Patent Publication Number: US-11651132-B2

Title: Logic drive based on standard commodity FPGA IC chips

Description:
PRIORITY CLAIM 
     This application is a continuation of application Ser. No. 16/601,834, filed Oct. 15, 2019, now U.S. Pat. No. 11,093,677, which is a continuation of application Ser. No. 15/841,326, filed Dec. 14, 2017, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,489,544, which claims priority benefits from U.S. provisional application No. 62/433,806, filed on Dec. 14, 2016 and entitled “Logic Drive”; U.S. provisional application No. 62/448,924, filed on Jan. 20, 2017 and entitled “Logic and Memory Drives and Process for Forming the Same”; U.S. provisional application No. 62/533,788, filed on Jul. 18, 2017 and entitled “Logic Drive Based on Standard Commodity FPGA IC Chips”; and U.S. provisional application No. 62/545,556, filed on Aug. 15, 2017 and entitled “Logic Drive Based on Standard Commodity FPGA IC Chips”. The present application incorporates the foregoing disclosures herein by reference. 
    
    
     BACKGROUND OF THE DISCLOSURE 
     Field of the Disclosure 
     The present invention relates to a logic package, logic package drive, logic device, logic module, logic drive, logic disk, logic disk drive, logic solid-state disk, logic solid-state drive, Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) logic disk, or FPGA logic drive (to be abbreviated as “logic drive” below, that is when “logic drive” is mentioned below, it means and reads as “logic package, logic package drive, logic device, logic module, logic drive, logic disk, logic disk drive, logic solid-state disk, logic solid-state drive, FPGA logic disk, or FPGA logic drive”) comprising plural FPGA IC chips, and one or plural non-volatile IC chips for field programming purposes, and more particularly to a standardized commodity logic drive formed by using plural standardized commodity FPGA IC chips and one or plural non-volatile IC chip or chips, and to be used for different specific applications when field programmed. 
     Brief Description of the Related Art 
     The Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) semiconductor integrated circuit (IC) has been used for development of new or innovated applications, or for small volume applications or business demands. When an application or business demand expands to a certain volume and extend to a certain time period, the semiconductor IC suppliers may usually implement the application in an Application Specific IC (ASIC) chip, or a Customer-Owned Tooling (COT) IC chip. The switch from the FPGA design to the ASIC or COT design is because the current FPGA IC chip, for a given application and compared with an ASIC or COT chip, (1) has a larger semiconductor chip size, lower fabrication yield, and higher fabrication cost, (2) consumes more power, (3) gives lower performance. When the semiconductor technology nodes or generations migrates, following the Moore&#39;s Law, to advanced nodes or generations (for example below 30 nm or 20 nm), the Non-Recurring Engineering (NRE) cost for designing an ASIC or COT chip increases greatly (more than US $5M or even exceeding US $10M, US $20M, US $50M or US $100M). The cost of a photo mask set for an ASIC or COT chip at the 16 nm technology node or generation may be over US $2M, US $5M, or US $10M. The high NRE cost in implementing the innovation or application using the advanced IC technology nodes or generations slows down or even stops the innovation or application using advanced and useful semiconductor technology nodes or generations. A new approach or technology is needed to inspire the continuing innovation and to lower down the barrier for implementing the innovation in the semiconductor IC chips. 
     SUMMARY OF THE DISCLOSURE 
     One aspect of the disclosure provides a standardized commodity logic drive in a multi-chip package comprising plural FPGA IC chips and one or more non-volatile memory IC chips for use in different applications requiring logic, computing and/or processing functions by field programming. Uses of the standardized commodity logic drive is analogues to uses of a standardized commodity data storage solid-state disk (drive), data storage hard disk (drive), data storage floppy disk, Universal Serial Bus (USB) flash drive, USB drive, USB stick, flash-disk, or USB memory, and differs in that the latter has memory functions for data storage, while the former has logic functions for processing and/or computing. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a method to reduce Non-Recurring Engineering (NRE) expenses for implementing an innovation or an application in semiconductor IC chips by using the standardized commodity logic drive. A person, user, or developer with an innovation or an application concept or idea needs to purchase the standardized commodity logic drive and develops or writes software codes or programs to load into the standardized commodity logic drive to implement his/her innovation or application concept or idea. Compared to the implementation by developing a logic ASIC or COT IC chip, the NRE cost may be reduced by a factor of larger than 2, 5, or 10. For advanced semiconductor technology nodes or generations (for example more advanced than or below 30 nm or 20 nm), the NRE cost for designing an ASIC or COT chip increases greatly, more than US $5M or even exceeding US $10M, US $20M, US $50M, or US $100M. The cost of a photo mask set for an ASIC or COT chip at the 16 nm technology node or generation may be over US $2M, US $5M, or US $10M. Implementing the same or similar innovation or application using the logic drive may reduce the NRE cost down to smaller than US $10M or even less than US $5M, US $3M, US $2M or US $1M. The aspect of the disclosure inspires the innovation and lowers the barrier for implementing the innovation in IC chips designed and fabricated using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, a technology node or generation more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a method to change the current logic ASIC or COT IC chip business into a commodity logic IC chip business, like the current commodity DRAM, or commodity flash memory IC chip business, by using the standardized commodity logic drive. Since the performance, power consumption, and engineering and manufacturing costs of the standardized commodity logic drive may be better or equal to that of the ASIC or COT IC chip for a same innovation or application, the standardized commodity logic drive may be used as an alternative for designing an ASIC or COT IC chip. The current logic ASIC or COT IC chip design, manufacturing and/or product companies (including fabless IC design and product companies, IC foundry or contracted manufactures (may be product-less), and/or vertically-integrated IC design, manufacturing and product companies) may become companies like the current commodity DRAM, or flash memory IC chip design, manufacturing, and/or product companies; or like the current DRAM module design, manufacturing, and/or product companies; or like the current flash memory module, flash USB stick or drive, or flash solid-state drive or disk drive design, manufacturing, and/or product companies. The current logic ASIC or COT IC chip design and/or manufacturing companies (including fabless IC design and product companies, IC foundry or contracted manufactures (may be product-less), vertically-integrated IC design, manufacturing and product companies) may become companies in the following business models: (1) designing, manufacturing, and/or selling the standard commodity FPGA IC chips; and/or (2) designing, manufacture, and/or selling the standard commodity logic drives. A person, user, customer, or software developer, or application developer may purchase the standardized commodity logic drive and write software codes to program them for his/her desired applications, for example, in applications of Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning, deep learning, big data, Internet Of Things (IOT), Virtual Reality (VR), Augmented Reality (AR), car electronics, Graphic Processing (GP), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Micro Controlling (MC), and/or Central Processing (CP). The logic drive may be programed to perform functions like a graphic chip, or a baseband chip, or an Ethernet chip, or a wireless (for example, 802.11ac) chip, or an AI chip. The logic drive may be alternatively programmed to perform functions of all or any combinations of functions of Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning, deep learning, big data, Internet Of Things (IOT), Virtual Reality (VR), Augmented Reality (AR), car electronics, Graphic Processing (GP), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Micro Controlling (MC), and/or Central Processing (CP). 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a method to change the current logic ASIC or COT IC chip hardware business into a software business by using the standardized commodity logic drive. Since the performance, power consumption, and engineering and manufacturing costs of the standardized commodity logic drive may be better or equal to that of the ASIC or COT IC chip for a same innovation or application, the standardized commodity logic drive may be used as an alternative for designing an ASIC or COT IC chip. The current ASIC or COT IC chip design companies or suppliers may become software developers or suppliers; they may adapt the following business models: (1) becoming software companies to develop and sell software for their innovation or application, and let their customers or users to install the software in the customers&#39; or users&#39; own standard commodity logic drive; and/or (2) still keeping as hardware companies by selling hardware without performing ASIC or COT IC chip design and/or production. They may install their in-house developed software for the innovation or application in the one or plural non-volatile memory IC chip or chips in the purchased standard commodity logic drive; and sell the program-installed logic drive to their customers or users. They may write software codes into the standard commodity logic drive (that is, loading the software codes in the non-volatile memory IC chip or chips in or of the standardized commodity logic drive) for their desired applications, for example, in applications of Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning, deep learning, big data, Internet Of Things (IOT), car electronics, Virtual Reality (VR), Augmented Reality (AR), Graphic Processing, Digital Signal Processing, micro controlling, and/or Central Processing. The logic drive may be programed to perform functions like a graphic chip, or a baseband chip, or an Ethernet chip, or a wireless (for example, 802.11ac) chip, or an AI chip. The logic drive may be alternatively programmed to perform functions of all or any combinations of functions of Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning, deep learning, big data, Internet Of Things (IOT), car electronics, Virtual Reality (VR), Augmented Reality (AR), car electronics, Graphic Processing (GP), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Micro Controlling (MC), and/or Central Processing (CP). 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a method to change the current system design, manufactures and/or product business into a commodity system/product business, like current commodity DRAM, or flash memory business, by using the standardized commodity logic drive. The system, computer, processor, smart-phone, or electronic equipment or device may become a standard commodity hardware comprises mainly a memory drive and a logic drive. The memory drive may be a hard disk drive, a flash drive, and/or a solid-state drive. The logic drive in the aspect of the disclosure may have big enough or adequate number of inputs/outputs (I/Os) to support I/O ports for use in programming all or most applications. The logic drive may have I/Os to support required I/O ports for programming, for example, to perform all or any combinations of functions of Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning, deep learning, big data, Internet Of Things (IOT), Virtual Reality (VR), Augmented Reality (AR), car electronics, Graphic Processing (GP), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Micro Controlling (MC), and/or Central Processing (CP), and etc. The logic drive may comprise (1) programing or configuration I/Os for software or application developers to load application software or program codes to program or configure the logic drive, through I/O ports or connectors connecting or coupling to the I/Os of the logic drive; and (2) execution or user I/Os for the users to execute and perform their instructions, through I/O ports or connectors connecting or coupling to the I/Os of the logic drive; for example, generating a Microsoft Word file, or a PowerPoint presentation file, or an Excel file. The I/O ports or connectors connecting or coupling to the corresponding I/Os of the logic drive may comprise one or multiple (2, 3, 4, or more than 4) Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports, one or more IEEE 1394 ports, one or more Ethernet ports, one or more audio ports or serial ports, for example, RS-232 or COM (communication) ports, wireless transceiver I/Os, and/or Bluetooth transceiver I/Os, and etc. The I/O ports or connectors connecting or coupling to the corresponding I/Os of the logic drive may also comprise Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) ports, or Peripheral Components Interconnect express (PCIe) ports for communicating, connecting or coupling with or to the memory drive. The I/O ports or connectors may be placed, located, assembled, or connected on or to a substrate, film or board; for example, a Printed Circuit Board (PCB), a silicon substrate with interconnection schemes, a metal substrate with interconnection schemes, a glass substrate with interconnection schemes, a ceramic substrate with interconnection schemes, a flexible film with interconnection schemes. The logic drive is assembled on the substrate, film or board using solder bumps, copper pillars or bumps, or gold bumps, on or of the logic drive, similar to the flip-chip assembly of the chip packaging technology, or the Chip-On-Film (COF) assembly technology used in the LCD driver packaging technology. The system, computer, processor, smart-phone, or electronic equipment or device design, manufacturing, and/or product companies may become companies to (1) design, manufacturing and/or sell the standard commodity hardware comprising a memory drive and a logic drive; in this case, the companies are still hardware companies; (2) develop system and application software for users to install in the users&#39; own standard commodity hardware; in this case, the companies become software companies; (3) install the third party&#39;s developed system and application software or programs in the standard commodity hardware and sell the software-loaded hardware; and in this case, the companies are still hardware companies. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a standard commodity FPGA IC chip for use in the standard commodity logic drive. The standard commodity FPGA IC chip is designed, implemented and fabricated using an advanced semiconductor technology node or generation, for example more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm; with a chip size and manufacturing yield optimized with the minimum manufacturing cost for the used semiconductor technology node or generation. The standard commodity FPGA IC chip may have an area between 400 mm 2  and 9 mm 2 , 225 mm 2  and 9 mm 2 , 144 mm 2  and 16 mm 2 , 100 mm 2  and 16 mm 2 , 75 mm 2  and 16 mm 2 , or 50 mm 2  and 16 mm 2 . Transistors used in the advanced semiconductor technology node or generation may be a FIN Field-Effect-Transistor (FINFET), a FINFET on Silicon-On-Insulator (FINFET SOI), a Fully Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. The standard commodity FPGA IC chip may only communicate directly with other chips in or of the logic drive only; its I/O circuits may require only small I/O drivers or receivers, and small or none Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) devices. The driving capability, loading, output capacitance, or input capacitance of I/O drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits may be between 0.1 pF and 10 pF, 0.1 pF and 5 pF, 0.1 pF and 3 pF or 0.1 pF and 2 pF; or smaller than 10 pF, 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF or 1 pF. The size of the ESD device may be between 0.05 pF and 10 pF, 0.05 pF and 5 pF, 0.05 pF and 2 pF or 0.05 pF and 1 pF; or smaller than 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF, 1 pF or 0.5 pF. For example, a bi-directional (or tri-state) I/O pad or circuit may comprise an ESD circuit, a receiver, and a driver, and has an input capacitance or output capacitance between 0.1 pF and 10 pF, 0.1 pF and 5 pF or 0.1 pF and 2 pF; or smaller than 10 pF, 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF or 1 pF. All or most control and/or Input/Output (I/O) circuits or units (for example, the off-logic-drive I/O circuits, i.e., large I/O circuits, communicating with circuits or components external or outside of the logic drive) are outside of, or not included in, the standard commodity FPGA IC chip, but are included in another dedicated control chip, dedicated I/O chip, or dedicated control and I/O chip, packaged in the same logic drive. None or minimal area of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip is used for the control or I/O circuits, for example, less than 15%, 10%, 5%, 2%, 1%, 0.5% or 0.1% area is used for the control or I/O circuits; or, none or minimal transistors of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip are used for the control or I/O circuits, for example, less than 15%, 10%, 5%, 2%, 1%, 0.5% or 0.1% of the total number of transistors are used for the control or I/O circuits; or all or most area of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip is used for (i) logic blocks comprising logic gate arrays, computing units or operators, and/or Look-Up-Tables (LUTs) and multiplexers, and/or (ii) programmable interconnection. For example, greater than 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, 99.5% or 99.9% area is used for logic blocks, and/or programmable interconnection; or, all or most transistors of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip are used for logic blocks, and/or programmable interconnection, for example, greater than 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, 99.5% or 99.9% of the total number of transistors are used for logic blocks, and/or programmable interconnection. 
     The logic blocks comprise (i) logic gate arrays comprising Boolean logic operators, for example, NAND, NOR, AND, and/or OR circuits; (ii) computing units comprising, for examples, adder, multiplication, multiplexer, shift register, floating-point circuits, and/or division circuits; (iii) Look-Up-Tables (LUTs) and multiplexers. Alternatively, the Boolean operators, the functions of logic gates, or a certain computing, operation or process may be carried out using, for example, Look-Up-Tables (LUTs) and/or multiplexers. The LUTs store or memorize the processing or computing results of logic gates, computing results of calculations, decisions of decision-making processes, or results of operations, events or activities. The LUTs may store or memorize data or results in, for example, SRAM cells. The SRAM cells may be distributed over all locations in the FPGA chip, and are nearby or close to their corresponding multiplexers in the logic blocks. Alternatively, the SRAM cells may be located in a SRAM array, in a certain area or location of the FPGA chip; wherein the SRAM cell array aggregates or comprises multiple of the SRAM cells of LUTs for the selection multiplexers in logic blocks in the distributed locations. Alternatively, the SRAM cells may be located in one of multiple SRAM arrays, in multiple certain areas of the FPGA chip; each of the SRAM arrays aggregates or comprises multiple of the SRAM cells of LUTs for the selection multiplexers in logic blocks in the distributed locations. The data stored or latched in each of SRAM cells are input to the multiplexer for selection. Each of the SRAM cells may comprise 6 Transistors (6T SRAM), with 2 transfer (write) transistors and 4 data-latch transistors, wherein the two transfer transistors are used for writing the data into the storage or latched nodes of the 4 data-latch transistors. Alternatively, each of the SRAM cells may comprise 5 Transistors (5T SRAM), with 1 transfer (write) transistor and 4 data-latch transistors; wherein the transfer transistor is used for writing the data into the two storage or latched nodes of the 4 data-latch transistors. One of the two latched nodes of the 4 latch transistors in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is connected or coupled to the multiplexer. The stored data in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is used for LUTs. When inputting a set of data, requests or conditions, a multiplexer is used to select the corresponding data (or results) stored or memorized in the LUTs, based on the inputted set of data, requests or conditions. As an example, a 4-input NAND gate may be implemented using an operator comprising LUTs and multiplexers as described below: There are 4 inputs for a 4-input NAND gate, and 16 (2 4 ) possible corresponding outputs (results) of the 4-input NAND gate. An operator, used to carry out the 4-input NAND operation using LUTs and multiplexers, comprises (i) 4 inputs, (ii) a LUT for storing and memorizing the 16 possible corresponding outputs (results), (iii) a multiplexer designed and used for selecting the right (corresponding) output, for a given 4-input data set (for example, 1, 0, 0, 1), and (iv) an output. In general, an operator comprises n inputs, a LUT for storing or memorizing 2 n  corresponding data or results, a multiplexer for selecting the right (corresponding) output for a given n-input data set, and 1 output. 
     The programmable interconnections of the standard commodity FPGA chip comprise cross-point switches, each in the middle of interconnection metal lines or traces. For example, n metal lines or traces are connected to the input terminals of a cross-point switch, and m metal lines or traces are connected to the output terminals of the cross-point switch, and the cross-point switch is located between the n metal lines or traces and the m metal lines and traces. The cross-point switch is designed such that each of the n metal lines or traces may be programed to connect to anyone of the m metal lines or traces. The cross-point switch may comprise, for example, a pass/no-pass circuit comprising a n-type and a p-type transistor, in pair, wherein one of the n metal lines or traces are connected to the connected source terminals of the n-type and p-type transistor pairs in the pass-no-pass circuit, while one of the m metal lines and traces are connected to the connected drain terminal of the n-type and p-type transistor pairs in the pass-no-pass circuit. The connection or disconnection (pass or no pass) of the cross-point switch is controlled by the data (0 or 1) stored or latched in a SRAM cell. The SRAM cell may be distributed overall locations in the FPGA chip, and is nearby or close to the corresponding switch. Alternatively, the SRAM cell may be located in a SRAM array, in a certain area or location of the FPGA chip; wherein the SRAM cell array aggregates or comprises multiple of the SRAM cells for controlling their corresponding cross-point switches in the distributed locations. Alternatively, the SRAM cell may be located in one of multiple SRAM arrays, in multiple certain areas or locations of the FPGA chip; each of the SRAM arrays aggregates or comprises multiple of the SRAM cells for controlling cross-point switches in the distributed locations. The (control) gates of both n-type and p-type transistors in the cross-point switch are connected to the two storage or latch nodes, respectively, of the SRAM cell. Each of the SRAM cells may comprise 6 Transistors (6T SRAM), with 2 transfer (write) transistors and 4 data-latch transistors, wherein the two transfer transistors are used for writing the programing code or data into the two storage nodes of the 4 data-latch transistors. Alternatively, each of the SRAM cells may comprise 5 Transistors (5T SRAM), with 1 transfer (write) transistor and 4 data-latch transistors, wherein the transfer transistor is used for writing the programing code or data into the two storage nodes of the 4 data-latch transistors. The two storage nodes of the 4 latch transistors in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell are connected to the gate of the n-type transistor and the gate of the p-type transistor, respectively, in the pass-no-pass switch circuit. The stored (programming) data in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is used to program the connection or not-connection of the two metal lines or traces connected to the terminals of the cross-point switch. When the data latched in the two storage nodes of the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is programmed at [1, 0], (may be defined as “1” for the data stored in the SRAM cell), the node of 1 is connected to the gate of the n-type transistor, and the node of 0 is connected to the gate of the p-type transistor; therefore, the pass/no-pass circuit is on, and the two metal lines or traces connected to the two terminals of the pass-no-pass switch circuit are connected. While the data latched in the two storage nodes of the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is programmed at [0, 1], (may be defined as “0” for the data stored in the SRAM cell), the node of 0 is connected to the gate of the n-type transistor, and the node of 1 is connected to the gate of the p-type transistor; therefore, the pass/no-pass switch circuit is off, and the two metal lines or traces connected to the two terminals of the pass/no-pass switch circuit are dis-connected. Since the standard commodity FPGA IC chip comprises mainly the regular and repeated gate arrays or blocks, LUTs and multiplexers, or programmable interconnection, just like standard commodity DRAM, or NAND flash IC chips, the manufacturing yield may be very high, for example, greater than 70%, 80%, 90% or 95% for a chip area greater than, for example, 50 mm 2 , or 80 mm 2 . 
     Alternatively, each of the cross-point switches may comprise, for example, a pass/no-pass circuit comprising a switching buffer, wherein the switching buffer comprises two-stages of inverters (buffer), a control N-MOS, and a control P-MOS. Wherein one of the n metal lines or traces is connected to the common (connected) gate terminal of an input-stage inverter of the buffer in the pass-no-pass circuit, while one of the m metal lines and traces is connected to the common (connected) drain terminal of output-stage inverter of buffer in the pass-no-pass circuit. The output-stage inverter is stacked with the control P-MOS at the top (between V cc  and the source of the P-MOS of the output-stage inverter) and the control N-MOS at the bottom (between V ss  and the source of the N-MOS of the output-stage inverter). The connection or disconnection (pass or no pass) of the cross-point switch is controlled by the data (0 or 1) stored in a 5T or 6T SRAM cell. The 5T or 6T SRAM cells may be distributed over all locations in the FPGA chip, and each of the 5T or 6T SRAM cells is nearby or close to its corresponding cross-point switch. Alternatively, the 5T or 6T SRAM cell may be located in a 5T or 6T SRAM cell array, in a certain area or location of the FPGA chip; wherein the 5T or 6T SRAM cell array aggregates or comprises multiple of the 5T or 6T SRAM cells for controlling their corresponding cross-point switches in the distributed locations. Alternatively, the 5T or 6T SRAM cell may be located in one of multiple 5T or 6T SRAM cell arrays, in multiple certain areas or locations of the FPGA chip; each of the 5T or 6T SRAM cell arrays aggregates or comprises multiple of the 5T or 6T SRAM cells for controlling their cross-point switches in the distributed locations. The gates of both control N-MOS and the control P-MOS transistors in the cross-point switch are connected or coupled to the two latched nodes, respectively, of the 5T or 6T SRAM cell. One latched node of the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is connected or coupled to the gate of the control N-MOS transistor in the switching buffer circuit, while the other latched node of the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is connected or coupled to the gate of the control P-MOS transistor in the switch buffer circuit. The stored (programming) data in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is used to program the connection or not-connection of the two metal lines or traces connected to the terminals of the cross-point switch. When the data stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is programmed at 1, the latched node of 1 is connected to the gate of the control N-MOS transistor, and the other latched node of 0 is connected to the gate of the control P-MOS transistor; therefore, the pass/no-pass circuit (the switching buffer) passes the data from input to the output. In other words, the two metal lines or traces connected to the two terminals of the pass-no-pass switch circuit are (virtually) connected. While the data stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is programmed at 0, the latched node of 0 is connected to the gate of the control N-MOS transistor, and the other latched node of 1 is connected to the gate of the control P-MOS transistor; therefore, both the control N-MOS and control P-MOS transistors are off. The data cannot be transferred from the input to the output, and the two metal lines or traces connected to the two terminals of the pass/no-pass switch circuit are dis-connected. 
     Alternatively, the cross-point switches may comprise, for example, multiplexers and switch buffers. A multiplexer of a cross-point switch selects one of the n inputting data form the n inputting metal lines based on the data stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells; and outputs the selected one of inputs to a switch buffer. The switch buffer passes or does not pass the output data from the multiplexer to one metal line connected to the output of the switch buffer based on the data stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells. The switch buffer comprises two-stages of inverters (buffer), a control N-MOS, and a control P-MOS. Wherein the selected data from the multiplexer is connected to the common (connected) gate terminal of input-stage inverter of the buffer, while said one metal line or trace is connected to the common (connected) drain terminal of output-stage inverter of the buffer. The output-stage inverter is stacked with the control P-MOS at the top (between Vcc and the source of the P-MOS of the output-stage inverter) and the control N-MOS at the bottom (between Vss and the source of the N-MOS of the output-stage inverter). The connection or disconnection of the switch buffer is controlled by the data (0 or 1) stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell. One latched node of the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is connected or coupled to the gate of the control N-MOS transistor in the switch buffer circuit, and the other latched node of the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is connected or coupled to the gate of the control P-MOS transistor in the switch buffer circuit. For example, two metal lines A and B are crossed at a point, and segmenting metal line A into two segments, A 1  and A 2 , and metal line B into two segments, B 1  and B 2 . The cross-point switch is located at the cross point. The cross-point switch comprises 4 pairs of multiplexers and switch buffers. Each of the multiplexer has 3 inputs and 1 output, that is, each multiplexer selects one from the 3 inputs as the output, based on 2 bits of data stored in two of the 5T or 6T SRAM cells. Each of the switch buffers receives the output data from the corresponding multiplexer and decides to pass or not to pass the selected data, based on the 3 rd  bit of data stored in the 3 rd  5T or 6T SRAM cell. The cross-point switch is located between segments A 1 , A 2 , B 1  and B 2 , and comprises 4 pairs of multiplexers/switch buffers: (1) The 3 inputs of a first multiplexer may be A 1 , B 1  and B 2 . If the 2 bits stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are 0 and 0 for the multiplexer, the A 1  segment is selected by the first multiplexer. The A 1  segment is connected to the input of a first switch buffer. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 1 for the first switch buffer, the data of A 1  segment is passing to the A 2  segment. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 0 for the first switch buffer, the data of A 1  segment is not passing to the A 2  segment. If the 2 bits stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are 1 and 0 for the first multiplexer, the B 1  segment is selected by the first multiplexer. The B 1  segment is connected to the input of the first switch buffer. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 1 for the first switch buffer, the data of B 1  segment is passing to the A 2  segment. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 0 for the first switch buffer, the data of B 1  segment is not passing to the A 2  segment. If the 2 bits stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are 0 and 1 for the first multiplexer, the B 2  segment is selected by the first multiplexer. The B 2  segment is connected to the input of the first switch buffer. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 1 for the first switch buffer, the data of B 2  segment is passing to the A 2  segment. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 0 for the first switch buffer, the data of B 2  segment is not passing to the A 2  segment. (2) The 3 inputs of a second multiplexer may be A 2 , B 1  and B 2 . If the 2 bits stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are 0 and 0 for the second multiplexer, the A 2  segment is selected by the second multiplexer. The A 2  segment is connected to the input of a second switch buffer. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 1 for the second switch buffer, the data of A 2  segment is passing to the A 1  segment. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 0 for the second switch buffer, the data of A 2  segment is not passing to the A 1  metal segment. If the 2 bits stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are 1 and 0 for the second multiplexer, the B 1  segment is selected by the second multiplexer. The B 1  segment is connected to the input of the second switch buffer. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 1 for the second switch buffer, the data of B 1  segment is passing to the A 1  segment. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 0 for the second switch buffer, the data of B 1  segment is not passing to the A 1  metal segment. If the 2 bits stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are 0 and 1 for the second multiplexer, the B 2  segment is selected by the second multiplexer. The B 2  segment is connected to the input of the second switch buffer. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 1 for the second switch buffer, the data of B 2  segment is passing to the A 1  segment. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 0 for the second switch buffer, the data of B 2  segment is not passing to the A 1  metal segment. (3) The 3 inputs of a third multiplexer may be A 1 , A 2  and B 2 . If the 2 bits stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are 0 and 0 for the third multiplexer, the A 1  segment is selected by the third multiplexer. The A 1  segment is connected to the input of a third switch buffer. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 1 for the third switch buffer, the data of A 1  segment is passing to the B 1  segment. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 0 for the third switch buffer, the data of A 1  segment is not passing to the B 1  segment. If the 2 bits stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are 1 and 0 for the third multiplexer, the A 2  segment is selected by the third multiplexer. The A 2  segment is connected to the input of the third switch buffer. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 1 for the third switch buffer, the data of A 2  segment is passing to the B 1  segment. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 0 for the third switch buffer, the data of A 2  segment is not passing to the B 1  segment. If the 2 bits stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are 0 and 1 for the third multiplexer, the B 2  segment is selected by the third multiplexer. The B 2  segment is connected to the input of the third switch buffer. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 1 for the third switch buffer, the data of B 2  segment is passing to the B 1  segment. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 0 for the third switch buffer, the data of B 2  segment is not passing to the B 1  segment. (4) The 3 inputs of a fourth multiplexer may be A 1 , A 2  and B 1 . If the 2 bits stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are 0 and 0 for the fourth multiplexer, the A 1  segment is selected by the fourth multiplexer. The A 1  segment is connected to the input of a fourth switch buffer. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 1 for the fourth switch buffer, the data of A 1  segment is passing to the B 2  segment. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 0 for the fourth switch buffer, the data of A 1  segment is not passing to the B 2  segment. If the 2 bits stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are 1 and 0 for the fourth multiplexer, the A 2  segment is selected by the fourth multiplexer. The A 2  segment is connected to the input of the fourth switch buffer. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 1 for the fourth switch buffer, the data of A 2  segment is passing to the B 2  segment. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 0 for the fourth switch buffer, the data of A 2  segment is not passing to the B 2  segment. If the 2 bits stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are 0 and 1 for the fourth multiplexer, the B 1  segment is selected by the fourth multiplexer. The B 1  segment is connected to the input of the fourth switch buffer. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 1 for the fourth switch buffer, the data of B 1  segment is passing to the B 2  segment. If the data bit stored in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is 0 for the fourth switch buffer, the data of B 1  segment is not passing to the B 2  segment. In this case, the cross-point switch is bi-directional; there are 4 pairs of multiplexers/switch buffers, each pair of the multiplexers/switch buffers is controlled by 3 bits of the 5T or 6T SRAM cells. Totally, 12 bits of the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are required for the cross-point switch. The 5T or 6T SRAM cells may be distributed over all locations in the FPGA chip, and each of the 5T or 6T SRAM cells is nearby or close to its corresponding multiplexers and/or cross-point switch buffers. Alternatively, the 5T or 6T SRAM cell may be located in a 5T or 6T SRAM cell array, in a certain area or location of the FPGA chip; wherein the 5T or 6T SRAM cell array aggregates or comprises multiple of the 5T or 6T SRAM cells for controlling their corresponding multiplexers and/or switch buffers of the cross-point switches in the distributed locations. Alternatively, the 5T or 6T SRAM cell may be located in one of multiple 5T or 6T SRAM cell arrays, in multiple certain areas or locations of the FPGA chip; each of the 5T or 6T SRAM cell arrays aggregates or comprises multiple of the 5T or 6T SRAM cells for controlling multiplexers and/or switch buffers of the cross-point switches in the distributed locations. 
     The programmable interconnections of the standard commodity FPGA chip comprise a multiplexer in the middle of interconnection metal lines or traces. The multiplexer selects from n metal interconnection lines connected to the n inputs of the multiplexer, and coupled or connected to one metal interconnection line connected to the output of the multiplexer, based on the data stored or programmed in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells. For example, n=16, 4 bits of the 5T or 6T SRAM cells are required to select any one of the 16 metal interconnection lines connected to the 16 inputs of the multiplexer, and couple or connect the selected one to one metal interconnection line connected to the output of the multiplexer. The data from the selected one of 16 inputs is therefore coupled, passed, or connected to the metal line connected to the output of the multiplexer. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the standard commodity logic drive in a multi-chip package comprising the standard commodity plural FPGA IC chips and one or more non-volatile memory IC chips, for use in different applications requiring logic, computing and/or processing functions by field programming, wherein the standard commodity plural FPGA IC chips, each is in a bare-die format or in a single-chip or multi-chip package. Each of standard commodity plural FPGA IC chips may have standard common features or specifications; (1) the logic block count, or operator count, or gate count, or density, or capacity or size: The logic block count or operator count may be greater than or equal to 16K, 64K, 256K, 512K, 1M, 4M, 16M, 64M, 256M, 1G, or 4G logic block counts or operator counts. The logic gate count may be greater than or equal to 64K, 256K, 512K, 1M, 4M, 16M, 64M, 256M, 1G, 4G or 16G logic gate counts; (2) the number of inputs to each of the logic blocks or operators: the number of inputs to each of the logic block or operator may be greater or equal to 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256; (3) the power supply voltage: the voltage may be between 0.2V and 2.5V, 0.2V and 2V, 0.2V and 1.5V, 0.1V and 1V, or 0.2V and 1V, or, smaller or lower than or equal to 2.5V, 2V, 1.8V, 1.5V or 1V; (4) the I/O pads, in terms of layout, location, number and function. Since the FPGA chips are standard commodity IC chips, the number of FPGA chip designs or products is reduced to a small number, therefore, the expensive photo masks or mask sets for fabricating the FPGA chips using advanced semiconductor nodes or generations are reduced to a few mask sets. For example, reduced down to between 3 and 20 mask sets, 3 and 10 mask sets, or 3 and 5 mask sets for a specific technology node or generation. The NRE and production expenses are therefore greatly reduced. With the few designs and products, the manufacturing processes may be tuned or optimized for the few chip designs or products, and resulting in very high manufacturing chip yields. This is similar to the current advanced standard commodity DRAM or NAND flash memory design and production. Furthermore, the chip inventory management becomes easy, efficient and effective; therefore, resulting in a shorter FPGA chip delivery time and becoming very cost-effective. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the standard commodity logic drive in a multi-chip package comprising plural standard commodity FPGA IC chips and one or more non-volatile memory IC chips, for use in different applications requiring logic, computing and/or processing functions by field programming, wherein the plural standard commodity FPGA IC chips, each is in a bare-die format or in a single-chip or multi-chip package format. The standard commodity logic drive may have standard common features or specifications; (1) the logic block count, or operator count, or gate count, or density, or capacity or size of the standard commodity logic drive: The logic block count or operator count may be greater than or equal to 32K, 64K, 256K, 512K, 1M, 4M, 16M, 64M, 256M, 1G, 4G, 8G or 16G logic block counts or operator counts. The logic gate count may be greater than or equal to 128K, 256K, 512K, 1M, 4M, 16M, 64M, 256M, 1G, 4G, 8G, 16G, 32G or 64G logic gate counts; (2) the power supply voltage: the voltage may be between 0.2V and 12V, 0.2V and 10V, 0.2V and 7V, 0.2V and 5V, 0.2V and 3V, 0.2V and 2V, 0.2V and 1.5V, or 0.2V and 1V; (3) the I/O pads in the multi-chip package of the standard commodity logic drive, in terms of layout, location, number and function; wherein the logic drive may comprise the I/O pads, metal pillars or bumps connecting or coupling to one or multiple (2, 3, 4, or more than 4) Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports, one or more IEEE 1394 ports, one or more Ethernet ports, one or more audio ports or serial ports, for example, RS-232 or COM (communication) ports, wireless transceiver I/Os, and/or Bluetooth transceiver I/Os, and etc. The logic drive may also comprise the I/O pads, metal pillars or bumps connecting or coupling to Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) ports, or Peripheral Components Interconnect express (PCIe) ports for communicating, connecting or coupling with the memory drive. Since the logic drives are standard commodity products, the product inventory management becomes easy, efficient and effective, therefore resulting in a shorter logic drive delivery time and becoming cost-effective. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the standard commodity logic drive in a multi-chip package further comprising a dedicated control chip. The dedicated control chip is designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm, or 500 nm. Alternatively, advanced semiconductor technology nodes or generations may be used for the dedicated control chip; for example, a semiconductor node or generation more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 40 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. The semiconductor technology node or generation used in the dedicated control chip is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive. Transistors used in the dedicated control chip may be a FINFET, a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Transistors used in the dedicated control chip may be different from that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive; for example, the dedicated control chip may use the conventional MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET; or the dedicated control chip may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET. The dedicated control chip provides control functions of: (1) downloading programing codes from outside (of the logic drive) to the non-volatile IC chips in the logic drive; (2) downloading the programing codes from the non-volatile IC chips in the logic drive to the 5T or 6T SRAM cells of the programmable interconnection on the standard commodity FPGA IC chips. Alternatively, the programming codes from the non-volatile IC chips in the logic drive may go through a buffer or driver in or of the dedicated control chip before getting into the 5T or 6T SRAM cells of the programmable interconnection on the standard commodity FPGA IC chips. The buffer in or of the dedicated control chip may latch the data from the non-volatile chips and increase the bit-width of the data. For example, the data bit-width (in a SATA standard) from the non-volatile chips is 1 bit, the buffer may latch the 1 bit data in each of the multiple SRAM cells in the buffer, and output the data stored or latched in the multiple SRAM cells in parallel and simultaneously to increase the data bit-width; for example, equal to or greater than 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 data bit-width. For another example, the data bit-width (in a PCIe standard) from the non-volatile chips is 32 bit, the buffer may increase the data bit-width to equal to or greater than 64, 128, or 256 data bit-width. The driver in or of the dedicated control chip may amplify the data signals from the non-volatile chips; (3) inputting/outputting signals for a user application; (4) power management; (5) downloading data from the non-volatile IC chips in the logic drive to the 5T or 6T SRAM cells of the LUTs on the standard commodity FPGA IC chips. Alternatively, the data from the non-volatile IC chips in the logic drive may go through a buffer or driver in or of the dedicated control chip before getting into the 5T or 6T SRAM cells of LUTs on the standard commodity FPGA IC chips. The buffer in or of the dedicated control chip may latch the data from the non-volatile chips and increase the bit-width of the data. For example, the data bit-width (in a SATA standard) from the non-volatile chips is 1 bit, the buffer may latch the 1 bit data in each of the multiple SRAM cells in the buffer, and output the data stored or latched in the multiple SRAM cells in parallel and simultaneously to increase the data bit-width; for example, equal to or greater than 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 data bit-width. For another example, the data bit-width (in a PCIe standard) from the non-volatile chips is 32 bit, the buffer may increase the data bit-width to equal to or greater than 64, 128, or 256 data bit-width. The driver in or of the dedicated control chip may amplify the data signals from the non-volatile chips. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the standard commodity logic drive in a multi-chip package further comprising a dedicated I/O chip. The dedicated I/O chip is designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, a semiconductor node or generation less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm, or 500 nm. The semiconductor technology node or generation used in the dedicated I/O chip is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive. Transistors used in the dedicated I/O chip may be a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Transistors used in the dedicated I/O chip may be different from that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive; for example, the dedicated I/O chip may use the conventional MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET; or the dedicated I/O chip may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET. The power supply voltage used in the dedicated I/O chip may be greater than or equal to 1.5V, 2.0 V, 2.5V, 3 V, 3.5V, 4V, or 5V, while the power supply voltage used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may be smaller than or equal to 2.5V, 2V, 1.8V, 1.5V, or 1V The power supply voltage used in the dedicated I/O chip may be different from that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive; for example, the dedicated I/O chip may use a power supply of 4V, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use a power supply voltage of 1.5V; or the dedicated I/O chip may use a power supply of 2.5V, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use a power supply of 0.75V The gate oxide (physical) thickness of the Field-Effect-Transistors (FETs) may be thicker than or equal to 5 nm, 6 nm, 7.5 nm, 10 nm, 12.5 nm, or 15 nm, while the gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may be thinner than 4.5 nm, 4 nm, 3 nm or 2 nm. The gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs used in the dedicated I/O chip may be different from that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive; for example, the dedicated I/O chip may use a gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of 10 nm, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use a gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of 3 nm; or the dedicated I/O chip may use a gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of 7.5 nm, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use a gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of 2 nm. The dedicated I/O chip provides inputs and outputs, and ESD protection for the logic drive. The dedicated I/O chip provides (i) large drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits for communicating with external or outside (of the logic drive), and (ii) small drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits for communicating with chips in or of the logic drive. The large drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits for communicating with external or outside (of the logic drive) have driving capability, loading, output capacitance or input capacitance lager or bigger than that of the small drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits for communicating with chips in or of the logic drive. The driving capability, loading, output capacitance, or input capacitance of the large I/O drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits for communicating with external or outside (of the logic drive) may be between 2 pF and 100 pF, 2 pF and 50 pF, 2 pF and 30 pF, 2 pF and 20 pF, 2 pF and 15 pF, 2 pF and 10 pF, or 2 pF and 5 pF; or larger than 2 pF, 5 pF, 10 pF, 15 pF or 20 pF. The driving capability, loading, output capacitance, or input capacitance of the small I/O drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits for communicating with chips in or of the logic drive may be between 0.1 pF and 10 pF, 0.1 pF and 5 pF or 0.1 pF and 2 pF; or smaller than 10 pF, 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF or 1 pF. The size of ESD protection device on the dedicated I/O chip is larger than that on other standard commodity FPGA IC chips in the same logic drive. The size of the ESD device in the large I/O circuits may be between 0.5 pF and 20 pF, 0.5 pF and 15 pF, 0.5 pF and 10 pF 0.5 pF and 5 pF or 0.5 pF and 2 pF; or larger than 0.5 pF, 1 pF, 2 pF, 3 pF, 5 pF or 10 pF. For example, a bi-directional (or tri-state) I/O pad or circuit may be used for the large I/O drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits for communicating with external or outside (of the logic drive), and may comprise an ESD circuit, a receiver, and a driver, and may have an input capacitance or output capacitance between 2 pF and 100 pF, 2 pF and 50 pF, 2 pF and 30 pF, 2 pF and 20 pF, 2 pF and 15 pF, 2 pF and 10 pF, or 2 pF and 5 pF; or larger than 2 pF, 5 pF, 10 pF, 15 pF or 20 pF. For example, a bi-directional (or tri-state) I/O pad or circuit may be used for the small I/O drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits for communicating with chips in or of the logic drive, and may comprise an ESD circuit, a receiver, and a driver, and may have an input capacitance or output capacitance between 0.1 pF and 10 pF, 0.1 pF and 5 pF or 0.1 pF and 2 pF; or smaller than 10 pF, 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF or 1 pF. 
     The dedicated I/O chip (or chips) in the multi-chip package of the standard commodity logic drive may comprise a buffer and/or driver circuits for (1) downloading the programing codes from the non-volatile IC chips in the logic drive to the 5T or 6T SRAM cells of the programmable interconnection on the standard commodity FPGA IC chips. The programming codes from the non-volatile IC chips in the logic drive may go through a buffer or driver in or of the dedicated I/O chip before getting into the 5T or 6T SRAM cells of the programmable interconnection on the standard commodity FPGA IC chips. The buffer in or of the dedicated I/O chip may latch the data from the non-volatile chips and increase the bit-width of the data. For example, the data bit-width (in a SATA standard) from the non-volatile chips is 1 bit, the buffer may latch the 1 bit data in each of the multiple SRAM cells in the buffer, and output the data stored or latched in the multiple SRAM cells in parallel and simultaneously to increase the data bit-width; for example, equal to or greater than 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 data bit-width. For another example, the data bit-width (in a PCIe standard) from the non-volatile chips is 32 bit, the buffer may increase the data bit-width to equal to or greater than 64, 128, or 256 data bit-width. The driver in or of the dedicated I/O chip may amplify the data signals from the non-volatile chips; (2) downloading data from the non-volatile IC chips in the logic drive to the 5T or 6T SRAM cells of the LUTs on the standard commodity FPGA IC chips. The data from the non-volatile IC chips in the logic drive may go through a buffer or driver in or of the dedicated I/O chip before getting into the 5T or 6T SRAM cells of LUTs on the standard commodity FPGA IC chips. The buffer in or of the dedicated I/O chip may latch the data from the non-volatile chips and increase the bit-width of the data. For example, the data bit-width (in a SATA standard) from the non-volatile chips is 1 bit, the buffer may latch the 1 bit data in each of the multiple SRAM cells in the buffer, and output the data stored or latched in the multiple SRAM cells in parallel and simultaneously to increase the data bit-width; for example, equal to or greater than 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 data bit-width. For another example, the data bit-width (in a PCIe standard) from the non-volatile chips is 32 bit, the buffer may increase the data bit-width to equal to or greater than 64, 128, or 256 data bit-width. The driver in or of the dedicated I/O chip may amplify the data signals from the non-volatile chips. 
     The dedicated I/O chip (or chips) in the multi-chip package of the standard commodity logic drive may comprise I/O circuits or pads (or micro copper pillars or bumps) for connecting or coupling to one or multiple (2, 3, 4, or more than 4) Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports, one or more IEEE 1394 ports, one or more Ethernet ports, one or more audio ports or serial ports, for example, RS-232 or COM (communication) ports, wireless transceiver I/Os, and/or Bluetooth transceiver I/Os, and etc. The dedicated I/O chip may also comprise I/O circuits or pads (or micro copper pillars or bumps) for connecting or coupling to Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) ports, or Peripheral Components Interconnect express (PCIe) ports for communicating, connecting or coupling with the memory drive. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the standard commodity logic drive in a multi-chip package further comprising a dedicated control and I/O chip. The dedicated control and I/O chip provides the functions of the dedicated control chip and the dedicated I/O chip, as described in the above paragraphs, in one chip. The dedicated control and I/O chip is designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, a semiconductor node or generation less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 30 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm, or 500 nm. The semiconductor technology node or generation used in the dedicated control and I/O chip is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive. Transistors used in the dedicated control and I/O chip may be a FINFET, a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Transistors used in the dedicated control and I/O chip may be different from that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive; for example, the dedicated control and I/O chip may use the conventional MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET; or the dedicated control and I/O chip may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET. The above-mentioned specification for the small I/O circuits, i.e., small driver or receiver, and the large I/O circuits, i.e., large driver or receiver, in the I/O chip may be applied to that in the dedicated control and I/O chip. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the standard commodity logic drive in a multi-chip package comprising plural standard commodity FPGA IC chips and one or more non-volatile IC chips, for use in different applications requiring logic, computing and/or processing functions by field programming; wherein the one or more non-volatile memory IC chips comprises a NAND flash chip or chips, in a bare-die format or in a multi-chip flash package format. Each of the one or more NAND flash chips may has a standard memory density, capacity or size of greater than or equal to 64 Mb, 512 Mb, 1 Gb, 4 Gb, 16 Gb, 64 Gb, 128 Gb, 256 Gb, or 512 Gb, wherein “b” is bits. The NAND flash chip may be designed and fabricated using advanced NAND flash technology nodes or generations, for example, more advanced than or equal to 45 nm, 28 nm, 20 nm, 16 nm, and/or 10 nm, wherein the advanced NAND flash technology may comprise Single Level Cells (SLC) or multiple level cells (MLC) (for example, Double Level Cells DLC, or triple Level cells TLC), and in a 2D-NAND or a 3D NAND structure. The 3D NAND structures may comprise multiple stacked layers or levels of NAND cells, for example, greater than or equal to 4, 8, 16, 32 stacked layers or levels of NAND cells. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the standard commodity logic drive in a multi-chip package comprising plural standard commodity FPGA IC chips and one or more non-volatile IC chips, for use in different applications requiring logic, computing and/or processing functions by field programming; wherein the one or more non-volatile memory IC chips comprises a NAND flash chip or chips, in a bare-die format or in a multi-chip flash package format. The standard commodity logic drive may have a standard non-volatile memory density, capacity or size of greater than or equal to 8 MB, 64 MB, 128 GB, 512 GB, 1 GB, 4 GB, 16 GB, 64 GB, 256 GB, or 512 GB, wherein “B” is bytes, each byte has 8 bits. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the standard commodity logic drive in a multi-chip package comprising the plural standard commodity FPGA IC chips, the dedicated I/O chip, the dedicated control chip and the one or more non-volatile memory IC chips, for use in different applications requiring logic, computing and/or processing functions by field programming. The communication between the chips of the logic drive and the communication between each chip of the logic drive and the external or outside (of the logic drive) are described as follows: (1) the dedicated I/O chip communicates directly with the other chip or chips of the logic drive, and also communicates directly with the external or outside (circuits) (of the logic drive). The dedicated I/O chip comprises two types of I/O circuits; one type having large driving capability, loading, output capacitance or input capacitance for communicating with the external or outside of the logic drive, and the other type having small driving capability, loading, output capacitance or input capacitance for communicating directly with the other chip or chips of the logic drive; (2) each of the plural FPGA IC chips only communicates directly with the other chip or chips of the logic drive, but does not communicate directly and/or does not communicate with the external or outside (of the logic drive); wherein an I/O circuit of one of the plural FPGA IC chips may communicate indirectly with the external or outside (of the logic drive) by going through an I/O circuit of the dedicated I/O chip; wherein the driving capability, loading, output capacitance or input capacitance of the I/O circuit of the dedicated I/O chip is significantly larger or bigger than that of the I/O circuit of the one of the plural FPGA IC chips, wherein the I/O circuit (for example, the input or output capacitance is smaller than 2 pF) of the one of the plural FPGA IC chips is connected or coupled to the large or big I/O circuit (for example, the input or output capacitance is larger than 3 pF) of the dedicated I/O chip for communicating with the external or outside circuits of the logic drive; (3) the dedicated control chip only communicates directly with the other chip or chips of the logic drive, but does not communicate directly and/or does not communicate with the external or outside (of the logic drive); wherein an I/O circuit of the dedicated control chip may communicate indirectly with the external or outside (of the logic drive) by going through an I/O circuit of the dedicated I/O chip; wherein the driving capability, loading, output capacitance or input capacitance of the I/O circuit of the dedicated I/O chip is significantly larger or bigger than that of the I/O circuit of the dedicated control chip. Alternatively, wherein the dedicated control chip may communicate directly with the other chip or chips of the logic drive, and may also communicate directly with the external or outside (of the logic drive); (4) each of the one or more non-volatile memory IC chips only communicates directly with the other chip or chips of the logic drive, but does not communicates directly and/or does not communicate with the external or outside (of the logic drive); wherein an I/O circuit of the one or more non-volatile memory IC chips may communicate indirectly with the external or outside (of the logic drive) by going through an I/O circuit of the dedicated I/O chip; wherein the driving capability, loading, output capacitance or input capacitance of the I/O circuit of the dedicated I/O chip is significantly larger or bigger than that of the I/O circuit of the one or more non-volatile memory IC chips. Alternatively, wherein the one or more non-volatile memory IC chips may communicate directly with the other chip or chips of the logic drive, and may also communicate directly with the external or outside (of the logic drive). In the above, “Object X communicates directly with Object Y” means the Object X (for example, a first chip of the logic drive) communicates or couples electrically and directly with the Object Y without going through or passing through any other chip or chips of the logic drive. In the above, “Object X does not communicate directly with Object Y” means the Object X (for example, a first chip of or in the logic drive) may communicate or couple electrically but indirectly with the Object Y by going through or passing through any other chip or chips of the logic drive. “Object X does not communicate with Object Y” means the Object X (for example, a first chip of the logic drive) does not communicate or couple electrically and directly, and does not communicate or couple electrically and indirectly with the Object Y. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the standard commodity logic drive in a multi-chip package comprising the plural standard commodity FPGA IC chips, the dedicated control and I/O chip, and the one or more non-volatile memory IC chips, for use in different applications requiring logic, computing and/or processing functions by field programming. The communication between the chips of the logic drive and the communication between each chip of the logic drive and the external or outside (of the logic drive) are described as follows: (1) the dedicated control and I/O chip communicates directly with the other chip or chips of the logic drive, and also communicates directly with the external or outside (circuits) (of the logic drive); The dedicated control and I/O chip comprises two types of I/O circuits; one type having large driving capability, loading, output capacitance or input capacitance for communicating with the external or outside of the logic drive, and the other type having small driving capability, loading, output capacitance or input capacitance for communicating directly with the other chip or chips of the logic drive; (2) each of the plural FPGA IC chips only communicates directly with the other chip or chips of the logic drive, but does not communicate directly and/or does not communicate with the external or outside (of the logic drive); wherein an I/O circuit of one of the plural FPGA IC chips may communicate indirectly with the external or outside (of the logic drive) by going through an I/O circuit of the dedicated control and I/O chip; wherein the driving capability, loading, output capacitance or input capacitance of the I/O circuit of the dedicated control and I/O chip is significantly larger or bigger than that of the I/O circuit of the one of the plural FPGA IC chips; (3) each of the one or more non-volatile memory IC chips only communicates directly with the other chip or chips in or of the logic drive, but does not communicates directly or does not communicate with the external or outside (of the logic drive); wherein an I/O circuit of the one or more non-volatile memory IC chips may communicate indirectly with the external or outside (of the logic drive) by going through an I/O circuit of the dedicated control and I/O chip, wherein the driving capability, loading, output capacitance or input capacitance of the I/O circuit of the dedicated control and I/O chip is significantly larger or bigger than that of the I/O circuit of the one or more non-volatile memory IC chips. Alternatively, wherein the one or more non-volatile memory IC chips communicates directly with the other chip or chips in the logic drive, and also communicates directly with the external or outside (of the logic drive). The wordings “Object X communicates directly with Object Y”, “Object X does not communicate directly with Object Y”, and “Object X does not communicate with Object Y” have the same meanings as defined in the previous paragraph. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a development kit or tool for a user or developer to implement an innovation or an application using the standard commodity logic drive. The user or developer with innovation or application concept or idea may purchase the standard commodity logic drive and use the corresponding development kit or tool to develop or to write software codes or programs to load into the non-volatile memory of the standard commodity logic drive for implementing his/her innovation or application concept or idea. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a logic drive in a multi-chip package format further comprising an Innovated ASIC or COT (abbreviated as IAC below) chip for Intellectual Property (IP) circuits, Application Specific (AS) circuits, analog circuits, mixed-mode signal circuits, Radio-Frequency (RF) circuits, and/or transmitter, receiver, transceiver circuits, etc. The IAC chip is designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm or 500 nm. Alternatively, the advanced semiconductor technology nodes or generations, such as more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 40 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, may be used for the IAC chip. The semiconductor technology node or generation used in the IAC chip is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive. Transistors used in the IAC chip may be a FINFET, a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Transistors used in the IAC chip may be different from that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive; for example, the IAC chip may use the conventional MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET; or the IAC chip may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET. Since the IAC chip in this aspect of disclosure may be designed and fabricated using older or less advanced technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm, or 500 nm, its NRE cost is cheaper than or less than that of the current or conventional ASIC or COT chip designed and fabricated using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. The NRE cost for designing a current or conventional ASIC or COT chip using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, may be more than US $5M, US $10M, US $20M or even exceeding US $50M, or US $100M. The cost of a photo mask set for an ASIC or COT chip at the 16 nm technology node or generation is over US $2M, US $5M, or US $10M. Implementing the same or similar innovation or application using the logic drive including the IAC chip designed and fabricated using older or less advanced technology nodes or generations may reduce NRE cost down to less than US $10M, US $7M, US $5M, US $3M or US $1M. 
     Compared to the implementation by developing the current conventional logic ASIC or COT IC chip, the NRE cost of developing the IAC chip for the same or similar innovation or application may be reduced by a factor of larger than 2, 5, 10, 20, or 30. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the logic drive in a multi-chip package format may comprises a dedicated control and IAC (abbreviated as DCIAC below) chip by combining the functions of the dedicated control chip and the IAC chip, as described in the above paragraphs, in one single chip. The DCIAC chip now comprises the control circuits, Intellectual Property (IP) circuits, Application Specific (AS) circuits, analog circuits, mixed-mode signal circuits, Radio-Frequency (RF) circuits, and/or transmitter, receiver, transceiver circuits, and etc. The DCIAC chip is designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm or 500 nm. Alternatively, the advanced semiconductor technology nodes or generations, such as more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 40 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, may be used for the DCIAC chip. The semiconductor technology node or generation used in the DCIAC chip is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive. Transistors used in the DCIAC chip may be a FINFET, a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Transistors used in the DCIAC chip may be different from that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive; for example, the DCIAC chip may use the conventional MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET; or the DCIAC chip may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET. Since the DCIAC chip in this aspect of disclosure may be designed and fabricated using older or less advanced technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm, or 500 nm, its NRE cost is cheaper than or less than that of the current or conventional ASIC or COT chip designed and fabricated using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. The NRE cost for designing a current or conventional ASIC or COT chip using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, may be more than US $5M, US $10M, US $20M or even exceeding US $50M, or US $100M. The cost of a photo mask set for an ASIC or COT chip at the 16 nm technology node or generation is over US $2M, US $5M or US $10M. Implementing the same or similar innovation or application using the logic drive including the DCIAC chip designed and fabricated using older or less advanced technology nodes or generations, may reduce NRE cost down to less than US $10M, US $7M, US $5M, US $3M or US $1M. Compared to the implementation by developing a logic ASIC or COT IC chip, the NRE cost of developing the DCIAC chip for the same or similar innovation or application may be reduced by a factor of larger than 2, 5, 10, 20, or 30. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the logic drive in a multi-chip package further comprising a dedicated control, dedicated I/O, and IAC (abbreviated as DCDI/OIAC below) chip by combining the functions of the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip and the IAC chip, as described in the above paragraphs, in one single chip. The DCDI/OIAC chip comprises the control circuits, I/O circuits, Intellectual Property (IP) circuits, Application Specific (AS) circuits, analog circuits, mixed-mode signal circuits, Radio-Frequency (RF) circuits, and/or transmitter, receiver, transceiver circuits, and etc. The DCDI/OIAC chip is designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 30 nm, 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm, or 500 nm. The semiconductor technology node or generation used in the DCDI/OIAC chip is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive. Transistors used in the DCDI/OIAC chip may be a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Transistors used in the DCDI/OIAC chip may be different from that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive; for example, the DCDI/OIAC chip may use the conventional MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET; or the DCDI/OIAC chip may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET. Since the DCDI/OIAC chip in this aspect of disclosure may be designed and fabricated using older or less advanced technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm, 500 nm, its NRE cost is cheaper than or less than that of the current or conventional ASIC or COT chip designed and fabricated using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. The NRE cost for designing a current or conventional ASIC or COT chip using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm may be more than US $5M, US $10M, US $20M or even exceeding US $50M, or US $100M. The cost of a photo mask set for an ASIC or COT chip at the 16 nm technology node or generation is over US$2M, US $5M or US $10M. Implementing the same or similar innovation or application using the logic drive including the DCDI/OIAC chip designed and fabricated using older or less advanced technology nodes or generations, may reduce NRE cost down to less than US $10M, US $7M, US $5M, US $3M or US $1M. Compared to the implementation by developing a logic ASIC or COT IC chip, the NRE cost of developing the DCDI/OIAC chip for the same or similar innovation or application may be reduced by a factor of larger than 2, 5, 10, 20, or 30. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a method to change the logic ASIC or COT IC chip hardware business into a mainly software business by using the logic drive. Since the performance, power consumption and engineering and manufacturing costs of the logic drive may be better or equal to the current conventional ASIC or COT IC chip for a same or similar innovation or application, the current ASIC or COT IC chip design companies or suppliers may become software developers, while only designing the IAC chip, the DCIAC chip, or the DCDI/OIAC chip, as described above, using older or less advanced semiconductor technology nodes or generations. In this aspect of disclosure, they may (1) design and own the IAC chip, the DCIAC chip, or the DCDI/OIAC chip; (2) purchase from a third party the standard commodity FPGA IC chips and standard commodity non-volatile memory chips in the bare-die or packaged format; (3) design and fabricate (may outsource the manufacturing to a third party of the manufacturing provider) the logic drive including their own IAC, DCIAC, or DCI/OIAC chip, and the purchased third party&#39;s standard commodity FPGA IC chips and standard commodity non-volatile memory chips; (3) install in-house developed software for the innovation or application in the non-volatile memory IC chip or chips in the logic drive; and/or (4) sell the program-installed logic drive to their customers. In this case, they still sell hardware without performing the expensive ASIC or COT IC chip design and production using advanced semiconductor technology notes, for example, nodes or generations more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. They may write software codes to program the logic drive comprising the plural of standard commodity FPGA IC chips for their desired applications, for example, in applications of Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning, deep learning, big data, Internet Of Things (IOT), Virtual Reality (VR), Augmented Reality (AR), car electronics, Graphic Processing (GP), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Micro Controlling (MC), and/or Central Processing (CP). 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the logic drive in a multi-chip package comprising plural standard commodity FPGA IC chips and one or more non-volatile IC chips, further comprising a processing and/or computing IC chip, for example, a Central Processing Unit (CPU) chip, a Graphic Processing Unit (GPU) chip, a Digital Signal Processing (DSP) chip, a Tensor Processing Unit (TPU) chip, and/or an Application Processing Unit (APU) chip, designed, implemented and fabricated using an advanced semiconductor technology node or generation, for example more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, which may be the same as, one generation or node less advanced than, or one generation or node more advanced than that used for the FPGA IC chips in the same logic drive. The processing and/or computing IC chip may comprise: (1) CPU and DSP unit, (2) CPU and GPU, (3) DSP and GPU or (4) CPU, GPU and DSP unit. Transistors used in the processing and/or computing IC chip may be a FIN Field-Effect-Transistor (FINFET), a FINFET on Silicon-On-Insulator (FINFET SOI), a Fully Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Alternatively, a plurality of the processing and/or computing IC chips may be included, packaged, or incorporated in the logic drive. Alternatively, two processing and/or computing IC chips are included, packaged or incorporated in the logic drive, the combination for the two processing and/or computing IC chips is as below: (1) one of the two processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Central Processing Unit (CPU) chip, and the other one of the two processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Graphic Processing unit (GPU); (2) one of the two processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Central Processing Unit (CPU), and the other one of the two processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Digital Signal Processing (DSP) unit; (3) one of the two processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Central Processing Unit (CPU), and the other one of the two processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Tensor Processing Unit (TPU); (4) one of the two processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Graphic Processing Unit (GPU), and the other one of the two processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Digital Signal Processing (DSP) unit; (5) one of the two processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Graphic Processing Unit (GPU), and the other one of the two processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Tensor Processing Unit (TPU); (6) one of the two processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Digital Signal Processing (DSP) unit, and the other one of the two processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Tensor Processing Unit (TPU). Alternatively, three processing and/or computing IC chips are incorporated in the logic drive, the combination for the three processing and/or computing IC chips is as below: (1) one of the three processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Central Processing Unit (CPU), another one of the three processing and/or computing IC chips may be a graphic Processing Unit (GPU), and the other one of the three processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Digital Signal Processing (DSP) unit; (2) one of the three processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Central Processing Unit (CPU), another one of the three processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Graphic Processing Unit (GPU), and the other one of the three processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Tensor Processing Unit (TPU); (3) one of the three processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Central Processing Unit (CPU), another one of the three processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Digital Signal Processing (DSP) unit, and the other one of the three processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Tensor Processing Unit (TPU); (4) one of the three processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Graphic processing unit (GPU), another one of the three processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Digital Signal Processing (DSP) unit, and the other one of the three processing and/or computing IC chips may be a Tensor Processing Unit (TPU). Alternatively, the combination for the multiple processing and/or computing IC chips may comprise: (1) multiple GPU chips, for example 2, 3, 4 or more than 4 GPU chips, (2) one or more CPU chips and/or one or more GPU chips, (3) one or more CPU chips and/or one or more DSP chips, (3) one or more CPU chips, one or more GPU chips and/or one or more DSP chips, (4) one or more CPU chips and/or one or more TPU chips, or, (5) one or more CPU chips, one or more DSP chips and/or one or more TPU chips. In all of the above alternatives, the logic drive may comprise one or more of the processing and/or computing IC chips, and one or more high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chips, DRAM chips or NVM chips for high speed parallel processing and/or computing. The high speed, high bandwidth parallel wide bitwidth data buses are based on a Top Interconnection Scheme in, on or of the logic drive (abbreviated as TISD in below) to be described below. For example, the logic drive may comprise multiple GPU chips, for example 2, 3, 4 or more than 4 GPU chips, and multiple high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chips, DRAM chips or NVM chips. The communication between one of GPU chips and one of SRAM chips, DRAM chips or NVM chips may be using metal lines or traces of TISD, and with data bit-width of equal or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. For another example, the logic drive may comprise multiple TPU chips, for example 2, 3, 4 or more than 4 TPU chips, and multiple high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chips, DRAM chips or NVM chips. The communication between one of TPU chips and one of SRAM chips, DRAM chips or NVM chips may be using metal lines or traces of TISD, and with data bit-width of equal or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. For another example, the logic drive may comprise multiple FPGA IC chips, for example 2, 3, 4 or more than 4 FPGA IC chips, and multiple high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chips, DRAM chips or NVM chips. The communication between one of FPGA IC chips and one of SRAM chips, DRAM chips or NVM chips may be using metal lines or traces of TISD, and with data bit-width of equal or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. 
     The communication, connection, or coupling between (i) one of FPGA IC chips and/or processing and/or computing chips (for example, CPU, GPU, DSP, APU, TPU, and/or ASIC chips) and (ii) one of high speed, high bandwidth SRAM, DRAM or NVM chips through the TISD of the logic drive described and specified above, may be the same or similar as that between internal circuits in a same chip. Alternatively, the communication, connection, or coupling between (i) one of FPGA IC chips, and/or processing and/or computing chips (for example, CPU, GPU, DSP, APU, TPU, and/or ASIC chips) and (ii) one of high speed, high bandwidth SRAM, DRAM or NVM chips through the TISD of the logic drive described and specified above, may be using small I/O drivers and/or receivers. The driving capability, loading, output capacitance, or input capacitance of the small I/O drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits may be between 0.01 pF and 10 pF, 0.05 pF and 5 pF, 0.01 pF and 2 pF or 0.01 pF and 1 pF; or smaller than 10 pF, 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF, 1 pF, 0.5 pF or 0.1 pF. For example, a bi-directional (or tri-state) I/O pad or circuit may be used for the small I/O drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits for communicating between high speed, high bandwidth logic and memory chips in the logic drive, and may comprise an ESD circuit, a receiver, and a driver, and may have an input capacitance or output capacitance between 0.01 pF and 10 pF, 0.05 pF and 5 pF, 0.01 pF and 2 pF or 0.01 pF and 1 pF; or smaller than 10 pF, 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF, 1 pF, 0.5 pF or 0.1 pF. 
     The processing and/or computing IC chip or chips in the logic drive provide fixed-metal-line (non-field-programmable) interconnects for (non-field-programmable) functions, processors and operations. The standard commodity FPGA IC chips provide (1) programmable-metal-line (field-programmable) interconnects for (field-programmable) functions, processors and operations and (2) fixed-metal-line (non-field-programmable) interconnects for (non-field-programmable) functions, processors and operations. Once the programmable-metal-line interconnects in or of the FPGA IC chips are programmed, the FPGA IC chips together with the processing and/or computing IC chip or chips in the same logic drive provide powerful functions and operations in applications, for example, Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning, deep learning, big data, Internet Of Things (IOT), Virtual Reality (VR), Augmented Reality (AR), driverless car electronics, Graphic Processing (GP), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Micro Controlling (MC), and/or Central Processing (CP). 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the standard commodity FPGA IC chip for use in the logic drive. The standard commodity FPGA IC chip is designed, implemented and fabricated using an advanced semiconductor technology node or generation, for example more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. The standard commodity FPGA IC chips are fabricated by the process steps described in the following paragraphs: 
     (I) Providing a semiconductor substrate (for example, a silicon substrate), or a Silicon-On-Insulator (SOI) substrate, with the substrate in the wafer form, and with a wafer size, for example 8″, 12″ or 18″ in the diameter. Transistors are formed in the substrate, and/or on or at the surface of the substrate by a wafer process. Transistors formed in the advanced semiconductor technology node or generation may be a FINFET, a FINFET on Silicon-on-insulator (FINFET SOI), a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. 
     (II) Forming a First Interconnection Scheme in, on or of the Chip (FISC) over the substrate and on or over a layer comprising transistors, by a wafer process. The FISC comprises multiple interconnection metal layers, with an inter-metal dielectric layer between each of the multiple interconnection metal layers. The FISC structure may be formed by performing a single damascene copper process and/or a double damascene copper process. As an example, the metal lines and traces of an interconnection metal layer in the multiple interconnection metal layers may be formed by the single damascene copper process as follows: (1) providing a first insulating dielectric layer (may be an inter-metal dielectric layer with the top surfaces of vias or metal pads, lines or traces exposed and formed therein). The top-most layer of the first insulting dielectric layer may be, for example, a low k dielectric layer, for an example, a SiOC layer; (2) depositing, for example, by Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) methods, a second insulting dielectric layer on or over the whole wafer, including on or over the first insulating dielectric layer, and on or over the exposed vias or metal pads in the first insulating dielectric layer. The second insulting dielectric layer is formed by (a) depositing a bottom differentiate etch-stop layer, for example, a Silicon Carbon Nitride layer (SiCN), on or over the top-most layer of the first insulting dielectric layer and on the exposed top surfaces of the vias or metal pads in the first insulating dielectric layer; (b) then depositing a low k dielectric layer, for example, a SiOC layer, on or over the bottom differentiate etch-stop layer. The low k dielectric material has a dielectric constant smaller than that of the SiO 2  material. The SiCN and SiOC layers may be deposited by CVD methods. The material used for the first and second insulating dielectric layers of the FISC comprises inorganic material, or material compounds comprising silicon, nitrogen, carbon, and/or oxygen; (3) then forming trenches or openings in the second insulting dielectric layer by (a) coating, exposing, developing a photoresist layer to form trenches or openings in the photoresist layer, and then (b) forming trenches or openings in the second insulating dielectric layer by etching methods, and then removing the photoresist layer; (4) followed by depositing an adhesion layer on or over the whole wafer including in the trenches or openings in the second insulating dielectric layer, for example, sputtering or Chemical Vapor Depositing (CVD) a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with thickness for example, between 1 nm and 50 nm); (5) then depositing an electroplating seed layer on or over the adhesion layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness, for example, between 3 nm and 200 nm); (6) then electroplating a copper layer (with a thickness, for example, between 10 nm and 3,000 nm, 10 nm and 1,000 nm or 10 nm and 500 nm) on or over the copper seed layer; (7) then applying a Chemical-Mechanical Process (CMP) to remove the un-wanted metals (Ti or TiN)/Seed Cu/electroplated Cu) outside the trenches or openings in the second insulating dielectric layer, until the top surface of the second insulating dielectric layer is exposed. The metals left or remained in trenches or openings in or of the second insulating dielectric layer are used as metal vias, lines or traces for the interconnection metal layer of the FISC. 
     As another example, the metal lines and traces of an interconnection metal layer of the FISC, and the vias in an inter-metal dielectric layer of the FISC may be form by a double damascene copper process as follows: (1) providing a first insulating dielectric layer with top surfaces of metal lines or traces or metal pads (in the first insulating dielectric layer) exposed. The top-most layer of the first insulting dielectric layer may be, for example, a Silicon Carbon Nitride layer (SiCN) or Silicon Nitride (SiN) layer; (2) depositing a dielectric stack layer comprising multiple insulating dielectric layers on the top-most layer of the first insulting dielectric layer and the exposed top surfaces of metal lines and traces in the first insulating dielectric layer. The dielectric stack layer comprises, from bottom to top, (a) a bottom low k dielectric layer, for example, a SiOC layer (to be used as the via layer or the inter-metal dielectric layer), (b) a middle differentiate etch-stop layer, for example, a Silicon Carbon Nitride layer (SiCN) or Silicon Nitride layer (SiN), (c) a top low k SiOC layer (to be used as the insulating dielectrics between metal lines or traces in or of the same interconnection metal layer), and (d) a top differentiate etch-stop layer, for example, a Silicon Carbon Nitride layer (SiCN) or Silicon Nitride (SiN) layer. All insulating dielectric layers, (SiCN, SiN, SiOC) may be deposited by CVD methods; (3) forming trenches, openings or holes in the dielectric stack: (a) coating, exposing and developing a first photoresist layer to form trenches or openings in the first photoresist layer; and then (b) etching the exposed top differentiate etch-stop layer (SiCN or SiN), and the top low k SiOC layer, and stopping at the middle differentiate etch-stop layer, (SiCN or SiN), forming trenches or top openings in the top portion of the dielectric stack layer for the later double-damascene copper process to from metal lines or traces of the interconnection metal layer; (c) then coating, exposing and developing a second photoresist layer to form openings or holes in the second photoresist layer; (d) etching the exposed middle differentiate etch-stop layer (SiCN or SiN), and the bottom low k SiOC layer, and stopping at the metal lines and traces in the first insulating dielectric layer, forming bottom openings or holes in the bottom portion of the dielectric stack layer for the later double-damascene copper process to form the vias in the inter-metal dielectric layer. The trenches or top openings in the top portion of the dielectric stack layer overlap the bottom openings or holes in the bottom portion of the dielectric stack layer, and have a size larger than that of the bottom openings or holes. In other words, the bottom openings or holes in the bottom portion of the dielectric stack layer, are inside or enclosed by the trenches or top openings in the top portion of the dielectric stack layer from a top view; (4) forming metal lines or traces and vias: (a) depositing an adhesion layer on or over the whole wafer, including on or over the dielectric stack layer, and in the etched trenches or top openings in the top portion of the dielectric stack layer, and in the bottom openings or holes in the bottom portion of the dielectric stack layer. For example, sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 50 nm), (b) then depositing an electroplating seed layer on or over the adhesion layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness, for example, between 3 nm and 200 nm); (c) then electroplating a copper layer (with a thickness, for example, between 20 nm and 6,000 nm, 10 nm and 3,000 nm, or between 10 nm and 1,000 nm) on or over the copper seed layer; (d) then applying a Chemical-Mechanical Process (CMP) to remove the un-wanted metals (Ti (or TiN)/Seed Cu/electroplated Cu) outside the trenches or top openings, and the bottom openings or holes in the dielectric stack layer, until the top surface of the dielectric stack layer is exposed. The metals left or remained in the trenches or top openings are used as metal lines or traces for the interconnection metal layer, and the metals left or remained in the bottom openings or holes are used as vias in the inter-metal dielectric layer for coupling the metal lines or traces below and above the vias. In the single-damascene process, the copper electroplating process step and the CMP process step are performed for the metal lines or traces of an interconnection metal layer, and are then performed sequentially again for vias in an inter-metal dielectric layer on the interconnection metal layer. In other words, in the single damascene copper process, the copper electroplating process step and the CMP process step are performed two times for forming the metal lines or traces of an interconnection metal layer, and vias in an inter-metal dielectric layer on the interconnection metal layer. In the double-damascene process, the copper electroplating process step and the CMP process step are performed only one time for forming the metal lines or traces of an interconnection metal layer, and vias in an inter-metal dielectric layer under the interconnection metal layer. The processes for forming metal lines or traces of the interconnection metal layer and vias in the inter-metal dielectric layer using the single damascene copper process or the double damascene copper process may be repeated multiple times to form metal lines or traces of multiple interconnection metal layers and vias in inter-metal dielectric layers of the FISC. The FISC may comprise 4 to 15 layers, or 6 to 12 layers of interconnection metal layers. 
     The metal lines or traces in the FISC are coupled or connected to the underlying transistors. The thickness of the metal lines or traces of the FISC, either formed by the single-damascene process or by the double-damascene process, is, for example, between 3 nm and 500 nm, or between 10 nm and 1,000 nm, or, thinner than or equal to 5 nm, 10 nm, 30 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, 200 nm, 300 nm, 500 nm, or 1,000 nm. The width of the metal lines or traces of the FISC is, for example, between 3 nm and 500 nm, or between 10 nm and 1,000 nm, or, narrower than 5 nm, 10 nm, 20 nm, 30 nm, 70 nm, 100 nm, 300 nm, 500 nm or 1,000 nm. The thickness of the inter-metal dielectric layer has a thickness, for example, between 3 nm and 500 nm, or between 10 nm and 1,000 nm, or thinner than 5 nm, 10 nm, 30 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, 200 nm, 300 nm, 500 nm or 1,000 nm. The metal lines or traces of the FISC may be used for the programmable interconnection. 
     (III) Depositing a passivation layer on or over the whole wafer and on or over the FISC structure. The passivation is used for protecting the transistors and the FISC structure from water moisture or contamination from the external environment, for example, sodium mobile ions. The passivation comprises a mobile ion-catching layer or layers, for example, SiN, SiON, and/or SiCN layer or layers. The total thickness of the mobile ion catching layer or layers is thicker than or equal to 100 nm, 150 nm, 200 nm, 300 nm, 450 nm, or 500 nm. Openings in the passivation layer may be formed to expose the top surface of the top-most interconnection metal layer of the FISC, and for forming vias in the passivation openings in the following processes later. 
     (IV) Forming a Second Interconnection Scheme in, on or of the Chip (SISC) on or over the FISC structure. The SISC comprises multiple interconnection metal layers, with an inter-metal dielectric layer between each of the multiple interconnection metal layers, and may optionally comprise an insulating dielectric layer on or over the passivation layer, and between the bottom-most interconnection metal layer of the SISC and the passivation layer. The insulating dielectric layer is then deposited on or over the whole wafer, including passivation layer and in the passivation openings. The insulating dielectric layer may have planarization function. A polymer material may be used for the insulating dielectric layer, for example, polyimide, BenzoCycloButene (BCB), parylene, epoxy-based material or compound, photo epoxy SU-8, elastomer or silicone. The material used for the insulating dielectric layer of SISC comprises organic material, for example, a polymer, or material compounds comprising carbon. The polymer layer may be deposited by methods of spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing, or molding. The polymer material may be photosensitive, and may be used as photoresist as well for patterning openings in it for forming metal vias in it by following processes to be performed later; that is, the photosensitive polymer layer is coated, and exposed to light through a photomask, and then developed and etched to form openings in it. The opening in the photosensitive insulating dielectric layer overlaps the opening in the passivation layer, exposing the top surfaces of the top-most metal layer of the FISC. In some applications or designs, the size of opening in the polymer layer is larger than that of the opening in the passivation layer, and the top surface of the passivation layer is exposed in the opening of the polymer layer. The photosensitive polymer layer (the insulating dielectric layer) is then cured at a temperature, for example, equal to or higher than 100° C., 125° C., 150° C., 175° C., 200° C., 225° C., 250° C., 275° C. or 300° C. A copper emboss process is then performed on or over the cured polymer layer and on or over the exposed top surfaces of the top-most interconnection metal layer of the FISC in openings in the cured polymer layer, or, on or over the exposed surface of the passivation layer in the openings of the cured polymer layer for some cases: (a) first depositing the whole wafer an adhesion layer on or over the cured polymer layer and on or over the exposed top surfaces of the top-most interconnection metal layer of the FISC in openings in the cured polymer layer, or, on or over the exposed surface of the passivation layer in the openings of the cured polymer layer for some cases, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 50 nm); (b) then depositing an electroplating seed layer on or over the adhesion layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness, for example, between 3 nm and 200 nm); (c) coating, exposing and developing a photoresist layer on or over the copper seed layer; forming trenches or openings in the photoresist layer for forming metal lines or traces of the interconnection metal layer of SISC by following processes to be performed later, wherein portion of the trench (opening) in the photoresist layer may overlap the whole area of opening in the cured polymer layer for forming vias in the openings of the cured polymer layer by following processes to be performed later; exposing the copper seed layer at the bottom of the trenches or openings; (d) then electroplating a copper layer (with a thickness, for example, between 0.3 μm and 20 μm, 0.5 μm and 5 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 2 μm and 10 μm) on or over the copper seed layer at the bottom of the patterned trenches or openings in the photoresist layer; (e) removing the remained photoresist; (f) removing or etching the copper seed layer and the adhesion layer not under the electroplated copper. The emboss metals (Ti (or TiN)/seed Cu/electroplated Cu) left or remained in the openings of the cured polymer layer are used for vias in the insulating dielectric layer and vias in the passivation layer; and the emboss metals (Ti (or TiN)/seed Cu/electroplated Cu) left or remained in the locations of trenches or openings in the photoresist, (noted: the photoresist is removed after copper electroplating) are used for the metal lines or traces of the interconnection metal layer. The processes of forming the insulating dielectric layer and openings in it, and the emboss copper processes for forming the vias in the insulting dielectric layer and the metal lines or traces of the interconnection metal layer, may be repeated to form multiple interconnection metal layers in or of the SISC; wherein the insulating dielectric layer is used as the inter-metal dielectric layer between two interconnection metal layers of the SISC, and the vias in the insulating dielectric layer (now in the inter-metal dielectric layer) are used for connecting or coupling metal lines or traces of the two interconnection metal layers. The top-most interconnection metal layer of the SISC is covered with a top-most insulating dielectric layer of SISC. The top-most insulating dielectric layer has openings in it to expose top surface of the top-most interconnection metal layer. The SISC may comprise 2 to 6, or 3 to 5 layers of interconnection metal layers. The metal lines or traces of the interconnection metal layers of the SISC have the adhesion layer (Ti or TiN, for example) and the copper seed layer only at the bottom, but not at the sidewalls of the metal lines or traces. The metal lines or traces of the interconnection metal layers of FISC have the adhesion layer (Ti or TiN, for example) and the copper seed layer at both the bottom and the sidewalls of the metal lines or traces. 
     The SISC interconnection metal lines or traces are coupled or connected to the FSIC interconnection metal lines or traces, or to transistors in the chip, through vias in openings of the passivation layer. The thickness of the metal lines or traces of SISC is between, for example, 0.3 μm and 20 μm, 0.5 μm and 10 μm, 1 μm and 5 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 2 μm and 10 μm; or thicker than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm or 3 μm. The width of the metal lines or traces of SISC is between, for example, 0.3 μm and 20 μm, 0.5 μm and 10 μm, 1 μm and 5 ums, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 2 μm and 10 μm; or wider than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm or 3 μm. The thickness of the inter-metal dielectric layer has a thickness between, for example, 0.3 μm and 20 μm, 0.5 μm and 10 μm, 1 μm and 5 μm, or 1 μm and 10 μm; or thicker than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm or 3 μm. The metal lines or traces of SISC may be used for the programmable interconnection. 
     (V) Forming micro copper pillars or bumps (i) on the top surface of the top-most interconnection metal layer of SISC, exposed in openings in the insulating dielectric layer of the SISC, and/or (ii) on or over the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the SISC. An emboss copper process, as described in above paragraphs, is performed to form the micro copper pillars or bumps as follows: (a) depositing whole wafer an adhesion layer on or over the top-most dielectric layer of the SISC structure, and in the openings of the top-most insulating dielectric layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with thickness for example, between 1 nm and 50 nm); (b) then depositing an electroplating seed layer on or over the adhesion layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness between, for example, 3 nm and 300 nm, or 3 nm and 200 nm); (c) coating, exposing and developing a photoresist layer; forming openings or holes in the photoresist layer for forming the micro pillars or bumps in later processes, exposing (i) a top surface of the top-most interconnection metal layer at the bottom of the openings in the top-most insulating layer of the SISC, and (ii) exposing an area or a ring of the top-most insulating dielectric layer (of the SISC) around the opening in the top-most insulating dielectric layer; (d) then electroplating a copper layer (with a thickness, for example, between 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, or 5 μm and 15 μm) on or over the copper seed layer in the patterned openings or holes in the photoresist layer; (e) removing the remained photoresist; (f) removing or etching the copper seed layer and the adhesion layer not under the electroplated copper. The metals left or remained are used as the micro copper pillars or bumps. The copper micro pillars or bumps are coupled or connected to the SISC and FISC interconnection metal lines or traces, and to transistors in or of the chip, through vias in openings in the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the SISC. The height of the micro pillars or bumps is between, for example, 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or greater than or equal to 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, 5 μm or 3 μm. The largest dimension in a cross-section of the micro pillars or bumps (for example, the diameter of a circle shape, or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape) is between, for example, 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. The space between a micro pillar or bump to its nearest neighboring pillar or bump is between, for example, 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. 
     (VI) Cutting or dicing the wafer to obtain separated standard commodity FPGA IC chips. The standard commodity FPGA IC chips comprise, from bottom to top: (i) a layer comprising transistors, (ii) the FISC, (iii) a passivation layer, (iv) the SISC and (v) micro copper pillars or bumps, above a level of the top surface of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the SISC by a height of, for example, between 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or greater than or equal to 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, 5 μm or 3 μm. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a Fan-Out Interconnection Technology (FOIT) for making or fabricating the logic drive based on a multi-chip packaging technology and process. The process steps are described as below: 
     (I) Providing a chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate, and IC chips or packages; then placing, fixing or attaching the IC chips or packages to and on the carrier, holder or substrate. The carrier, holder, molder or substrate may be in a wafer format (with 8″, 12″ or 18″ in diameter), or, in a panel format in the square or rectangle format (with a width or a length greater than or equal to 20 cm, 30 cm, 50 cm, 75 cm, 100 cm, 150 cm, 200 cm or 300 cm). The material of the chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate may be silicon, metal, ceramics, glass, steel, plastics, polymer, epoxy-based polymer, or epoxy-based compound. The IC chips or packages to be placed, fixed or attached to the carrier, holder, molder or substrate include the chips or packages mentioned, described and specified above: the standard commodity FPGA IC chips, the non-volatile chips or packages, the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, the dedicated control and I/O chip, IAC, DCIAC, and/or DCDI/OIAC chip. All chips to be packaged in the logic drives comprise micro copper pillars or bumps on the top surface of the chips. The top surfaces of micro copper pillars or bumps are at a level above the level of the top surface of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the chips with a height of, for example, between 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or greater than or equal to 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, 5 μm or 3 μm. The chips are placed, held, fixed or attached on or to the carrier, holder, molder or substrate with the side or surface of the chip with transistors faced up. The backside of the silicon substrate of the chips (the side or surface without transistors) is faced down and is placed, fixed, held or attached on or to the carrier, holder, molder or substrate. 
     (II) Applying a material, resin, or compound to fill the gaps between chips and cover the surfaces of chips by methods, for example, spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing or molding in the wafer or panel format. The molding method includes the compress molding (using top and bottom pieces of molds) or the casting molding (using a dispenser). The material, resin, or compound used may be a polymer material includes, for example, polyimide, BenzoCycloButene (BCB), parylene, epoxy-based material or compound, photo epoxy SU-8, elastomer, or silicone. The polymer may be, for example, photosensitive polyimide/PBO PIMEL™ supplied by Asahi Kasei Corporation, Japan; or epoxy-based molding compounds, resins or sealants provided by Nagase ChemteX Corporation, Japan. The material, resin or compound is applied (by coating, printing, dispensing or molding) on or over the carrier, holder, molder or substrate and on or over the chips to a level to: (i) fill gaps between chips, (ii) cover the top-most surface of the chips, (iii) fill gaps between micro copper pillars or bumps on or of the chips, (iv) cover top surfaces of the micro copper pillars or bumps on or of the chips. The material, resin or compound may be cured or cross-linked by raising a temperature to a certain temperature degree, for example, equal to or higher than or equal to 50° C., 70° C., 90° C., 100° C., 125° C., 150° C., 175° C., 200° C., 225° C., 250° C., 275° C. or 300° C. The material may be polymer or molding compound. Applying a CMP process to planarize the surface of the applied material, resin or compound to a level where the top surfaces of all micro bumps or pillars on or of the chips are fully exposed. The chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate may be then (i) removed after the CMP process, and before forming the Top Interconnection Scheme in, on or of the logic drive (TISD) to be described below; (ii) kept during the following fabrication process steps to be performed later, and removed after all fabrication process steps for making or fabricating the logic drive at the wafer or panel format are finished; or (iii) kept as part of the separated finished final logic drive product. A process, for example, a CMP process, a polishing process, or a wafer backside grinding process, may be performed for removing the chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate. Alternatively, a wafer or panel thinning process, for example, a CMP process, a polishing process or a wafer backside grinding process, may be performed to remove portion of the wafer or panel to make the wafer or panel thinner, in a wafer or panel process, after the wafer or panel process steps are all finished, and before the wafer or panel is separated, cut or diced into individual unit of the logic drive. 
     (III) Forming the Top Interconnection Scheme in, on or of the logic drive (TISD) on or over the planarized material, resin or compound and on or over the exposed top surfaces of the micro pillars or bumps by a wafer or panel processing. The TISD comprises multiple metal layers, with inter-metal dielectric layers between each of the multiple metal layers, and may, optionally, comprise an insulating dielectric layer on the planarized material, resin or compound layer, and between the bottom-most interconnection metal layer of the TISD and the planarized material, resin or compound layer. The metal lines or traces of the interconnection metal layers of the TISD are over the chips and extend horizontally across the edges of the chips, in other words, the metal lines or traces are running through gaps between chips of the logic drive. The metal lines or traces of the interconnection metal layers of the TISD are connecting or coupling circuits of two or more chips of the logic drive. The TISD is formed as follows: the insulating dielectric layer of the TISD is then deposited on or over the whole wafer, including the planarized material, resin or compound layer and the exposed top surfaces of the micro copper pillars or bumps. The insulating dielectric layer may have planarization function. A polymer material may be used for the insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, for example, polyimide, BenzoCycloButene (BCB), parylene, epoxy-based material or compound, photo epoxy SU-8, elastomer, or silicone. The material used for the insulating dielectric layer of the TISD comprises organic material, for example, a polymer, or material compounds comprising carbon. The polymer layer may be deposited by methods of spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing, or molding. The polymer material may be photosensitive, and may be used as photoresist as well for patterning openings in it for forming metal vias in it by following processes to be performed later; that is the photosensitive polymer layer is coated, and exposed to light through a photomask, and then developed and etched to form openings in it. The opening in the photosensitive insulating dielectric layer overlaps the exposed top surface of the micro copper pillar or bump, exposing the top surfaces of the micro copper pillars or bumps on or of the chips of the logic drive. In some applications or designs, the size of opening in the polymer layer is smaller than that of the top surface of the micro copper or bump. In other applications or designs, the size of opening in the polymer layer is larger than that of the top surface of the micro copper pillar or bump, and the top surface of the planarized material, resin or compound layer is exposed in the opening of the polymer layer. The photosensitive polymer layer (the insulating dielectric layer) is then cured at a temperature, for example, equal to or higher than 100° C., 125° C., 150° C., 175° C., 200° C., 225° C., 250° C., 275° C. or 300° C. A copper emboss process is then performed on or over the insulating dielectric layer of the TISD and on or over the exposed top surfaces of the micro copper pillars or bumps in openings in the cured polymer layer, and, for some cases, on or over the exposed surface of the planarized material, resin or compound layer in the openings of the cured polymer layer: (a) first depositing the whole wafer an adhesion layer on or over the cured polymer layer and on or over the exposed top surfaces of the micro copper pillars or bumps in openings in the cured polymer layer, and, in some cases, on or over the exposed planarized material, resin or compound layer in the openings of the cured polymer layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 50 nm); (b) then depositing an electroplating seed layer on or over the adhesion layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness, for example, between 3 nm and 400 nm, or 3 nm and 200 nm); (c) coating, exposing and developing a photoresist layer on or over the copper seed layer; forming trenches or openings in the photoresist layer for forming metal lines or traces of the interconnection metal layer of the TISD by following processes to be performed later, wherein portion of the trench (opening) in the photoresist layer may overlap the whole area of opening in the cured polymer layer for forming vias in the openings of the cured polymer layer by following processes to be performed later, exposing the copper seed layer at the bottom of the trenches or openings; (d) then electroplating a copper layer (with a thickness, for example, between 0.3 μm and 20 μm, 0.5 μm and 5 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 2 μm and 10 μm) on or over the copper seed layer at the bottom of the patterned trenches or openings in the photoresist layer; (e) removing the remained photoresist; (f) removing or etching the copper seed layer and the adhesion layer not under the electroplated copper. The emboss metals (Ti (or TiN)/seed Cu/electroplated Cu) left or remained in the openings of the cured polymer layer are used for vias in the insulating dielectric layer; and the emboss metals (Ti (or TiN)/seed Cu/electroplated Cu) left or remained in the locations of trenches or openings in the photoresist, (noted: the photoresist is removed after copper electroplating) are used for the metal lines or traces of the interconnection metal layer of the TISD. The processes of forming the insulating dielectric layer and openings in it; and the emboss copper processes for forming the vias in the insulting dielectric layer and the metal lines or traces of the interconnection metal layer, may be repeated to form multiple interconnection metal layers in or of the TISD; wherein the insulating dielectric layer is used as the inter-metal dielectric layer between two interconnection metal layers of the TISD, and the vias in the insulating dielectric layer (now in the inter-metal dielectric layer) are used for connecting or coupling metal lines or traces of the two interconnection metal layers of the TISD. The top-most interconnection metal layer of the TISD is covered with a top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD. The top-most insulating dielectric layer has openings in it to expose top surface of the top-most interconnection metal layer. The TISD may comprise 2 to 6 layers, or 3 to 5 layers of interconnection metal layers. The interconnection metal lines or traces of the TISD have the adhesion layer (Ti or TiN, for example) and the copper seed layer only at the bottom, but not at the sidewalls of the metal lines or traces. The interconnection metal lines or traces of FISC have the adhesion layer (Ti or TiN, for example) and the copper seed layer at both the bottom and the sidewalls of the metal lines or traces. 
     The TISD interconnection metal lines or traces are coupled or connected to the SISC interconnection metal lines or traces, the FISC interconnection metal lines or traces, and/or transistors on, in or of the chips of the logic drive, through the micro bumps or pillars on or of the chips. The chips are surrounded by the material, resin, or compound filled in the gaps between chips, and the chips are also covered by the material, resin, or compound on the surfaces of the chips. The thickness of the metal lines or traces of the TISD is between, for example, 0.3 μm and 30 μm, 0.5 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 0.5 μm to 5 μm, or thicker than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm, 3 μm or 5 μm. The width of the metal lines or traces of the TISD is between, for example, 0.3 μm and 30 μm, 0.5 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 0.5 μm to 5 μm, or wider than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm, 3 μm or 5 μm. The thickness of the inter-metal dielectric layer of the TISD is between, for example, 0.3 μm and 30 μm, 0.5 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 0.5 μm and 5 μm, or thicker than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm, 3 μm or 5 μm. The metal lines or traces of interconnection metal layers of the TISD may be used for the programmable interconnection. 
     (IV) Forming copper pillars or bumps on or over the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, and the exposed top surfaces of the top-most interconnection metal layer of the TISD in openings of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, by performing an emboss copper process, as described above, in the following process steps: (a) depositing whole wafer or panel an adhesion layer on or over the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, and the exposed top surfaces of the top-most interconnection metal layer of the TISD in openings of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 200 nm, or 5 nm and 50 nm); (b) then depositing an electroplating seed layer on or over the adhesion layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness, for example, between 3 nm and 400 nm or 10 nm to 200 nm); (c) patterning openings or holes in a photoresist layer for the copper pillars or bumps by coating, exposing and developing the photoresist layer, exposing the copper seed layer at the bottom of the openings in the photoresist layer. The opening in the photoresist layer overlaps the opening in the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD; and may extend out of the opening in the top-most insulating dielectric layer, to an area or a ring of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD around the opening in the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD; (d) then electroplating a copper layer (with a thickness, for example, between 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm) on or over the copper seed layer in the patterned openings in the photoresist layer; (e) removing the remained photoresist; (f) removing or etching the copper seed layer and the adhesion layer not under the electroplated copper. The metals left or remained are used as the copper pillars or bumps. The copper pillars or bumps are used for connecting or coupling the chips, for example the dedicated I/O chip, of the logic drive to the external circuits or components external or outside of the logic drive. The height of the copper pillars or bumps is, for example, between 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater or taller than or equal to 50 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 5 μm. The largest dimension in a cross-section of the copper pillars or bumps (for example, the diameter of a circle shape or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape) is, for example, between 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm; or greater than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. The smallest space between a copper pillar or bump and its nearest neighboring copper pillar or bump is, for example, between 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm; or greater than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. The copper bumps or pillars may be used for flip-package assembling the logic drive on or to a substrate, film or board, similar to the flip-chip assembly of the chip packaging technology, or similar to the Chip-On-Film (COF) assembly technology used in the LCD driver packaging technology. The substrate, film or board used may be, for example, a Printed Circuit Board (PCB), a silicon substrate with interconnection schemes, a metal substrate with interconnection schemes, a glass substrate with interconnection schemes, a ceramic substrate with interconnection schemes, or a flexible film with interconnection schemes. The substrate, film or board may comprise metal bonding pads or bumps at its surface; and the metal bonding pads or bumps may have a layer of solder on their top surface for use in the solder reflow or thermal compressing bonding process for bonding to the copper pillars or bumps on or of the logic drive package. The copper pillars or bumps may be located at the front surface of the logic drive package with a layout of Bump or Pillar Grid-Array, with the pillars or bumps at the peripheral area used for the signal I/Os, and the pillars or bumps at or near the central area used for the Power/Ground (P/G) I/Os. The signal pillars or bumps at the peripheral area may form 1 ring, or 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 rings along the edges of the logic drive package. The pitches of the signal I/Os at the peripheral area may be smaller than that of the P/G I/Os at or near the central area of the logic drive package. 
     Alternatively, solder bumps may be formed on or over the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, and the exposed top surfaces of the top-most interconnection metal layer of the TISD in openings of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, by performing an emboss copper/solder process in the following process steps: (a) depositing whole wafer or panel an adhesion layer on or over the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, and the exposed top surfaces of the top-most interconnection metal layer of the TISD in openings of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 200 nm, or 5 nm and 50 nm); (b) then depositing an electroplating seed layer on or over the adhesion layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness, for example, between 3 nm and 400 nm, or 10 nm to 200 nm); (c) patterning openings or holes in a photoresist layer for forming the solder bumps later, by coating, exposing and developing the photoresist layer, exposing the copper seed layer at the bottom of the openings in the photoresist layer. The opening in the photoresist layer overlaps the opening in the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD; and may extend out of the opening of the top-most insulating dielectric layer, to an area or a ring of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD around the opening in the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD; (d) then electroplating a copper barrier layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 μm and 50 μm, 1 μm and 40 μm, 1 μm and 30 μm, 1 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, 1 μm and 5 μm, or 1 μm and 3 μm) on or over the copper seed layer in the openings of the photoresist layer; (e) then electroplating a solder layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 μm and 150 μm, 1 μm and 120 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 5 μm and 100 μm, 5 μm and 75 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 10 μm, 1 μm and 5 μm, or 1 μm and 3 μm) on or over the electroplated copper barrier layer in the openings of the photoresist; (f) removing the remained photoresist; (g) removing or etching the copper seed layer and the adhesion layer not under the electroplated copper barrier layer and the electroplated solder layer; (h) reflowing solder to form the solder bumps. The metals (Ti (or TiN)/seed Cu/barrier Cu/solder) left or remained and solder-reflowed are used as the solder bumps. The solder material used may be a lead-free solder. Lead-free solders in commercial use may contain tin, copper, silver, bismuth, indium, zinc, antimony, and traces of other metals. For example, the lead-free solder may be Sn—Ag—Cu (SAC) solder, Sn—Ag solder, or Sn—Ag—Cu—Zn solder. The solder bumps are used for connecting or coupling the chips, for example, the dedicated I/O chip, of the logic drive to the external circuits or components external or outside of the logic drive. The height of the solder bumps is, for example, between 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater or taller than or equal to 75 μm, 50 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. The solder bump height is measured from the level of the surface of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of TISD to the level of the top surface of the solder bump. The largest dimension in cross-sections of the solder bumps (for example, the diameter of a circle shape or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape) is, for example, between 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm; or greater than or equal to 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. The smallest space between a solder bump and its nearest neighboring solder bump is, for example, between 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm; or greater than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. The solder bumps may be used for flip-package assembling the logic drive on or to the substrate, film or board, similar to the flip-chip assembly of the chip packaging technology, or the Chip-On-Film (COF) assembly technology used in the LCD driver packaging technology. The solder bump assembly process may comprise a solder flow or reflow process using solder flux or without using solder flux. The substrate, film or board used may be, for example, a Printed Circuit Board (PCB), a silicon substrate with interconnection schemes, a metal substrate with interconnection schemes, a glass substrate with interconnection schemes, a ceramic substrate with interconnection schemes, or a flexible film with interconnection schemes. The solder bumps may be located at the front surface of the logic drive package with a layout in a Ball-Grid-Array (BGA) with the bumps at the peripheral area used for the signal I/Os, and the bumps at or near the central area used for the Power/Ground (P/G) I/Os. The signal bumps at the peripheral area may form ring or rings at the peripheral area near the edges of the logic drive package, with 1 ring, or 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 rings. The pitches of the signal I/Os at the peripheral area may be smaller than that of the P/G I/Os at or near the central area of the logic drive package. 
     Alternatively, gold bumps may be formed on or over the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, and the exposed top surfaces of the top-most interconnection metal layer of the TISD in openings of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, by performing an emboss gold process, in the following process steps: (a) depositing whole wafer or panel an adhesion layer on or over the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, and the exposed top surfaces of the top-most interconnection metal layer of the TISD in openings of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 200 nm, or 5 nm and 50 nm); (b) then depositing an electroplating seed layer on or over the adhesion layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a gold seed layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 300 nm, or 1 nm to 50 nm); (c) patterning openings or holes in a photoresist layer for forming gold bumps in later processes, by coating, exposing and developing the photoresist layer, exposing the gold seed layer at the bottom of the openings in the photoresist layer. The opening in the photoresist layer overlaps the opening in the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD, and may extend out of the opening in the top-most insulating dielectric layer, to an area or a ring of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD around the opening in the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the TISD; (d) then electroplating a gold layer (with a thickness, for example, between 3 μm and 40 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, 3 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm) on or over the gold seed layer in the patterned openings of the photoresist layer; (f) removing the remained photoresist; (g) removing or etching the gold seed layer and the adhesion layer not under the electroplated gold layer. The metals (Ti (or TiN)/seed Au/Electroplated Au) left or remained are used as the gold bumps. The gold bumps are used for connecting or coupling the chips, for example, the dedicated I/O chip, of the logic drive to the external circuits or components external or outside of the logic drive. The height of the gold bumps is, for example, between 3 μm and 40 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, 3 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller or shorter than or equal to 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. The largest dimension in cross-sections of the gold bumps (for example, the diameter of a circle shape or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape) is, for example, between 3 μm and 40 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, 3 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller than or equal to 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. The smallest space between a gold bump and its nearest neighboring gold bump is, for example, between 3 μm and 40 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, 3 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller than or equal to 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. The gold bumps may be used for flip-package assembling the logic drive on or to the substrate, film or board, similar to the flip-chip assembly of the chip packaging technology, or similar to the Chip-On-Film (COF) assembly technology used in the LCD driver packaging technology. The substrate, film or board used may be, for example, a Printed Circuit Board (PCB), a silicon substrate with interconnection schemes, a metal substrate with interconnection schemes, a glass substrate with interconnection schemes, a ceramic substrate with interconnection schemes, or a flexible film or tape with interconnection schemes. When the gold bumps are used for the COF technology, the gold bumps are thermal compress bonded to a flexible circuit film or tape. The COF assembly using gold bumps may provide very high I/Os in a small area. The current COF assembly technology using gold bumps may provide gold bumps with pitches smaller than 20 μm. The number of I/Os or gold bumps used for signal inputs or outputs at the peripheral area along 4 edges of a logic drive package, for example, for a square shaped logic drive package with 10 mm width and having two rings (or two rows) along the 4 edges, may be, for example, greater or equal to 5,000 (with 15 μm gold bump pitch), 4,000 (with 20 μm gold bump pitch), or 2,500 (with 15 μm gold bump pitch). The reason that 2 rings or rows are designed along the edges is for the easy fan-out from the logic drive package when a single-layer film with one-sided metal lines or traces is used. The metal pads on the flexible circuit film or tape have a gold layer or a solder layer at the top-most surfaces of the metal pads. The gold-to-gold thermal compressing bonding method is used for the COF assembly technology when the metal pad on the flexible circuit film or tape has a gold layer at its top surface; while the gold-to-solder thermal compressing bonding method is used for the COF assembly technology when the metal pad on the flexible circuit film or tape has a solder layer at its top surface. The gold bumps may be located at the front surface of the logic drive package with a layout in a Ball-Grid-Array (BGA), having the gold bumps at the peripheral area used for the signal I/Os, and the gold bumps at or near the central area used for the Power/Ground (P/G) I/Os. The signal bumps at the peripheral area may form ring or rings along the edges of the logic drive package, with 1 ring, or 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 rings. The pitches of the signal I/Os in the peripheral area may be smaller than that of the P/G I/Os at or near the central area of the logic drive package. 
     The TISD interconnection metal lines or traces of the single-layer-packaged logic drive may: (a) comprise an interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive for connecting or coupling the transistors, the FISC, the SISC and/or the micro copper pillars or bumps of an FPGA IC chip of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive to the transistors, the FISC, the SISC and/or the micro copper pillars or bumps of another FPGA IC chip packaged in the (this) same single-layer-packaged logic drive. This interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD may be connected to the circuits or components outside or external to the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive through metal pillars or bumps (copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, or gold bumps on the TISD). This interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD may be a net or scheme for the power or ground supply; (b) comprise an interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive connecting to multiple micro copper pillars or bumps of an IC chip in or of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive. This interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD may be connected to the circuits or components outside or external to the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive through metal pillars or bumps (copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, or gold bumps on the TISD). This interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD may be a net or scheme for the power or ground supply; (c) comprise interconnection metal lines or traces in or of the TISD of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive for connecting or coupling to the circuits or components outside or external to the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive, through the metal bumps or pillars (copper pillars or bumps solder bumps, or gold bumps on the TISD) of the single-layer-packaged logic drive. The interconnection metal lines or traces in or of the TISD may be used for signals, power or ground supplies. In this case, for example, the metal pillars or bumps may be connected to the I/O circuits of, for example, the dedicated I/O chip of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive. The I/O circuits in this case may be a large I/O circuit, for example, a bi-directional (or tri-state) I/O pad or circuit, comprising an ESD circuit, a receiver, and a driver, and may have an input capacitance or output capacitance between 2 pF and 100 pF, 2 pF and 50 pF, 2 pF and 30 pF, 2 pF and 20 pF, 2 pF and 15 pF, 2 pF and 10 pF, or 2 pF and 5 pF; or larger than 2 pF, 5 pF, 10 pF, 15 pF or 20 pF; (d) comprise an interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive used for connecting the transistors, the FISC, the SISC and/or the micro copper pillars or bumps of an FPGA IC chip of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive to the transistors, the FISC, the SISC and/or the micro copper pillars or bumps of another FPGA IC chip packaged in the (this) same single-layer-packaged logic drive; but not connected to the circuits or components outside or external to the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive. That is, no metal pillars or bumps (copper pillars or bumps solder bumps, or gold bumps) of the single-layer-packaged logic drive is connected to the interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD. In this case, the interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD may be connected or coupled to the I/O circuits of the FPGA IC chips packaged in the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive. The I/O circuit in this case may be a small I/O circuit, for example, a bi-directional (or tri-state) I/O pad or circuit, comprising an ESD circuit, a receiver, and/or a driver, and may have an input capacitance or output capacitance between 0.1 pF and 10 pF, 0.1 pF and 5 pF or 0.1 pF and 2 pF; or smaller than 10 pF, 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF or 1 pF; (e) comprise an interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive used for connecting or coupling to multiple micro copper pillars or bumps of a IC chip in or of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive; but not connecting to the circuits or components outside or external to the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive. That is, no metal pillars or bumps (copper pillars or bumps solder bumps, or gold bumps) of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive is connected to the interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD. In this case, the interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD may be connected or coupled to the transistors, the FISC, the SISC and/or the micro copper pillars or bumps of the FPGA IC chip of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive, without going through any I/O circuit of the FPGA IC chip. 
     (V) Separating, cutting or dicing the finished wafer or panel, including separating, cutting or dicing through materials or structures between two neighboring logic drives. The material (for example, polymer) filling gaps between chips of two neighboring logic drives is separated, cut or diced to from individual unit of logic drives. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the logic drive comprising plural single-layer-packaged logic drives; and each of single-layer-packaged logic drives in a multiple-chip package is as described and specified above. The multiple single-layer-packaged logic drive, for example, comprising 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or greater than 8 single-layer-packaged logic drives, may be, for example, (1) flip-package assembled on a printed circuit board (PCB), high-density fine-line PCB, Ball-Grid-Array (BGA) substrate, or flexible circuit film or tape; or (2) stack assembled using the Package-on-Package (POP) assembling technology; that is assembling one single-layer-packaged logic drive on top of the other single-layer-packaged logic drive. The POP assembling technology may apply, for example, the Surface Mount Technology (SMT). 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a method for a single-layer-packaged logic drive suitable for the stacked POP assembling technology. The single-layer-packaged logic drive for use in the POP package assembling is fabricated as the same as the process steps and specifications of the FOIT described in the above paragraphs, except for forming Through-Package-Vias, or Through Polymer Vias (TPVs) in the gaps between chips in or of the logic drive, and/or in the peripheral area of the logic drive package and outside the edges of chips in or of the logic drive. The TPVs are used for connecting or coupling circuits or components at the topside of the logic drive to that at the backside of the logic drive package. The single-layer-packaged logic drive with TPVs for use in the stacked logic drive may be in a standard format or having standard sizes. For example, the single-layer-packaged logic drive may be in a shape of square or rectangle, with a certain widths, lengths and thicknesses. An industry standard may be set for the shape and dimensions of the single-layer-packaged logic drive. For example, the standard shape of the single-layer-packaged logic drive may be a square, with a width greater than or equal to 4 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm or 40 mm, and having a thickness greater than or equal to 0.03 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, or 5 mm. Alternatively, the standard shape of the single-layer-packaged logic drive may be a rectangle, with a width greater than or equal to 3 mm, 5 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm or 40 mm, and a length greater than or equal to 5 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm, 40 mm, 45 mm or 50 mm; and having a thickness greater than or equal to 0.03 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, or 5 mm. The logic drive with TPVs is formed by forming copper pillars or bumps on the provided chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate for use in placing, fixing or attaching the IC chips or packages to and on it as described in Process Step (I) of the FOIT in forming the logic drive package. The process steps for forming the copper pillars or bumps (used as TPVs) on or over the chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate are: (a) providing a chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate and the IC chips or packages. The carrier, holder, molder or substrate may be in a wafer format (with 8″, 12″ or 18″ in diameter), or, in a panel format in the square or rectangle format (with a width or a length greater than or equal to 20 cm, 30 cm, 50 cm, 75 cm, 100 cm, 150 cm, 200 cm or 300 cm). The material of the chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate may be silicon, metal, ceramics, glass, steel, plastics, polymer, epoxy-based polymer, or epoxy-based compound. The wafer or panel has a base insulating layer on it. The base insulating layer may comprise a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer, and/or a polymer layer; (b) depositing an insulting dielectric layer, whole wafer or panel, on the base insulating layer. The insulting dielectric layer may be a polymer material includes, for example, polyimide, BenzoCycloButene (BCB), parylene, epoxy-based material or compound, photo epoxy SU-8, elastomer, or silicone. The polymer layer of the insulating dielectric layer may be deposited by methods of spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing, or molding. The insulating dielectric layer may be formed (A): by a non-photosensitive material or a photosensitive material, and no openings in the polymer insulating dielectric layer are formed; or (B): alternatively, the polymer material may be photosensitive, and may be used as photoresist as well for patterning openings in it for forming metal vias (to be used as a bottom portion of the copper pillars or bumps, that is the bottom portion of the TPVs) in it by following processes to be performed later; that is the photosensitive polymer layer is coated, and exposed to light through a photomask, and then developed and etched to form openings in it. The openings in the photosensitive insulating dielectric layer expose the top surfaces of the base insulating layer. The non-photosensitive polymer or the photosensitive polymer layer used for the insulating dielectric layer in (A) or (B) is then cured at a temperature, for example, equal to or higher than 100° C., 125° C., 150° C., 175° C., 200° C., 225° C., 250° C., 275° C. or 300° C. The thickness of the cured polymer is between, for example, 2 μm and 50 μm, 3 μm and 50 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, or 3 μm and 15 μm; or thicker than or equal to 2 μm, 3 μm, 5 μm, 10 μm, 20 μm, or 30 μm; (c) performing an emboss copper process to form the copper pillars or bumps for use as the TPVs, for alternative (A) or (B): (i) depositing whole wafer or panel an adhesion layer on or over the insulting dielectric layer (for (A) and (B)) and the exposed top surfaces of the base insulating layer at the bottom of the openings in the cured polymer layer (for (B)), for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 200 nm, or 5 nm and 50 nm); (ii) then depositing an electroplating seed layer on or over the adhesion layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness, for example, between 3 nm and 300 nm, or 10 nm and 120 nm); (iii) patterning openings or holes in a photoresist layer for forming the copper pillars or bumps later by coating, exposing and developing the photoresist layer, exposing the copper seed layer at the bottom of the openings or holes in the photoresist layer. For the alternative (B), the opening or hole in the photoresist layer overlaps the opening in the insulating dielectric layer; and may extend out of the opening of the insulating dielectric layer, to an area or a ring of the insulating dielectric layer around the opening in the insulating dielectric layer; the width of the ring is between 1 μm and 15 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 1 μm and 5 μm. For alternative (A) or (B), the locations of the openings or holes in the photoresist layer are in the gaps between chips in or of the logic drive, and/or in peripheral area of the logic drive package and outside the edges of chips in or of the logic drive, (the chips are to be placed, attached or fixed in latter processes); (iv) then electroplating a copper layer (with a thickness, for example, between 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm) on or over the copper seed layer in the patterned openings or holes of the photoresist layer; (e) removing the remained photoresist; (f) removing or etching the copper seed layer and the adhesion layer not under the electroplated copper. For alternative (A), the metals (Ti (or TiN)/seed Cu/electroplated Cu) left or remained in the locations of openings or holes in the photoresist layer (noticed the photoresist is removed now) are used as the copper pillars or bumps (TPVs). For alternative (B), the metals (Ti (or TiN)/seed Cu/electroplated Cu) left or remained in the locations of openings or holes in the photoresist layer (noticed the photoresist is removed now) are used as the main portion of the copper pillars or bumps (TPVs); and the metals (Ti (or TiN)/seed Cu/electroplated Cu) left or remained in the openings of the insulting dielectric layer are used as the bottom portion of copper pillars or bumps (TPVs). For alternative (A) and (B), the height of the copper pillars or bumps (from the level of top surface of the insulating dielectric layer to the level of the top surface of the copper pillars or bumps) is between, for example, 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater than or taller than or equal to 50 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 5 μm. The largest dimension in a cross-section of the copper pillars or bumps (for example, the diameter of a circle shape or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape) is between, for example, 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm; or greater than or equal to 150 μm, 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. The smallest space between a copper pillar or bump and its nearest neighboring copper pillar or bump is between, for example, 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm; or greater than or equal to 150 μm, 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. 
     The wafer or panel with the insulating dielectric layer and the copper pillars or bumps (TPVs) are then used as the carrier, holder, molder or substrate for forming a logic drive as described and specified above. All processes of forming the logic drive are the same as described and specified above. Some process steps are mentioned again below: in the Process Step (II) for forming the logic drive described above, a material, resin, or compound is applied to (i) fill gaps between chips, (ii) cover the top surfaces of chips, (iii) fill gaps between micro copper pillars or bumps on or of chips, (iv) cover top surfaces of the micro copper pillars or bumps on or of chips, (v) filling gaps between copper pillars or bumps (TPVs) on or over the wafer or panel, (vi) cover the top surfaces of the copper pillars or bumps (TPVs) on or over the wafer or panel. Applying a CMP process to planarize the surface of the applied material, resin or compound to a level where (i) all top surfaces of micro bumps or pillars on chips and (ii) all top surfaces of copper pillars or bumps (TPVs) on or over the wafer or panel, are fully exposed. The TISD structure is then formed on or over the planarized surface of the applied material, resin or compound, and connecting or coupling to the exposed top surfaces of micro bumps or pillars on chips and/or the top surfaces of copper pillars or bumps (TPVs) on or over the wafer or panel, as described and specified above. The copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, gold bumps on or over the TISD are then formed for connecting or coupling to the metal lines or traces in the multiple interconnection metal layers of the TISD, as described and specified above. The copper pillars or bumps on or over the wafer or panel and in the cured, or cross-linked applied material, resin or compound are used for vias (Through Package Vias, TPVs) for connecting or coupling circuits, interconnection metal schemes (for example, the TISD), copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, gold bumps, and/or metal pads at the front side of the logic drive package to circuits, interconnection metal schemes, metal pads, metal pillars or bumps, and/or components at backside of the logic drive package. The chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate may be (i) removed after the CMP process, and before forming the Top Interconnection Scheme in, on or of the logic drive (TISD); (ii) kept during the fabrication process steps, and removed after all fabrication process steps are finished. The chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate is removed by a peeling process, a CMP process, a backside grinding or a polishing process. After the chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate is removed, for the alternative (A), the insulating dielectric layer (assuming the front-sides with transistors of the IC chips are facing up) and the adhesion layer at bottom surfaces of the TPVs may be removed by a CMP process or a backside grinding or a polishing process to expose the bottom surface of copper seed layer or electroplated copper layer of the copper pillar or bump (that means, the whole layer of the insulating dielectric layer is removed). For the alternative (B), After the chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate is removed, the bottom portion of the insulating dielectric layer (assuming the front-sides with transistors of the IC chips are facing up) and the adhesion layer at bottom surfaces of the TPVs may be removed by a CMP process or a backside grinding or a polishing process to expose the bottom portion of the copper pillar or bump (note that the bottom portion of the copper pillar or bump is the metal via in the opening of the insulating dielectric layer); that is, the removing process of the insulating dielectric layer is performed until the copper seed layer or the electroplated copper at the bottom of the copper pillar or bump (in the opening of the insulating dielectric layer) is exposed. In the alternative (B), the remained portion of the insulating dielectric layer becomes a part of the finished logic drive, and is at the bottom of the logic drive package, and the surface of the seed copper layer or the electroplated copper layer in the opening of the remained insulation dielectric layer is exposed. For the alternative (A) or (B), the exposed bottom surfaces of copper seed layer or electroplated copper layer of the copper pillars or bumps (TPVs) are formed copper pads at the backside of the logic drive for use in making connection or coupling to transistors, circuits, interconnection metal schemes, metal pads, metal pillars or bumps, and/or components at the frontside (or topside, still assuming the IC chips having the side with transistors is facing up) of the logic drive package. The stacked logic drive may be formed, for an example, by in the following process steps: (i) providing a first single-layer-packaged logic drive, either separated or still in the wafer or panel format, with TPVs and with its copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, or gold bumps faced down, and with the exposed copper pads of TPVs on its upside; (ii) Package-On-Package (POP) stacking assembling, by surface-mounting and/or flip-package methods, a second separated single-layer-packaged logic drive on top of the provided first single-layer-packaged logic drive. The surface-mounting process is similar to the Surface-Mount Technology (SMT) used in the assembly of components on or to the Printed Circuit Boards (PCB), by first printing solder or solder cream, or flux on the copper pads of the TPVs, and then flip-package assembling, connecting or coupling the copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, or gold bumps on or of the second separated single-layer-packaged logic drive to the solder or solder cream or flux printed copper pads of TPVs of the first single-layer-packaged logic drive. The flip-package process is performed, similar to the Package-On-Package technology (POP) used in the IC stacking-package technology, by flip-package assembling, connecting or coupling the copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, or gold bumps on or of the second separated single-layer-packaged logic drive to the copper pads of TPVs of the first single-layer-packaged logic drive. An underfill material may be filled in the gaps between the first and the second single-layer-packaged logic drives. A third separated single-layer-packaged logic drive may be flip-package assembled, connected or coupled to the exposed copper pads of TPVs of the second single-layer-packaged logic drive. The Package-On-Package stacking assembling process may be repeated for assembling more separated single-layer-packaged logic drives (for example, up to more than or equal to a nth separated single-layer-packaged logic drive, wherein n is greater than or equal to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) to form the finished stacking logic drive. When the first single-layer-packaged logic drives are in the separated format, they may be first flip-package assembled to a carrier or substrate, for example a PCB, or a BGA (Ball-Grid-Array) substrate, and then performing the POP processes, in the carrier or substrate format, to form stacked logic drives, and then cutting, dicing the carrier or substrate to obtain the separated finished stacked logic drives. When the first single-layer-packaged logic drives are still in the wafer or panel format, the wafer or panel may be used directly as the carrier or substrate for performing POP stacking processes, in the wafer or panel format, for forming the stacked logic drives. The wafer or panel is then cut or diced to obtain the separated stacked finished logic drives. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a method for a single-layer-packaged logic drive suitable for the stacked POP assembling technology. The single-layer-packaged logic drive for use in the POP package assembling is fabricated as the same process steps and specifications of the FOIT described in the above paragraphs, except for forming a Bottom metal Interconnection Scheme at the bottom of the single-layer-packaged logic Drive (abbreviated as BISD in below) and Through-Package-Vias, or Through Polymer Vias (TPVs) in the gaps between chips in or of the logic drive, and/or in the peripheral area of the logic drive package and outside the edges of chips in or of the logic drive. The BISD may comprise metal lines, traces, or planes in multiple interconnection metal layers, and is formed on or over the chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate, before pacing, attaching or fixing the IC chips the chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate, using the same or similar process steps as in forming the TISD as described above. The TPVs are formed on or over the BISD, and are formed using the same or similar process steps as in forming metal pillars or bumps (copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps or gold bumps) on the TISD. The BISD provides additional interconnection metal layer or layers at the bottom or the backside of the logic drive package, and provides exposed metal pads or copper pads in an area array at the bottom of the single-layer-packaged logic drive, including at locations directly under the IC chips of the logic drive. The TPVs are used for connecting or coupling circuits or components (for example, the TISD) at the topside of the logic drive to that (for example, the BISD) at the backside of the logic drive package. The single-layer-packaged logic drive with TPVs for use in the stacked logic drive may be in a standard format or having standard sizes. For example, the single-layer-packaged logic drive may be in a shape of square or rectangle, with a certain widths, lengths and thicknesses; and/or with a standard layout of the locations of the copper pads. An industry standard may be set for the shape and dimensions of the single-layer-packaged logic drive. For example, the standard shape of the single-layer-packaged logic drive may be a square, with a width greater than or equal to 4 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm or 40 mm, and having a thickness greater than or equal to 0.03 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, or 5 mm. Alternatively, the standard shape of the single-layer-packaged logic drive may be a rectangle, with a width greater than or equal to 3 mm, 5 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm or 40 mm, and a length greater than or equal to 5 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm, 40 mm, 45 mm or 50 mm; and having a thickness greater than or equal to 0.03 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, or 5 mm. The logic drive with the BISD and TPVs is formed by first forming metal lines, traces, or planes on multiple interconnection metal layers on the provided chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate for use in placing, fixing or attaching the IC chips or packages to and on it; and then forming copper pillars or bumps (TPVs) on the BISD. The chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate with the BISD and TPVs on or over it is used for the FOIT processes, as described in Process Step (I) of forming the FOIT in or of the logic drive package. The process steps for forming the BISD and the copper pillars or bumps (used as TPVs) on or over the chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate are: (a) providing a chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate and the IC chips or packages. The carrier, holder, molder or substrate may be in a wafer format (with 8″, 12″ or 18″ in diameter), or, in a panel format in the square or rectangle format (with a width or a length greater than or equal to 20 cm, 30 cm, 50 cm, 75 cm, 100 cm, 150 cm, 200 cm or 300 cm). The material of the chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate may be silicon, metal, ceramics, glass, steel, plastics, polymer, epoxy-based polymer, or epoxy-based compound. The wafer or panel has a base insulating layer on it. The base insulating layer may comprise a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer, and/or a polymer layer; (b) depositing a bottom-most insulting dielectric layer, whole wafer or panel, on the base insulating layer. The bottom-most insulting dielectric layer may be a polymer material includes, for example, polyimide, BenzoCycloButene (BCB), parylene, epoxy-based material or compound, photo epoxy SU-8, elastomer, or silicone. The bottom-most polymer insulating dielectric layer may be deposited by methods of spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing, or molding. The polymer material may be photosensitive, and may be used as photoresist as well for patterning openings in it for forming metal vias in it by following processes to be performed later; that is, the photosensitive polymer layer is coated, and exposed to light through a photomask, and then developed and etched to form openings in it. The openings in the photosensitive bottom-most insulating dielectric layer expose the top surfaces of the base insulating layer. The photosensitive bottom-most polymer layer (the insulating dielectric layer) is then cured at a temperature, for example, equal to or higher than 100° C., 125° C., 150° C., 175° C., 200° C., 225° C., 250° C., 275° C. or 300° C. The thickness of the cured bottom-most polymer is between, for example, 3 μm and 50 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, or 3 μm and 15 μm; or thicker than or equal to 3 μm, 5 μm, 10 μm, 20 μm, or 30 μm; (c) performing an emboss copper process to form the metal vias in the openings of the cured bottom-most polymer insulating dielectric layer, and to form metal lines, traces or planes of an bottom-most interconnection metal layer of the BISD: (i) depositing whole wafer or panel an adhesion layer on or over the bottom-most insulting dielectric layer and the exposed top surfaces of the base insulating layer at the bottom of the openings in the cured bottom-most polymer layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 200 nm, or 5 nm and 50 nm); (ii) then depositing an electroplating seed layer on or over the adhesion layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness, for example, between 3 nm and 300 nm, or 10 nm and 120 nm); (iii) patterning trenches, openings or holes in a photoresist layer for forming metal lines, traces or planes of the bottom-most interconnection metal layer later by coating, exposing and developing the photoresist layer, exposing the copper seed layer at the bottom of the trenches, openings or holes in the photoresist layer. The trench, opening or hole in the photoresist layer overlaps the opening in the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer; and may extend out of the opening of the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer; (iv) then electroplating a copper layer (with a thickness, for example, between 5 μm and 80 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, 3 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm) on or over the copper seed layer in the patterned trenches, openings or holes of the photoresist layer; (e) removing the remained photoresist; (f) removing or etching the copper seed layer and the adhesion layer not under the electroplated copper. The metals (Ti (or TiN)/seed Cu/electroplated Cu) left or remained in the locations of trenches, openings or holes in the photoresist layer (note that the photoresist is removed now) are used as the metal lines, traces or planes of the bottom-most interconnection metal layer of the BISD; and the metals (Ti (or TiN)/seed Cu/electroplated Cu) left or remained in the openings of the bottom-most insulting dielectric layer are used as the metal vias in the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD. The processes of forming the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer and openings in it; and the emboss copper processes for forming the metal vias in the bottom-most insulting dielectric layer and the metal lines, traces, or planes of the bottom-most interconnection metal layer, may be repeated to form a metal layer of multiple interconnection metal layers in or of the BISD; wherein the repeated bottom-most insulating dielectric layer is used as the inter-metal dielectric layer between two interconnection metal layers of the BISD, and the metal vias in the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer (now in the inter-metal dielectric layer) are used for connecting or coupling metal lines, traces, or planes of the two interconnection metal layers, above and below the metal vias, of the BISD. The top-most interconnection metal layer of the BISD is covered with a top-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD. The top-most insulating dielectric layer has openings in it to expose top surface of the top-most interconnection metal layer of the BISD. The locations of the openings in the top-most insulating dielectric layer are in the gaps between chips in or of the logic drive, and/or in peripheral area of the logic drive package and outside the edges of chips in or of the logic drive, (the chips are to be placed, attached or fixed in latter processes). A CMP process may be then performed to planarize the top surface of the BISD (that is to planarize the cured top-most insulating dielectric layer) before the following process in forming copper pillars or bumps for TPVs. The BISD may comprise 1 to 6 layers, or 2 to 5 layers of interconnection metal layers. The interconnection metal lines, traces or planes of the BISD have the adhesion layer (Ti or TiN, for example) and the copper seed layer only at the bottom, but not at the sidewalls of the metal lines or traces. The interconnection metal lines or traces of FISC have the adhesion layer (Ti or TiN, for example) and the copper seed layer at both the bottom and the sidewalls of the metal lines or traces. 
     The thickness of the metal lines, traces or planes of the BISD is between, for example, 0.3 μm and 40 μm, 0.5 μm and 30 μm, 1 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 15 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 0.5 μm to 5 μm, or thicker than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 2 μm, 3 μm, 5 μm, 7 μm or 10 μm. The width of the metal lines or traces of the BISD is between, for example, 0.3 μm and 40 μm, 0.5 μm and 30 μm, 1 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 15 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 0.5 μm to 5 μm, or wider than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 2 μm, 3 μm, 5 μm, 7 μm or 10 μm. The thickness of the inter-metal dielectric layer of the BISD is between, for example, 0.3 μm and 50 μm, 0.3 μm and 30 μm, 0.5 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 0.5 μm and 5 μm, or thicker than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm, 3 μm or 5 μm. The thickness or height of metal vias in the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD is between, for example, 3 μm and 50 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, or 3 μm and 15 μm; or thicker than or equal to 3 μm, 5 μm, 10 μm, 20 μm, or 30 μm. The planes in a metal layer of interconnection metal layers of the BISD may be used for the power, ground planes of a power supply, and/or used as heat dissipaters or spreaders for the heat dissipation or spreading; wherein the metal thickness may be thicker, for example, between 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, or 5 μm and 15 μm; or thicker than or equal to 5 μm, 10 μm, 20 μm, or 30 μm. The power, ground plane, and/or heat dissipater or spreader may be layout as interlaced or interleaved shaped structures in a plane of an interconnection metal layer of the BISD; or may be layout in a fork shape. 
     After the BISD is formed, forming copper pillars or bumps (to be used as TPVs) on or over the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD on or of the a chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate, and the exposed top surfaces of the top-most interconnection metal layer of the BISD in openings of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD, by performing an emboss copper process, as described above, in the following process steps: (a) depositing whole wafer or panel an adhesion layer on or over the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD, and the exposed top surfaces of the top-most interconnection metal layer of the BISD in openings of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 200 nm, or 5 nm and 50 nm); (b) then depositing an electroplating seed layer on or over the adhesion layer, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness, for example, between 3 nm and 400 nm or 10 nm to 200 nm); (c) patterning openings or holes in a photoresist layer for forming the copper pillars or bumps (TPVs) by coating, exposing and developing the photoresist layer, exposing the copper seed layer at the bottom of the openings or holes in the photoresist layer. The opening or holes in the photoresist layer overlaps the opening in the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD; and may extend out of the opening in the top-most insulating dielectric layer, to an area or a ring of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD around the opening in the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD. The width of the ring is between 1 μm and 15 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 1 μm and 5 μm. The locations of the openings or holes in the photoresist layer are in the gaps between chips in or of the logic drive, and/or in the peripheral area of the logic drive package and outside the edges of chips in or of the logic drive, (the chips are to be placed, attached or fixed in latter processes); (d) then electroplating a copper layer (with a thickness, for example, between 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm) on or over the copper seed layer in the patterned openings or holes of the photoresist layer; (e) removing the remained photoresist; (f) removing or etching the copper seed layer and the adhesion layer not under the electroplated copper. The metals (Ti (or TiN)/seed Cu/electroplated Cu) left or remained in the locations of openings or holes in the photoresist layer (noticed the photoresist is removed now) are used as the copper pillars or bumps (TPVs). The height of the copper pillars or bumps (from the level of top surface of the insulating dielectric layer to the level of the top surface of the copper pillars or bumps) is between, for example, 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater than or taller than or equal to 50 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 5 μm. The largest dimension in a cross-section of the copper pillars or bumps (for example, the diameter of a circle shape or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape) is between, for example, 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm; or greater than or equal to 150 μm, 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. The smallest space between a copper pillar or bump and its nearest neighboring copper pillar or bump is between, for example, 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm; or greater than or equal to 150 μm, 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. 
     The wafer or panel with the BISD and the copper pillars or bumps (TPVs) are then used as the carrier, holder, molder or substrate for forming a logic drive as described and specified above. All processes of forming the logic drive are the same as described and specified above. Some process steps are mentioned again below: in the Process Step (II) for forming the logic drive described above, a material, resin, or compound is applied to (i) fill gaps between chips, (ii) cover the top surfaces of chips, (iii) fill gaps between micro copper pillars or bumps on or of chips, (iv) cover top surfaces of the micro copper pillars or bumps on or of chips, (v) filling gaps between copper pillars or bumps (TPVs) on or over the wafer or panel, (vi) cover the top surfaces of the copper pillars or bumps (TPVs) on or over the wafer or panel. Applying a CMP process to planarize the surface of the applied material, resin or compound to a level where (i) all top surfaces of micro bumps or pillars on chips and (ii) all top surfaces of copper pillars or bumps (TPVs) on or over the wafer or panel, are fully exposed. The copper pillars or bumps on or over the wafer or panel and in the cured, or cross-linked applied material, resin or compound are used for Through Package Vias or Through Polymer Vias (TPVs) for connecting or coupling circuits, interconnection metal schemes (for example, TISD), copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, gold bumps, and/or metal pads at the front side of the logic drive package to circuits, interconnection metal schemes (for example, BISD), copper pads, metal pillars or bumps, and/or components at backside of the logic drive package. The chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate may be (i) removed after the CMP process (for planarizing the surface of the applied material, resin or compound), and before forming the Top Interconnection Scheme in, on or of the logic drive (the TISD); (ii) kept during the fabrication process steps, and removed after all fabrication process steps (in wafer or panel format) are finished. When the chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate is removed, a bottom portion of the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer (assuming the frontside with transistors of the IC chips are facing up) may be removed by a CMP process or a backside grinding or polishing process to expose the metal vias in the openings of the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer; that is, the removing process of the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer is performed until the copper seed layer or the electroplated copper layer of the metal vias in the openings of the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer is exposed. The remained portion of the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer becomes a part of the finished logic drive, and is at the bottom of the logic drive package, and the surface of the seed copper layer or the electroplated copper layer in the opening of the remained bottom-most insulation dielectric layer is exposed. The exposed surfaces of the seed copper layer or the electroplated copper layer in the openings of the remained bottom-most insulation dielectric layer may be designed or layout as a pad area array at the bottom surface or the backside surface of the logic drive package; with the pads at the peripheral area used for the signal pads, and pads at or near the central area are used for the Power/Ground (P/G) pads. The pads may be located directly under locations where IC chips are placed or attached on the carrier, holder, molder or substrate. The signal pads at the peripheral area may form 1 ring, or 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 rings along the edges at the bottom of the logic drive package. The pitches of the signal pads at the peripheral area may be smaller than that of the P/G pads at or near the central area of the backside of logic drive package. The exposed copper pads at the bottom surface or the backside surface of the logic drive package are connected to TPVs, and therefore the copper pads and TPVs are used for connection or coupling between the transistors, circuits, interconnection metal schemes (for example, TISD), metal pads, metal pillars or bumps, and/or components at the frontside (or topside, still assuming the IC chips having the side with transistors is facing up) of the logic drive package, and interconnection metal schemes (for example, BISD), metal pads and/or components at the backside (or bottom side) of the logic drive package. 
     The BISD interconnection metal lines or traces of the single-layer-packaged logic drive are used: (a) for connecting or coupling the copper pads at the bottom (backside) surface of the single-layer-packaged logic drive to their corresponding TPVs; and through the corresponding TPVs, the copper pads at the bottom surface of the single-layer-packaged logic drive are connected or coupled to the metal lines or traces of the TISD at the topside (or frontside) of the single-layer-packaged logic drive, therefore connecting or coupling the copper pads to the transistors, the FISC, the SISC and micro copper pillars or bumps of the IC chips at the topside of the single-layer-packaged logic drive; (b) for connecting or coupling the copper pads at the bottom surface of the single-layer-packaged logic drive to their corresponding TPVs, and through the corresponding TPVs, the copper pads at the bottom surface of the single-layer-packaged logic drive are connected or coupled to the metal lines or traces of the TISD at the topside (or frontside) of the single-layer-packaged logic drive; and the TISD may be connected or coupled to the metal pillars or bumps on the TISD. Therefore, the copper pads at the backside of the single-layer-packaged logic drive are connected or coupled to the metal pillars or bumps at the frontside of the single-layer-packaged logic drive; (c) for connecting or coupling copper pads directly under a first FPGA IC chip of the single-layer-packaged logic drive to copper pads directly under a second FPGA IC chip of the single-layer-packaged logic drive by using an interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the BISD. The interconnection net or scheme may be connected or coupled to TPVs of the single-layer-packaged logic drive; (d) for connecting or coupling a copper pad directly under a FPGA IC chip of the single-layer-packaged logic drive to another copper pad or multiple other copper pads directly under the same FPGA IC chip by using an interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the BISD. The interconnection net or scheme may be connected or coupled to the TPVs of the single-layer-packaged logic drive; (e) for the power or ground planes and/or heat dissipaters or spreaders. 
     The stacked logic drive using the single-layer-packaged logic drive with the BISD and TPVs may be formed using the same or similar process steps, as described and specified above; for an example, by the following process steps: (i) providing a first single-layer-packaged logic drive with both TPVs and the BISD, either separated or still in the wafer or panel format, and with its copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, or gold bumps faced down, and with the exposed copper pads on its upside; (ii) Package-On-Package (POP) stacking assembling, by surface-mounting and/or flip-package methods, a second separated single-layer-packaged logic drive (also with both TPVs and the BISD) on top of the provided first single-layer-packaged logic drive. The surface-mounting process is similar to the Surface-Mount Technology (SMT) used in the assembly of components on or to the Printed Circuit Boards (PCB), by first printing solder or solder cream, or flux on the surfaces of the exposed copper pads, and then flip-package assembling, connecting or coupling the copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, or gold bumps on or of the second separated single-layer-packaged logic drive to the solder or solder cream or flux printed surfaces of the exposed copper pads of the first single-layer-packaged logic drive. The flip-package process is performed, similar to the Package-On-Package technology (POP) used in the IC stacking-package technology, by flip-package assembling, connecting or coupling the copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, or gold bumps on or of the second separated single-layer-packaged logic drive to the surfaces of copper pads of the first single-layer-packaged logic drive. Note that the copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, or gold bumps on or of the second separated single-layer-packaged logic drive bonded to the surfaces of copper pads of the first single-layer-packaged logic drive may be located directly over or above locations where IC chips are placed in the first single-layer-packaged logic drive. An underfill material may be filled in the gaps between the first and the second single-layer-packaged logic drives. A third separated single-layer-packaged logic drive (also with both TPVs and the BISD) may be flip-package assembled, connected or coupled to the exposed surfaces of copper pads of the second single-layer-packaged logic drive. The Package-On-Package stacking assembling process may be repeated for assembling more separated single-layer-packaged logic drives (for example, up to more than or equal to a nth separated single-layer-packaged logic drive, wherein n is greater than or equal to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) to form the finished stacking logic drive. When the first single-layer-packaged logic drives are in the separated format, they may be first flip-package assembled to a carrier or substrate, for example a PCB, or a BGA (Ball-Grid-Array) substrate, and then performing the POP processes, in the carrier or substrate format, to form stacked logic drives, and then cutting, dicing the carrier or substrate to obtain the separated finished stacked logic drives. When the first single-layer-packaged logic drives are still in the wafer or panel format, the wafer or panel may be used directly as the carrier or substrate for performing POP stacking processes, in the wafer or panel format, for forming the stacked logic drives. The wafer or panel is then cut or diced to obtain the separated stacked finished logic drives. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides varieties of interconnection alternatives for the TPVs of a single-layer-packaged logic drive: (a) the TPV is used as a through via for connecting a single-layer-packaged logic drive above the single-layer-packaged logic drive, and a single-layer-packaged logic drive below the single-layer-packaged logic drive; without connecting or coupled to the FISC, the SISC or micro copper pillars or bumps on or of any IC chip of the single-layer-packaged logic drive. In this case, a stacked structure is formed, from bottom to top: (i) copper pad (metal via in the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD); (ii) stacked interconnection layers and metal vias in the dielectric layer of the BISD; (iii) the TPV; (iv) stacked interconnection layers and metal vias in the dielectric layer of the TISD; and (v) the metal pillar or bump; (b) the TPV is stacked as a through TPV in (a), but is connected or coupled to the FISC, the SISC or micro copper pillars or bumps on or of one or more IC chips of the single-layer-packaged logic drive, through the metal lines or traces of the TISD; (c) the TPV is only stacked at the bottom portion, but not at the top portion. In this case, a structure for the TPV connection is formed, from bottom to top: (i) copper pad (metal via in the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD); (ii) stacked interconnection layers and metal vias in the dielectric layer of the BISD; (iii) the TPV; (iv) the top of the TPV is connected or coupled to the FISC, the SISC or micro copper pillars or bumps on or of one or more IC chips of the single-layer-packaged logic drive, through the interconnection metal layers and metal vias in the dielectric layer of the TISD; no metal pillar or bump, directly over the top of the TPV, is connected or coupled to the TPV; (v) a metal pillar or bump (on the TISD) connected or coupled to the top of the TPV and at a location not directly over the top of the TPV; (d) a structure for the TPV connection is formed, from bottom to top: (i) a copper pad (metal via in the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD) directly under an IC chip of the single-layer-packaged logic drive; (ii) the copper pad is connected or coupled to the bottom of the TPV (which is located between the gaps of chips or at the peripheral area where no chip is placed) through the interconnection metal layers and metal vias in the dielectric layer of the BISD; (iii) the TPV; (iv) the top of the TPV is connected or coupled to the FISC, the SISC or micro copper pillars or bumps on or of one or more IC chips of the single-layer-packaged logic drive through the interconnection metal layers and metal vias in the dielectric layer of the TISD; (v) a metal pillar or bump (on the TISD) connected or coupled to the top of the TPV, and may be at a location not directly over the top of the TPV; (e) a structure for the TPV connection is formed, from bottom to top: (i) a copper pad (metal via in the bottom-most insulating dielectric layer of the BISD) directly under an IC chip of the single-layer-packaged logic drive; (ii) the copper pad is connected or coupled to the bottom of the TPV (which is located between the gaps of chips or at the peripheral area where no chip is placed) through the interconnection metal layers and metal vias in the dielectric layer of the BISD; (iii) the TPV; (iv) the top of the TPV is connected or coupled to the FISC, the SISC or micro copper pillars or bumps on or of one or more IC chips of the single-layer-packaged logic drive through the interconnection metal layers and metal vias in the dielectric layer of the TISD. The interconnection metal layers and metal vias in the dielectric layer of the TISD may comprise an interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD of the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive used for connecting or coupling the transistors, the FISC, the SISC and/or the micro copper pillars or bumps of an FPGA IC chip or multiple FPGA IC chips packaged in the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive, but the interconnection net or scheme is not connected or coupled to the circuits or components outside or external to the (this) single-layer-packaged logic drive. That is, no metal pillars or bumps (copper pillars or bumps solder bumps, or gold bumps) of the single-layer-packaged logic drive is connected to the interconnection net or scheme of metal lines or traces in or of the TISD, and therefore, no metal pillars or bumps (copper pillars or bumps solder bumps, or gold bumps) of the single-layer-packaged logic drive is connected or coupled to the top of the TPV. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the logic drive in a multi-chip package format further comprising one or plural dedicated programmable SRAM (DPSRAM) chip or chips. The DPSRAM chip comprises 5T or 6T SRAM cells and cross-point switches, and is used for programming the interconnection between circuits or interconnections of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips. The programmable interconnections comprise interconnection metal lines or traces of the TISD between the standard commodity FPGA IC chips, with cross-point switch circuits in the middle of interconnection metal lines or traces of the TISD. For example, n metal lines or traces of the TISD are input to a cross-point switch circuit, and m metal lines or traces of the TISD are output from the switch circuit. The cross-point switch circuit is designed such that each of the n metal lines or traces of the TISD can be programed to connect to anyone of the m metal lines or traces of the TISD. The cross-point switch circuit may be controlled by the programming code stored in, for example, an SRAM cell in or of the DPSRAM chip. The SRAM cell may comprise 6-Transistors (6T), with two transfer (write) transistors and 4 data-latch transistors. The two transfer (write) transistors are used for writing the programing code or data into the two storage or latch nodes of the 4 data-latch transistors. Alternatively, the SRAM cell may comprise 5-Transistors (5T), with a transfer (write) transistor and 4 data-latch transistors. The transfer (write) transistor is used for writing the programing code or data into the two storage or latch nodes of the 4 data-latch transistors. The stored (programming) data in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is used to program the connection or not-connection of metal lines or traces of the TISD. The cross-point switches are the same as that described in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips. The details of various types of cross-point switches are as specified or described in the paragraphs of FPGA IC chips. The cross-point switches may comprise: (1) n-type and p-type transistor pair circuits; or (2) multiplexers and switch buffers. When the data latched in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is programmed at 1, a pass/no-pass circuit comprising a n-type and p-type transistor pair is on, and the two metal lines or traces of the TISD connected to two terminals of the pass-no-pass circuit (the source and drain of the transistor pair, respectively), are connected; while the data latched in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is programmed at 0, a pass/no-pass circuit comprising a n-type and p-type transistor pair circuit is off, and the two metal lines or traces of the TISD connected to two terminals of the pass/no-pass circuit (the source and drain of the transistor pair, respectively), are dis-connected. Alternatively, when the data latched in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is programmed at 1, the control N-MOS transistor and the control P-MOS transistor in the switch buffer are on, the data on the input metal line is passing to the output metal line of the cross-point switch, and the two metal lines or traces of the TISD connected to two terminals of the cross-point switch are coupled or connected; while the data latched in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is programmed at 0, the control N-MOS transistor and the control P-MOS transistor in the switch buffer are off, the data on the input metal line is not passing to the output metal line of the cross-point switch, and the two metal lines or traces of the TISD connected to two terminals of the cross-point switch are not coupled or dis-connected. The DPSRAM chip comprises 5T or 6T SRAM cells and cross-point switches used for programmable interconnection of metal lines or traces of the TISD between the standard commodity FPGA IC chips in the logic drive. Alternatively, the DPSRAM chip comprising 5T or 6T SRAM cells and cross-point switches may be used for programmable interconnection of metal lines or traces of the TISD between the standard commodity FPGA IC chips and the TPVs (for example, the top surfaces of the TPVs) in the logic drive, in the same or similar method as described above. The stored (programming) data in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is used to program the connection or not-connection between (i) a first metal line, trace, or net of the TISD, connecting to one or more micro copper pillars or bumps on or over one or more the IC chips of the logic drive, and/or to one or more metal pillars or bumps on or over the TISD of the logic drive, and (ii) a second metal line, trace or net of the TISD, connecting or coupling to TPV (for example, the top surface of the TPV), in a same or similar method described above. With this aspect of disclosure, TPVs are programmable; in other words, this aspect of disclosure provides programmable TPVs. The programmable TPVs may, alternatively, use the programmable interconnection, comprising 5T or 6T SRAM cells and cross-point switches, on or of the FPGA IC chips in or of the logic drive. The programmable TPV may be, by (software) programming, (i) connected or coupled to one or more micro copper pillars or bumps of one or more IC chips (therefor to the metal lines or traces of the SISC and/or the FISC, and/or the transistors) of the logic drive, and/or (ii) connected or coupled to one or more metal pillars or bumps on or over the TISD of the logic drive. When a copper pad (the bottom surface of the TPV, the bottom surface of the metal via in the polymer layer at the bottom portion of the TPV, or the bottom surface of the metal via in the bottom-most polymer layer of the BISD) at the backside of the logic drive is connected to the programmable TPV, the copper pad becomes a programmable coper pad. The programmable copper pad at the backside of the logic drive may be connected or coupled to, by programming and through the programmable TPV, (i) one or more micro copper pillars or bumps of one or more IC chips (therefor to the metal lines or traces of the SISC and/or the FISC, and/or the transistors) at the frontside of the logic drive, and/or (ii) one or more metal pillars or bumps on or over the TISD at the frontside of the logic drive. Alternatively, the DPSRAM chip comprises 5T or 6T SRAM cells and cross-point switches may be used for programmable interconnection of metal lines or traces of the TISD between the metal pillars or bumps (copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps or gold bumps) on or over the TISDs of the logic drive and one or more micro copper pillars or bumps on or of one or more IC chips of the logic drive, in a same or similar method as described above. The stored (programming) data in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is used to program the connection or not-connection between (i) a first metal line, trace or net of the TISD, connecting to one or more micro copper pillars or bumps on or of one or more IC chips of the logic drive, and/or to the metal pillars or bumps on the TISD) and (ii) a second metal line, trace or net of the TISD, connecting or coupling to the metal pillar or bump, in a same or similar method described above. With this aspect of disclosure, metal pillars or bumps on or over the TISD are programmable; in other words, this aspect of disclosure provides programmable metal pillars or bumps on or over the TISD. The programmable metal pillar or bump may, alternatively, use the programmable interconnection, comprising 5T or 6T SRAM cells and cross-point switches, on or of the FPGA IC chips in or of the logic drive. The programmable metal pillar or bump may be connected or coupled, by programming, to one or more micro copper pillars or bumps of one or more IC chips (therefor to the metal lines or traces of the SISC and/or the FISC, and/or the transistors) of the logic drive. 
     The DPSRAM chip is designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, a semiconductor node or generation less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 35 nm, 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm, 500 nm, or alternatively including advanced semiconductor technology nodes or generations, for example, a semiconductor node or generation more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. The semiconductor technology node or generation used in the DPSRAM chip is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive. Transistors used in the DPSRAM chip may be a FINFET, a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Transistors used in the DPSRAM chip may be different from that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive; for example, the DPSRAM chip may use the conventional MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET; or the DPSRAM chip may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the logic drive in a multi-chip package format further comprising one or plural dedicated programmable interconnection and Cache SRAM (DPCSRAM) chip or chips. The DPCSRAM chip comprises (i) 5T or 6T SRAM cells and cross-point switches used for programming interconnection of the metal lines or traces of the TISD, and therefore programming the interconnection between circuits or interconnections of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips in or of the logic drive, and (ii) the conventional 6T SRAM cells used for cache memory. The programmable interconnections of the 5T or 6T cells and cross-point switches are described and specified above. Alternatively, the DPCSRAM chip comprising 5T or 6T SRAM cells and cross-point switches may be used for programmable interconnection of metal lines or traces of the TISD between the standard commodity FPGA IC chips and the TPVs (for example, the top surfaces of the TPVs) in the logic drive, in the same or similar method as described above. The stored (programming) data in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is used to program the connection or not-connection between (i) a first metal line, trace, or net of the TISD, connecting to one or more micro copper pillars or bumps on or over one or more the IC chips of the logic drive, and/or to one or more metal pillars or bumps on or over the TISD of the logic drive, and (ii) a second metal line, trace or net of the TISD, connecting or coupling to TPV (for example, the top surface of the TPV), in a same or similar method described above. With this aspect of disclosure, TPVs are programmable; in other words, this aspect of disclosure provides programmable TPVs. The programmable TPVs may, alternatively, use the programmable interconnection, comprising 5T or 6T SRAM cells and cross-point switches, on or of the FPGA IC chips in or of the logic drive. The programmable TPV may be, by (software) programming, (i) connected or coupled to one or more micro copper pillars or bumps of one or more IC chips (therefor to the metal lines or traces of the SISC and/or the FISC, and/or the transistors) of the logic drive, and/or (ii) connected or coupled to one or more metal pillars or bumps on or over the TISD of the logic drive. When a copper pad (the bottom surface of the TPV, the bottom surface of the metal via in the polymer layer at the bottom portion of the TPV, or the bottom surface of the metal via in the bottom-most polymer layer of the BISD) at the backside of the logic drive is connected to the programmable TPV, the copper pad becomes a programmable coper pad. The programmable copper pad at the backside of the logic drive may be connected or coupled to, by programming and through the programmable TPV, (i) one or more micro copper pillars or bumps of one or more IC chips (therefor to the metal lines or traces of the SISC and/or the FISC, and/or the transistors) at the frontside of the logic drive, and/or (ii) one or more metal pillars or bumps on or over the TISD at the frontside of the logic drive. Alternatively, the DPCSRAM chip comprises 5T or 6T SRAM cells and cross-point switches may be used for programmable interconnection of metal lines or traces of the TISD between the metal pillars or bumps (copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps or gold bumps) on or over the TISDs of the logic drive and one or more micro copper pillars or bumps on or of one or more IC chips of the logic drive, in a same or similar method as described above. The stored (programming) data in the 5T or 6T SRAM cell is used to program the connection or not-connection between (i) a first metal line, trace or net of the TISD, connecting to one or more micro copper pillars or bumps on or of one or more IC chips of the logic drive, and/or to the metal pillars or bumps on the TISD) and (ii) a second metal line, trace or net of the TISD, connecting or coupling to the metal pillar or bump, in a same or similar method described above. With this aspect of disclosure, metal pillars or bumps on or over the TISD are programmable; in other words, this aspect of disclosure provides programmable metal pillars or bumps on or over the TISD. The programmable metal pillar or bump may, alternatively, use the programmable interconnection, comprising 5T or 6T SRAM cells and cross-point switches, on or of the FPGA IC chips in or of the logic drive. The programmable metal pillar or bump may be connected or coupled, by programming, to one or more micro copper pillars or bumps of one or more IC chips (therefor to the metal lines or traces of the SISC and/or the FISC, and/or the transistors) of the logic drive. 
     The 6T SRAM cell used as cache memory for data latch or storage comprises 2 transistors for bit and bit-bar data transfer, and 4 data-latch transistors for a data latch or storage node. The 6T SRAM cache memory cells provide the 2 transfer transistors for writing data into them and reading data stored in them. A sense amplifier is required for reading (amplifying or detecting) data from the cache memory cells. In comparison, the 5T or 6T SRAM cells used for the programmable interconnection or for the LUTs may not require the reading step, and no sense amplifier is required for sensing the data from the SRAM cell. The DPCSRAM chip comprises 6T SRAM cells for use as cache memory to store data during the processing or computing of the chips of the logic drive. The DPCSRAM chip is designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, a semiconductor node or generation less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 35 nm, 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm, 500 nm, or alternatively including advanced semiconductor technology nodes or generations, for example, a semiconductor node or generation more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. The semiconductor technology node or generation used in the DPCSRAM chip is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive. Transistors used in the DPCRAM chip may be a FINFET, a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Transistors used in the DPCSRAM chip may be different from that used in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive; for example, the DPCSRAM chip may use the conventional MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET; or the DPCSRAM chip may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while the standard commodity FPGA IC chips packaged in the same logic drive may use the FINFET. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a standardized carrier, holder, molder or substrate, in the wafer form or panel form in the stock or in the inventory for use in the later processing in forming the standard commodity logic drive, as described and specified above. The standardized carrier, holder, molder or substrate comprises a fixed physical layout or design of copper pads at the backside of the carrier, holder, molder or substrate and the TPVs; and a fixed layout or design of the BISD if included in the carrier, holder, molder or substrate. The locations or coordinates of the copper pads and the TPVs in the carrier, holder, molder or substrate are the same; and, if there is the BISD, the design or interconnection of the BISD, for example, connection schemes between copper pads and the TPVs are the same for each of the standard commodity carrier, holder, molder or substrate. The standard commodity carrier, holder, molder or substrate in the stock or inventory is then used for forming the standard commodity logic drive by the process described and specified above, including process steps: (I) placing, holding, fixing or attaching the IC chips on or to the carrier, holder, molder or substrate with the side or surface of the chip with transistors faced up; (II) Applying a material, resin, or compound to fill the gaps between chips and cover the surfaces of chips by methods, for example, spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing or molding in the wafer or panel format. Applying a CMP process to planarize the surface of the applied material, resin or compound to a level where the top surfaces of all micro bumps or pillars on or of the chips are fully exposed; (III) forming the TISD; and (IV) forming the metal pillars or bumps on the TISD. The standard commodity carriers, holders, molder or substrates with a fixed layout or design may be used, customized for different applications by different designs or layouts of the TISD. The standard commodity carriers, holders, molders or substrates with a fixed layout or design may be used or customized, by software coding or programming, using the programmable TPVs, as described and specified above, for different applications. As described above, the data installed or programed in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells of the DPSRAM or DCPRAM chips may be used for programmable TPVs. The data installed or programed in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells of the FPGA IC chips may be alternatively used for programmable TPVs. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the standardized commodity logic drive (for example, the single-layer-packaged logic drive) with a fixed design, layout or footprint of (i) the metal pillars or bumps (copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps or gold bumps) on the frontside, and (ii) copper pads (the bottom surface of the TPV, the bottom surface of the metal via in the polymer layer at the bottom portion of the TPV, or the bottom surface of the metal via in the bottom-most polymer layer of the BISD) on the backside of the standard commodity logic drive. The standardized commodity logic drive may be used, customized for different applications by software coding or programming, using the programmable metal pillars or bumps, and/or programmable copper pads (through programmable TPVs), as described and specified above, for different applications. As described above, the codes of the software programs are loaded, installed or programed in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells of the DPSRAM or DCPRAM chip for controlling cross-point switches of the same DPSRAM or DCPRAM chip in or of the standard commodity logic drive for different varieties of applications. Alternatively, the codes of the software programs are loaded, installed or programed in the 5T or 6T SRAM cells of one of the FPGA IC chips, in or of the logic drive in or of the standard commodity logic drive, for controlling cross-point switches of the same one FPGA IC chip for different varieties of applications. Each of the standard commodity logic drives with the same design, layout or footprint of the metal pillars or bumps, and the copper pads may be used for different applications, purposes or functions, by software coding or programming, using the programmable metal pillars or bumps, and/or programmable copper pads (through programmable TPVs) of the logic drive. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the logic drive, either in the single-layer-packaged or in a stacked format, comprising IC chips, logic blocks (comprising LUTs, multiplexers, logic circuits, logic gates, and/or computing circuits) and/or memory cells or arrays, immersing in a super-rich interconnection scheme or environment. The logic blocks (comprising LUTs, multiplexers, logic circuits, logic gates, and/or computing circuits) and/or memory cells or arrays of each of the multiple standard commodity FPGA IC chips are immersed in a programmable 3D Immersive IC Interconnection Environment (IIIE); wherein (1) the FISC, the SISC, micro copper pillars or bumps on the SISC, the TISD, and metal pillars or bumps on the TISD are over them; (2) the BISD and the copper pads are under them; and (3) TPVs are surrounding them along the four edges of the FPGA IC chip, in which they are. The programmable 3D IIIE provides the super-rich interconnection scheme or environment, comprising the FISC, the SISC and micro copper pillars or bumps on, in or of the IC chips, and the TISD, the BISD, TPVs, copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps or gold bumps (at the TISD side), and/or copper pads (at the BISD side) on, in, or of the logic drive package. The programmable 3D IIIE provides a programmable 3-Dimension (3D) super-rich interconnection scheme or system: (1) the FISC, the SISC, the TISD, and/or the BISD provide the interconnection scheme or system in the x-y directions for interconnecting or coupling the logic blocks and/or memory cells or arrays in or of a same FPGA IC chip, or in or of different FPGA IC chips in or of the single-layer-packaged logic drive. The interconnection of metal lines or traces in the interconnection scheme or system in the x-y directions is programmable; (2) The metal structures including micro pillars or bumps on the SISC, copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps or gold bumps on the TISD, TPVs, and/or copper pads at the BISD provide the interconnection scheme or system in the z direction for interconnecting or coupling the logic blocks, and/or memory cells or arrays in or of different FPGA IC chips in or of different single-layer-packaged logic drives stacking-packaged in the stacked logic drive. The interconnection of the metal structures in the interconnection scheme or system in the z direction is also programmable. The programmable 3D IIIE provides an almost unlimited number of the transistors or logic blocks, interconnection metal lines or traces, and memory cells/switches at an extremely low cost. The programmable 3D IIIE similar or analogous to the human brain: (i) transistors and/or logic blocks (comprising logic gates, logic circuits, computing operators, computing circuits, LUTs, and/or multiplexers) are similar or analogous to the neurons (cell bodies) or the nerve cells; (ii) the metal lines or traces of the FISC and/or the SISC are similar or analogous to the dendrites connecting to the neurons (cell bodies) or nerve cells. The micro pillars or bumps connecting to the receivers for the inputs of the logic blocks (comprising, for example, logic gates, logic circuits, computing operators, computing circuits, LUTs, and/or multiplexers) in or of the FPGA IC chips are similar or analogous to the post-synaptic cells at the ends of the dendrites; (iii) the long distance connects formed by metal lines or traces of the FISC, the SISC, the TISD and/or the BISD, and the metal pillars or bumps, including the micro copper pillars or bumps on the SISC, metal pillars or bumps on TISD, TPVs, copper pads on or at BISD, are similar or analogous to the axons connecting to the neurons (cell bodies) or nerve cells. The micro pillars or bumps connecting the drivers or transmitters for the outputs of the logic blocks (comprising, for example, logic gates, logic circuits, computing operators, computing circuits, LUTs, and/or multiplexers) in or of the FPGA IC chips are similar or analogous to the pre-synaptic cells at the axons&#39; terminals. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the programmable 3D IIIE with similar or analogous connections, interconnection and/or functions of a human brain: (1) transistors and/or logic blocks (comprising, for example, logic gates, logic circuits, computing operators, computing circuits, LUTs, and/or multiplexers) are similar or analogous to the neurons (cell bodies) or the nerve cells; (2) The interconnection schemes and/or structures of the logic drives are similar or analogous to the axons or dendrites connecting or coupling to the neurons (cell bodies) or the nerve cells. The interconnection schemes and/or structures of the logic drives comprise (i) metal lines or traces of the FISC, the SISC, the TISD and/or BISD and/or (ii) micro copper pillars or bumps, metal pillars or bumps on the TISD, TPVs and/or copper pads at the backside. An axon-like interconnection scheme and/or structure of the logic drive is connected to the driving or transmitting output (a driver) of a logic unit or operator; and having a structure scheme or structure like a tree, comprising: (i) a trunk or stem connecting to the logic unit or operator; (ii) multiple branches branching from the stem, and the terminal of each branch may be connected or coupled to other logic units or operators. Programmable cross-point switches (5T or 6T SRAM cells/switches of the FPGA IC chips and/or of the DPSRAMs or DPCSRAMs) are used to control the connection or not-connection between the stem and each of the branches; (iii) sub-branches branching form the branches, and the terminal of each sub-branch may be connected or coupled to other logic units or operators. Programmable cross-point switches (5T or 6T SRAM cells/switches of the FPGA IC chips and/or of the DPSRAMs or DPCSRAMs) are used to control the connection or not-connection between a branch and each of its sub-branches. A dendrite-like interconnection scheme and/or structure of the logic drive is connected to the receiving or sensing input (a receiver) of a logic unit or operator; and having a structure scheme or structure like a shrub or bush comprising: (i) a short stem connecting to the logic unit or operator; (ii) multiple branches branching from the stem. Programmable switches (5T or 6T SRAM cells/switches of the FPGA IC chips and/or of the DPSRAMs or DPCSRAMs) are used to control the connection or not-connection between the stem and each of its branches. There are multiple dendrite-like interconnection scheme or structures connecting or coupling to the logic unit or operator. The end of each branch of the dendrite-like interconnection scheme or structure is connected or coupled to the terminal of a branch or sub-branch of the axon-like interconnection scheme or structure. The dendrite-like interconnection scheme and/or structure of the logic drive may comprise the FISCs and SISCs of the FPGA IC chips. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a standard commodity memory drive, package, package drive, device, module, disk, disk drive, solid-state disk, or solid-state drive (to be abbreviated as “drive” below, that is when “drive” is mentioned below, it means and reads as “drive, package, package drive, device, module, disk, disk drive, solid-state disk, or solid-state drive”), in a multi-chip package comprising plural standard commodity non-volatile memory IC chips for use in data storage. The data stored in the standard commodity non-volatile memory drive are kept even if the power supply of the drive is turned off. The plural non-volatile memory IC chips comprise NAND flash chips, in a bare-die format or in a package format. Alternatively, the plural non-volatile memory IC chips may comprise Non-Volatile Radom-Access-Memory (NVRAM) IC chips, in a bare-die format or in a package format. The NVRAM may be a Ferroelectric RAM (FRAM), Magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), or Phase-change RAM (PRAM). The standard commodity memory drive is formed by the FOIT, using same or similar process steps of the FOIT in forming the standard commodity logic drive, as described and specified in the above paragraphs. The process steps of the FOIT are highlighted below: (I) Providing non-volatile memory IC chips, for example, standard commodity NAND flash IC chips, and a chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate; and then placing, fixing or attaching the IC chips to and on the carrier, holder or substrate. Each of the plural NAND flash chips may have a standard memory density, capacity or size of greater than or equal to 64 Mb, 512 Mb, 1Gb, 4Gb, 16Gb, 64Gb, 128Gb, 256 Gb, or 512Gb, wherein “b” is bits. The NAND flash chip may be designed and fabricated using advanced NAND flash technology nodes or generations, for example, more advanced than or equal to 45 nm, 28 nm, 20 nm, 16 nm, and/or 10 nm, wherein the advanced NAND flash technology may comprise Single Level Cells (SLC) or multiple level cells (MLC) (for example, Double Level Cells DLC, or triple Level cells TLC), and in a 2D-NAND or a 3D NAND structure. The 3D NAND structures may comprise multiple stacked layers or levels of NAND cells, for example, greater than or equal to 4, 8, 16, 32 stacked layers or levels of NAND cells. Each of the plural NAND flash chips to be packaged in the memory drives may comprise micro copper pillars or bumps on the top surfaces of the chips. The top surfaces of micro copper pillars or bumps are at a level above the level of the top surface of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the chips with a height of, for example, between 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or greater than or equal to 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, 5 μm or 3 μm. The chips are placed, held, fixed or attached on or to the carrier, holder, molder or substrate with the side or surface of the chip with transistors faced up; (II) Applying a material, resin, or compound to fill the gaps between chips and cover the surfaces of chips by methods, for example, spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing or molding in the wafer or panel format. Applying a CMP process to planarize the surface of the applied material, resin or compound to a level where the top surfaces of all micro bumps or pillars on or of the chips are fully exposed; (III) Forming a Top Interconnection Scheme in, on or of the memory drive (TISD) on or over the planarized material, resin or compound and on or over the exposed top surfaces of the micro pillars or bumps by a wafer or panel processing; (IV) Forming copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, or gold bumps on or over the TISD, (V) Separating, cutting or dicing the finished wafer or panel, including separating, cutting or dicing through the material, resin or compound between two neighboring memory drives. The material, resin or compound (for example, polymer) filling gaps between chips of two neighboring memory drives is separated, cut or diced to from individual unit of memory drives. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a standard commodity memory drive in a multi-chip package comprising plural standard commodity non-volatile memory IC chips may further comprise the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, or the dedicated control and I/O chip; for use in data storage. The data stored in the standard commodity non-volatile memory drive are kept even if the power supply of the drive is turned off. The plural non-volatile memory IC chips comprise NAND flash chips, in a bare-die format or in a package format. Alternatively, the plural non-volatile memory IC chips may comprise Non-Volatile Radom-Access-Memory (NVRAM) IC chips, in a bare-die format or in a package format. The NVRAM may be a Ferroelectric RAM (FRAM), Magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), or Phase-change RAM (PRAM). The functions of the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, or the dedicated control and I/O chip are for the memory control and/or inputs/outputs, and are the same or similar to that described and specified in the above paragraphs for the logic drive. The communication, connection or coupling between the non-volatile memory IC chips, for example the NAND flash chips, and the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, or the dedicated control and I/O chip in a same memory drive is the same or similar to that described and specified in the above paragraphs for the logic drive. The standard commodity NAND flash IC chips may be fabricated using an IC manufacturing technology node or generation different from that used for manufacturing the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, or the dedicated control and I/O chip used in the same memory drive. The standard commodity NAND flash IC chips comprise small I/O circuits, while the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, or the dedicated control and I/O chip used in the memory drive may comprise large I/O circuits, as descried and specified for the logic drive. The standard commodity memory drive comprising the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, or the dedicated control and I/O chip is formed by the FOIT, using same or similar process steps of the FOIT in forming the logic drive, as described and specified in the above paragraphs. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the stacked non-volatile (for example, NAND flash) memory drive comprising plural single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives, as described and specified above, each in a multiple-chip package. The single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drive with TPVs for use in the stacked non-volatile memory drive may be in a standard format or having standard sizes. For example, the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drive may be in a shape of square or rectangle, with a certain widths, lengths and thicknesses. An industry standard may be set for the shape and dimensions of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drive. For example, the standard shape of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drive may be a square, with a width greater than or equal to 4 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm or 40 mm, and having a thickness greater than or equal to 0.03 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, or 5 mm. Alternatively, the standard shape of the non-volatile memory drive may be a rectangle, with a width greater than or equal to 3 mm, 5 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm or 40 mm, and a length greater than or equal to 5 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm, 40 mm, 45 mm or 50 mm; and having a thickness greater than or equal to 0.03 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, or 5 mm. The stacked non-volatile memory drive may comprise, for example 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or greater than 8 single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives, and may be formed by the similar or the same process steps as described and specified in forming the stacked logic drive. The single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives comprise TPVs for the stacking assembly purpose. The process steps for forming TPVs, and the specifications of TPVs are as described and specified in the above paragraphs for use in the stacked logic drive. The stacking methods (for example, POP) using TPVs are as described and specified in above paragraphs for the stacked logic drive. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a standard commodity memory drive in a multi-chip package comprising plural standard commodity volatile memory IC chips for use in data storage; wherein the plural volatile memory IC chips comprise DRAM chips, in a bare-die format or in a package format. The standard commodity DRAM memory drive is formed by the FOIT, using same or similar process steps of the FOIT in forming the logic drive, as described and specified in the above paragraphs. The process steps are highlighted below: (I) Providing standard commodity DRAM IC chips, and a chip carrier, holder, molder or substrate; and then placing, fixing or attaching the IC chips to and on the carrier, holder or substrate. Each of the plural DRAM chips may have a standard memory density, capacity or size of greater than or equal to 64 Mb, 512 Mb, 1Gb, 4Gb, 16Gb, 64Gb, 128Gb, 256 Gb, or 512Gb, wherein “b” is bits. The DRAM chip may be designed and fabricated using advanced DRAM technology nodes or generations, for example, more advanced than or equal to 45 nm, 28 nm, 20 nm, 16 nm, and/or 10 nm. All DRAM chips to be packaged in the memory drives may comprise micro copper pillars or bumps on the top surfaces of the chips. The top surfaces of micro copper pillars or bumps are at a level above the level of the top surface of the top-most insulating dielectric layer of the chips with a height of, for example, between 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or greater than or equal to 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, 5 μm or 3 μm. The chips are placed, held, fixed or attached on or to the carrier, holder, molder or substrate with the side or surface of the chip with transistors faced up; (II) Applying a material, resin, or compound to fill the gaps between chips and cover the surfaces of chips by methods, for example, spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing or molding in the wafer or panel format. Applying a CMP process to planarize the surface of the applied material, resin or compound to a level where the top surfaces of all micro bumps or pillars on or of the chips are fully exposed; (III) Forming a Top Interconnection Scheme in, on or of the memory drive (TISD) on or over the planarized material, resin or compound and on or over the exposed top surfaces of the micro pillars or bumps by a wafer or panel processing; (IV) Forming copper pillars or bumps, solder bumps, or gold bumps on or over the TISD, (V) Separating, cutting or dicing the finished wafer or panel, including separating, cutting or dicing through the material, resin or compound between two neighboring memory drives. The material, resin or compound (for example, polymer) filling gaps between chips of two neighboring memory drives is separated, cut or diced to from individual unit of memory drives. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a standard commodity memory drive in a multi-chip package comprising plural standard commodity volatile IC chips may further comprise the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, or the dedicated control and I/O chip; for use in data storage; wherein the plural volatile memory IC chips comprise DRAM chips, in a bare-die format or in a DRAM package format. The functions of the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, or the dedicated control and I/O chip used in the memory drive are for the memory control and/or inputs/outputs, and are the same or similar to that described and specified in the above paragraphs for the logic drive. The communication, connection or coupling between the DRAM chips and the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, or the dedicated control and I/O chip in a same memory drive is the same or similar to that described and specified in the above paragraphs for the logic drive. The standard commodity DRAM IC chips may be fabricated using an IC manufacturing technology node or generation different from that used for manufacturing the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, or the dedicated control and I/O chip. The standard commodity DRAM chips comprise small I/O circuits, while the dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, or the dedicated control and I/O chip used in the memory drive may comprise large I/O circuits, as descried and specified above for the logic drive. The standard commodity memory drive is formed by the same or similar process steps as that in forming the logic drive, as described and specified in the above paragraphs. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the stacked volatile (for example, DRAM) memory drive comprising plural single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives, as described and specified above, each in a multiple-chip package. The single-layer-packaged volatile memory drive with TPVs for use in the stacked volatile memory drive may be in a standard format or having standard sizes. For example, the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drive may be in a shape of square or rectangle, with a certain widths, lengths and thicknesses. An industry standard may be set for the shape and dimensions of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drive. For example, the standard shape of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drive may be a square, with a width greater than or equal to 4 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm or 40 mm, and having a thickness greater than or equal to 0.03 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, or 5 mm. Alternatively, the standard shape of the volatile memory drive may be a rectangle, with a width greater than or equal to 3 mm, 5 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm or 40 mm, and a length greater than or equal to 5 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm, 40 mm, 45 mm or 50 mm; and having a thickness greater than or equal to 0.03 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, or 5 mm. The stacked volatile memory drive may comprise, for example 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or greater than 8 single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives, and may be formed by the similar or the same process steps as described and specified in forming the stacked logic drive. The single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives may comprise TPVs for the stacking assembly purpose. The process steps for forming TPVs, and the specifications of TPVs are described and specified in the above paragraphs for use in the stacked logic drive. The stacking methods (for example, POP) using TPVs are as described and specified in above paragraphs for the stacked logic drive. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the stacked logic and volatile (for example, DRAM) memory drive comprising plural single-layer-packaged logic drives and plural single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives, each in a multiple-chip package, as described and specified above. Each of plural single-layer-packaged logic drives and each of plural single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives may be in a same standard format or having a same standard shape, size and dimension, as described and specified in above. The stacked logic and volatile-memory drive may comprise, for example 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or greater than 8 single-layer-packaged logic drives or volatile-memory drives (in total), and may be formed by the similar or the same process steps as described and specified in forming the stacked logic drive. The stacking sequence, from bottom to top, may be: (a) all single-layer-packaged logic drives at the bottom and all single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives at the top, or (b) single-layer-packaged logic drives and single-layer-packaged volatile drives are stacked interlaced or interleaved layer over layer, from bottom to top, in sequence: (i) single-layer-packaged logic drive, (ii) single-layer-packaged volatile memory drive, (iii) single-layer-packaged logic drive, (iv) single-layer-packaged volatile memory, and so on. The single-layer-packaged logic drives and single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives used in the stacked logic and volatile-memory drives, each comprises TPVs for the stacking assembly purpose. The process steps for forming TPVs, and the specifications of TPVs are described and specified in the above paragraphs. The stacking methods (POP) using TPVs are as described and specified in above paragraphs. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the stacked non-volatile (for example, NAND flash) and volatile (for example, DRAM) memory drive comprising plural single-layer-packaged non-volatile drives and plural single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives, each in a multiple-chip package, as described and specified in above paragraphs. Each of plural single-layer-packaged non-volatile drives and each of plural single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives may be in a same standard format or having a same standard shape, size and dimension, as described and specified above. The stacked non-volatile and volatile-memory drive may comprise, for example 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or greater than 8 single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives or single-layer-packaged volatile-memory drives (in total), and may be formed by the similar or the same process steps as described and specified in forming the stacked logic drive. The stacking sequence, from bottom to top, may be: (a) all single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives at the bottom and all single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives at the top, (b) all single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives at the bottom and all single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives at the top, or (c) single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives and single-layer-packaged volatile drives are stacked interlaced or interleaved layer over layer, from bottom to top, in sequence: (i) single-layer-packaged volatile memory drive, (ii) single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drive, (iii) single-layer-packaged volatile memory drive, (iv) single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory, and so on. The single-layer-packaged non-volatile drives and single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives used in the stacked non-volatile and volatile-memory drives, each comprises TPVs for the stacking assembly purpose. The process steps for forming TPVs, and the specifications of TPVs are described and specified in the above paragraphs for use in the stacked logic drive. The stacking methods (POP) using TPVs are as described and specified in above paragraphs for forming the stacked logic drive. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides the stacked logic, non-volatile (for example, NAND flash) memory and volatile (for example, DRAM) memory drive comprising plural single-layer-packaged logic drives, plural single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives and plural single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives, each in a multiple-chip package, as described and specified above. Each of plural single-layer-packaged logic drives, each of plural single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives and each of plural single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives may be in a same standard format or having a same standard shape, size and dimension, as described and specified above. The stacked logic, non-volatile (flash) memory and volatile (DRAM) memory drive may comprise, for example 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or greater than 8 single-layer-packaged logic drives, single-layer-packaged non-volatile-memory drives or single-layer-packaged volatile-memory drives (in total), and may be formed by the similar or the same process steps as described and specified in forming the stacked logic drive. The stacking sequence is, from bottom to top, for example: (a) all single-layer-packaged logic drives at the bottom, all single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives in the middle, and all single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives at the top, or, (b) single-layer-packaged logic drives, single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives, and single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives are stacked interlaced or interleaved layer over layer, from bottom to top, in sequence: (i) single-layer-packaged logic drive, (ii) single-layer-packaged volatile memory drive, (iii) single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drive, (iv) single-layer-packaged logic drive, (v) single-layer-packaged volatile memory, (vi) single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drive, and so on. The single-layer-packaged logic drives, single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives, and single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives used in the stacked logic, non-volatile-memory and volatile-memory drives, each comprises TPVs for the stacking assembly purpose. The process steps for forming TPVs, and the specifications of TPVs are described and specified in the above paragraphs for use in the stacked logic drive. The stacking methods (POP) using TPVs are as described and specified in above paragraphs for forming the stacked logic drive. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a system, hardware, electronic device, computer, processor, mobile phone, communication equipment, and/or robot comprising the logic drive, the non-volatile (for example, NAND flash) memory drive, and/or the volatile (for example, DRAM) memory drive. The logic drive may be the single-layer-packaged logic drive or the stacked logic drive, as described and specified above; the non-volatile flash memory drive may be the single-layer-packaged non-volatile flash memory drive or the stacked non-volatile flash memory drive as described and specified above; and the volatile DRAM memory drive may be the single-layer-packaged DRAM memory drive or the stacked volatile DRAM memory drive as described and specified above. The logic drive, the non-volatile flash memory drive, and/or the volatile DRAM memory drive are flip-package assembled on a Printed Circuit Board (PCB), a Ball-Grid-Array (BGA) substrate, a flexible circuit film or tape, or a ceramic circuit substrate. 
     Another aspect of the disclosure provides a logic and memory drive in a stacked package or device comprising the single-layer-packaged logic drive and the single-layer-packaged memory drive. The single-layer-packaged logic drive is as described and specified above, and is comprising one or more FPGA IC chips, one or more NAND flash chips, the DPSRAMs or DPCSRAMs, dedicated control chip, the dedicated I/O chip, and/or the dedicated control and I/O chip. The single-layer-packaged logic drive may be further comprising one or more of the processing and/or computing IC chips, for example, one or more CPU chips, GPU chips, DSP chips, and/or TPU chips. The single-layer-packaged memory drive is as described and specified above, and is comprising one or more high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chips, one or more DRAM chips, or one or more NVM chips for high speed parallel processing and/or computing. The one or more high speed, high bandwidth NVMs may comprise MRAM or RRAM. The single-layer-packaged logic drive, as described and specified above, is formed using the FOIT technology. For high speed, high bandwidth communications with the memory chips of the single-layer-packaged memory drive, stacked vias (in or of the TISD) directly and vertically on or over the micro copper pillars or bumps on or over the SISC and/or FISC of the IC chips are formed, and metal pillars or bumps on the front side of the logic drive (the side of the IC chips with transistors are facing up) are formed directly and vertically on or over the stacked vias of the TISD. Multiple stacked structures in or of the logic drive, each for a bit data of the high speed, wide bit-width buses, are formed, from top to the bottom, comprise: (i) metal pillars or bumps on or over the TISD; (ii) stacked vias by stacking metal vias and metal layers of the TISD; (iii) micro copper pillars or bumps on or over the SISC and/or FISC. The number of stacked structures for each IC chip (that is the data bit-width between each logic chip and each high speed, high bandwidth memory chip) is equal or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K for high speed, high bandwidth parallel processing and/or computing. Similarly, multiple stacked structures are formed in the single-layer-packaged memory drive. The single-layer-packaged logic drive is the flip-package assembled or packaged on or to the single-layer-packaged memory chip, with the side with transistor of IC chips in the logic drive faced down, and the side with transistor of IC chips in the memory drive faced up. Therefore, a micro copper/solder pillar or bump on or of a FPGA IC, CPU, GPU, DSP and/or TPU chip can be connected or coupled, with the shortest distance, to a micro copper/solder pillar or bump on a memory chip, for example, DRAM, SRAM or NVM, through: (i) micro copper pads, pillars or bumps on or under the SISC and/or FISC of the single-layer-packaged logic drive; (ii) stacked vias by stacking metal vias and metal layers of the TISD of the single-layer-packaged logic drive; (iii) metal pads, pillars, or bumps on or under the TISD of the single-layer-packaged logic drive; (iv) metal pads, pillars, or bumps on or over the TISD of the single-layer-packaged memory drive; (v) stacked vias by stacking metal vias and metal layers of the TISD of the single-layer-packaged memory drive; (vi) micro copper pads, pillars or bumps on or over the SISC and/or FISC of the single-layer-packaged logic drive. With the TPVs and/or BISDs for both the single-layer-packaged logic drive and the single-layer-packaged memory drive, the stacked logic and memory drive or device can communicate, connect or couple to the external circuits or components from the top side (the backside of the single-layer-packaged logic drive, with the side with transistor of IC chips in the single-layer-packaged logic drive faced down,) and the bottom side (the backside of the single-layer-packaged memory drive, the side with transistor of IC chips in the single-layer-packaged memory drive faced up) of the stacked logic and memory drive or device. Alternatively, the TPVs and/or BISDs for the single-layer-packaged logic drive may be omitted; and the stacked logic and memory drive or device can communicate, connect or couple to the external circuits or components from the bottom side (the backside of the single-layer-packaged memory drive, the side with transistor of IC chips in the single-layer-packaged memory drive faced up) of the stacked the stacked logic and memory drive or device, through the TPVs and/or BISD of the single-layer-packaged memory drive. Alternatively, the TPVs and/or BISDs for the single-layer-packaged memory drive may be omitted; and the stacked logic and memory drive or device can communicate, connect or couple to the external circuits or components from the top side (the backside of the single-layer-packaged logic drive, the side with transistor of IC chips in the single-layer-packaged logic drive faced up) of the stacked logic and memory drive or device, through the TPVs and/or BISD of the single-layer-packaged logic drive. 
     In all of the above alternatives for the logic and memory drive or device, the single-layer-packaged logic drive may comprise one or more of the processing and/or computing IC chips, and the single-layer-packaged memory drive may comprise one or more high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chips, DRAM chips, or NVM chips (for example, MRAM or RRAM) for high speed parallel processing and/or computing. For example, the single-layer-packaged logic drive may comprise multiple GPU chips, for example 2, 3, 4 or more than 4 GPU chips, and the single-layer-packaged memory drive may comprise multiple high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chips, DRAM chips, or NVM chips. The communication between one of GPU chips and one of SRAM, DRAM or NVM chips, through the stacked structures described and specified above, may be with data bit-width equal or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. For another example, the logic drive may comprise multiple TPU chips, for example 2, 3, 4 or more than 4 TPU chips, and the single-layer-packaged memory drive may comprise multiple high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chips, DRAM chips or NVM chips. The communication between one of TPU chips and one of SRAM chips, DRAM chips or NVM chips, through the stacked structures described and specified above, may be with data bit-width equal or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. For another example, the logic drive may comprise multiple FPGA IC chips, for example 2, 3, 4 or more than 4 FPGA IC chips, and the single-layer-packaged memory drive may comprise multiple high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chips, DRAM chips or NVM chips. The communication between one of FPGA IC chips and one of SRAM chips, DRAM chips or NVM chips, through the stacked structures described and specified above, may be with data bit-width equal or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. 
     The communication, connection, or coupling between one of FPGA IC chips, and/or processing and/or computing chips (for example, CPU, GPU, DSP, APU, TPU, and/or ASIC chips) and one of high speed, high bandwidth SRAM, DRAM or NVM chips, through the stacked structures described and specified above, may be the same or similar as that between internal circuits in a same chip. Alternatively, the communication, connection, or coupling between (i) one of FPGA IC chips, and/or processing and/or computing chips (for example, CPU, GPU, DSP, APU, TPU, and/or ASIC chips) and (ii) one of high speed, high bandwidth SRAM, DRAM or NVM chips, through the stacked structures described and specified above, may be using small I/O drivers and/or receivers. The driving capability, loading, output capacitance, or input capacitance of the small I/O drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits may be between 0.01 pF and 10 pF, 0.05 pF and 5 pF, 0.01 pF and 2 pF or 0.01 pF and 1 pF; or smaller than 10 pF, 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF, 1 pF, 0.5 pF or 0.1 pF. For example, a bi-directional (or tri-state) I/O pad or circuit may be used for the small I/O drivers or receivers, or I/O circuits for communicating between high speed, high bandwidth logic and memory chips in the logic and memory stacked drive, and may comprise an ESD circuit, a receiver, and a driver, and may have an input capacitance or output capacitance between 0.01 pF and 10 pF, 0.05 pF and 5 pF, 0.01 pF and 2 pF or 0.01 pF and 1 pF; or smaller than 10 pF, 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF, 1 pF, 0.5 pF or 0.1 pF. 
     These, as well as other components, steps, features, benefits, and advantages of the present application, will now become clear from a review of the following detailed description of illustrative embodiments, the accompanying drawings, and the claims. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
       The drawings disclose illustrative embodiments of the present application. They do not set forth all embodiments. Other embodiments may be used in addition or instead. Details that may be apparent or unnecessary may be omitted to save space or for more effective illustration. Conversely, some embodiments may be practiced without all of the details that are disclosed. When the same reference number or reference indicator appears in different drawings, it may refer to the same or like components or steps. 
       Aspects of the disclosure may be more fully understood from the following description when read together with the accompanying drawings, which are to be regarded as illustrative in nature, and not as limiting. The drawings are not necessarily to scale, emphasis instead being placed on the principles of the disclosure. In the drawings: 
         FIGS.  1 A and  1 B  are circuit diagrams illustrating various types of memory cells in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  2 A- 2 F  are circuit diagrams illustrating various types of pass/no-pass switch in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  3 A- 3 D  are block diagrams illustrating various types of cross-point switches in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  4 A and  4 C- 4 J  are circuit diagrams illustrating various types of multiplexers in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIG.  4 B  is a circuit diagram illustrating a tri-state buffer of a multiplexer in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIG.  5 A  is a circuit diagram of a large I/O circuit in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIG.  5 B  is a circuit diagram of a small I/O circuit in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIG.  6 A  is a schematic view showing a block diagram of a programmable logic block in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIG.  6 B  is a circuit diagram of a logic operator in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIG.  6 C  shows a look-up table for a logic operator in  FIG.  6 B . 
         FIG.  6 D  shows a look-up table for a computation operator in  FIG.  6 E . 
         FIG.  6 E  is a circuit diagram of a computation operator in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  7 A- 7 C  are block diagrams illustrating programmable interconnects programmed by a pass/no-pass switch or cross-point switch in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  8 A- 8 H  are schematically top views showing various arrangements for a standard commodity FPGA IC chip in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  8 I and  8 J  are block diagrams showing various repair algorithms in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIG.  9    is a schematically top view showing a block diagram of a dedicated programmable interconnection (DPI) integrated-circuit (IC) chip in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIG.  10    is a schematically top view showing a block diagram of a dedicated input/output (I/O) chip in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  11 A- 11 N  are schematically top views showing various arrangement for a logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  12 A- 12 C  are various block diagrams showing various connections between chips in a logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  13 A and  13 B  are block diagrams showing an algorithm for data loading to memory cells in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIG.  14 A  is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor wafer in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  14 B- 14 H  are cross-sectional views showing a single damascene process is performed to form a first interconnection scheme in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  14 I- 14 Q  are cross-sectional views showing a double damascene process is performed to form a first interconnection scheme in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  15 A- 15 H  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming a micro-bump or micro-pillar on chip in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  16 A- 16 L and  17    are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming a second interconnection scheme over a passivation layer and forming multiple micro-pillars or micro-bumps on the second interconnection metal layer in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  18 A- 18 W  are schematic views showing a process for forming a single-layer-packaged logic drive based on FOIT in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  19 A- 19 L  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming a single-layer-packaged logic drive based on TPVs and FOIT in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  19 M- 19 R  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for a package-on-package (POP) assembly in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  19 S- 19 Z  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming a single-layer-packaged logic drive based on TPVs and FOIT in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIG.  20 A- 20 M  are schematic views showing a process for forming BISD over a carrier substrate in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIG.  20 N  is a top view showing a metal plane in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  20 O- 20 R  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming multiple through-package vias (TPV) on the BISD in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  20 S- 20 Z  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming a single-layer-packaged logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIG.  21 A  is a top view of TPVs in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  21 B- 21 G  are cross-sectional views showing various interconnection nets in a single-layer-packaged logic drive in accordance with embodiments of the present application; 
         FIG.  21 H  is a bottom view of  FIG.  25 G , showing a layout of metal pads of a logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  22 A- 22 I  are schematically views showing a process for fabricating a package-on-package assembly in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  23 A and  23 B  are conceptual views showing interconnection between multiple logic blocks from an aspect of human&#39;s nerve system in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  24 A- 24 K  are schematically views showing multiple combinations of POP assemblies for logic and memory drives in accordance with embodiments of the present application. 
         FIG.  24 L  is a schematically top view of multiple POP assemblies, which is a schematically cross-sectional view along a cut line A-A shown in  FIG.  24 K . 
         FIGS.  25 A- 25 C  are schematically views showing various applications for logic and memory drives in accordance with multiple embodiments of the present application. 
         FIGS.  26 A- 26 F  are schematically top views showing various standard commodity memory drives in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
         FIGS.  27 A- 27 C  are cross-sectional views showing various assemblies for logic and memory drives in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
     
    
    
     While certain embodiments are depicted in the drawings, one skilled in the art will appreciate that the embodiments depicted are illustrative and that variations of those shown, as well as other embodiments described herein, may be envisioned and practiced within the scope of the present application. 
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE DISCLOSURE 
     Illustrative embodiments are now described. Other embodiments may be used in addition or instead. Details that may be apparent or unnecessary may be omitted to save space or for a more effective presentation. Conversely, some embodiments may be practiced without all of the details that are disclosed. 
     Specification for Static Random-Access Memory (SRAM) Cells 
     (1) First Type of SRAM Cell (6T SRAM Cell) 
       FIG.  1 A  is a circuit diagram illustrating a 6T SRAM cell in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  1 A , a first type of static random-access memory (SRAM) cell  398 , i.e., 6T SRAM cell, may have a memory unit  446  composed of 4 data-latch transistors  447  and  448 , that is, two pairs of a P-type MOS transistor  447  and N-type MOS transistor  448  both having respective drain terminals coupled to each other, respective gate terminals coupled to each other and respective source terminals coupled to a power supply at a voltage (Vcc) and to a ground reference at a voltage (Vss). The gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair are coupled to the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair, acting as an output Out 1  of the memory unit  446 . The gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair are coupled to the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair, acting as an output Out 2  of the memory unit  446 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  1 A , the first type of SRAM cell  398  may further include two switches or transfer (write) transistor  449 , such as N-type or P-type MOS transistors, a first one of which has a gate terminal coupled to a word line  451  and a channel having a terminal coupled to a bit line  452  and another terminal coupled to the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair and the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair, and a second one of which has a gate terminal coupled to the word line  451  and a channel having a terminal coupled to a bit-bar line  453  and another terminal coupled to the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair and the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair. A logic level on the bit line  452  is opposite a logic level on the bit-bar line  453 . The switch  449  may be considered as a programming transistor for writing a programing code or data into storage nodes of the 4 data-latch transistors  447  and  448 , i.e., at the drains and gates of the 4 data-latch transistors  447  and  448 . The switches  449  may be controlled via the word line  451  to turn on connection from the bit line  452  to the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair and the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair via the channel of the first one of the switches  449 , and thereby the logic level on the bit line  452  may be reloaded into the conductive line between the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair and the conductive line between the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair. Further, the bit-bar line  453  may be coupled to the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair and the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair via the channel of the second one of the switches  449 , and thereby the logic level on the bit line  453  may be reloaded into the conductive line between the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair and the conductive line between the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair. Thus, the logic level on the bit line  452  may be registered or latched in the conductive line between the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair and in the conductive line between the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair; a logic level on the bit line  453  may be registered or latched in the conductive line between the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair and in the conductive line between the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair. 
     (2) Second Type of SRAM Cell (5T SRAM Cell) 
       FIG.  1 B  is a circuit diagram illustrating a 5T SRAM cell in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  1 B , a second type of static random-access memory (SRAM) cell  398 , i.e., 5T SRAM cell, may have the memory unit  446  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A . The second type of static random-access memory (SRAM) cell  398  may further have a switch or transfer (write) transistor  449 , such as N-type or P-type MOS transistor, having a gate terminal coupled to a word line  451  and a channel having a terminal coupled to a bit line  452  and another terminal coupled to the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair and the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair. The switch  449  may be considered as a programming transistor for writing a programing code or data into storage nodes of the 4 data-latch transistors  447  and  448 , i.e., at the drains and gates of the 4 data-latch transistors  447  and  448 . The switch  449  may be controlled via the word line  451  to turn on connection from the bit line  452  to the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair and the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair via the channel of the switch  449 , and thereby a logic level on the bit line  452  may be reloaded into the conductive line between the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair and the conductive line between the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair. Thus, the logic level on the bit line  452  may be registered or latched in the conductive line between the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair and in the conductive line between the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair; a logic level, opposite to the logic level on the bit line  452 , may be registered or latched in the conductive line between the gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the left pair and in the conductive line between the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  447  and  448  in the right pair. 
     Specification for Pass/No-Pass Switches 
     (1) First Type of Pass/No-Pass Switch 
       FIG.  2 A  is a circuit diagram illustrating a first type of pass/no-pass switch in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  2 A , a first type of pass/no-pass switch  258  may include an N-type metal-oxide-semiconductor (MOS) transistor  222  and a P-type metal-oxide-semiconductor (MOS) transistor  223  coupling in parallel to each other. Each of the N-type and P-type metal-oxide-semiconductor (MOS) transistors  222  and  223  of the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the first type may be provided with a channel having an end coupling to a node N 21  and the other opposite end coupling to a node N 22 . Thereby, the first type of pass/no-pass switch  258  may be set to turn on or off connection between the nodes N 21  and N 22 . The P-type MOS transistor  223  of the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the first type may have a gate terminal coupling to a node SC- 1 . The N-type MOS transistor  222  of the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the first type may have a gate terminal coupling to a node SC- 2 . 
     (2) Second Type of Pass/No-Pass Switch 
       FIG.  2 B  is a circuit diagram illustrating a second type of pass/no-pass switch in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  2 B , a second type of pass/no-pass switch  258  may include the N-type MOS transistor  222  and the P-type MOS transistor  223  that are the same as those of the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the first type as illustrated in  FIG.  2 A . The second type of pass/no-pass switch  258  may further include an inverter  533  configured to invert its input coupling to a gate terminal of the N-type MOS transistor  222  and a node SC- 3  into an output coupling to a gate terminal of the P-type MOS transistor  223 . 
     (3) Third Type of Pass/No-Pass Switch 
       FIG.  2 C  is a circuit diagram illustrating a third type of pass/no-pass switch in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  2 C , a third type of pass/no-pass switch  258  may be a multi-stage tri-state buffer  292 , i.e., switch buffer, having a pair of a P-type MOS transistor  293  and N-type MOS transistor  294  in each stage, both having respective drain terminals coupling to each other and respective source terminals configured to couple to a power supply at a voltage (Vcc) and to a ground reference at a voltage (Vss). In this case, the multi-stage tri-state buffer  292  is two-stage tri-state buffer, i.e., two-stage inverter buffer, having two pairs of the P-type MOS transistor  293  and N-type MOS transistor  294  in the two respective stages, i.e., first and second stages. A node N 21  may couple to gate terminals of the P-type MOS and N-type MOS transistors  293  and  294  in the pair in the first stage. The drain terminals of the P-type MOS and N-type MOS transistors  293  and  294  in the pair in the first stage may couple to gate terminals of the P-type MOS and N-type MOS transistors  293  and  294  in the pair in the second stage. The drain terminals of the P-type MOS and N-type MOS transistors  293  and  294  in the pair in the second stage may couple to a node N 22 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  2 C , the multi-stage tri-state buffer  292  may further include a switching mechanism configured to enable or disable the multi-stage tri-state buffer  292 , wherein the switching mechanism may be composed of (1) a P-type MOS transistor  295  having a source terminal coupling to the power supply at the voltage (Vcc) and a drain terminal coupling to the source terminals of the P-type MOS transistors  293  in the first and second stages, (2) a N-type MOS transistor  296  having a source terminal coupling to the ground reference at the voltage (Vss) and a drain terminal coupling to the source terminals of the N-type MOS transistors  294  in the first and second stages and (3) an inverter  297  configured to invert its input coupling to a gate terminal of the N-type MOS transistor  296  and a node SC- 4  into its output coupling to a gate terminal of the P-type MOS transistor  295 . 
     For example, referring to  FIG.  2 C , when a logic level of “1” couples to the node SC- 4  to turn on the multi-stage tri-state buffer  292 , a signal may be transmitted from the node N 21  to the node N 22 . When a logic level of “0” couples to the node SC- 4  to turn off the multi-stage tri-state buffer  292 , no signal transmission may occur between the nodes N 21  and N 22 . 
     (4) Fourth Type of Pass/No-Pass Switch 
       FIG.  2 D  is a circuit diagram illustrating a fourth type of pass/no-pass switch in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  2 D , a fourth type of pass/no-pass switch  258  may be a multi-stage tri-state buffer, i.e., switch buffer, that is similar to the one  292  as illustrated in  FIG.  2 C . For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  2 C and  2 D , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  2 D  may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIG.  2 C . The difference between the circuits illustrated in  FIG.  2 C  and the circuits illustrated in  FIG.  2 D  is mentioned as below. Referring to  FIG.  2 D , the drain terminal of the P-type MOS transistor  295  may couple to the source terminal of the P-type MOS transistor  293  in the second stage but does not couple to the source terminal of the P-type MOS transistor  293  in the first stage; the source terminal of the P-type MOS transistor  293  in the first stage may couple to the power supply at the voltage (Vcc) and the source terminal of the P-type MOS transistor  295 . The drain terminal of the N-type MOS transistor  296  may couple to the source terminal of the N-type MOS transistor  294  in the second stage but does not couple to the source terminal of the N-type MOS transistor  294  in the first stage; the source terminal of the N-type MOS transistor  294  in the first stage may couple to the ground reference at the voltage (Vss) and the source terminal of the N-type MOS transistor  296 . 
     (5) Fifth Type of Pass/No-Pass Switch 
       FIG.  2 E  is a circuit diagram illustrating a fifth type of pass/no-pass switch in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  2 C and  2 E , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  2 E  may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIG.  2 C . Referring to  FIG.  2 E , a fifth type of pass/no-pass switch  258  may include a pair of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292 , i.e., switch buffers, as illustrated in  FIG.  2 C . The gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  293  and  294  in the first stage in the left one of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair may couple to the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  293  and  294  in the second stage in the right one of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair and to a node N 21 . The gate terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  293  and  294  in the first stage in the right one of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair may couple to the drain terminals of the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  293  and  294  in the second stage in the left one of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair and to a node N 22 . For the left one of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair, its inverter  297  is configured to invert its input coupling to the gate terminal of its N-type MOS transistor  296  and a node SC- 5  into its output coupling to the gate terminal of its P-type MOS transistor  295 . For the right one of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair, its inverter  297  is configured to invert its input coupling to the gate terminal of its N-type MOS transistor  296  and a node SC- 6  into its output coupling to the gate terminal of its P-type MOS transistor  295 . 
     For example, referring to  FIG.  2 E , when a logic level of “1” couples to the node SC- 5  to turn on the left one of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair and a logic level of “0” couples to the node SC- 6  to turn off the right one of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair, a signal may be transmitted from the node N 21  to the node N 22 . When a logic level of “0” couples to the node SC- 5  to turn off the left one of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair and a logic level of “1” couples to the node SC- 6  to turn on the right one of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair, a signal may be transmitted from the node N 22  to the node N 21 . When a logic level of “0” couples to the node SC- 5  to turn off the left one of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair and a logic level of “0” couples to the node SC- 6  to turn off the right one of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair, no signal transmission may occur between the nodes N 21  and N 22 . 
     (6) Sixth Type of Pass/No-Pass Switch 
       FIG.  2 F  is a circuit diagram illustrating a sixth type of pass/no-pass switch in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  2 F , a sixth type of pass/no-pass switch  258  may be composed of a pair of multi-stage tri-state buffers, i.e., switch buffers, which is similar to the ones  292  as illustrated in  FIG.  2 E . For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  2 E and  2 F , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  2 F  may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIG.  2 E . The difference between the circuits illustrated in  FIG.  2 E  and the circuits illustrated in  FIG.  2 F  is mentioned as below. Referring to  FIG.  2 F , for each of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair, the drain terminal of its P-type MOS transistor  295  may couple to the source terminal of its P-type MOS transistor  293  in the second stage but does not couple to the source terminal of its P-type MOS transistor  293  in the first stage; the source terminal of its P-type MOS transistor  293  in the first stage may couple to the power supply at the voltage (Vcc) and the source terminal of its P-type MOS transistor  295 . For each of the multi-stage tri-state buffers  292  in the pair, the drain terminal of its N-type MOS transistor  296  may couple to the source terminal of its N-type MOS transistor  294  in the second stage but does not couple to the source terminal of its N-type MOS transistor  294  in the first stage; the source terminal of its N-type MOS transistor  294  in the first stage may couple to the ground reference at the voltage (Vss) and the source terminal of its N-type MOS transistor  296 . 
     Specification for Cross-Point Switches Constructed from Pass/No-Pass Switches 
     (1) First Type of Cross-Point Switch 
       FIG.  3 A  is a circuit diagram illustrating a first type of cross-point switch composed of six pass/no-pass switches in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  3 A , six pass/no-pass switches  258 , each of which may be any one of the first through sixth types of pass/no-pass switches as illustrated in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F  respectively, may compose a first type of cross-point switch  379 . The first type of cross-point switch  379  may have four terminals N 23 -N 26  each configured to be switched to couple to another one of its four terminals N 23 -N 26  via one of its six pass/no-pass switches  258 . One of the first through sixth types of pass/no-pass switches for said each of the pass/no-pass switches  258  may have one of its nodes N 21  and N 22  coupling to one of the four terminals N 23 -N 26  and the other one of its nodes N 21  and N 22  coupling to another one of the four terminals N 23 -N 26 . For example, the first type of cross-point switch  379  may have its terminal N 23  configured to be switched to couple to its terminal N 24  via a first one of its six pass/no-pass switches  258  between its terminals N 23  and N 24 , to its terminal N 25  via a second one of its six pass/no-pass switches  258  between its terminals N 23  and N 25  and/or to its terminal N 26  via a third one of its six pass/no-pass switches  258  between its terminals N 23  and N 26 . 
     (2) Second Type of Cross-Point Switch 
       FIG.  3 B  is a circuit diagram illustrating a second type of cross-point switch composed of four pass/no-pass switches in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  3 B , four pass/no-pass switches  258 , each of which may be any one of the first through sixth types of pass/no-pass switches as illustrated in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F  respectively, may compose a second type of cross-point switch  379 . The second type of cross-point switch  379  may have four terminals N 23 -N 26  each configured to be switched to couple to another one of its four terminals N 23 -N 26  via two of its four pass/no-pass switches  258 . The second type of cross-point switch  379  may have a central node configured to couple to its four terminals N 23 -N 26  via its four respective pass/no-pass switches  258 . One of the first through sixth types of pass/no-pass switches for said each of the pass/no-pass switches  258  may have one of its nodes N 21  and N 22  coupling to one of the four terminals N 23 -N 26  and the other one of its nodes N 21  and N 22  coupling to the central node of the cross-point switch  379  of the second type. For example, the second type of cross-point switch  379  may have its terminal N 23  configured to be switched to couple to its terminal N 24  via left and top ones of its four pass/no-pass switches  258 , to its terminal N 25  via left and right ones of its four pass/no-pass switches  258  and/or to its terminal N 26  via left and bottom ones of its four pass/no-pass switches  258 . 
     Specification for Multiplexer (MUXER) 
     (1) First Type of Multiplexer 
       FIG.  4 A  is a circuit diagram illustrating a first type of multiplexer in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  4 A , a first type of multiplexer (MUXER)  211  may select one from its first set of inputs arranged in parallel into its output based on a combination of its second set of inputs arranged in parallel. For example, the first type of multiplexer (MUXER)  211  may have sixteen inputs D 0 -D 15  arranged in parallel to act as its first set of inputs and four inputs A 0 -A 3  arranged in parallel to act as its second set of inputs. The first type of multiplexer (MUXER)  211  may select one from its first set of sixteen inputs D 0 -D 15  into its output Dout based on a combination of its second set of four inputs A 0 -A 3 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  4 A , the first type of multiplexer  211  may include multiple stages of tri-state buffers, e.g., four stages of tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218 , coupling to one another stage by stage. For more elaboration, the first type of multiplexer  211  may include sixteen tri-state buffers  215  in eight pairs in the first stage, arranged in parallel, each having a first input coupling to one of the sixteen inputs D 0 -D 15  in the first set and a second input associated with the input A 3  in the second set. Each of the sixteen tri-state buffers  215  in the first stage may be switched on or off to pass or not to pass its first input into its output in accordance with its second input. The first type of multiplexer  211  may include an inverter  219  configured to invert its input coupling to the input A 3  in the second set into its output. One of the tri-state buffers  215  in each pair in the first stage may be switched on in accordance with its second input coupling to one of the input and output of the inverter  219  to pass its first input into its output; the other one of the tri-state buffers  215  in said each pair in the first stage may be switched off in accordance with its second input coupling to the other one of the input and output of the inverter  219  not to pass its first input into its output. The outputs of the tri-state buffers  215  in said each pair in the first stage may couple to each other. For example, a top one of the tri-state buffers  215  in a topmost pair in the first stage may have its first input coupling to the input D 0  in the first set and its second input coupling to the output of the inverter  219 ; a bottom one of the tri-state buffers  215  in the topmost pair in the first stage may have its first input coupling to the input D 1  in the first set and its second input coupling to the input of the inverter  219 . The top one of the tri-state buffers  215  in the topmost pair in the first stage may be switched on in accordance with its second input to pass its first input into its output; the bottom one of the tri-state buffers  215  in the topmost pair in the first stage may be switched off in accordance with its second input not to pass its first input into its output. Thereby, each of the eight pairs of tri-state buffers  215  in the first stage may be switched in accordance with its two second inputs coupling to the input and output of the inverter  219  respectively to pass one of its two first inputs into its output coupling to a first input of one of the tri-state buffers  216  in the second stage. 
     Referring to  FIG.  4 A , the first type of multiplexer  211  may include eight tri-state buffers  216  in four pairs in the second stage, arranged in parallel, each having a first input coupling to the output of one of the eight pairs of tri-state buffers  215  in the first stage and a second input associated with the input A 2  in the second set. Each of the eight tri-state buffers  216  in the second stage may be switched on or off to pass or not to pass its first input into its output in accordance with its second input. The first type of multiplexer  211  may include an inverter  220  configured to invert its input coupling to the input A 2  in the second set into its output. One of the tri-state buffers  216  in each pair in the second stage may be switched on in accordance with its second input coupling to one of the input and output of the inverter  220  to pass its first input into its output; the other one of the tri-state buffers  216  in said each pair in the second stage may be switched off in accordance with its second input coupling to the other one of the input and output of the inverter  220  not to pass its first input into its output. The outputs of the tri-state buffers  216  in said each pair in the second stage may couple to each other. For example, a top one of the tri-state buffers  216  in a topmost pair in the second stage may have its first input coupling to the output of a topmost one of the eight pairs of tri-state buffers  215  in the first stage and its second input coupling to the output of the inverter  220 ; a bottom one of the tri-state buffers  216  in the topmost pair in the second stage may have its first input coupling to the output of a second top one of the eight pairs of tri-state buffers  215  in the first stage and its second input coupling to the input of the inverter  220 . The top one of the tri-state buffers  216  in the topmost pair in the second stage may be switched on in accordance with its second input to pass its first input into its output; the bottom one of the tri-state buffers  216  in the topmost pair in the second stage may be switched off in accordance with its second input not to pass its first input into its output. Thereby, each of the four pairs of tri-state buffers  216  in the second stage may be switched in accordance with its two second inputs coupling to the input and output of the inverter  220  respectively to pass one of its two first inputs into its output coupling to a first input of one of the tri-state buffers  217  in the third stage. 
     Referring to  FIG.  4 A , the first type of multiplexer  211  may include four tri-state buffers  217  in two pairs in the third stage, arranged in parallel, each having a first input coupling to the output of one of the four pairs of tri-state buffers  216  in the second stage and a second input associated with the input A 1  in the second set. Each of the four tri-state buffers  217  in the third stage may be switched on or off to pass or not to pass its first input into its output in accordance with its second input. The first type of multiplexer  211  may include an inverter  207  configured to invert its input coupling to the input A 1  in the second set into its output. One of the tri-state buffers  217  in each pair in the third stage may be switched on in accordance with its second input coupling to one of the input and output of the inverter  207  to pass its first input into its output; the other one of the tri-state buffers  217  in said each pair in the third stage may be switched off in accordance with its second input coupling to the other one of the input and output of the inverter  207  not to pass its first input into its output. The outputs of the tri-state buffers  217  in said each pair in the third stage may couple to each other. For example, a top one of the tri-state buffers  217  in a top pair in the third stage may have its first input coupling to the output of a topmost one of the four pairs of tri-state buffers  216  in the second stage and its second input coupling to the output of the inverter  207 ; a bottom one of the tri-state buffers  217  in the top pair in the third stage may have its first input coupling to the output of a second top one of the four pairs of tri-state buffers  216  in the second stage and its second input coupling to the input of the inverter  207 . The top one of the tri-state buffers  217  in the top pair in the third stage may be switched on in accordance with its second input to pass its first input into its output; the bottom one of the tri-state buffers  217  in the top pair in the third stage may be switched off in accordance with its second input not to pass its first input into its output. Thereby, each of the two pairs of tri-state buffers  217  in the third stage may be switched in accordance with its two second inputs coupling to the input and output of the inverter  207  respectively to pass one of its two first inputs into its output coupling to a first input of one of the tri-state buffers  218  in the fourth stage. 
     Referring to  FIG.  4 A , the first type of multiplexer  211  may include a pair of two tri-state buffers  218  in the fourth stage, arranged in parallel, each having a first input coupling to the output of one of the two pairs of tri-state buffers  217  in the third stage and a second input associated with the input A 0  in the second set. Each of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the fourth stage may be switched on or off to pass or not to pass its first input into its output in accordance with its second input. The first type of multiplexer  211  may include an inverter  208  configured to invert its input coupling to the input A 0  in the second set into its output. One of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the fourth stage may be switched on in accordance with its second input coupling to one of the input and output of the inverter  208  to pass its first input into its output; the other one of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the fourth stage may be switched off in accordance with its second input coupling to the other one of the input and output of the inverter  208  not to pass its first input into its output. The outputs of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the fourth stage may couple to each other. For example, a top one of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the fourth stage may have its first input coupling to the output of a top one of the two pairs of tri-state buffers  217  in the third stage and its second input coupling to the output of the inverter  208 ; a bottom one of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the fourth stage may have its first input coupling to the output of a bottom one of the two pairs of tri-state buffers  217  in the third stage and its second input coupling to the input of the inverter  208 . The top one of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the fourth stage may be switched on in accordance with its second input to pass its first input into its output; the bottom one of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the fourth stage may be switched off in accordance with its second input not to pass its first input into its output. Thereby, the pair of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the fourth stage may be switched in accordance with its two second inputs coupling to the input and output of the inverter  208  respectively to pass one of its two first inputs into its output acting as the output Dout of the multiplexer  211  of the first type. 
       FIG.  4 B  is a circuit diagram illustrating a tri-state buffer of a multiplexer of a first type in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIGS.  4 A and  4 B , each of the tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218  may include (1) a P-type MOS transistor  231  configured to form a channel with an end at the first input of said each of the tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218  and the other opposite end at the output of said each of the tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218 , (2) a N-type MOS transistor  232  configured to form a channel with an end at the first input of said each of the tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218  and the other opposite end at the output of said each of the tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218 , and (3) an inverter  233  configured to invert its input, at the second input of said each of the tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218 , coupling to a gate terminal of the N-type MOS transistor  232  into its output coupling to a gate terminal of the P-type MOS transistor  231 . For each of the tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218 , when its inverter  233  has its input at a logic level of “1”, each of its P-type and N-type MOS transistors  231  and  232  may be switched on to pass its first input to its output via the channels of its P-type and N-type MOS transistors  231  and  232 ; when its inverter  233  has its input at a logic level of “0”, each of its P-type and N-type MOS transistors  231  and  232  may be switched off not to form any channel therein such that its first input may not be passed to its output. For the two tri-state buffers  215  in each pair in the first stage, their two respective inverters  233  may have their two respective inputs coupling respectively to the output and input of the inverter  219 , which are associated with the input A 3  in the second set. For the two tri-state buffers  216  in each pair in the second stage, their two respective inverters  233  may have their two respective inputs coupling respectively to the output and input of the inverter  220 , which are associated with the input A 2  in the second set. For the two tri-state buffers  217  in each pair in the third stage, their two respective inverters  233  may have their two respective inputs coupling respectively to the output and input of the inverter  207 , which are associated with the input A 1  in the second set. For the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the fourth stage, their two respective inverters  233  may have their two respective inputs coupling respectively to the output and input of the inverter  208 , which are associated with the input A 0  in the second set. 
     The first type of multiplexer (MUXER)  211  may select one from its first set of sixteen inputs D 0 -D 15  into its output Dout based on a combination of its second set of four inputs A 0 -A 3 . 
     (2) Second Type of Multiplexer 
       FIG.  4 C  is a circuit diagram of a second type of multiplexer in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  4 C , a second type of multiplexer  211  is similar to the first type of multiplexer  211  as illustrated in  FIGS.  4 A and  4 B  but may further include the third type of pass/no-pass switch or switch buffer  292  as seen in  FIG.  2 C  having its input at the node N 21  coupling to the output of the pair of tri-state buffers  218  in the last stage, e.g., in the fourth stage in this case. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  2 C,  4 A,  4 B and  4 C , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  4 C  may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIG.  2 C,  4 A or  4 B . Accordingly, referring to  FIG.  4 C , the third type of pass/no-pass switch  292  may amplify its input at the node N 21  into its output at the node N 22  acting as an output Dout of the multiplexer  211  of the second type. 
     The second type of multiplexer (MUXER)  211  may select one from its first set of sixteen inputs D 0 -D 15  into its output Dout based on a combination of its second set of four inputs A 0 -A 3 . 
     (3) Third Type of Multiplexer 
       FIG.  4 D  is a circuit diagram of a third type of multiplexer in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  4 D , a third type of multiplexer  211  is similar to the first type of multiplexer  211  as illustrated in  FIGS.  4 A and  4 B  but may further include the fourth type of pass/no-pass switch  292  or switch buffer as seen in  FIG.  2 D  having its input at the node N 21  coupling to the output of the pair of tri-state buffers  218  in the last stage, e.g., in the fourth stage in this case. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  2 C,  2 D,  4 A,  4 B,  4 C and  4 D , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  4 D  may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIG.  2 C,  2 D,  4 A,  4 B or  4 C . Accordingly, referring to  FIG.  4 D , the fourth type of pass/no-pass switch  292  may amplify its input at the node N 21  into its output at the node N 22  acting as an output Dout of the multiplexer  211  of the third type. 
     The third type of multiplexer (MUXER)  211  may select one from its first set of sixteen inputs D 0 -D 15  into its output Dout based on a combination of its second set of four inputs A 0 -A 3 . 
     Alternatively, the first, second or third type of multiplexer (MUXER)  211  may have the first set of inputs, arranged in parallel, having the number of 2 to the power of n and the second set of inputs, arranged in parallel, having the number of n, wherein the number n may be any integer greater than or equal to 2, such as between 2 and 64.  FIG.  4 E  is a schematic view showing a circuit diagram of a multiplexer in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. In this example, referring to  FIG.  4 E , each of the multiplexers  211  of the first through third types as illustrated in  FIGS.  4 A,  4 C and  4 D  may be modified with its second set of inputs A 0 -A 7 , having the number of n equal to 8, and its first set of 256 inputs D 0 -D 255 , i.e. the resulting values or programming codes for all combinations of its second set of inputs A 0 -A 7 , having the number of 2 to the power of n equal to 8. Each of the multiplexers  211  of the first through third types may include eight stages of tri-state buffers or switch buffers, each having the same architecture as illustrated in  FIG.  4 B , coupling to one another stage by stage. The tri-state buffers or switch buffers in the first stage, arranged in parallel, may have the number of 256 each having its first input coupling to one of the 256 inputs D 0 -D 255  of the first set of said each of the multiplexers  211  and each may be switched on or off to pass or not to pass its first input into an output in accordance with its second input associated with the input A 7  of the second set of said each of the multiplexers  211 . The tri-state buffers or switch buffers in each of the second through seventh stages, arranged in parallel, each may have its first input coupling to an output of one of multiple pairs of tri-state buffers or switch buffers in a stage previous to said each of the second through seventh stages and may be switched on or off to pass or not to pass its first input into an output in accordance with its second input associated with one of the respective inputs A 6 -A 1  of the second set of said each of the multiplexers  211 . Each of the tri-state buffers or switch buffers in a pair in the eighth stage may have its first input coupling to an output of one of multiple pairs of tri-state buffers or switch buffers in the seventh stage and may be switched on or off to pass or not to pass its first input into an output, which may act as an output Dout of the multiplexer  211 , in accordance with its second input associated with the input A 0  of the second set of said each of the multiplexers  211 . Alternatively, one of the pass/no-pass switches or switch buffers  292  as seen in  FIGS.  4 C and  4 D  may be incorporated to amplify its input coupling to the output of the tri-state buffers or switch buffers in the pair in the eighth stage into an output Dout, which may act as an output of the multiplexer  211 . 
     For example,  FIG.  4 F  is a schematic view showing a circuit diagram of a multiplexer in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  4 F , the second type of multiplexer  211  may have the first set of inputs D 0 , D 1  and D 3  arranged in parallel and the second set of inputs A 0  and A 1  arranged in parallel. The second type of multiplexer  211  may include two stages of tri-state buffers  217  and  218  coupling to each other stage by stage. For more elaboration, the second type of multiplexer  211  may include third tri-state buffers  217  in the first stage, arranged in parallel, each having a first input coupling to one of the third inputs D 0 -D 2  in the first set and a second input associated with the input A 1  in the second set. Each of the three tri-state buffers  217  in the first stage may be switched on or off to pass or not to pass its first input into its output in accordance with its second input. The second type of multiplexer  211  may include the inverter  207  configured to invert its input coupling to the input A 1  in the second set into its output. One of the top two tri-state buffers  217  in a pair in the first stage may be switched on in accordance with its second input coupling to one of the input and output of the inverter  207  to pass its first input into its output; the other one of the top two tri-state buffers  217  in the pair in the first stage may be switched off in accordance with its second input coupling to the other one of the input and output of the inverter  207  not to pass its first input into its output. The outputs of the top two tri-state buffers  217  in the pair in the first stage may couple to each other. Thereby, the pair of top two tri-state buffers  217  in the first stage may be switched in accordance with its two second inputs coupling to the input and output of the inverter  207  respectively to pass one of its two first inputs into its output coupling to a first input of one of the tri-state buffers  218  in the second stage. The bottom one of the tri-state buffers  217  in the first stage may be switched on or off in accordance with its second input coupling to the output of the inverter  207  to or not to pass its first input into its output coupling to a first input of another one of the tri-state buffers  218  in the second stage. 
     Referring to  FIG.  4 F , the second type of multiplexer  211  may include a pair of two tri-state buffers  218  in the second stage, arranged in parallel, a top one of which has a first input coupling to the output of the pair of top two tri-state buffers  217  in the first stage and a second input associated with the input A 0  in the second set, and a bottom one of which has a first input coupling to the output of the bottom one of the tri-state buffers  217  in the first stage and a second input associated with the input A 0  in the second set. Each of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the second stage may be switched on or off to pass or not to pass its first input into its output in accordance with its second input. The second type of multiplexer  211  may include the inverter  208  configured to invert its input coupling to the input A 0  in the second set into its output. One of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the second stage may be switched on in accordance with its second input coupling to one of the input and output of the inverter  208  to pass its first input into its output; the other one of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the second stage may be switched off in accordance with its second input coupling to the other one of the input and output of the inverter  208  not to pass its first input into its output. The outputs of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the pair in the second stage may couple to each other. Thereby, the pair of the two tri-state buffers  218  in the second stage may be switched in accordance with its two second inputs coupling to the input and output of the inverter  208  respectively to pass one of its two first inputs into its output. The second type of multiplexer  211  may further include the third type of pass/no-pass switch  292  as seen in  FIG.  2 C  having its input at the node N 21  coupling to the output of the pair of tri-state buffers  218  in the second stage. The third type of pass/no-pass switch  292  may amplify its input at the node N 21  into its output at the node N 22  acting as an output Dout of the multiplexer  211  of the second type. 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F , each of the tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218  may be replaced with a transistor, such as N-type MOS transistor or P-type MOS transistor, as seen in  FIGS.  4 G- 4 J .  FIGS.  4 G- 4 J  are schematic views showing circuit diagrams of multiplexers in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. For more elaboration, the first type of multiplexer  211  as seen in  FIG.  4 G  is similar to that as seen in  FIG.  4 A , but the difference therebetween is that each of the tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218  is replaced with a transistor, such as N-type MOS transistor or P-type MOS transistor. The second type of multiplexer  211  as seen in  FIG.  4 H  is similar to that as seen in  FIG.  4 C , but the difference therebetween is that each of the tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218  is replaced with a transistor, such as N-type MOS transistor or P-type MOS transistor. The third type of multiplexer  211  as seen in  FIG.  4 I  is similar to that as seen in  FIG.  4 D , but the difference therebetween is that each of the tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218  is replaced with a transistor, such as N-type MOS transistor or P-type MOS transistor. The second type of multiplexer  211  as seen in  FIG.  4 J  is similar to that as seen in  FIG.  4 F , but the difference therebetween is that each of the tri-state buffers  215 ,  216 ,  217  and  218  is replaced with a transistor, such as N-type MOS transistor or P-type MOS transistor. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  4 G- 4 J , each of the transistors  215  may be configured to form a channel with an input terminal coupling to what the first input of replaced one of the tri-state buffers  215  seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F  couples, and an output terminal coupling to what the output of the replaced one of the tri-state buffers  215  seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F  couples, and may have a gate terminal coupling to what the second input of the replaced one of the tri-state buffers  215  seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F  couples. Each of the transistors  216  may be configured to form a channel with an input terminal coupling to what the first input of replaced one of the tri-state buffers  216  seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F  couples, and an output terminal coupling to what the output of the replaced one of the tri-state buffers  216  seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F  couples, and may have a gate terminal coupling to what the second input of the replaced one of the tri-state buffers  216  seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F  couples. Each of the transistors  217  may be configured to form a channel with an input terminal coupling to what the first input of replaced one of the tri-state buffers  217  seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F  couples, and an output terminal coupling to what the output of the replaced one of the tri-state buffers  217  seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F  couples, and may have a gate terminal coupling to what the second input of the replaced one of the tri-state buffers  217  seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F  couples. Each of the transistors  218  may be configured to form a channel with an input terminal coupling to what the first input of replaced one of the tri-state buffers  218  seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F  couples, and an output terminal coupling to what the output of the replaced one of the tri-state buffers  218  seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F  couples, and may have a gate terminal coupling to what the second input of the replaced one of the tri-state buffers  218  seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 F  couples. 
     Specification for Cross-Point Switches Constructed from Multiplexers 
     The first and second types of cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 A and  3 B  are fabricated from a plurality of the pass/no-pass switches  258  seen in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F . Alternatively, cross-point switches  379  may be fabricated from either of the first through third types of multiplexers  211 , mentioned as below. 
     (1) Third Type of Cross-Point Switch 
       FIG.  3 C  is a circuit diagram illustrating a third type of cross-point switch composed of multiple multiplexers in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  3 C , the third type of cross-point switch  379  may include four multiplexers  211  of the first, second or third type as seen in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 J  each having three inputs in the first set and two inputs in the second set and being configured to pass one of its three inputs in the first set into an output in accordance with a combination of its two inputs in the second set. Particularly, the second type of the multiplexer  211  employed in the third type of cross-point switch  379  may be referred to that illustrated in  FIGS.  4 F and  4 J . Each of the three inputs D 0 -D 2  of the first set of one of the four multiplexers  211  may couple to one of its three inputs D 0 -D 2  of the first set of another two of the four multiplexers  211  and to an output Dout of the other one of the four multiplexers  211 . Thereby, each of the four multiplexers  211  may pass one of its three inputs D 0 -D 2  in the first set coupling to three respective metal lines extending in three different directions to the three outputs Dout of the other three of the four multiplexers  211  into its output Dout in accordance with a combination of its two inputs A 0  and A 1  in the second set. Each of the four multiplexers  211  may include the pass/no-pass switch or switch buffer  292  configured to be switched on or off in accordance with its input SC- 4  to pass or not to pass one of its three inputs D 0 -D 2  in the first set, passed in accordance with the second set of its inputs A 0  and A 1 , into its output Dout. For example, the top one of the four multiplexers  211  may pass one of its three inputs in the first set coupling to the three outputs Dout at nodes N 23 , N 26  and N 25  of the left, bottom and right ones of the four multiplexers  211  into its output Dout at a node N 24  in accordance with a combination of its two inputs A 0   1  and A 1   1  in the second set. The top one of the four multiplexers  211  may include the pass/no-pass switch or switch buffer  292  configured to be switched on or off in accordance with the second set of its input SC 1 - 4  to pass or not to pass one of its three inputs in the first set, passed in accordance with the second set of its inputs A 0   1  and A 1   1 , into its output Dout at the node N 24 . 
     (2) Fourth Type of Cross-Point Switch 
       FIG.  3 D  is a circuit diagram illustrating a fourth type of cross-point switch composed of a multiplexer in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  3 D , the fourth type of cross-point switch  379  may be provided from any of the multiplexers  211  of the first through third types as illustrated in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 J . When the fourth type of cross-point switch  379  is provided by one of the multiplexers  211  as illustrated in  FIGS.  4 A,  4 C,  4 D and  4 G- 4 I , it is configured to pass one of its 16 inputs D 0 -D 15  in the first set into its output Dout in accordance with a combination of its four inputs A 0 -A 3  in the second set. 
     Specification for Large I/O Circuits 
       FIG.  5 A  is a circuit diagram of a large I/O circuit in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  5 A , a semiconductor chip may include multiple I/O pads  272  each coupling to its large ESD protection circuit or device  273 , its large driver  274  and its large receiver  275 . The large driver  274 , large receiver  275  and large ESD protection circuit or device  273  may compose a large I/O circuit  341 . The large ESD protection circuit or device  273  may include a diode  282  having a cathode coupling to a power supply at a voltage of Vcc and an anode coupling to a node  281  and a diode  283  having a cathode coupling to the node  281  and an anode coupling to a ground reference at a voltage of Vss. The node  281  couples to one of the I/O pads  272 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 A , the large driver  274  may have a first input coupling to an L_Enable signal for enabling the large driver  274  and a second input coupling to data of L_Data_out for amplifying or driving the data of L_Data_out into its output at the node  281  to be transmitted to circuits outside the semiconductor chip through said one of the I/O pads  272 . The large driver  274  may include a P-type MOS transistor  285  and N-type MOS transistor  286  both having respective drain terminals coupling to each other as its output at the node  281  and respective source terminals coupling to the power supply at the voltage of Vcc and to the ground reference at the voltage of Vss. The large driver  274  may have a NAND gate  287  having an output coupling to a gate terminal of the P-type MOS transistor  285  and a NOR gate  288  having an output coupling to a gate terminal of the N-type MOS transistor  286 . The large driver  274  may include the NAND gate  287  having a first input coupling to an output of its inverter  289  and a second input coupling to the data of L_Data_out to perform a NAND operation on its first and second inputs into its output coupling to a gate terminal of its P-type MOS transistor  285 . The large driver  274  may include the NOR gate  288  having a first input coupling to the data of L_Data_out and a second input coupling to the L_Enable signal to perform a NOR operation on its first and second inputs into its output coupling to a gate terminal of the N-type MOS transistor  286 . The inverter  289  may be configured to invert its input coupling to the L_Enable signal into its output coupling to the first input of the NAND gate  287 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 A , when the L_Enable signal is at a logic level of “1”, the output of the NAND gate  287  is always at a logic level of “1” to turn off the P-type MOS transistor  285  and the output of the NOR gate  288  is always at a logic level of “0” to turn off the N-type MOS transistor  286 . Thereby, the large driver  274  may be disabled by the L_Enable signal and the data of L_Data_out may not be passed to the output of the large driver  274  at the node  281 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 A , the large driver  274  may be enabled when the L_Enable signal is at a logic level of “0”. Meanwhile, if the data of L_Data_out is at a logic level of “0”, the outputs of the NAND and NOR gates  287  and  288  are at logic level of “1” to turn off the P-type MOS transistor  285  and on the N-type MOS transistor  286 , and thereby the output of the large driver  274  at the node  281  is at a logic level of “0” to be passed to said one of the I/O pads  272 . If the data of L_Data_out is at a logic level of “1”, the outputs of the NAND and NOR gates  287  and  288  are at logic level of “0” to turn on the P-type MOS transistor  285  and off the N-type MOS transistor  286 , and thereby the output of the large driver  274  at the node  281  is at a logic level of “1” to be passed to said one of the I/O pads  272 . Accordingly, the large driver  274  may be enabled by the L_Enable signal to amplify or drive the data of L_Data_out into its output at the node  281  coupling to one of the I/O pads  272 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 A , the large receiver  275  may have a first input coupling to said one of the I/O pads  272  to be amplified or driven by the large receiver  275  into its output of L_Data_in and a second input coupling to an L_Inhibit signal to inhibit the large receiver  275  from generating its output of L_Data_in associated with data at its first input. The large receiver  275  may include a NAND gate  290  having a first input coupling to said one of the I/O pads  272  and a second input coupling to the L_Inhibit signal to perform a NAND operation on its first and second inputs into its output coupling to its inverter  291 . The inverter  291  may be configured to invert its input coupling to the output of the NAND gate  290  into its output acting as the output of L_Data_in of the large receiver  275 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 A , when the L_Inhibit signal is at a logic level of “0”, the output of the NAND gate  290  is always at a logic level of “1” and the output L_Data_in of the large receiver  275  is always at a logic level of “0”. Thereby, the large receiver  275  is inhibited from generating its output of L_Data_in associated with its first input at said one of the I/O pads  272 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 A , the large receiver  275  may be activated when the L_Inhibit signal is at a logic level of “1”. Meanwhile, if data from circuits outside the chip to said one of the I/O pads  272  is at a logic level of “1”, the NAND gate  290  has its output at a logic level of “0”, and thereby the large receiver  275  may have its output of L_Data_in at a logic level of “1”. If data from circuits outside the chip to said one of the I/O pads  272  is at a logic level of “0”, the NAND gate  290  has its output at a logic level of “1”, and thereby the large receiver  275  may have its output of L_Data_in at a logic level of “0”. Accordingly, the large receiver  275  may be activated by the L_Inhibit signal to amplify or drive data from circuits outside the chip to said one of the I/O pads  272  into its output of L_Data_in. 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 A , said one of the I/O pads  272  may have an input capacitance, provided by the large ESD protection circuit or device  273  and large receiver  275  for example, between 2 pF and 100 pF, between 2 pF and 50 pF, between 2 pF and 30 pF, or greater than 2 pF, 5 pF, 10 pF, 15 pF or 20 pF. The large driver  274  may have an output capacitance or driving capability or loading, for example, between 2 pF and 100 pF, between 2 pF and 50 pF, between 2 pF and 30 pF, or greater than 2 pF, 5 pF, 10 pF, 15 pF or 20 pF. The size of the large ESD protection circuit or device  273  may be between 0.5 pF and 20 pF, 0.5 pF and 15 pF, 0.5 pF and 10 pF 0.5 pF and 5 pF or 0.5 pF and 2 pF, or larger than 0.5 pF, 1 pF, 2 pF, 3 pF, 5 pF or 10 pF. 
     Specification for Small I/O Circuits 
       FIG.  5 B  is a circuit diagram of a small I/O circuit in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  5 B , a semiconductor chip may include multiple I/O pads  372  each coupling to its small ESD protection circuit or device  373 , its small driver  374  and its small receiver  375 . The small driver  374 , small receiver  375  and small ESD protection circuit or device  373  may compose a small I/O circuit  203 . The small ESD protection circuit or device  373  may include a diode  382  having a cathode coupling to a power supply at a voltage of Vcc and an anode coupling to a node  381  and a diode  383  having a cathode coupling to the node  381  and an anode coupling to a ground reference at a voltage of Vss. The node  381  couples to one of the I/O pads  372 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 B , the small driver  374  may have a first input coupling to an S_Enable signal for enabling the small driver  374  and a second input coupling to data of S_Data_out for amplifying or driving the data of S_Data_out into its output at the node  381  to be transmitted to circuits outside the semiconductor chip through said one of the I/O pads  372 . The small driver  374  may include a P-type MOS transistor  385  and N-type MOS transistor  386  both having respective drain terminals coupling to each other as its output at the node  381  and respective source terminals coupling to the power supply at the voltage of Vcc and to the ground reference at the voltage of Vss. The small driver  374  may have a NAND gate  387  having an output coupling to a gate terminal of the P-type MOS transistor  385  and a NOR gate  388  having an output coupling to a gate terminal of the N-type MOS transistor  386 . The small driver  374  may include the NAND gate  387  having a first input coupling to an output of its inverter  389  and a second input coupling to the data of S_Data_out to perform a NAND operation on its first and second inputs into its output coupling to a gate terminal of its P-type MOS transistor  385 . The small driver  374  may include the NOR gate  388  having a first input coupling to the data of S_Data_out and a second input coupling to the S_Enable signal to perform a NOR operation on its first and second inputs into its output coupling to a gate terminal of the N-type MOS transistor  386 . The inverter  389  may be configured to invert its input coupling to the S_Enable signal into its output coupling to the first input of the NAND gate  387 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 B , when the S_Enable signal is at a logic level of “1”, the output of the NAND gate  387  is always at a logic level of “1” to turn off the P-type MOS transistor  385  and the output of the NOR gate  388  is always at a logic level of “0” to turn off the N-type MOS transistor  386 . Thereby, the small driver  374  may be disabled by the S_Enable signal and the data of S_Data_out may not be passed to the output of the small driver  374  at the node  381 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 B , the small driver  374  may be enabled when the S_Enable signal is at a logic level of “0”. Meanwhile, if the data of S_Data_out is at a logic level of “0”, the outputs of the NAND and NOR gates  387  and  388  are at logic level of “1” to turn off the P-type MOS transistor  385  and on the N-type MOS transistor  386 , and thereby the output of the small driver  374  at the node  381  is at a logic level of “0” to be passed to said one of the I/O pads  372 . If the data of S_Data_out is at a logic level of “1”, the outputs of the NAND and NOR gates  387  and  388  are at logic level of “0” to turn on the P-type MOS transistor  385  and off the N-type MOS transistor  386 , and thereby the output of the small driver  374  at the node  381  is at a logic level of “1” to be passed to said one of the I/O pads  372 . Accordingly, the small driver  374  may be enabled by the S_Enable signal to amplify or drive the data of S_Data_out into its output at the node  381  coupling to one of the I/O pads  372 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 B , the small receiver  375  may have a first input coupling to said one of the I/O pads  372  to be amplified or driven by the small receiver  375  into its output of S_Data_in and a second input coupling to an S_Inhibit signal to inhibit the small receiver  375  from generating its output of S_Data_in associated with its first input. The small receiver  375  may include a NAND gate  390  having a first input coupling to said one of the I/O pads  372  and a second input coupling to the S_Inhibit signal to perform a NAND operation on its first and second inputs into its output coupling to its inverter  391 . The inverter  391  may be configured to invert its input coupling to the output of the NAND gate  390  into its output acting as the output of S_Data_in of the small receiver  375 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 B , when the S_Inhibit signal is at a logic level of “0”, the output of the NAND gate  390  is always at a logic level of “1” and the output S_Data_in of the small receiver  375  is always at a logic level of “0”. Thereby, the small receiver  375  is inhibited from generating its output of S_Data_in associated with its first input at said one of the I/O pads  372 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 B , the small receiver  375  may be activated when the S_Inhibit signal is at a logic level of “1”. Meanwhile, if data from circuits outside the semiconductor chip to said one of the I/O pads  372  is at a logic level of “1”, the NAND gate  390  has its output at a logic level of “0”, and thereby the small receiver  375  may have its output of S_Data_in at a logic level of “1”. If data from circuits outside the chip to said one of the I/O pads  372  is at a logic level of “0”, the NAND gate  390  has its output at a logic level of “1”, and thereby the small receiver  375  may have its output of S_Data_in at a logic level of “0”. Accordingly, the small receiver  375  may be activated by the S_Inhibit signal to amplify or drive data from circuits outside the chip to said one of the I/O pads  372  into its output of S_Data_in. 
     Referring to  FIG.  5 B , said one of the I/O pads  372  may have an input capacitance, provided by the small ESD protection circuit or device  373  and small receiver  375  for example, between 0.1 pF and 10 pF, between 0.1 pF and 5 pF, between 0.1 pF and 3 pF or between 0.1 pF and 2 pF, or smaller than 10 pF, 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF or 1 pF. The small driver  374  may have an output capacitance or driving capability or loading, for example, between 0.1 pF and 10 pF, between 0.1 pF and 5 pF, between 0.1 pF and 3 pF or between 0.1 pF and 2 pF, or smaller than 10 pF, 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF or 1 pF. The size of the small ESD protection circuit or device  373  may be between 0.05 pF and 10 pF, 0.05 pF and 5 pF, 0.05 pF and 2 pF or 0.05 pF and 1 pF; or smaller than 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF, 1 pF or 0.5 pF. 
     Specification for Programmable Logic Blocks 
       FIG.  6 A  is a schematic view showing a block diagram of a programmable logic block in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  6 A , a programmable logic block (LB)  201  may be of various types, including a look-up table (LUT)  210  and a multiplexer  211  having its first set of inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15  as illustrated in  FIG.  4 A,  4 C,  4 D or  4 G- 4 I  or D 0 -D 255  as illustrated in  FIG.  4 E , each coupling to one of resulting values or programming codes stored in the look-up table (LUT)  210  and its second set of inputs, e.g., four-digit inputs of A 0 -A 3  as illustrated in  FIG.  4 A,  4 C,  4 D or  4 G- 4 I  or eight-digit inputs of A 0 -A 7  as illustrated in  FIG.  4 E , configured to determine one of the inputs in its first set into its output, e.g., Dout as illustrated in  FIG.  4 A,  4 C- 4 E or  4 G- 4 I , acting as an output of the programmable logic block (LB)  201 . The inputs, e.g., A 0 -A 3  as illustrated in  FIG.  4 A,  4 C,  4 D or  4 G- 4 I  or A 0 -A 7  as illustrated in  FIG.  4 E , of the second set of the multiplexer  211  may act as inputs of the programmable logic block (LB)  201 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  6 A , the look-up table (LUT)  210  of the programmable logic block (LB)  201  may be composed of multiple memory cells  490  each configured to save or store one of the resulting values, i.e., programming codes. Each of the memory cells  490  may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B . Its multiplexer  211  may have its first set of inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15  as illustrated in  FIG.  4 A,  4 C,  4 D or  4 G- 4 I  or D 0 -D 255  as illustrated in  FIG.  4 E , each coupling to one of the outputs of one of the memory cells  490 , i.e., one of the outputs Out 1  and Out 2  of the memory cell  398 , for the look-up table (LUT)  210 . Thus, each of the resulting values or programming codes stored in the respective memory cells  490  may couple to one of the inputs of the first set of the multiplexer  211  of the programmable logic block (LB)  201 . 
     Furthermore, the programmable logic block (LB)  201  may be composed of another memory cell  490  configured to save or store a programming code, wherein the another memory cell  490  may have an output coupling to the input SC- 4  of the multi-stage tri-state buffer  292  as seen in  FIG.  4 C,  4 D,  4 H or  4 I  of the multiplexer  211  of the second or third type for the programmable logic block (LB)  201 . Each of the another memory cells  490  may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B . For its multiplexer  211  of the second or third type as seen in  FIG.  4 C,  4 D,  4 H or  4 I  for the programmable logic block (LB)  201 , its multi-stage tri-state buffer  292  may have the input SC- 4  coupling to one of the outputs Out 1  and Out 2  of one of the another memory cells  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B  configured to save or store a programming code to switch on or off it. Alternatively, for the multiplexer  211  of the second or third type as seen in  FIG.  4 C,  4 D,  4 H or  4 I  for the programmable logic block (LB)  201 , its multi-stage tri-state buffer  292  may be provided with the P-type and N-type MOS transistors  295  and  296  having gate terminals coupling respectively to the outputs Out 1  and Out 2  of one of the another memory cells  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B  configured to save or store a programming code to switch on or off it, wherein its inverter  297  as seen in  FIG.  4 C,  4 D,  4 H or  4 I  may be removed from it. 
     The programmable logic block  201  may be programed to perform logic operation or Boolean operation, such as AND, NAND, OR or NOR operation. For example, the look-up table  210  may be programed to lead the programmable logic block  201  to achieve the same logic operation as a logic operator as shown in  FIG.  6 B  performs. Referring to  FIG.  6 B , the logic operator may be provided with an AND gate  212  and NAND gate  213  arranged in parallel, wherein the AND gate  212  is configured to perform an AND operation on its two inputs X 0  and X 1 , i.e. two inputs of the logic operator, into an output and the NAND gate  213  is configured to perform an NAND operation on its two inputs X 2  and X 3 , i.e. the other two inputs of the logic operator, into an output, and with an NAND gate  214  having two inputs coupling to the outputs of the AND gate  212  and NAND gate  213  respectively. The NAND gate  214  is configured to perform an NAND operation on its two inputs into an output Y acting as an output of the logic operator. The programmable logic block (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  may achieve the same logic operation as the logic operator as illustrated in  FIG.  6 B  performs. For this case, the programmable logic block  201  may have four inputs, e.g., A 0 -A 3 , a first one A 0  of which may be equivalent to the input X 0 , a second one A 1  of which may be equivalent to the input X 1 , a third one A 2  of which may be equivalent to the input X 2 , and a fourth one A 3  of which may be equivalent to the input X 3 . The programmable logic block  201  may have an output, e.g., Dout, which may be equivalent to the output Y of the logic operator. 
       FIG.  6 C  shows the look-up table  210  configured for achieving the same logic operation as the logic operator as illustrated in  FIG.  6 B  performs. Referring to  FIG.  6 C , the look-up table  210  records or stores each of sixteen resulting values or programming codes of the logic operator as illustrated in  FIG.  6 B  that are generated respectively in accordance with sixteen combinations of its inputs X 0 -X 3 . The look-up table  210  may be programmed with the sixteen resulting values or programming codes respectively stored in the sixteen memory cells  490 , each of which may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B , having their outputs Out 1  or Out 2  coupling to the respective sixteen inputs D 0 -D 15  of the first set of the multiplexer  211 , as illustrated in  FIG.  4 A,  4 C,  4 D or  4 G- 4 I , for the programmable logic block (LB)  201 . The multiplexer  211  may be configured to determine one of its sixteen inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of the first set into its output, e.g., Dout as illustrated in  FIG.  4 A,  4 C,  4 D or  4 G- 4 I , in accordance with one of the combinations of its inputs A 0 -A 3  of the second set. The output Dout of the multiplexer  211  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  may act as the output of the programmable logic block (LB)  201 . 
     Alternatively, the programmable logic block  201  may be substituted with multiple programmable logic gates to be programmed to perform logic operation or Boolean operation as illustrated in  FIG.  6 B . 
     Alternatively, a plurality of the programmable logic block  201  may be programed to be integrated into a computation operator to perform computation operation, such as addition, subtraction, multiplication or division operation. The computation operator may be an adder, a multiplier, a multiplexer, a shift register, floating-point circuits and/or division circuits. For example, the computation operator may be configured to multiply two two-binary-digit numbers, i.e., [A 1 , A 0 ] and [A 3 , A 2 ], into a four-binary-digit output, i.e., [C 3 , C 2 , C 1 , C 0 ], as seen in  FIG.  6 D . Four programmable logic blocks  201 , as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A , may be programed to be integrated into the computation operator. Each of the programmable logic blocks  201  may generate one of the four binary digits, i.e., C 0 -C 3 , based on a combination of its inputs [A 1 , A 0 , A 3 , A 2 ]. In the multiplication of the two-binary-digit number, i.e., [A 1 , A 0 ], by the two-binary-digit number, i.e., [A 3 , A 2 ], the four programmable logic blocks  201  may generate their four respective outputs, i.e., the four binary digits C 0 -C 3 , based on a common combination of their inputs [A 1 , A 0 , A 3 , A 2 ]. The four programmable logic blocks  201  may be programed with four respective look-up tables  210 , i.e., Table-0, Table-1, Table-2 and Table-3. 
     For example, referring to  FIGS.  6 A and  6 D , multiple of the memory cells  490 , each of which may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B , may be composed for each of the four look-up tables  210 , i.e., Table-0, Table-1, Table-2 and Table-3, and each of the memory cells  490  for said each of the four look-up tables may be configured to store one of the resulting values, i.e., programming codes, for one of the four binary digits C 0 -C 3 . A first one of the four programmable logic blocks  201  may have its multiplexer  211  provided with its first set of inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , each coupling to one of the outputs Out 1  and Out 2  of one of the memory cells  490  for the look-up table (LUT) of Table-0 and its second set of inputs, e.g., A 0 -A 3 , configured to determine one of its inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of the first set into its output, e.g., Dout, acting as an output C 0  of the first one of the programmable logic block (LB)  201 . A second one of the four programmable logic blocks  201  may have its multiplexer  211  provided with its first set of inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , each coupling to one of the outputs Out 1  and Out 2  of one of the memory cells  490  for the look-up table (LUT) of Table-1 and its second set of inputs, e.g., A 0 -A 3 , configured to determine one of its inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of the first set into its output, e.g., Dout, acting as an output C 1  of the second one of the programmable logic block (LB)  201 . A third one of the four programmable logic blocks  201  may have its multiplexer  211  provided with its first set of inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , each coupling to one of the outputs Out 1  and Out 2  of one of the memory cells  490  for the look-up table (LUT) of Table-2 and its second set of inputs, e.g., A 0 -A 3 , configured to determine one of its inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of the first set into its output, e.g., Dout, acting as an output C 2  of the third one of the programmable logic block (LB)  201 . A fourth one of the four programmable logic blocks  201  may have its multiplexer  211  provided with its first set of inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , each coupling to one of the outputs Out 1  and Out 2  of one of the memory cells  490  for the look-up table (LUT) of Table-3 and its second set of inputs, e.g., A 0 -A 3 , configured to determine one of its inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of the first set into its output, e.g., Dout, acting as an output C 3  of the fourth one of the programmable logic block (LB)  201 . 
     Thereby, referring to  FIG.  6 D , the four programmable logic blocks  201  composing the computation operator may generate their four respective outputs, i.e., the four binary digits C 0 -C 3 , based on a common combination of their inputs [A 1 , A 0 , A 3 , A 2 ]. In this case, the inputs A 0 -A 3  of the four programmable logic blocks  201  may act as inputs of the computation operator and the outputs C 0 -C 3  of the four programmable logic blocks  201  may act as an output of the computation operator. The computation operator may generate a four-binary-digit output, i.e., [C 3 , C 2 , C 1 , C 0 ], based on a combination of its four-binary-digit input, i.e., [A 1 , A 0 , A 3 , A 2 ]. 
     Referring to  FIG.  6 D , in a particular case for multiplication of 3 by 3, each of the four programmable logic blocks  201  may have a combination of its inputs, i.e., [A 1 , A 0 , A 3 , A 2 ]=[1, 1, 1, 1], to determine one of the four binary digits, i.e., [C 3 , C 2 , C 1 , C 0 ]=[1, 0, 0, 1]. The first one of the four programmable logic blocks  201  may generate the binary digit C 0  at a logic level of “1” based on the combination of its inputs, i.e., [A 1 , A 0 , A 3 , A 2 ]=[1, 1, 1, 1]; the second one of the four programmable logic blocks  201  may generate the binary digit C 1  at a logic level of “0” based on the combination of its inputs, i.e., [A 1 , A 0 , A 3 , A 2 ]=[1, 1, 1, 1]; the third one of the four programmable logic blocks  201  may generate the binary digit C 2  at a logic level of “0” based on the combination of its inputs, i.e., [A 1 , A 0 , A 3 , A 2 ]=[1, 1, 1, 1]; the fourth one of the four programmable logic blocks  201  may generate the binary digit C 3  at a logic level of “1” based on the combination for its inputs, i.e., [A 1 , A 0 , A 3 , A 2 ]=[1, 1, 1, 1]. 
     Alternatively, the four programmable logic blocks  201  may be substituted with multiple programmable logic gates as illustrated in  FIG.  6 E  to be programmed for a computation operator performing the same computation operation as the four programmable logic blocks  201 . Referring to  FIG.  6 E , the computation operator may be programed to perform multiplication on two numbers each expressed by two binary digits, e.g., [A 1 , A 0 ] and [A 3 , A 2 ] as illustrated in  FIG.  6 D , into a four-binary-digit output, e.g., [C 3 , C 2 , C 1 , C 0 ] as illustrated in  FIG.  6 D . The computation operator may be programed with an AND gate  234  configured to perform AND operation on its two inputs respectively at the inputs A 0  and A 3  of the computation operator into an output. The programmable logic gates may be programed with an AND gate  235  configured to perform AND operation on its two inputs respectively at the inputs A 0  and A 2  of the computation operator into an output acting as the output C 0  of the computation operator. The computation operator may be programed with an AND gate  236  configured to perform AND operation on its two inputs respectively at the inputs A 1  and A 2  of the computation operator into an output. The computation operator may be programed with an AND gate  237  configured to perform AND operation on its two inputs respectively at the inputs A 1  and A 3  of the computation operator into an output. The computation operator may be programed with an ExOR gate  238  configured to perform Exclusive-OR operation on its two inputs coupling respectively to the outputs of the AND gates  234  and  236  into an output acting as the output C 1  of the computation operator. The computation operator may be programed with an AND gate  239  configured to perform AND operation on its two inputs coupling respectively to the outputs of the AND gates  234  and  236  into an output. The computation operator may be programed with an ExOR gate  242  configured to perform Exclusive-OR operation on its two inputs coupling respectively to the outputs of the AND gates  239  and  237  into an output acting as the output C 2  of the computation operator. The computation operator may be programed with an AND gate  253  configured to perform AND operation on its two inputs coupling respectively to the outputs of the AND gates  239  and  237  into an output acting as the output C 3  of the computation operator. 
     To sum up, the programmable logic block  201  may be provided with the memory cells  490 , having the number of 2 to the power of n, for the look-up table  210  to be programed respectively to store the resulting values or programming codes, having the number of 2 to the power of n, for each combination of its inputs having the number of n. For example, the number of n may be any integer greater than or equal to 2, such as between 2 and 64. For the example as illustrated in  FIGS.  6 C and  6 D , each of the programmable logic blocks  201  may be provided with its inputs having the number of n equal to 4, and thus the number of resulting values or programming codes for all combinations of its inputs is 16, i.e., the number of 2 to the power of n equal to 4. 
     Accordingly, the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  may perform logic operation on its inputs into an output, wherein the logic operation may include Boolean operation such as AND, NAND, OR or NOR operation. Besides, the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  may perform computation operation on its inputs into an output, wherein the computation operation may include addition, subtraction, multiplication or division operation. 
     Specification for Programmable Interconnect 
       FIG.  7 A  is a block diagram illustrating a programmable interconnect programmed by a pass/no-pass switch in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  7 A , two programmable interconnects  361  may be controlled, by the pass/no-pass switch  258  of either of the first through sixth types as seen in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F , to couple to each other. One of the programmable interconnects  361  may couple to the node N 21  of the pass/no-pass switch  258 , and another of the programmable interconnects  361  may couple to the node N 22  of the pass/no-pass switch  258 . Accordingly, the pass/no-pass switch  258  may be switched on to connect said one of the programmable interconnects  361  to said another of the programmable interconnects  361 ; the pass/no-pass switch  258  may be switched off to disconnect said one of the programmable interconnects  361  from said another of the programmable interconnects  361 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  7 A , a memory cell  362  may couple to the pass/no-pass switch  258  to turn on or off the pass/no-pass switch  258 , wherein the memory cell  362  may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B . For the first type of pass/no-pass switch  258  as illustrated in  FIG.  2 A  used to program the programmable interconnects  361 , the first type of pass/no-pass switch  258  may have its nodes SC- 1  and SC- 2  coupling to two outputs of one of memory cells  362 , i.e., the two outputs Out 1  and Out 2  of the memory cell  398 , and accordingly receiving the two outputs of the memory cell  362  associated with the programming code stored or saved in the memory cell  362  to switch on or off the first type of pass/no-pass switch  258  to couple or decouple two of the programmable interconnects  361  coupling to the two nodes N 21  and N 22  of the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the first type respectively. For the second type of pass/no-pass switch  258  as illustrated in  FIG.  2 B  used to program the programmable interconnects  361 , the second type of pass/no-pass switch  258  may have its node SC- 3  coupling to an output of a memory cell  362 , i.e., the output Out 1  or Out 2  of the memory cell  398 , and accordingly receiving the output of the memory cell  362  associated with the programming code stored or saved in the memory cell  362  to switch on or off the second type of pass/no-pass switch  258  to couple or decouple two of the programmable interconnects  361  coupling to the two nodes N 21  and N 22  of the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the second type respectively. For the third or fourth type of pass/no-pass switch  258  as illustrated in  FIG.  2 C or  2 D  used to program the programmable interconnects  361 , the third or fourth type of pass/no-pass switch  258  may have its node SC- 4  coupling to an output of a memory cell  362 , i.e., the output Out 1  or Out 2  of the memory cell  398 , and accordingly receiving the output of the memory cell  362  associated with the programming code stored or saved in the memory cell  362  to switch on or off the third or fourth type of pass/no-pass switch  258  to couple or decouple two of the programmable interconnects  361  coupling to the two nodes N 21  and N 22  of the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the third or fourth type respectively. Alternatively, its P-type and N-type MOS transistors  295  and  296  may have gate terminals coupling respectively to two outputs of a memory cell  362 , i.e., the two outputs Out 1  and Out 2  of the memory cell  398 , and accordingly receiving the two outputs of the memory cell  362  associated with the programming code stored or saved in the memory cell  362  to switch on or off the third or fourth type of pass/no-pass switch  258  to couple or decouple two of the programmable interconnects  361  coupling to the two nodes N 21  and N 22  of the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the third or fourth type respectively, wherein its inverter  297  may be removed from the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the third or fourth type. For the fifth or sixth type of pass/no-pass switch  258  as illustrated in  FIG.  2 E or  2 F  used to program the programmable interconnects  361 , the fifth or sixth type of pass/no-pass switch  258  may have its nodes SC- 5  and SC- 6  coupling to two outputs of two respective memory cells  362 , i.e., the two outputs Out 1  or Out 2  of the two memory cells  398 , and accordingly receiving the two outputs of the two memory cells  362  associated with two programming codes stored or saved in the two memory cells  362  respectively to switch on or off the fifth or sixth type of pass/no-pass switch  258  to couple or decouple two of the programmable interconnects  361  coupling to the two nodes N 21  and N 22  of the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the fifth or sixth type respectively. Alternatively, (1) its P-type and N-type MOS transistors  295  and  296  at its left side may have gate terminals coupling respectively to two outputs of one of the memory cells  362 , i.e., the two outputs Out 1  and Out 2  of one of the memory cells  398 , and accordingly receiving the two outputs of said one of the memory cell  362  associated with the programming code stored or saved in said one of the memory cell  362 , and (2) its P-type and N-type MOS transistors  295  and  296  at its right side may have gate terminals coupling respectively to two outputs of another of the memory cells  362 , i.e., the two outputs Out 1  and Out 2  of another of the memory cells  398 , and accordingly receiving the two outputs of said another of the memory cell  362  associated with the programming code stored or saved in said another of the memory cell  362 , to switch on or off the fifth or sixth type of pass/no-pass switch  258  to couple or decouple two of the programmable interconnects  361  coupling to the two nodes N 21  and N 22  of the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the fifth or sixth type respectively, wherein its inverters  297  may be removed from the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the fifth or sixth type. Before the memory cell(s)  362  are programmed or when the memory cell(s)  362  are being programmed, the programmable interconnects  361  may not be used for signal transmission. The memory cell(s)  362  may be programmed to have the pass/no-pass switch  258  switched on to couple the programmable interconnects  361  for signal transmission or to have the pass/no-pass switch  258  switched off to decouple the programmable interconnects  361 . Similarly, each of the first and second types of cross-point switches  379  as seen in  FIGS.  3 A and  3 B  may be composed of a plurality of the pass/no-pass switch  258  of any type, wherein each of the pass/no-pass switches  258  may have the node(s) (SC- 1  and SC- 2 ), SC- 3 , SC- 4  or (SC- 5  and SC- 6 ) coupling to the output(s) of the memory cell(s)  362 , i.e., the output(s) Out 1  or Out 2  of the memory cell(s)  398 , and accordingly receiving the output(s) of the memory cell(s)  362  associated with the programming code(s) stored or saved in the memory cell(s)  362  to switch on or off said each of the pass/no-pass switches  258  to couple or decouple two of the programmable interconnects  361  coupling to the two nodes N 21  and N 22  of said each of the pass/no-pass switches  258  respectively. 
       FIG.  7 B  is a circuit diagram illustrating programmable interconnects programmed by a cross-point switch in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  7 B , four programmable interconnects  361  may couple to the respective four nodes N 23 -N 26  of the cross-point switch  379  of the third type as seen in  FIG.  3 C . Thereby, one of the four programmable interconnects  361  may be switched by the cross-point switch  379  of the third type to couple to another one, two or three of the four programmable interconnects  361 . For the cross-point switch  379  composed of four of the multiplexers  211  of the first type, each of the multiplexers  211  may have its second set of two inputs A 0  and A 1  coupling respectively to the outputs of two of the memory cells  362 . For the cross-point switch  379  composed of four of the multiplexers  211  of the second or third type as seen in  FIG.  4 F or  4 J  for the second type, each of the multiplexers  211  may have its second set of two inputs A 0  and A 1  coupling respectively to the outputs of two of the memory cells  362 , i.e., the outputs Out 1  or Out 2  of the two memory cells  398 , and its node SC- 4  may couple to the output of another of the memory cells  362 , i.e., the output Out 1  or Out 2  of the three memory cell  398 . Alternatively, its P-type and N-type MOS transistors  295  and  296  may have gate terminals coupling respectively to two outputs of a memory cell  362 , i.e., the two outputs Out 1  and Out 2  of the memory cell  398 , and accordingly receiving the two outputs of the memory cell  362  associated with the programming code stored or saved in the memory cell  362  to switch on or off its pass/no-pass switch  258  of the third or fourth type to couple or decouple the input and output Dout of its pass/no-pass switch  258  of the third or fourth type, wherein its inverter  297  may be removed from the pass/no-pass switch  258  of the third or fourth type. Accordingly, each of the multiplexers  211  may pass its first set of three inputs coupling to three of the four programmable interconnects  361  into its output coupling to the other one of the four programmable interconnects  361  in accordance with its second set of two inputs A 0  and A 1  and alternatively further in accordance with a logic level at the node SC- 4  or logic levels at gate terminals of its P-type and N-type MOS transistors  295  and  296 . 
     For example, referring to  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B , the following description takes the cross-point switch  379  composed of four of the multiplexers  211  of the second or third type as an example. For programming the programmable interconnects  361 , the top one of the multiplexers  211  may have its second set of inputs A 0   1 , A 1   1  and SC 1 - 4  coupling to the outputs of the three memory cells  362 - 1 , i.e., the outputs Out 1  or Out 2  of the three memory cells  398 , respectively, the left one of the multiplexers  211  may have its second set of inputs A 0   2 , A 1   2  and SC 2 - 4  coupling to the outputs of the three memory cells  362 - 2 , i.e., the outputs Out 1  or Out 2  of the three memory cells  398 , respectively, the bottom one of the multiplexers  211  may have its second set of inputs A 0   3 , A 1   3  and SC 3 - 4  coupling to the outputs of the three memory cells  362 - 3 , i.e., the outputs Out 1  or Out 2  of the three memory cells  398 , respectively, and the right one of the multiplexers  211  may have its second set of inputs A 0   4 , A 1   4  and SC 4 - 4  coupling to the outputs of the three memory cells  362 - 4 , i.e., the outputs Out 1  or Out 2  of the three memory cells  398 , respectively. Before the memory cells  362 - 1 ,  362 - 2 ,  362 - 3  and  362 - 4  are programmed or when the memory cells  362 - 1 ,  362 - 2 ,  362 - 3  and  362 - 4  are being programmed, the four programmable interconnects  361  may not be used for signal transmission. The memory cells  362 - 1 ,  362 - 2 ,  362 - 3  and  362 - 4  may be programmed to have each of the multiplexers  211  of the second or third type pass one of its three inputs of the first set into its output such that one of the four programmable interconnects  361  may couple to another, another two or another three of the four programmable interconnects  361  for signal transmission in operation. 
       FIG.  7 C  is a circuit diagram illustrating a programmable interconnect programmed by a cross-point switch in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  7 C , the fourth type of cross-point switch  379  illustrated in  FIG.  3 D  may have the first set of its inputs, e.g., 16 inputs D 0 -D 15 , coupling respectively to multiple of the programmable interconnects  361 , e.g., sixteen of the programmable interconnects  361 , and its output, e.g., Dout, coupling to another of the programmable interconnects  361 . Thereby, said multiple of the programmable interconnects  361  may have one to be switched by the fourth type of cross-point switch  379  to associate with said another of the programmable interconnects  361 . The fourth type of cross-point switch  379  may have its second set of multiple inputs A 0 -A 3  coupling respectively to the outputs of four of the memory cells  362 , i.e., the outputs Out 1  or Out 2  of the four memory cells  398 , and accordingly receiving the outputs of the four respective memory cells  362  associated with the four programming codes stored or saved in the four respective memory cells  362  to pass one of its inputs of the first set, e.g., D 0 -D 15  coupling to the sixteen of the programmable interconnects  361 , into its output, e.g., Dout coupling to said another of the programmable interconnects  361 . Before the memory cells  362  are programmed or when the memory cells  362  are being programmed, said multiple of the programmable interconnects  361  and said another of the programmable interconnects  361  may not be used for signal transmission. The memory cells  362  may be programmed to have the fourth type of cross-point switch  379  pass one of its inputs of the first set into its output such that one of said multiple of the programmable interconnects  361  may couple to said another of the programmable interconnects  361  for signal transmission in operation. 
     Specification for Fixed Interconnect 
     Before the memory cells  490  for the look-up table (LUT)  210  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  and the memory cells  362  for the programmable interconnects  361  as seen in  FIGS.  7 A- 7 C  are programmed or when the memory cells  490  for the look-up table (LUT)  210  and the memory cells  362  for the programmable interconnects  361  are being programmed, multiple fixed interconnects  364  that are not field programmable may be provided for signal transmission or power/ground delivery to (1) the memory cells  490  of the look-up table (LUT)  210  of the programmable logic block (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  for programming the memory cells  490  and/or (2) the memory cells  362  as seen in  FIGS.  7 A- 7 C  for the programmable interconnects  361  for programming the memory cells  362 . After the memory cells  490  for the look-up table (LUT)  210  and the memory cells  362  for the programmable interconnects  361  are programmed, the fixed interconnects  364  may be used for signal transmission or power/ground delivery in operation. 
     Specification for Standard Commodity Field-Programmable-Gate-Array (FPGA) Integrated-Circuit (IC) Chip 
       FIG.  8 A  is a schematically top view showing a block diagram of a standard commodity FPGA IC chip in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  8 A , a standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  is designed, implemented and fabricated using an advanced semiconductor technology node or generation, for example more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm; with a chip size and manufacturing yield optimized with the minimum manufacturing cost for the used semiconductor technology node or generation. The standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  may have an area between 400 mm 2  and 9 mm 2 , 225 mm 2  and 9 mm 2 , 144 mm 2  and 16 mm 2 , 100 mm 2  and 16 mm 2 , 75 mm 2  and 16 mm 2 , or 50 mm 2  and 16 mm 2 . Transistors or semiconductor devices of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  used in the advanced semiconductor technology node or generation may be a FIN Field-Effect-Transistor (FINFET), a FINFET on Silicon-On-Insulator (FINFET SOI), a Fully Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 A , since the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  is a standard commodity IC chip, the number of types of products for the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  may be reduced to a small number, and therefore expensive photo masks or mask sets for fabricating the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  using advanced semiconductor nodes or generations may be reduced to a few mask sets. For example, the mask sets for a specific technology node or generation may be reduced down to between 3 and 20, 3 and 10, or 3 and 5. Its NRE and production expenses are therefore greatly reduced. With the few types of products for the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , the manufacturing processes may be optimized to achieve very high manufacturing chip yields. Furthermore, the chip inventory management becomes easy, efficient and effective, therefore resulting in a relatively short chip delivery time and becoming very cost-effective. 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 A , the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  may be of various types, including (1) multiple of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as illustrated in  FIGS.  6 A- 6 E  arranged in an array in a central region thereof, (2) multiple intra-chip interconnects  502  each extending over spaces between neighboring two of the programmable logic blocks  201 , and (3) multiple of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203 , as illustrated in  FIG.  5 B , each having its output S_Data_in coupling to one or more of the intra-chip interconnects  502  and its input S_Data_out, S_Enable or S_Inhibit coupling to another one or more of intra-chip interconnects  502   
     Referring to  FIG.  8 A , each of the intra-chip interconnects  502  may be the programmable interconnect  361  or fixed interconnect  364  as illustrated in  FIG.  7 A- 7 C . For the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , each of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203 , as illustrated in  FIG.  5 B , may have its output S_Data_in coupling to one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  and/or one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  and its input S_Data_out, S_Enable or S_Inhibit coupling to another one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  and/or another one or more of the fixed interconnects  364 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 A , each of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as illustrated in  FIGS.  6 A- 6 E  may have its inputs, e.g., A 0 -A 3 , each coupling to one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  and/or one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  and may be configured to perform logic operation or computation operation on its inputs into an output, e.g., Dout, coupling to another one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  and/or another one or more of the fixed interconnects  364 . The computation operation may include an addition, subtraction, multiplication or division operation; alternatively, the logic operation may include a Boolean operation such as AND, NAND, OR or NOR operation. 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 A , the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  may include multiple of the I/O pads  372  as seen in  FIG.  5 B , each vertically over one of its small input/output (I/O) circuits  203 , coupling to the node  381  of said one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203 . In a first clock, the output Dout of one of the programmable logic blocks  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A  may be transmitted to the input S_Data_out of the small driver  374  of one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  through one or more of the programmable interconnects  361 , and then the small driver  374  of said one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  may amplify its input S_Data_out to be transmitted to one of the I/O pads  372  vertically over said one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  for external connection to circuits outside the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 . In a second clock, a signal from circuits outside the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  may be transmitted to the small receiver  375  of said one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  through said one of the I/O pads  372 , and then the small receiver  375  of said one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  may amplify the signal into its output S_Data_in to be transmitted to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of another of the programmable logic blocks  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A  through another one or more of the programmable interconnects  361 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 A , the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  may further include (1) multiple power pads  205  for applying the power supply voltage, i.e., Vcc, to the memory cells  490  for the look-up tables (LUT)  210  of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A  and/or the memory cells  362  for the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  7 A- 7 C  through one or more of the fixed interconnects  364 , wherein the power supply voltage, i.e., Vcc, may be between 0.2V and 2.5V, between 0.2V and 2V, between 0.2V and 1.5V, between 0.1V and 1V, or between 0.2V and 1V, or, smaller or lower than or equal to 2.5V, 2V, 1.8V, 1.5V or 1V, and (2) multiple ground pads  206  for providing ground reference voltage, i.e., Vss, to the memory cells  490  for the look-up tables (LUT)  210  of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A  and/or the memory cells  362  for the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  7 A- 7 C  through one or more of the fixed interconnects  364 . 
     I. Arrangements for Memory Cells, Multiplexers and Pass/No-Pass Switches for Standard Commodity FPGA IC Chip 
       FIGS.  8 B through  8 E  are schematic views showing various arrangements for (1) the memory cells  490 , employed for the look-up tables  210 , and the multiplexers  211  for the programmable logic blocks  201  and (2) the memory cells  362  and the pass/no-pass switches  258  for the programmable interconnects  361  in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. The pass/no-pass switches  258  may compose the first and second types of cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 A and  3 B  respectively. The various arrangements are mentioned as below: 
     (1) First Arrangement for Memory Cells, Multiplexers and Pass/No-Pass Switches for Standard Commodity FPGA IC Chip 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 B , for each of the programmable logic blocks  201  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , the memory cells  490  for one of its look-up tables  210  may be distributed on and/or over a first area of a semiconductor substrate  2  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , and one of its multiplexers  211  coupling to the memory cells  490  for said one of its look-up tables  210  may be distributed on and/or over a second area of the semiconductor substrate  2  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , wherein the first area is nearby or close to the second area. Each of the programmable logic blocks  201  may include one or more of multiplexers  211  and one or more groups of memory cells  490  employed for one or more of look-up tables  210  respectively and coupled to the first set of inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of said one or more of multiplexers  211  respectively, wherein each of the memory cells  490  in said one or more groups may store one of the resulting values or programming codes for said one or more of look-up tables  210  and may have an output coupling to one of the inputs of the first set, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of said one or more of multiplexers  211 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 B , a group of memory cells  362  employed for the programmable interconnects  361  as seen in  FIG.  7 A  may be distributed in one or more lines between neighboring two of the programmable logic blocks  201 . Also, a group of pass/no-pass switches  258  employed for the programmable interconnects  361  as seen in  FIG.  7 A  may be distributed in one or more lines between said neighboring two of the programmable logic blocks  201 . The group of pass/no-pass switches  258  and the group of memory cells  362  compose the cross-point switch  379  as seen in  FIG.  3 A or  3 B . Each of the pass/no-pass switches  258  in the group may couple one or more of the memory cells  362  in the group. 
     (2) Second Arrangement for Memory Cells, Multiplexers and Pass/No-Pass Switches for Standard Commodity FPGA IC Chip 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 C , for the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , the memory cells  490  employed for all of its look-up tables  210  and the memory cells  362  employed for all of its programmable interconnects  361  may be aggregately distributed in a memory-array block  395  in a certain area of its semiconductor substrate  2 . For more elaboration, for the same programmable logic block  201 , the memory cells  490  employed for its one or more look-up tables (LUTs)  210  and its one or more multiplexers  211  may be arranged in two separate areas, in one of which are the memory cells  490  employed for its one or more look-up tables (LUTs)  210  and in the other one of which are its one or more multiplexers  211 . The pass/no-pass switches  258  employed for programmable interconnects  361  may be distributed in one or more lines between the multiplexers  211  of neighboring two of the programmable logic blocks  201 . 
     (3) Third Arrangement for Memory Cells, Multiplexers and Pass/No-Pass Switches for Standard Commodity FPGA IC Chip 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 D , for the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , the memory cells  490  employed for all of its look-up tables  210  and the memory cells  362  employed for all of its programmable interconnects  361  may be aggregately distributed in multiple separate memory-array blocks  395   a  and  395   b  in multiple certain areas of its semiconductor substrate  2 . For more elaboration, for the same programmable logic block  201 , the memory cells  490  employed for its one or more look-up tables (LUTs)  210  and its one or more multiplexers  211  may be arranged in two separate areas, in one of which are the memory cells  490  employed for its one or more look-up tables (LUTs)  210  and in the other one of which are its one or more multiplexers  211 . The pass/no-pass switches  258  employed for programmable interconnects  361  may be distributed in one or more lines between the multiplexers  211  of neighboring two of the programmable logic blocks  201 . For the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , some of its multiplexers  211  and some of the pass/no-pass switches  258  may be arranged between the memory-array blocks  395   a  and  395   b.    
     (4) Fourth Arrangement for Memory Cells, Multiplexers and Pass/No-Pass Switches for Standard Commodity FPGA IC Chip 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 E , for the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , the memory cells  362  employed for its programmable interconnects  361  may be aggregately arranged in a memory-array block  395  in a certain area of the semiconductor substrate  2  and coupled to (1) multiple first groups of its pass/no-pass switches  258  arranged on or over its semiconductor substrate  2 , wherein each of its pass/no-pass switches  258  in the first groups may be between neighboring two of its programmable logic blocks  201  in the same row or between the memory-array block  395  and one of its programmable logic blocks  201  in the same row, (2) multiple second groups of its pass/no-pass switches  258  arranged on or over its semiconductor substrate  2 , wherein each of its pass/no-pass switches  258  in the second groups may be between neighboring two of its programmable logic blocks  201  in the same column or between the memory-array block  395  and one of its programmable logic blocks  201  in the same column, and (3) multiple third groups of the pass/no-pass switches  258  arranged on or over the semiconductor substrate  2 , wherein each of its pass/no-pass switches  258  in the third groups may be between neighboring two of the first groups of the pass/no-pass switches  258  in the same column and between neighboring two of the second groups of the pass/no-pass switches  258  in the same row. For the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , each of its programmable logic blocks  201  may include one or more multiplexers  211  and one or more groups of memory cells  490  employed for one or more of look-up tables  210  respectively and coupled to the first set of inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of said one or more of multiplexers  211  respectively, as illustrated in  FIG.  8 B , wherein each of the memory cells  490  in said one or more groups may store one of the resulting values or programming codes for said one or more of look-up tables  210  and may have an output coupling to one of the inputs of the first set, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of said one or more of multiplexers  211 . 
     (5) Fifth Arrangement for Memory Cells, Multiplexers and Pass/No-Pass Switches for Standard Commodity FPGA IC Chip 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 F , for the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , the memory cells  262  for the programmable interconnects  361  may be aggregately distributed in multiple memory-array blocks  395  on or over its semiconductor substrate  2  and coupled to (1) multiple first groups of its pass/no-pass switches  258  arranged on or over its semiconductor substrate  2 , wherein each of its pass/no-pass switches  258  in the first groups may be between neighboring two of its programmable logic blocks  201  in the same row or between one of the memory-array blocks  395  and one of its programmable logic blocks  201  in the same row, (2) multiple second groups of its pass/no-pass switches  258  arranged on or over its semiconductor substrate  2 , wherein each of its pass/no-pass switches  258  in the second groups may be between neighboring two of its programmable logic blocks  201  in the same column or between one of the memory-array blocks  395  and one of its programmable logic blocks  201  in the same column, and (3) multiple third groups of the pass/no-pass switches  258  arranged on or over the semiconductor substrate  2 , wherein each of its pass/no-pass switches  258  in the third groups may be between neighboring two of the first groups of the pass/no-pass switches  258  in the same column and between neighboring two of the second groups of the pass/no-pass switches  258  in the same row. For the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , each of its programmable logic blocks  201  may include one or more multiplexers  211  and one or more groups of memory cells  490  employed for one or more of look-up tables  210  respectively, as illustrated in  FIG.  8 B , wherein each of the memory cells  490  in said one or more groups may store one of the resulting values or programming codes for said one or more of look-up tables  210  and may have an output coupling to one of the inputs of the first set, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of said one or more of multiplexers  211 . One or more of the programmable logic blocks  201  may be positioned between the memory-array blocks  395 . 
     (6) Memory Cells for First Through Fifth Arrangements 
     Referring to  FIGS.  8 B- 8 F , for the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , the memory cells  490  for its look-up tables (LUTs)  210  may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B , each of which may generate an output Out 1  or Out 2  coupling to one of the inputs D 0 -D 15  of the first set of its multiplexer  211  as illustrated in  FIGS.  6 A- 6 E , wherein its multiplexer  211  may be one of the first through third types as illustrated in  FIGS.  4 A- 4 J . The memory cells  362  for its programmable interconnects  361  may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B , each of which may generate (an) output(s) Out 1  and/or Out 2  coupling to its pass/no-pass switch  258  as illustrated in  FIG.  7 A , wherein its pass/no-pass switch  258  may be one of the first through sixth types as illustrated in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F . 
     II. Arrangement for by-Pass Interconnects for Standard Commodity FPGA IC Chip 
       FIG.  8 G  is a top view showing programmable interconnects serving as by-pass interconnects in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  8 G , the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  may include (1) a first group of programmable interconnects  361  to serve as by-pass interconnects  279  each coupling one of the cross-point switches  379  to another far one of the cross-point switches  379  by-passing another one or more of the cross-point switches  379 , each of which may be one of the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 A- 3 D , and (2) a second group of programmable interconnects  361  not by-passing any of the cross-point switches  379 , but each of the by-pass interconnects  279  may be arranged in parallel with an aggregate of multiple of the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group configured to be coupled to each other or one another via one or more of the cross-point switches  379 . 
     For connection between one of the by-pass interconnects  279  and one the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group, one of the cross-point switches  379  as seen in  FIGS.  3 A- 3 C  may have the nodes N 23  and N 25  coupling respectively to two of the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group and the nodes N 24  and N 26  coupling respectively to two of the by-pass interconnects  279 . Thereby, said one of the cross-point switches  379  may switch one selected from two of the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group and two of the by-pass interconnects  279  to be coupled to the other one or more selected from them. For example, said one of the cross-point switches  379  may switch the programmable interconnect  361  in the second group coupling to its node N 23  to be coupled to the by-pass interconnect  279  coupling to its node N 24 . Alternatively, said one of the cross-point switches  379  may switch the programmable interconnect  361  in the second group coupling to its node N 23  to be coupled to the programmable interconnect  361  in the second group coupling to its node N 25 . Alternatively, said one of the cross-point switches  379  may switch the by-pass interconnect  279  coupling to its node N 24  to be coupled to the by-pass interconnect  279  coupling to its node N 26 . 
     For connection between two of the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group, one of the cross-point switches  379  as seen in  FIGS.  3 A- 3 C  may have its four nodes N 23 -N 26  coupling to four of the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group respectively. Thereby, said one of the cross-point switches  379  may switch one selected from said four of the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group to be coupled to another one selected from them. 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 G , multiple of the cross-point switches  379  surrounds a region  278 , in which multiple of the memory cells  362 , which may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B , each having (an) output(s) Out 1  and/or Out 2  coupling to one of said multiple of the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  7 A- 7 C . In the region  278  are further multiple of the memory cells  490  for the look-up table (LUT)  210  of the programmable logic block  201 , each of which may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B  and may have an output Out 1  or Out 2  coupling to one of the inputs D 0 -D 15  in the first set of the multiplexer  211 , in the region  278 , of the programmable logic block  201 , as illustrated in  FIGS.  6 A- 6 E . The memory cells  362  for the cross-point switches  379  may be arranged in one or more rings around the programmable logic block  201 . Multiple of the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group around the region  278  may couple the second set of inputs, e.g., A 0 -A 3 , of the multiplexer  211  of the programmable logic blocks  201  to multiple of the cross-point switches  379  around the region  278  respectively. One of the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group around the region  278  may couple the output, e.g., Dout, of the multiplexer  211  of the programmable logic blocks  201  to one of the cross-point switches  379  around the region  278 . 
     Accordingly, referring to  FIG.  8 G , the output, e.g., Dout, of the multiplexer  211  of one of the programmable logic blocks  201  may (1) pass to one of the by-pass interconnects  279  alternately through one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group and one or more of the cross-point switches  379 , (2) subsequently pass from said one of the by-pass interconnects  279  to another of the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group alternately through one or more of the cross-point switches  379  and one or more of the by-pass interconnects  279 , and (3) finally pass from said another of the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group to one of the inputs in the second set, e.g., A 0 -A 3 , of the multiplexer  211  of another of the programmable logic blocks  201  alternately through one or more of the cross-point switches  379  and one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  in the second group. 
     III. Arrangement for Cross-Point Switches for Standard Commodity FPGA IC Chip 
       FIG.  8 H  is a top view showing arrangement for cross-point switches for a standard commodity FPGA IC chip in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  8 H , the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  may include the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  arranged in an array, multiple connection blocks (CB)  455  each arranged between neighboring two of the logic blocks (LB)  201  in the same column or row, and multiple switch blocks (SB)  456  each arranged between neighboring two of the connection blocks (CB)  455  in the same column or row. Each of the connection blocks (CB)  455  may be composed of multiple of the cross-point switches  379  of the fourth type as seen in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C . Each of the switch blocks (SB)  456  may be composed of multiple of the cross-point switches  379  of the third type as seen in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B . 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 H , for each of the connection blocks (CB)  455 , each of its cross-point switches  379  of the fourth type may have its inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , each coupling to one of the programmable interconnects  361  and its output, e.g., Dout, coupling to another of the programmable interconnects  361 . Said one of the programmable interconnects  361  may couple one of the inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of one of the cross-point switches  379  of one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  to (1) the output, e.g., Dout, of one of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A  or (2) one of nodes N 23 -N 26  of one of the cross-point switches  379  of one of the switch blocks (SB)  456  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B . Alternatively, said another of the programmable interconnects  361  may couple the output, e.g., Dout, of one of the cross-point switches  379  of one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  to (1) one of the inputs, e.g., A 0 -A 3  of one of the logic blocks (LB)  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A  or (2) one of the nodes N 23 -N 26  of one of the cross-point switches  379  of one of the switch blocks (SB)  456  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B . 
     For example, referring to  FIG.  8 H , one or more of the inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of the cross-point switch  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  for said one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  may couple to the output Dout of the programmable logic block (LB)  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A  at its first side through one or more of the programmable interconnects  361 . Another one or more of the inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of the cross-point switch  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  for said one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  may couple to the output Dout of the programmable logic block (LB)  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A  at its second side opposite to its first side through one or more of the programmable interconnects  361 . Another one or more of the inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of the cross-point switch  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  for said one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  may couple to one of the nodes N 23 -N 26  of the cross-point switch  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B  for the switch blocks (SB)  456  at its third side through one or more of the programmable interconnects  361 . Another one or more of the inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of the cross-point switch  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  for said one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  may couple to one of the nodes N 23 -N 26  of the cross-point switch  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B  for the switch block (SB)  456  at its fourth side opposite to its third side through one or more of the programmable interconnects  361 . The output, e.g., Dout, of the cross-point switch  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  for said one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  may couple to one of the nodes N 23 -N 26  of the cross-point switch  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B  for the switch block (SB)  456  at its third or fourth side through one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  or to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of the programmable logic block (LB)  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A  at its first or second side through one or more of the programmable interconnects  361 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  8 H , for each of the switch blocks (SB)  456 , its cross-point switch  379  of the third type as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B  may have its four nodes N 23 -N 26  coupling respectively to four of the programmable interconnects  361  in four different directions. For example, the cross-point switch  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B  for said each of the switch blocks (SB)  456  may have its node N 23  coupling to one of the inputs D 0 -D 15  and output Dout of the cross-point switch  379  as seen in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  for the connection block (CB)  455  at its left side through one of said four of the programmable interconnects  361 , the cross-point switch  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B  for said each of the switch blocks (SB)  456  may have its node N 24  coupling to one of the inputs D 0 -D 15  and output Dout of the cross-point switch  379  as seen in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  for the connection block (CB)  455  at its top side through another of said four of the programmable interconnects  361 , the cross-point switch  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B  for said each of the switch blocks (SB)  456  may have its node N 25  coupling to one of the inputs D 0 -D 15  and output Dout of the cross-point switch  379  as seen in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  for the connection block (CB)  455  at its right side through another of said four of the programmable interconnects  361 , and the cross-point switch  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B  for said each of the switch blocks (SB)  456  may have its node N 26  coupling to one of the inputs D 0 -D 15  and output Dout of the cross-point switch  379  as seen in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  for the connection block (CB)  455  at its bottom side through the other of said four of the programmable interconnects  361 . 
     Thereby, referring to  FIG.  8 H , signal transmission may be built from one of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  to another of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  through multiple of the switch blocks (SB)  456 , wherein between each neighboring two of said multiple of the switch blocks (SB)  456  may be arranged one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  for the signal transmission, between said one of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  and one of said multiple of the switch blocks (SB)  456  may be arranged one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  for the signal transmission, and between said another of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  and one of said multiple of the switch blocks (SB)  456  may be one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  for the signal transmission. For example, a signal may be transmitted from an output, e.g., Dout, of said one of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  to one of the inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of the cross-point switches  379  of the fourth type as seen in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  for a first one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  through one of the programmable interconnects  361 . Next, the cross-point switches  379  of the fourth type for the first one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  may pass the signal from said one of its inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , to its output, e.g., Dout, to be transmitted to a node N 23  of one of the cross-point switches  379  of the third type as seen in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B  for one of the switch blocks (SB)  456  through another of the programmable interconnects  361 . Next, said one of the cross-point switches  379  of the third type for one of the switch blocks (SB)  456  may pass the signal from its node N 23  to its node N 25  to be transmitted to one of the inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , of the cross-point switches  379  of the fourth type as seen in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  for a second one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  through another of the programmable interconnects  361 . Next, the cross-point switches  379  of the fourth type for the second one of the connection blocks (CB)  455  may pass the signal from said one of its inputs, e.g., D 0 -D 15 , to its output, e.g., Dout, to be transmitted to one of the inputs, e.g., A 0 -A 3 , of said another of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  through another of the programmable interconnects  361 . 
     IV. Repair for Standard Commodity FPGA IC Chip 
       FIG.  8 I  is a block diagram showing a repair for a standard commodity FPGA IC chip in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  8 I , the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  may have a spare  201 - s  for the programmable logic blocks  201  configured to replace a broken one of the programmable logic blocks  201 . The standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  may include (1) multiple input repair switch matrixes  276  each having multiple outputs each coupling in series to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of one of the programmable logic blocks  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A  and (2) multiple output repair switch matrixes  277  each having one or more input(s) coupling in series to the one or more output(s) Dout of one of the programmable logic blocks  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A . Furthermore, the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may include (1) multiple spare input repair switch matrixes  276 - s  each having multiple outputs each coupling in parallel to one of the outputs of each of the others of the spare input repair switch matrixes  276 - s  and coupling in series to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of the spare  201 - s  for the programmable logic blocks  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A , and (2) multiple spare output repair switch matrixes  277 - s  each having one or more input(s) coupling respectively in parallel to the one or more input(s) of each of the others of the spare output repair switch matrixes  277 - s  and coupling respectively in series to the one or more output(s) Dout of the spare  201 - s  for the programmable logic blocks  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A . Each of the spare input repair switch matrixes  276 - s  may have multiple inputs each coupling in parallel to one of the inputs of one of the input repair switch matrixes  276 . Each of the spare output repair switch matrixes  277 - s  may have one or more outputs coupling respectively in parallel to the one or more outputs of one of the output repair switch matrixes  277 . 
     Thereby, referring to  FIG.  8 I , when one of the programmable logic blocks  201  is broken, one of the input repair switch matrixes  276  and one of the output repair switch matrixes  277  coupling to the inputs and output(s) of said one of the programmable logic blocks  201  respectively may be turned off; one of the spare input repair switch matrixes  276 - s  having its inputs coupling respectively in parallel to the inputs of said one of the input repair switch matrixes  276  and one of the spare output repair switch matrixes  277 - s  having its output(s) coupling respectively in parallel to the output(s) of said one of the output repair switch matrixes  277  may be turned on; the others of the spare input repair switch matrixes  276 - s  and the others of the spare output repair switch matrixes  277 - s  may be turned off. Accordingly, the broken one of the programmable logic blocks  201  may be replaced with the spare  201 - s  for the programmable logic blocks  201 . 
       FIG.  8 J  is a block diagram showing a repair for a standard commodity FPGA IC chip in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  8 J , the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  may be arranged in an array. When one of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  arranged in a column is broken, all of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  arranged in the column may be turned off and multiple spares  201 - s  for the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  arranged in a column may be turned on. Next, the columns for the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  and the spares  201 - s  for the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  may be renumbered, and each of the programmable logic blocks  201  after repaired in a renumbered column and in a specific row may perform the same operations as one of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  before repaired in a column having the same number as the renumbered column and in the specific row. For example, when one of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  arranged in the column N- 1  is broken, all of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  arranged in the column N- 1  may be turned off and the spares  201 - s  for the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  arranged in the rightmost column may be turned on. Next, the columns for the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  and the spares  201 - s  for the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  may be renumbered such that the rightmost column arranged for the spare  201 - s  for the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  before repaired may be renumbered to column  1  after the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  are repaired, the column  1  arranged for the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  before repaired may be renumbered to column  2  after the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  are repaired, and so on. The column n- 2  arranged for the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  before repaired may be renumbered to column n- 1  after the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  are repaired, wherein n is an integer ranging from 3 to N. Each of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  after repaired in the renumbered column m and in a specific row may perform the same operation as one of the programmable logic blocks  201  before repaired in the column m and in the specific row, where m is an integer ranging from 1 to N. For example, each of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  after repaired in the renumbered column  1  and in a specific row may perform the same operations as one of the logic blocks  201  before repaired in the column  1  and in the specific row. 
     Specification for Dedicated Programmable Interconnection (DPI) Integrated-Circuit (IC) Chip 
       FIG.  9    is a schematically top view showing a block diagram of a dedicated programmable interconnection (DPI) integrated-circuit (IC) chip in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  9   , a dedicated programmable interconnection (DPI) integrated-circuit (IC) chip  410  is designed, implemented and fabricated using an advanced semiconductor technology node or generation, for example more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm; with a chip size and manufacturing yield optimized with the minimum manufacturing cost for the used semiconductor technology node or generation. The dedicated IP IC chip  410  may have an area between 400 mm 2  and 9 mm 2 , 225 mm 2  and 9 mm 2 , 144 mm 2  and 16 mm 2 , 100 mm 2  and 16 mm 2 , 75 mm 2  and 16 mm 2 , or 50 mm 2  and 16 mm 2 . Transistors or semiconductor devices of the dedicated IP IC chip  410  used in the advanced semiconductor technology node or generation may be a FIN Field-Effect-Transistor (FINFET), a FINFET on Silicon-On-Insulator (FINFET SOI), a Fully Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. 
     Referring to  FIG.  9   , since the dedicated programmable interconnection (DPI) integrated-circuit (IC) chip  410  is a standard commodity IC chip, the number of types of products for the DPIIC chip  410  may be reduced to a small number, and therefore expensive photo masks or mask sets for fabricating the DPIIC chip  410  using advanced semiconductor nodes or generations may be reduced to a few mask sets. For example, the mask sets for a specific technology node or generation may be reduced down to between 3 and 20, 3 and 10, or 3 and 5. Its NRE and production expenses are therefore greatly reduced. With the few types of products for the DPIIC chip  410 , the manufacturing processes may be optimized to achieve very high manufacturing chip yields. Furthermore, the chip inventory management becomes easy, efficient and effective, therefore resulting in a relatively short chip delivery time and becoming very cost-effective. 
     Referring to  FIG.  9   , the DPIIC chip  410  may be of various types, including (1) multiple memory-array blocks  423  arranged in an array in a central region thereof, (2) multiple groups of cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIG.  3 A,  3 B,  3 C or  3 D , each group of which is arranged in one or more rings around one of the memory-array blocks  423 , and (3) multiple small input/output (I/O) circuits  203 , as illustrated in  FIG.  5 B , each having the node of S_Data_in coupling to one of the nodes N 23 -N 26  of one of its cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 A- 3 C  through one of the programmable interconnects  361  or to one of the inputs D 0 -D 15  of one of its cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIG.  3 D  through one of the programmable interconnects  361  and the node of S_Data_out coupling to one of the nodes N 23 -N 26  of another of its cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 A- 3 C  through another of the programmable interconnects  361  or to the output Dout of another of its cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIG.  3 D  through another of the programmable interconnects  361 . In each of the memory-array blocks  423  are multiple of memory cells  362 , each of which may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B , each having an output Out 1  and/or Out 2  coupling to one of the pass/no-pass switches  258  for one of the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 A,  3 B and  7 A  close to said each of the memory-array blocks  423  to switch on or off said one of the pass/no-pass switches  258 . Alternatively, in each of the memory-array blocks  423  are multiple of memory cells  362 , each of which may be referred to one as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B , each having an output Out 1  or Out 2  coupling to one of the inputs, e.g., A 0  and A 1 , of the second set and inputs SC- 4  of one of the multiplexers  211  of one of the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 C and  7 B  close to said each of the memory-array blocks  423 . Alternatively, in each of the memory-array blocks  423  are multiple of memory cells  362 , each of which may be referred to one as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B , each having an output Out 1  or Out 2  coupling to one of the inputs, e.g., A 0 -A 3 , of the second set of the multiplexer  211  of one of the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C  close to said each of the memory-array blocks  423 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  9   , the DPIIC chip  410  may include multiple intra-chip interconnects (not shown) each extending over spaces between neighboring two of the memory-array blocks  423 , wherein said each of the intra-chip interconnects may be the programmable interconnect  361  or fixed interconnect  364  as illustrated in  FIGS.  7 A- 7 C . For the DPIIC chip  410 , each of its small input/output (I/O) circuits  203 , as illustrated in  FIG.  5 B , may have its output S_Data_in coupling to one or more of its programmable interconnects  361  and/or one or more of its fixed interconnects  364  and its input S_Data_out, S_Enable or S_Inhibit coupling to another one or more of its programmable interconnects  361  and/or another one or more of its fixed interconnects  364 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  9   , the DPIIC chip  410  may include multiple of the I/O pads  372  as seen in  FIG.  5 B , each vertically over one of its small input/output (I/O) circuits  203 , coupling to the node  381  of said one of its small input/output (I/O) circuits  203 . In a first clock, a signal from one of the nodes N 23 -N 26  of one of the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 A- 3 C,  7 A and  7 B , or the output Dout of one of the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C , may be transmitted to the input S_Data_out of the small driver  374  of one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  through one or more of the programmable interconnects  361 , and then the small driver  374  of said one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  may amplify its input S_Data_out to be transmitted to one of the I/O pads  372  vertically over said one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  for external connection to circuits outside the DPIIC chip  410 . In a second clock, a signal from circuits outside the DPIIC chip  410  may be transmitted to the small receiver  375  of said one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  through said one of the I/O pads  372 , and then the small receiver  375  of said one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  may amplify the signal into its output S_Data_in to be transmitted to one of the nodes N 23 -N 26  of another of the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 A- 3 C,  7 A and  7 B , or to one of the inputs D 0 -D 15  of another of the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  3 D and  7 C , through another one or more of the programmable interconnects  361 . Referring to  FIG.  9   , the DPIIC chip  410  may further include (1) multiple power pads  205  for applying the power supply voltage, i.e., Vcc, to the memory cells  362  for the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  7 A- 7 C , wherein the power supply voltage, i.e., Vcc, may be between 0.2V and 2.5V, between 0.2V and 2V, between 0.2V and 1.5V, between 0.1V and 1V, or between 0.2V and 1V, or, smaller or lower than or equal to 2.5V, 2V, 1.8V, 1.5V or 1V, and (2) multiple ground pads  206  for providing ground reference voltage, i.e., Vss, to the memory cells  362  for the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  7 A- 7 C . 
     Specification for Dedicated Input/Output (I/O) Chip 
       FIG.  10    is a block diagram for a dedicated input/output (I/O) chip in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  10   , a dedicated input/output (I/O) chip  265  may include a plurality of the large I/O circuit  341  (only one is shown) and a plurality of the small I/O circuit  203  (only one is shown). The large I/O circuit  341  may be referred to one as illustrated in  FIG.  5 A ; the small I/O circuit  203  may be referred to one as illustrated in  FIG.  5 B . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  5 A,  5 B and  10   , each of the large I/O circuits  341  may be provided with the large driver  274  having the input L_Data_out coupling to the output S_Data_in of the small receiver  375  of one of the small I/O circuits  203 . Each of the large I/O circuits  341  may be provided with the large receiver  275  having the node of L_Data_in coupling to the node of S_Data_out of the small driver  374  of one of the small I/O circuits  203 . When the large driver  274  is enabled by the L_Ebable signal, the small receiver  375  is activated by the S_Inhibit signal, the large receiver  275  is inhibited by the L_Inhibit signal and the small driver  374  is disabled by the S_Ebable signal, data from the I/O pad  372  of the small I/O circuit  203  may pass to the I/O pad  272  of the large I/O circuit  341  through, in sequence, the small receiver  375  and large driver  274 . When the large receiver  275  is activated by the L_Inhibit signal, the small driver  374  is enabled by the S_Ebable signal, the large driver  274  is disabled by the L_Ebable signal and the small receiver  375  is inhibited by the S_Inhibit signal, data from the I/O pad  272  of the large I/O circuit  341  may pass to the I/O pad  372  of the small I/O circuit  203  through, in sequence, the large receiver  275  and small driver  374 . 
     Specification for Logic Drive 
     Various types of standard commodity logic drives, packages, package drives, devices, modules, disks or disk drives (to be abbreviated as “drive” below, that is when “drive” is mentioned below, it means and reads as “drive, package, package drive, device, module, disk or disk drive”) are introduced in the following paragraphs. 
     I. First Type of Logic Drive 
       FIG.  11 A  is a schematically top view showing arrangement for various chips packaged in a first type of standard commodity logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  11 A , the standard commodity logic drive  300  may be packaged with a plurality of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J , one or more non-volatile memory (NVM) IC chips  250  and a dedicated control chip  260 , which are arranged in an array, wherein the dedicated control chip  260  may be surrounded by the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and NVMIC chips  250 , i.e., NVM chips, and arranged between the NVMIC chips  250  and/or between the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One of the NVMIC chips  250  at a right middle side of the logic drive  300  may be arranged between two of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  at right top and right bottom sides of the logic drive  300 . Some of the FPGA IC chips  200  may be arranged in a line at a top side of the logic drive  300 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 A , the logic drive  300  may include multiple inter-chip interconnects  371  each extending over spaces between neighboring two of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , NVMIC chips  250  and dedicated control chip  260 . The logic drive  300  may include a plurality of the DPIIC chip  410  aligned with a cross of a vertical bundle of inter-chip interconnects  371  and a horizontal bundle of inter-chip interconnects  371 . Each of the DPIIC chips  410  is at corners of four of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , NVM IC chips  250  and dedicated control chip  260  around said each of the DPIIC chips  410 . For example, one of the DPIIC chips  410  at a left top corner of the dedicated control chip  260  may have a first minimum distance to a first one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  at a left top corner of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , wherein the first minimum distance is the one between the right bottom corner of the first one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and the left top corner of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 ; said one of the DPIIC chips  410  may have a second minimum distance to a second one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  at a right top corner of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , wherein the second minimum distance is the one between the left bottom corner of the second one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and the right top corner of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 ; said one of the DPIIC chips  410  may have a third minimum distance to one of the NVMIC chips  250  at a left bottom corner of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , wherein the third minimum distance is the one between the right top corner of said one of the NVMIC chips  250  and the left bottom corner of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 ; said one of the DPIIC chips  410  may have a fourth minimum distance to the dedicated control chip  260  at a right bottom corner of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , wherein the fourth minimum distance is the one between the left top corner of the dedicated control chip  260  and the right bottom corner of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 A , each of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may be the programmable or fixed interconnect  361  or  364  as illustrated in  FIGS.  7 A- 7 C  in the sections of “Specification for Programmable Interconnect” and “Specification for Fixed Interconnect”. Signal transmission may be built (1) between one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects  502  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  or (2) between one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 . Signal transmission may be built (1) between one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the intra-chip interconnects  502  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  or (2) between one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the intra-chip interconnects of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 A , one or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the NVMIC chips  250  to the dedicated control chip  260 . 
     Accordingly, referring to  FIG.  11 A , a first one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may have a first one of the programmable logic blocks  201 , as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A , to transmit an output Dout to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of a second one of the programmable logic blocks  201 , as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A , of a second one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  through one of the cross-point switches  379  of one of the DPIIC chips  410 . The output Dout of the first one of the programmable logic blocks  201  may be passed to said one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of the second one of the programmable logic blocks  201  through, in sequence, (1) the programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects  502  of the first one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , (2) a first group of programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 , (3) a first group of programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , (4) said one of the cross-point switches  379  of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , (5) a second group of programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , (6) a second group of programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and (7) the programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects  502  of the second one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIG.  11 A , one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may have a first one of the programmable logic blocks  201 , as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A , to transmit an output Dout to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of a second one of the programmable logic blocks  201 , as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A , of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  through one of the cross-point switches  379  of one of the DPIIC chips  410 . The output Dout of the first one of the programmable logic blocks  201  may be passed to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of the second one of the programmable logic blocks  201  through, in sequence, (1) a first group of programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects  502  of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , (2) a first group of programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 , (3) a first group of programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , (4) said one of the cross-point switches  379  of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , (5) a second group of programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , (6) a second group of programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and (7) a second group of programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects  502  of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 A , the logic drive  300  may include multiple dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265  in a peripheral region thereof surrounding a central region thereof having the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , NVMIC chips  250 , dedicated control chip  260  and DPIIC chips  410  located therein. One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from one of the DPIIC chips  410  to one of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from one of the NVMIC chips  250  to one of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the dedicated control chip  260  to one of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 A , each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may be referred to ones as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J , and each of the DPIIC chips  410  may be referred to ones as illustrated in  FIG.  9   . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 A , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and the dedicated control chip  260  may be designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, a semiconductor node or generation less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm or 500 nm. Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the semiconductor technology node or generation used in each of the dedicated I/O chip  265  and the dedicated control chip  260  is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 A , transistors or semiconductor devices used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and the dedicated control chip  260  may be a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , transistors or semiconductor devices used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and the dedicated control chip  260  may be different from those used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 ; for example, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and the dedicated control chip  260  may use the conventional MOSFET, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use the FINFET; alternatively, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and the dedicated control chip  260  may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use the FINFET. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 A , each of the NVMIC chips  250  may be a NAND flash chip, in a bare-die format or in a multi-chip flash package format. Data stored in the NVMIC chips  250  of the standard commodity logic drive  300  are kept even if the logic drive  300  is powered off. Alternatively, the NVMIC chips  250  may be Non-Volatile Radom-Access-Memory (NVRAM) IC chips, in a bare-die format or in a package format. The NVRAM may be a Ferroelectric RAM (FRAM), Magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), or Phase-change RAM (PRAM). Each of the NVMIC chips  250  may have a standard memory density, capacity or size of greater than or equal to 64 Mb, 512 Mb, 1Gb, 4Gb, 16Gb, 64Gb, 128Gb, 256 Gb, or 512Gb, wherein “b” is bits. Each of the NVMIC chips  250  may be designed and fabricated using advanced NAND flash technology nodes or generations, for example, more advanced than or smaller than or equal to 45 nm, 28 nm, 20 nm, 16 nm or 10 nm, wherein the advanced NAND flash technology may comprise Single Level Cells (SLC) or multiple level cells (MLLC) (for example, Double Level Cells DLC, or triple Level cells TLC), and in a 2D-NAND or a 3D NAND structure. The 3D NAND structures may comprise multiple stacked layers or levels of NAND cells, for example, greater than or equal to 4, 8, 16, 32 stacked layers or levels of NAND cells. Accordingly, the standard commodity logic drive  300  may have a standard non-volatile memory density, capacity or size of greater than or equal to 8 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 4 GB, 16 GB, 64 GB, 256 GB, or 512 GB, wherein “B” is bytes, each byte has 8 bits. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 A , packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the power supply voltage (Vcc) used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and the dedicated control chip  260  may be greater than or equal to 1.5V, 2.0V, 2.5V, 3V, 3.5V, 4V, or 5V, while the power supply voltage (Vcc) used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIDC chips  410  may be between 0.2V and 2.5V, between 0.2V and 2V, between 0.2V and 1.5V, between 0.1V and 1V, or between 0.2V and 1V, or smaller or lower than or equal to 2.5V, 2V, 1.8V, 1.5V or 1V. Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the power supply voltage (Vcc) used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control chip  260  may be different from that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 ; for example, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control chip  260  may use a power supply voltage (Vcc) of 4V, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use a power supply voltage (Vcc) of 1.5V; alternatively, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control chip  260  may use a power supply voltage (Vcc) of 2.5V, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIDC chips  410  may use a power supply (Vcc) of 0.75V. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 A , packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the gate oxide (physical) thickness of the Field-Effect-Transistors (FETs) of semiconductor devices used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control chip  260  may be thicker than or equal to 5 nm, 6 nm, 7.5 nm, 10 nm, 12.5 nm, or 15 nm, while the gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of semiconductor devices used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may be thinner than 4.5 nm, 4 nm, 3 nm or 2 nm. Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of the semiconductor devices used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control chip  260  may be different from that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 ; for example, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control chip  260  may use a gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of 10 nm, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use a gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of 3 nm; alternatively, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control chip  260  may use a gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of 7.5 nm, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use a gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of 2 nm. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 A , each of the dedicated I/O chip(s)  165  in the multi-chip package of the standard commodity logic drive  300  may have the circuits as illustrated in  FIG.  10   . Each of the dedicated I/O chip(s)  165  may arrange a plurality of the large I/O circuit  341  and I/O pad  272 , as seen in  FIGS.  5 A and  10   , for the logic drive  300  to employ one or multiple (2, 3, 4, or more than 4) Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports, one or more IEEE 1394 ports, one or more Ethernet ports, one or more HDMI ports, one or more VGA ports, one or more audio ports or serial ports, for example, RS-232 or COM (communication) ports, wireless transceiver I/Os, and/or Bluetooth transceiver I/Os, and etc. Each of the dedicated I/O chips  165  may have a plurality of the large I/O circuit  341  and I/O pad  272 , as seen in  FIGS.  10 A and  15   , for the logic drive  300  to employ Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) ports, or Peripheral Components Interconnect express (PCIe) ports to communicate, connect or couple with a memory drive. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 A , the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may have standard common features or specifications, mentioned as below: (1) the count of the programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  for each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may be greater than or equal to 16K, 64K, 256K, 512K, 1M, 4M, 16M, 64M, 256M, 1G, or 4G; (2) the number of the inputs of each of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  for each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may be greater or equal to 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256; (3) the power supply voltage, i.e. Vcc, applied to the power pads  205  for each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may be between 0.2V and 2.5V, between 0.2V and 2V, between 0.2V and 1.5V, between 0.1V and 1V, or between 0.2V and 1V, or, smaller or lower than or equal to 2.5V, 2V, 1.8V, 1.5V or 1V; (4) the I/O pads  372  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may have the same layout and number, and the I/O pads  372  at the same relative location to the respective standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  have the same function. 
     II. Second Type of Logic Drive 
       FIG.  11 B  is a schematically top view showing arrangement for various chips packaged in a second type of standard commodity logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  11 B , the dedicated control chip  260  and dedicated I/O chips  265  have functions that may be combined into a single chip  266 , i.e., dedicated control and I/O chip, to perform above-mentioned functions of the control and I/O chips  260  and  265 . The dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may include the architecture as seen in  FIG.  10   . The dedicated control chip  260  as seen in  FIG.  11 A  may be replaced with the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  to be packaged at the place where the dedicated control chip  260  is arranged. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A and  11 B , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 B  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIG.  11 A  and the process for forming the same. 
     For interconnection, referring to  FIG.  11 B , one or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to the dedicated control and I/O chip  266 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to the dedicated control and I/O chip  266 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 B , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  is designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, a semiconductor node or generation less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm or 500 nm. Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the semiconductor technology node or generation used in each of the dedicated I/O chip  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 B , transistors or semiconductor devices used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may be a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , transistors or semiconductor devices used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may be different from that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 ; for example, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may use the conventional MOSFET, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use the FINFET; alternatively, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use the FINFET. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 B , packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the power supply voltage used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may be greater than or equal to 1.5V, 2.0V, 2.5V, 3 V, 3.5V, 4V, or 5V, while the power supply voltage (Vcc) used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIDC chips  410  may be between 0.2V and 2.5V, between 0.2V and 2V, between 0.2V and 1.5V, between 0.1V and 1V, or between 0.2V and 1V, or smaller or lower than or equal to 2.5V, 2V, 1.8V, 1.5V or 1V Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the power supply voltage used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may be different from that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 ; for example, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may use a power supply voltage (Vcc) of 4V, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use a power supply voltage (Vcc) of 1.5V; alternatively, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may use a power supply voltage (Vcc) of 2.5V, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIDC chips  410  may use a power supply (Vcc) of 0.75V. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 B , Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the gate oxide (physical) thickness of the Field-Effect-Transistors (FETs) of semiconductor devices used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may be thicker than or equal to 5 nm, 6 nm, 7.5 nm, 10 nm, 12.5 nm, or 15 nm, while the gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of semiconductor devices used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may be thinner than 4.5 nm, 4 nm, 3 nm or 2 nm. Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of the semiconductor devices used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may be different from that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 ; for example, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may use a gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of 10 nm, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use a gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of 3 nm; alternatively, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may use a gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of 7.5 nm, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use a gate oxide (physical) thickness of FETs of 2 nm. 
     III. Third Type of Logic Drive 
       FIG.  11 C  is a schematically top view showing arrangement for various chips packaged in a third type of standard commodity logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. The structure shown in  FIG.  11 C  is similar to that shown in  FIG.  11 A  but the difference therebetween is that an Innovated ASIC or COT (abbreviated as IAC below) chip  402  may be further provided to be packaged in the logic drive  300 . For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A and  11 C , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 C  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIG.  11 A  and the process for forming the same. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 C , the IAC chip  402  may be configured for Intellectual Property (IP) circuits, Application Specific (AS) circuits, analog circuits, mixed-mode signal circuits, Radio-Frequency (RF) circuits, and/or transmitter, receiver, transceiver circuits, etc. Each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control chip  260  and IAC chip  402  is designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm or 500 nm. Alternatively, the advanced semiconductor technology nodes or generations, such as more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 40 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, may be used for the IAC chip  402 . Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the semiconductor technology node or generation used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control chip  260  and IAC chip  402  is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 . Transistors or semiconductor devices used in the IAC chip  402  may be a FINFET, a FINFET on Silicon-On-Insulator (FINFET SOI), a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , transistors or semiconductor devices used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control chip  260  and IAC chip  402  may be different from that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 ; for example, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control chip  260  and IAC chip  402  may use the conventional MOSFET, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use the FINFET; alternatively, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and dedicated control chip  260  and IAC chip  402  may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use the FINFET. 
     Since the IAC chip  402  in this aspect of disclosure may be designed and fabricated using older or less advanced technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm or 500 nm, its NRE cost is cheaper than or less than that of the current or conventional ASIC or COT chip designed and fabricated using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. The NRE cost for designing a current or conventional ASIC or COT chip using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, may be more than US $5M, US $10M, US $20M or even exceeding US $50M, or US $100M. The cost of a photo mask set for an ASIC or COT chip at the 16 nm technology node or generation is over US $2M, US $5M, or US $10M. Implementing the same or similar innovation or application using the third type of logic drive  300  including the IAC chip  402  designed and fabricated using older or less advanced technology nodes or generations, may reduce NRE cost down to less than US $10M, US $7M, US $5M, US $3M or US $1M. Compared to the implementation by developing the current or conventional ASIC or COT chip, the NRE cost of developing the IAC chip  402  for the same or similar innovation or application used in the third type logic drive  300  may be reduced by a factor of larger than 2, 5, 10, 20, or 30. 
     For interconnection, referring to  FIG.  11 C , one or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to the IAC chip  402 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to the IAC chip  402 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the IAC chip  402  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the IAC chip  402  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the IAC chip  402  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . 
     IV. Fourth Type of Logic Drive 
       FIG.  11 D  is a schematically top view showing arrangement for various chips packaged in a fourth type of standard commodity logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  11 D , the functions of the dedicated control chip  260  and the IAC chip  402  as seen in  FIG.  11 C  may be incorporated into a single chip  267 , i.e., dedicated control and IAC (abbreviated as DCIAC below) chip. The structure shown in  FIG.  11 D  is similar to that shown in  FIG.  11 A  but the difference therebetween is that the DCIAC chip  267  may be further provided to be packaged in the logic drive  300 . The dedicated control chip  260  as seen in  FIG.  11 A  may be replaced with the DCIAC chip  267  to be packaged at the place where the dedicated control chip  260  is arranged. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A and  11 D , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 D  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIG.  11 A  and the process for forming the same. The DCIAC chip  267  now comprises the control circuits, Intellectual Property (IP) circuits, Application Specific (AS) circuits, analog circuits, mixed-mode signal circuits, Radio-Frequency (RF) circuits, and/or transmitter, receiver, transceiver circuits, and etc. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 D , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and DCIAC chip  267  is designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm or 500 nm. Alternatively, the advanced semiconductor technology nodes or generations, such as more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 40 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, may be used for the DCIAC chip  267 . Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the semiconductor technology node or generation used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and DCIAC chip  267  is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 . Transistors or semiconductor devices used in the DCIAC chip  267  may be a FINFET, a FINFET on Silicon-On-Insulator (FINFET SOI), a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , transistors or semiconductor devices used in each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and DCIAC chip  267  may be different from that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 ; for example, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and DCIAC chip  267  may use the conventional MOSFET, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use the FINFET; alternatively, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  and DCIAC chip  267  may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use the FINFET. 
     Since the DCIAC chip  267  in this aspect of disclosure may be designed and fabricated using older or less advanced technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm or 500 nm, its NRE cost is cheaper than or less than that of the current or conventional ASIC or COT chip designed and fabricated using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. The NRE cost for designing a current or conventional ASIC or COT chip using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, may be more than US $5M, US $10M, US $20M or even exceeding US $50M, or US $100M. The cost of a photo mask set for an ASIC or COT chip at the 16 nm technology node or generation is over US $2M, US $5M or US $10M. Implementing the same or similar innovation or application using the fourth type of logic drive  300  including the DCIAC chip  267  designed and fabricated using older or less advanced technology nodes or generations may reduce NRE cost down to less than US $10M, US $7M, US $5M, US $3M or US $1M. Compared to the implementation by developing a current or conventional ASIC or COT chip, the NRE cost of developing the DCIAC chip  267  for the same or similar innovation or application used in the fourth type logic drive  300  may be reduced by a factor of larger than 2, 5, 10, 20 or 30. 
     For interconnection, referring to  FIG.  11 D , one or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to the DCIAC chip  267 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to the DCIAC chip  267 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the DCIAC chip  267  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the DCIAC chip  267  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . 
     V. Fifth Type of Logic Drive 
       FIG.  11 E  is a schematically top view showing arrangement for various chips packaged in a fifth type of standard commodity logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  11 E , the functions of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated I/O chips  265  and IAC chip  402  as seen in  FIG.  11 C  may be incorporated into a single chip  268 , i.e., dedicated control, dedicated I/O, and IAC (abbreviated as DCDI/OIAC below) chip. The structure shown in  FIG.  11 E  is similar to that shown in  FIG.  11 A  but the difference therebetween is that the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  may be further provided to be packaged in the logic drive  300 . The dedicated control chip  260  as seen in  FIG.  11 A  may be replaced with the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  to be packaged at the place where the dedicated control chip  260  is arranged. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A and  11 E , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 E  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIG.  11 A  and the process for forming the same. The DCDI/OIAC chip  268  may include the architecture as seen in  FIG.  10   . Further, the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  now comprises the control circuits, Intellectual Property (IP) circuits, Application Specific (AS) circuits, analog circuits, mixed-mode signal circuits, Radio-Frequency (RF) circuits, and/or transmitter, receiver, transceiver circuits, and etc. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 E , the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  is designed, implemented and fabricated using varieties of semiconductor technology nodes or generations, including old or matured technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 30 nm, 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm, 500 nm. Alternatively, the advanced semiconductor technology nodes or generations, such as more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 40 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, may be used for the DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the semiconductor technology node or generation used in the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or greater than 5 nodes or generations older, more matured or less advanced than that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 . Transistors or semiconductor devices used in the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  may be a FINFET, a FINFET on Silicon-On-Insulator (FINFET SOI), a Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. Packaged in the same logic drive  300 , transistors or semiconductor devices used in the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  may be different from that used in each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 ; for example, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  may use the conventional MOSFET, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use the FINFET; alternatively, packaged in the same logic drive  300 , the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  may use the Fully Depleted Silicon-on-insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, while each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may use the FINFET. 
     Since the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in this aspect of disclosure may be designed and fabricated using older or less advanced technology nodes or generations, for example, less advanced than or equal to, or above or equal to 40 nm, 50 nm, 90 nm, 130 nm, 250 nm, 350 nm or 500 nm, its NRE cost is cheaper than or less than that of the current or conventional ASIC or COT chip designed and fabricated using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, a technology node or generation more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. The NRE cost for designing an current or conventional ASIC or COT chip using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, a technology node or generation more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, may be more than US $5M, US $10M, US $20M or even exceeding US $50M, or US $100M. The cost of a photo mask set for an ASIC or COT chip at the 16 nm technology node or generation is over US $2M, US $5M or US $10M. Implementing the same or similar innovation or application using the fifth type of logic drive  300  including the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  designed and fabricated using older or less advanced technology nodes or generations, may reduce NRE cost down to less than US $10M, US $7M, US $5M, US $3M or US $1M. Compared to the implementation by developing a current or conventional ASIC or COT chip, the NRE cost of developing the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  for the same or similar innovation or application used in the fifth type logic drive  300  may be reduced by a factor of larger than 2, 5, 10, 20 or 30. 
     For interconnection, referring to  FIG.  11 E , one or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to the DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to the DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . 
     VI. Sixth Type of Logic Drive 
       FIGS.  11 F and  11 G  are schematically top views showing arrangement for various chips packaged in a sixth type of standard commodity logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G , the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 E  may further include a processing and/or computing (PC) IC chip  269 , such as central processing unit (CPU) chip, graphic processing unit (GPU) chip, digital signal processing (DSP) chip, tensor processing unit (TPU) chip or application processing unit (APU) chip. The APU chip may be (1) a combination of CPU and DSP unit operating with each other, (2) a combination of CPU and GPU operating with each other, (3) a combination of GPU and DSP unit operating with each other or (4) a combination of CPU, GPU and DSP unit operating with one another. The structure shown in  FIG.  11 F  is similar to those shown in  FIGS.  11 A,  11 B,  11 D and  11 E  but the difference therebetween is that the PCIC chip  269  may be further provided to be packaged in the logic drive  300  and close to the dedicated control chip  260  for the scheme in  FIG.  11 A , the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  for the scheme in  FIG.  11 B , the DCIAC chip  267  for the scheme in  FIG.  11 D  or the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  for the scheme in  FIG.  11 E . The structure shown in  FIG.  11 G  is similar to that shown in  FIG.  11 C  but the difference therebetween is that the PCIC chip  269  may be further provided to be packaged in the logic drive  300  and close to the dedicated control chip  260 . For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A,  11 B,  11 D,  11 E and  11 F , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 F  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A,  11 B,  11 D and  11 E  and the process for forming the same. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A,  11 C and  11 G , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 G  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A and  11 C  and the process for forming the same. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G , in a center region between neighboring two of the vertical bundles of inter-chip interconnects  371  and between neighboring two of the horizontal bundles of inter-chip interconnects  371  may be arranged the PCIC chip  269  and one of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  and DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . For interconnection, referring to  FIGS.  11 F and  11 G , one or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to the PCIC chip  269 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to the PCIC chip  269 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the PCIC chip  269  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the PCIC chip  269  to the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the PCIC chip  269  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the PCIC chip  269  to the IAC chip  402  as seen in  FIG.  11 G . The PCIC chip  269  is designed, implemented and fabricated using an advanced semiconductor technology node or generation, for example more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, which may be the same as, one generation or node less advanced than or one generation or node more advanced than that used for each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 . Transistors or semiconductor devices used in the PCIC chip  269  may be a FIN Field-Effect-Transistor (FINFET), a FINFET on Silicon-On-Insulator (FINFET SOI), a Fully Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. 
     VII. Seventh Type of Logic Drive 
       FIGS.  11 H and  11 I  are schematically top views showing arrangement for various chips packaged in a seventh type of standard commodity logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIGS.  11 H and  11 I , the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 E  may further include two PCIC chips  269 , a combination of which may be two selected from a central processing unit (CPU) chip, graphic processing unit (GPU) chip, digital signal processing (DSP) chip and tensor processing unit (TPU) chip. For example, (1) one of the two PCIC chips  269  may be a central processing unit (CPU) chip, and the other one of the two PCIC chips  269  may be a graphic processing unit (GPU) chip; (2) one of the two PCIC chips  269  may be a central processing unit (CPU) chip, and the other one of the two PCIC chips  269  may be a digital signal processing (DSP) chip; (3) one of the two PCIC chips  269  may be a central processing unit (CPU) chip, and the other one of the two PCIC chips  269  may be a tensor processing unit (TPU) chip; (4) one of the two PCIC chips  269  may be a graphic processing unit (GPU) chip, and the other one of the two PCIC chips  269  may be a digital signal processing (DSP) chip; (5) one of the two PCIC chips  269  may be a graphic processing unit (GPU) chip, and the other one of the two PCIC chips  269  may be a tensor processing unit (TPU) chip; (6) one of the two PCIC chips  269  may be a digital signal processing (DSP) chip, and the other one of the two PCIC chips  269  may be a tensor processing unit (TPU) chip. The structure shown in  FIG.  11 H  is similar to those shown in  FIGS.  11 A,  11 B,  11 D and  11 E  but the difference therebetween is that the two PCIC chips  269  may be further provided to be packaged in the logic drive  300  and close to the dedicated control chip  260  for the scheme in  FIG.  11 A , the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  for the scheme in  FIG.  11 B , the DCIAC chip  267  for the scheme in  FIG.  11 D  or the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  for the scheme in  FIG.  11 E . The structure shown in  FIG.  11 I  is similar to that shown in  FIG.  11 C  but the difference therebetween is that the two PCIC chips  269  may be further provided to be packaged in the logic drive  300  and close to the dedicated control chip  260 . For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A,  11 B,  11 D,  11 E and  11 H , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 H  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A,  11 B,  11 D and  11 E  and the process for forming the same. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A,  11 C and  11 I , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 I  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A and  11 C  and the process for forming the same. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 H and  11 I , in a center region between neighboring two of the vertical bundles of inter-chip interconnects  371  and between neighboring two of the horizontal bundles of inter-chip interconnects  371  may be arranged the two PCIC chips  269  and one of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  and DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . For interconnection, referring to  FIGS.  11 H and  11 I , one or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to both of the PCIC chips  269 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to both of the PCIC chip  269 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chips  269  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chips  269  to the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . One of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chips  269  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chips  269  to the other of the PCIC chips  269 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chip  269  to the IAC chip  402  as seen in  FIG.  11 G . Each of the PCIC chips  269  is designed, implemented and fabricated using an advanced semiconductor technology node or generation, for example more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, which may be the same as, one generation or node less advanced than or one generation or node more advanced than that used for each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 . Transistors or semiconductor devices used in each of the PCIC chips  269  may be a FIN Field-Effect-Transistor (FINFET), a FINFET on Silicon-On-Insulator (FINFET SOI), a Fully Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. 
     VIII. Eighth Type of Logic Drive 
       FIGS.  11 J and  11 K  are schematically top views showing arrangement for various chips packaged in an eighth type of standard commodity logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIGS.  11 J and  11 K , the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 E  may further include three PCIC chips  269 , a combination of which may be three selected from a central processing unit (CPU) chip, graphic processing unit (GPU) chip, digital signal processing (DSP) chip or tensor processing unit (TPU) chip. For example, (1) one of the three PCIC chips  269  may be a central processing unit (CPU) chip, another one of the three PCIC chips  269  may be a graphic processing unit (GPU) chip, the other one of the three PCIC chips  269  may be a digital signal processing (DSP) chip; (2) one of the three PCIC chips  269  may be a central processing unit (CPU) chip, another one of the three PCIC chips  269  may be a graphic processing unit (GPU) chip, the other one of the three PCIC chips  269  may be a tensor processing unit (TPU) chip; (3) one of the three PCIC chips  269  may be a central processing unit (CPU) chip, another one of the three PCIC chips  269  may be a digital signal processing (DSP) chip, the other one of the three PCIC chips  269  may be a tensor processing unit (TPU) chip; (4) one of the three PCIC chips  269  may be a graphic processing unit (GPU) chip, another one of the three PCIC chips  269  may be a digital signal processing (DSP) chip, the other one of the three PCIC chips  269  may be a tensor processing unit (TPU) chip. The structure shown in  FIG.  11 J  is similar to those shown in  FIGS.  11 A,  11 B,  11 D and  11 E  but the difference therebetween is that the three PCIC chips  269  may be further provided to be packaged in the logic drive  300  and close to the dedicated control chip  260  for the scheme in  FIG.  16 A , the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  for the scheme in  FIG.  11 B , the DCIAC chip  267  for the scheme in  FIG.  11 D  or the DCDI/OIAC chip  268  for the scheme in  FIG.  11 E . The structure shown in  FIG.  11 K  is similar to that shown in  FIG.  11 C  but the difference therebetween is that the three PCIC chips  269  may be further provided to be packaged in the logic drive  300  and close to the dedicated control chip  260 . For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A,  11 B,  11 D,  11 E and  11 J , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 J  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A,  11 B,  11 D and  11 E  and the process for forming the same. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A,  11 C and  11 K , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 K  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A and  11 C  and the process for forming the same. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 J and  11 K , in a center region between neighboring two of the vertical bundles of inter-chip interconnects  371  and between neighboring two of the horizontal bundles of inter-chip interconnects  371  may be arranged the three PCIC chips  269  and one of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  and DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . For interconnection, referring to  FIGS.  11 J and  11 K , one or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the PCIC chips  269 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the PCIC chips  269 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chips  269  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chips  269  to the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chips  269  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chips  269  to the other two of the PCIC chips  269 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chip  269  to the IAC chip  402  as seen in  FIG.  11 G . Each of the PCIC chips  269  is designed, implemented and fabricated using an advanced semiconductor technology node or generation, for example more advanced than or equal to, or below or equal to 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm, which may be the same as, one generation or node less advanced than or one generation or node more advanced than that used for each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410 . Transistors or semiconductor devices used in each of the PCIC chips  269  may be a FIN Field-Effect-Transistor (FINFET), a FINFET on Silicon-On-Insulator (FINFET SOI), a Fully Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, a Partially Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or a conventional MOSFET. 
     IX. Ninth Type of Logic Drive 
       FIG.  11 L  is a schematically top view showing arrangement for various chips packaged in a ninth type of standard commodity logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 L , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 L  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 K  and the process for forming the same. Referring to  FIG.  11 L , a ninth type of standard commodity logic drive  300  may be packaged with one or more processing and/or computing (PC) integrated circuit (IC) chips  269 , one or more standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J , one or more non-volatile memory (NVM) IC chips  250 , one or more volatile memory (VM) integrated circuit (IC) chips  324 , one or more high speed, high bandwidth memory (HBM) IC chips  251  and a dedicated control chip  260 , which are arranged in an array, wherein the dedicated control chip  260  may be arranged in a center region surrounded by the PCIC chips  269 , standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , NVMIC chips  250  and VMIC chips  324 . The combination for the PCIC chips  269  may comprise: (1) multiple GPU chips, for example 2, 3, 4 or more than 4 GPU chips, (2) one or more CPU chips and/or one or more GPU chips, (3) one or more CPU chips and/or one or more DSP chips, (4) one or more CPU chips, one or more GPU chips and/or one or more DSP chips, (5) one or more CPU chips and/or one or more TPU chips, or, (6) one or more CPU chips, one or more DSP chips and/or one or more TPU chips. Each of the HBM IC chips  251  may be a high speed, high bandwidth DRAM chip, high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chip, magnetoresistive random-access-memory (MRAM) chip or resistive random-access-memory (RRAM) chip. The PCIC chips  269  and standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may operate with the HBM IC chips  251  for high speed, high bandwidth parallel processing and/or parallel computing. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 L , the logic drive  300  may include the inter-chip interconnects  371  each extending over spaces between neighboring two of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , NVMIC chip  250 , VMIC chip  324 , dedicated control chip  260 , PCIC chips  269  and HBMIC chips  251 . The logic drive  300  may include a plurality of the DPIIC chip  410  aligned with a cross of a vertical bundle of inter-chip interconnects  371  and a horizontal bundle of inter-chip interconnects  371 . Each of the DPIIC chips  410  is at corners of four of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , NVMIC chip  250 , VMIC chip  324 , dedicated control chip  260 , PCIC chips  269  and HBMIC chips  251  around said each of the DPIIC chips  410 . Each of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may be the programmable or fixed interconnect  361  or  364  as mentioned above in the sections of “Specification for Programmable Interconnect” and “Specification for Fixed Interconnect”. Signal transmission may be built (1) between one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects  371  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  or (2) between one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 . Signal transmission may be built (1) between one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the intra-chip interconnects  502  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  or (2) between one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the intra-chip interconnects of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 L , one or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the PCIC chips  269 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the HBMIC chips  251 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the PCIC chips  269 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the HBMIC chips  251 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from one of the PCIC chips  269  to one of the HBMIC chips  251  and the communication between said one of the PCIC chips  269  and said one of the HBM IC chips  251  may have a data bit width of equal to or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the NVMIC chips  250  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the HBMIC chips  251  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chips  269  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chips  269  to all the others of the PCIC chips  269 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 L , the logic drive  300  may include multiple dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265  in a peripheral region thereof surrounding a central region thereof having the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , NVMIC chips  250 , dedicated control chip  260 , PCIC chips  269 , HBMIC chips  251  and DPIIC chips  410  located therein. One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the NVMIC chips  250  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the dedicated control chip  260  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the PCIC chips  269  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the HBMIC chips  251  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 L , each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may be referred to one as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J , and each of the DPIIC chips  410  may be referred to one as illustrated in  FIG.  9   . The specification of the commodity standard FPGA IC chips  200 , DPIIC chips  410 , dedicated I/O chips  265 , NVMIC chips  250 , dedicated control chip  260  may be referred to that as illustrated in  FIG.  11 A . 
     For example, referring to  FIG.  11 L , all of the PCIC chips  269  in the logic drive  300  may be GPU chips, for example 2, 3, 4 or more than 4 GPU chips and each of the HBM IC chips  251  in the logic drive  300  may be a high speed, high bandwidth DRAM chip, high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chip, magnetoresistive random-access-memory (MRAM) chip or resistive random-access-memory (RRAM) chip. The communication between one of the PCIC chips  269 , i.e., GPU chips, and one of the HBM IC chips  251  may have a data bit width of equal to or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. 
     For example, referring to  FIG.  11 L , all of the PCIC chips  269  in the logic drive  300  may be TPU chips, for example 2, 3, 4 or more than 4 TPU chips and each of the HBM IC chips  251  in the logic drive  300  may be a high speed, high bandwidth DRAM chip, high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chip, magnetoresistive random-access-memory (MRAM) chip or resistive random-access-memory (RRAM) chip. The communication between one of the PCIC chips  269 , i.e., TPU chips, and one of the HBM IC chips  251  may have a data bit width of equal to or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. 
     X. Tenth Type of Logic Drive 
       FIG.  11 M  is a schematically top view showing arrangement for various chips packaged in a tenth type of standard commodity logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 M , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 M  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 L  and the process for forming the same. Referring to  FIG.  11 M , the logic drive  300  may be packaged with multiple GPU chips  269   a  and a CPU chip  269   b  for the PCIC chips  269  as above mentioned. Further, the logic drive  300  may be packaged with multiple HBMIC chips  251  each arranged next to one of the GPU chips  269   a  for communication with said one of the GPU chips  269   a  in a high speed and high bandwidth. Each of the HBM IC chips  251  in the logic drive  300  may be a high speed, high bandwidth DRAM chip, high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chip, magnetoresistive random-access-memory (MRAM) chip or resistive random-access-memory (RRAM) chip. The logic drive  300  may be further packaged with a plurality of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  and one or more of the NVMIC chips  250  configured to store the resulting values or programming codes in a non-volatile manner for programming the programmable logic blocks  201  or cross-point switches  379  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and for programming the cross-point switches  379  of the DPIIC chips  410 , as illustrated in  FIGS.  6 A- 9   . The CPU chip  269   b , dedicated control chip  260 , standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , GPU chips  269   a , NVMIC chips  250  and HBMIC chips  251  may be arranged in an array, wherein the CPU chip  269   b  and dedicated control chip  260  may be arranged in a center region surrounded by a periphery region having the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , GPU chips  269   a , NVMIC chips  250  and HBMIC chips  251  mounted thereto. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 M , the logic drive  300  may include the inter-chip interconnects  371  each extending over spaces between neighboring two of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , NVMIC chips  250 , dedicated control chip  260 , GPU chips  269   a , CPU chip  269   b  and HBMIC chips  251 . The logic drive  300  may include a plurality of the DPIIC chip  410  aligned with a cross of a vertical bundle of inter-chip interconnects  371  and a horizontal bundle of inter-chip interconnects  371 . Each of the DPIIC chips  410  is at corners of four of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , NVMIC chips  250 , dedicated control chip  260 , GPU chips  269   a , CPU chip  269   b  and HBMIC chips  251  around said each of the DPIIC chips  410 . Each of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may be the programmable or fixed interconnect  361  or  364  as mentioned above in the sections of “Specification for Programmable Interconnect” and “Specification for Fixed Interconnect”. Signal transmission may be built (1) between one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects  371  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  or (2) between one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 . Signal transmission may be built (1) between one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the intra-chip interconnects  502  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  or (2) between one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the intra-chip interconnects of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 M , one or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the GPU chips  269   a . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to the CPU chip  269   b . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the HBMIC chips  251 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the GPU chips  269   a . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to the CPU chip  269   b . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the HBMIC chips  251 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the CPU chip  269   b  to all of the GPU chips  269   a . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the CPU chip  269   b  to all of the HBMIC chips  251 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from one of the GPU chips  269   a  to one of the HBMIC chips  251  and the communication between said one of the GPU chips  269   a  and said one of the HBM IC chips  251  may have a data bit width of equal to or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the NVMIC chips  250  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the HBMIC chips  251  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the GPU chips  269   a  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the CPU chip  269   b  to the dedicated control chip  260 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 M , the logic drive  300  may include multiple dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265  in a peripheral region thereof surrounding a central region thereof having the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , NVMIC chips  250 , dedicated control chip  260 , GPU chips  269   a , CPU chip  269   b , HBMIC chips  251  and DPIIC chips  410  located therein. One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the NVMIC chips  250  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the dedicated control chip  260  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the GPU chips  269   a  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the CPU chip  269   b  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the HBMIC chips  251  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . 
     Accordingly, in the tenth type of logic drive  300 , the GPU chips  269   a  may operate with the HBM IC chips  251  for high speed, high bandwidth parallel processing and/or computing. Referring to  FIG.  11 M , each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may be the first type of standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J , and each of the DPIIC chips  410  may be the first type of DPIIC chips  410  as illustrated in  FIG.  9   . The specification of the commodity standard FPGA IC chips  200 , DPIIC chips  410 , dedicated I/O chips  265 , NVMIC chips  250 , dedicated control chip  260  may be referred to that as illustrated in  FIG.  11 A . 
     XI. Eleventh Type of Logic Drive 
       FIG.  11 N  is a schematically top view showing arrangement for various chips packaged in an eleventh type of standard commodity logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , the specification of the element as seen in  FIG.  11 N  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 M  and the process for forming the same. Referring to  FIG.  11 M , the logic drive  300  may be packaged with multiple TPU chips  269   c  and a CPU chip  269   b  for the PCIC chips  269  as above mentioned. Further, the logic drive  300  may be packaged with multiple HBMIC chips  251  each arranged next to one of the TPU chips  269   c  for communication with said one of the TPU chips  269   c  in a high speed and high bandwidth. Each of the HBM IC chips  251  in the logic drive  300  may be a high speed, high bandwidth DRAM chip, high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chip, magnetoresistive random-access-memory (MRAM) chip or resistive random-access-memory (RRAM) chip. The logic drive  300  may be further packaged with a plurality of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  and one or more of the NVMIC chips  250  configured to store the resulting values or programming codes in a non-volatile manner for programming the programmable logic blocks  201  or cross-point switches  379  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and for programming the cross-point switches  379  of the DPIIC chips  410 , as illustrated in  FIGS.  6 A- 9   . The CPU chip  269   b , dedicated control chip  260 , standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , TPU chips  269   c , NVMIC chips  250  and HBMIC chips  251  may be arranged in an array, wherein the CPU chip  269   b  and dedicated control chip  260  may be arranged in a center region surrounded by a periphery region having the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , TPU chips  269   c , NVMIC chips  250  and HBMIC chips  251  mounted thereto. 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 N , the logic drive  300  may include the inter-chip interconnects  371  each extending over spaces between neighboring two of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , NVMIC chips  250 , dedicated control chip  260 , TPU chips  269   c , CPU chip  269   b  and HBMIC chips  251 . The logic drive  300  may include a plurality of the DPIIC chip  410  aligned with a cross of a vertical bundle of inter-chip interconnects  371  and a horizontal bundle of inter-chip interconnects  371 . Each of the DPIIC chips  410  is at corners of four of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , NVMIC chips  250 , dedicated control chip  260 , TPU chips  269   c , CPU chip  269   b  and HBMIC chips  251  around said each of the DPIIC chips  410 . Each of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may be the programmable or fixed interconnect  361  or  364  as mentioned above in the sections of “Specification for Programmable Interconnect” and “Specification for Fixed Interconnect”. Signal transmission may be built (1) between one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects  371  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  or (2) between one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the intra-chip interconnects of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 . Signal transmission may be built (1) between one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the intra-chip interconnects  502  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  or (2) between one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the intra-chip interconnects of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one of the small input/output (I/O) circuits  203  of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 N , one or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to both of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the TPU chips  269   c . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to the CPU chip  269   b . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the HBMIC chips  251 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to both of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the TPU chips  269   c . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to the CPU chip  269   b . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the HBMIC chips  251 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects or more  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the CPU chip  269   b  to all of the TPU chips  269   c . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the CPU chip  269   b  to all of the HBMIC chips  251 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from one of the TPU chips  269   c  to one of the HBMIC chips  251  and the communication between said one of the TPU chips  269   c  and said one of the HBM IC chips  251  may have a data bit width of equal to or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the NVMIC chips  250  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the HBMIC chips  251  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the TPU chips  269   c  to the dedicated control chip  260 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the CPU chip  269   b  to the dedicated control chip  260 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  11 N , the logic drive  300  may include multiple dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265  in a peripheral region thereof surrounding a central region thereof having the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , NVMIC chips  250 , dedicated control chip  260 , TPU chips  269   c , CPU chip  269   b , HBMIC chips  251  and DPIIC chips  410  located therein. One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the DPIIC chips  410  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the NVMIC chips  250  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the dedicated control chip  260  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the TPU chips  269   c  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from the CPU chip  269   b  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . One or more of the programmable or fixed interconnects  361  or  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple from each of the HBMIC chips  251  to all of the dedicated input/output (I/O) chips  265 . 
     Accordingly, in the eleventh type of logic drive  300 , the TPU chips  269   c  may operate with the HBM IC chips  251  for high speed, high bandwidth parallel processing and/or computing. Referring to  FIG.  11 N , each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may be the first type of standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J , and each of the DPIIC chips  410  may be the first type of DPIIC chips  410  as illustrated in  FIG.  9   . The specification of the commodity standard FPGA IC chips  200 , DPIIC chips  410 , dedicated I/O chips  265 , NVMIC chips  250 , dedicated control chip  260  may be referred to that as illustrated in  FIG.  11 A . 
     Accordingly, referring to  FIGS.  11 F through  11 N , once the programmable interconnects  361  of the FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  are programmed, the programmed programmable interconnects  361  together with the fixed interconnects  364  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  may provide some specific functions for some given applications. The standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may operate together with the PCIC chip or chips  269 , e.g., GPU chips, CPU chips, TPU chips or DSP chips, in the same logic drive  300  to provide powerful functions and operations in applications, for example, Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning, deep learning, big data, Internet Of Things (IOT), Virtual Reality (VR), Augmented Reality (AR), driverless car electronics, Graphic Processing (GP), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Micro Controlling (MC), and/or Central Processing (CP). 
     Interconnection for Logic Drive 
       FIGS.  12 A- 12 C  are various block diagrams showing various connections between chips in a logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIGS.  12 A- 12 C , a block  250  may be a combination of the NVMIC chips  250  in the logic drive  300  illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N ; two blocks  200  may be two different groups of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  in the logic drive  300  illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N ; a block  410  may be a combination of the DPIIC chips  410  in the logic drive  300  illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N ; a block  265  may be a combination of the dedicated I/O chips  265  in the logic drive  300  illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N ; a block  360  may be the dedicated control chip  260 , the dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , the DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the logic drive  300  illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A- 12 C , each of the NVMIC chips  250  may reload resulting values or first programming codes from the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300  such that each of the resulting values or first programming codes may pass from said each of the NVMIC chips  250  to one of the memory cells  490  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and the fixed interconnects  364  of the intra-chip interconnects  502  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  for programing one of the programmable logic blocks  201  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A . Each of the NVMIC chips  250  may reload second programming codes from the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300  such that each of the second programming codes may pass from said each of the NVMIC chips  250  to one of the memory cells  362  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and the fixed interconnects  364  of the intra-chip interconnects  502  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  for programing one of the pass/no-pass switches  258  or cross-point switches  379  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  as illustrated in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F,  3 A- 3 D and  7 A- 7 C . Each of the NVMIC chips  250  may reload third programming codes from the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300  such that each of the third programming codes may pass from said each of the NVMIC chips  250  to one of the memory cells  362  of the DPIIC chips  410  via the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and the fixed interconnects  364  of the intra-chip interconnects of the DPIIC chips  410  for programing one of the pass/no-pass switches  258  or cross-point switches  379  of the DPIIC chips  410  as illustrated in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F,  3 A- 3 D and  7 A- 7 C . The external circuitry  271  may not be allowed to reload the resulting values and first, second and third programming codes from any of the NVMIC chips  250  in the logic drive  300 . Alternatively, the external circuitry  271  may be allowed to reload the resulting values and first, second and third programming codes from any of the NVMIC chips  250  in the logic drive  300 . 
     I. First Type of Interconnection for Logic Drive 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the DPIIC chips  410  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the DPIIC chips  410  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the DPIIC chips  410  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the DPIIC chips  410  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the DPIIC chips  410 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of all of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . One or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may couple to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of the others of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . One or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may couple to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of each of the NVMIC chips  250  to one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of the others of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of each of the NVMIC chips  250  may couple to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . In this case, each of the NVMIC chips  250  in the logic drive  300  may not be provided with any I/O circuit having input or output capacitance, driving capability or loading smaller than 2 pF, but provided with the large I/O circuits  341  as seen in  FIG.  5 A  to perform the above-mentioned connection. Each of the NVMIC chips  250  may pass data to all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  through one or more of the dedicated I/O chips  265 ; each of the NVMIC chips  250  may pass data to all of the DPIIC chips  410  through one or more of the dedicated I/O chips  265 ; each of the NVMIC chips  250  may have no freedom to pass any data to any of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  not through any of the dedicated I/O chips  265 ; each of the NVMIC chips  250  may have no freedom to pass any data to any of the DPIIC chips  410  not through any of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . 
     (1) Interconnection for Programming Memory Cells 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , in an aspect, the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may generate a control command to one of its large I/O circuits  341  to drive the control command to a first one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the NVMIC chips  250  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the NVMIC chips  250 , the control command is driven by the first one of its large I/O circuits  341  to its internal circuits to command its internal circuits to pass the programming code to a second one of its large I/O circuits  341 ; the second one of its large I/O circuits  341  may drive the programming code to one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its large I/O circuits may drive the programming code to one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the programming code to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the programming code to one of its memory cells  362  in one of its memory-array blocks  423  as seen in  FIG.  9    via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of its intra-chip interconnects; the programming code may be stored in said one of its memory cells  362  for programming one of its pass/no-pass switches  258  and/or cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F,  3 A- 3 D and  7 A- 7 C . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may generate a control command to one of its large I/O circuits  341  to drive the control command to a first one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the NVMIC chips  250  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the NVMIC chips  250 , the control command is driven by the first one of its large I/O circuits  341  to its internal circuits to command its internal circuits to pass the programming code to a second one of its large I/O circuits  341 ; the second one of its large I/O circuits  341  may drive the programming code to one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its large I/O circuits may drive the programming code to one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the programming code to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the programming code to one of its memory cells  362  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of its intra-chip interconnects  502 ; the programming code may be stored in said one of its memory cells  362  for programming one of its pass/no-pass switches  258  and/or cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F,  3 A- 3 D and  7 A- 7 C . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may generate a control command to one of its large I/O circuits  341  to drive the control command to a first one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the NVMIC chips  250  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the NVMIC chips  250 , the control command is driven by the first one of its large I/O circuits  341  to its internal circuits to command its internal circuits to pass the resulting value or programming code to a second one of its large I/O circuits  341 ; the second one of its large I/O circuits  341  may drive the resulting value or programming code to one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its large I/O circuits may drive the resulting value or programming code to one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the resulting value or programming code to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the resulting value or programming code to one of its memory cells  490  via one of its fixed interconnects  364 ; the resulting value or programming code may be stored in said one of its memory cells  490  for programming one of its programmable logic blocks  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A . 
     (2) Interconnection for Operation 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , in an aspect, one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may have one of its large I/O circuits  341  to drive a signal from the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300  to one of its small I/O circuits  203 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the signal to a first one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated DPIIC chips  410 , the first one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the signal to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first one of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the signal from the first one of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to a second one of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to be passed to a second one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; the second one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the signal to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the signal to one of its cross-point switches  379  through a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  as seen in  FIG.  8 G ; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the signal to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to be passed to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of one of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , in another aspect, for a first one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , one of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  may generate an output Dout to be passed to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502 ; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to be passed to one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to a first one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , the first one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to be passed to a second one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; the second one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of a second one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For the second one of the FPGA IC chips  200 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of its cross-point switches  379  through a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  as seen in  FIG.  8 G ; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to be passed to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of one of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , in another aspect, for one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , one of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  may generate an output Dout to be passed to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502 ; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to be passed to one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to a first one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , the first one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to be passed to a second one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; the second one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of its large I/O circuits  341  to be passed to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     (3) Interconnection for Controlling 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , for the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360 , one of its large I/O circuits  341  may receive or drive a control command from or to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may have a first one of its large I/O circuits  341  to drive a control command from the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300  to a second one of its large I/O circuits  341 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , the second one of its large I/O circuits  341  may drive the control command to one of the large I/O circuits  341  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , for the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360 , one of its large I/O circuits  341  may drive a control command to a first one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , the first one of its large I/O circuits  341  may drive the control command to a second one of its large I/O circuits  341  to be passed to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Thereby, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , a control command may be provided from the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300  to the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  or from the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     II. Second Type of Interconnection for Logic Drive 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the DPIIC chips  410  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the DPIIC chips  410  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the DPIIC chips  410  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the DPIIC chips  410  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the DPIIC chips  410 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of all of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may couple to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of each of the NVMIC chips  250  to one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of all of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of each of the NVMIC chips  250  to one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of all the others of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of all the others of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . One or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of each of the NVMIC chips  250  may couple to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . One or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may couple to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , in this case, each of the NVMIC chips  250  in the logic drive  300  may not be provided with any I/O circuit having input or output capacitance, driving capability or loading smaller than 2 pF, but provided with the large I/O circuits  341  as seen in  FIG.  5 A  to perform the above-mentioned connection. Each of the NVMIC chips  250  may pass data to all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  through one or more of the dedicated I/O chips  265 ; each of the NVMIC chips  250  may pass data to all of the DPIIC chips  410  through one or more of the dedicated I/O chips  265 ; each of the NVMIC chips  250  may have no freedom to pass any data to any of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  not through any of the dedicated I/O chips  265 ; each of the NVMIC chips  250  may have no freedom to pass any data to any of the DPIIC chips  410  not through any of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . In this case, the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may not be provided with any I/O circuit having input or output capacitance, driving capability or loading smaller than 2 pF, but provided with the large I/O circuits  341  as seen in  FIG.  5 A  to perform the above-mentioned connection. The dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may pass control commands or other signals to all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  through one or more of the dedicated I/O chips  265 ; the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may pass control commands or other signals to all of the DPIIC chips  410  through one or more of the dedicated I/O chips  265 ; the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may have no freedom to pass any control command or other signal to any of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  not through any of the dedicated I/O chips  265 ; the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may have no freedom to pass any control command or other signal to any of the DPIIC chips  410  not through any of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . 
     (1) Interconnection for Programming Memory Cells 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , in an aspect, the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may generate a control command to one of its large I/O circuits  341  to drive the control command to a first one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the NVMIC chips  250  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the NVMIC chips  250 , the control command is driven by the first one of its large I/O circuits  341  to its internal circuits to command its internal circuits to pass the programming code to a second one of its large I/O circuits  341 ; the second one of its large I/O circuits  341  may drive the programming code to one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its large I/O circuits may drive the programming code to one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the programming code to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the programming code to one of its memory cells  362  in one of its memory-array blocks  423  as seen in  FIG.  9    via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of its intra-chip interconnects; the programming code may be stored in said one of its memory cells  362  for programming one of its pass/no-pass switches  258  and/or cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F,  3 A- 3 D and  7 A- 7 C . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may generate a control command to one of its large I/O circuits  341  to drive the control command to a first one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the NVMIC chips  250  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the NVMIC chips  250 , the control command is driven by the first one of its large I/O circuits  341  to its internal circuits to command its internal circuits to pass the programming code to a second one of its large I/O circuits  341 ; the second one of its large I/O circuits  341  may drive the programming code to one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its large I/O circuits may drive the programming code to one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the programming code to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the programming code to one of its memory cells  362  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of its intra-chip interconnects  502 ; the programming code may be stored in said one of its memory cells  362  for programming one of its pass/no-pass switches  258  and/or cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F,  3 A- 3 D and  7 A- 7 C . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may generate a control command to one of its large I/O circuits  341  to drive the control command to a first one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the NVMIC chips  250  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the NVMIC chips  250 , the control command is driven by the first one of its large I/O circuits  341  to its internal circuits to command its internal circuits to pass the resulting value or programming code to a second one of its large I/O circuits  341 ; the second one of its large I/O circuits  341  may drive the resulting value or programming code to one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its large I/O circuits may drive the resulting value or programming code to one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the resulting value or programming code to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the resulting value or programming code to one of its memory cells  490  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of its intra-chip interconnects  502 ; the resulting value or programming code may be stored in said one of its memory cells  490  for programming one of its programmable logic blocks  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A . 
     (2) Interconnection for Operation 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , in an aspect, one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may have one of its large I/O circuits  341  to drive a signal from the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300  to one of its small I/O circuits  203 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the signal to a first one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated DPIIC chips  410 , the first one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the signal to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the signal from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to be passed to a second one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; the second one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the signal to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the signal to one of its cross-point switches  379  through a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  as seen in  FIG.  8 G ; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the signal to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to be passed to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of one of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , in another aspect, for a first one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , one of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  may generate an output Dout to be passed to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502 ; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to be passed to one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to a first one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , the first one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to be passed to a second one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; the second one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of a second one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For the second one of the FPGA IC chips  200 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of its cross-point switches  379  through a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  as seen in  FIG.  8 G ; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to be passed to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of one of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , in another aspect, for one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , one of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  may generate an output Dout to be passed to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502 ; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to be passed to one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to a first one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , the first one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to be passed to a second one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; the second one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of its large I/O circuits  341  to be passed to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     (3) Interconnection for Controlling 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , for the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360 , one of its large I/O circuits  341  may receive or drive a control command from or to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may have a first one of its large I/O circuits  341  to drive a control command, from the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300  to a second one of its large I/O circuits  341 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , the second one of its large I/O circuits  341  may drive the control command to one of the large I/O circuits  341  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , for the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360 , one of its large I/O circuits  341  may drive a control command to a first one of the large I/O circuits  341  of one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , the first one of its large I/O circuits  341  may drive the control command to a second one of its large I/O circuits  341  to be passed to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Thereby, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 B , a control command may be provided from the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300  to the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  or from the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     III. Third Type of Interconnection for Logic Drive 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the DPIIC chips  410  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the DPIIC chips  410  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the DPIIC chips  410  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the DPIIC chips  410  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the DPIIC chips  410 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all the others of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . One or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may couple to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of the others of the dedicated I/O chips  265 . One or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may couple to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the NVMIC chips  250  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the NVMIC chips  250  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . One or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the NVMIC chips  250  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the NVMIC chips  250  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of all of the DPIIC chips  410 . One or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may couple one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of each of the NVMIC chips  250  to one or more of the small I/O circuits  203  of the others of the NVMIC chips  250 . One or more of the large I/O circuits  341  of each of the NVMIC chips  250  may couple to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     (1) Interconnection for Programming Memory Cells 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , in an aspect, the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may generate a control command to one of its small I/O circuits  203  to drive the control command to a first one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the NVMIC chips  250  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the NVMIC chips  250 , the control command is driven by the first one of its small I/O circuits  203  to its internal circuits to command its internal circuits to pass the programming code to a second one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; the second one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the programming code to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the programming code to one of its memory cells  362  in one of its memory-array blocks  423  as seen in  FIG.  9    via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of its intra-chip interconnects; the programming code may be stored in said one of its memory cells  362  for programming one of its pass/no-pass switches  258  and/or cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F,  3 A- 3 D and  7 A- 7 C . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may generate a control command to one of its small I/O circuits  203  to drive the control command to a first one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the NVMIC chips  250  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the NVMIC chips  250 , the control command is driven by the first one of its small I/O circuits  203  to its internal circuits to command its internal circuits to pass the programming code to a second one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; the second one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the programming code to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the programming code to one of its memory cells  362  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of its intra-chip interconnects  502 ; the programming code may be stored in said one of its memory cells  362  for programming one of its pass/no-pass switches  258  and/or cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  2 A- 2 F,  3 A- 3 D and  7 A- 7 C . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  may generate a control command to one of its small I/O circuits  203  to drive the control command to a first one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the NVMIC chips  250  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the NVMIC chips  250 , the control command is driven by the first one of its small I/O circuits  203  to its internal circuits to command its internal circuits to pass the resulting value or programming code to a second one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; the second one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the resulting value or programming code to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the resulting value or programming code to one of its memory cells  490  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of its intra-chip interconnects  502 ; the resulting value or programming code may be stored in said one of its memory cells  490  for programming one of its programmable logic blocks  201  as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A . 
     (2) Interconnection for Operation 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , in an aspect, one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may have one of its large I/O circuits  341  to drive a signal from the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300  to one of its small I/O circuits  203 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the signal to a first one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated DPIIC chips  410 , the first one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the signal to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first one of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the signal from the first one of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to a second one of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to be passed to a second one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; the second one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the signal to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the signal to one of its cross-point switches  379  through a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  as seen in  FIG.  8 G ; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the signal to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to be passed to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of one of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , in another aspect, for a first one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , one of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  may generate an output Dout to be passed to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502 ; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to be passed to one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to a first one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , the first one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to be passed to a second one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; the second one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of a second one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For the second one of the FPGA IC chips  200 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of its cross-point switches  379  through a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  as seen in  FIG.  8 G ; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to be passed to one of the inputs A 0 -A 3  of one of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , in another aspect, for one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , one of its programmable logic blocks (LB)  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  may generate an output Dout to be passed to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502 ; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  and by-pass interconnects  279  of its intra-chip interconnects  502  to be passed to one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to a first one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the DPIIC chips  410 , the first one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of its cross-point switches  379  via a first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects; said one of its cross-point switches  379  may switch the output Dout to pass from the first group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to a second group of the programmable interconnects  361  of its intra-chip interconnects to be passed to a second one of its small I/O circuits  203 ; the second one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  via one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the output Dout to one of its large I/O circuits  341  to be passed to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     (3) Interconnection for Controlling 
     Referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , for the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360 , one of its large I/O circuits  341  may receive or drive a control command from or to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 C , one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may have one of its large I/O circuits  341  to drive a control command from the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300  to one of its small I/O circuits  203 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the control command to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , for the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360 , one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive a control command to one of the small I/O circuits  203  of one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  via one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . For said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , said one of its small I/O circuits  203  may drive the control command to one of its large I/O circuits  341  to be passed to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Thereby, referring to  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N and  12 A , a control command may be provided from the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300  to the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  or from the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the control block  360  to the external circuitry  271  outside the logic drive  300 . 
     Algorithm for Data Loading to Memory Cells 
       FIG.  13 A  is a block diagram showing an algorithm for data loading to memory cells in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  13 A , for loading data to the memory cells  490  and  362  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  as seen in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J  and to the memory cells  362  of the memory-array blocks  423  of the DPIIC chip  410  as seen in  FIG.  9   , a buffering/driving unit or buffer  340  may be provided for buffering data, such as the resulting values or programming codes, transmitted in series thereto and driving or amplifying the data in parallel to the memory cells  490  and  362  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  and/or to the memory cells  362  of the DPIIC chip  410 . Furthermore, a control unit  337  may be provided for controlling multiple memory units  446 , e.g., ones of SRAM cells of the first type as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A , of the buffering/driving unit  340  to couple in series to an input of the buffering/driving unit  340  and controlling the memory units  446  to couple in parallel to multiple respective outputs of the buffering/driving unit  340 . The outputs of the buffering/driving unit  340  may couple respectively to multiple of the memory cells  490  and  362  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  as seen in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J  and/or couple respectively to multiple of the memory cells  362  of the memory-array blocks  423  of the DPIIC chip  410  as seen in  FIG.  9   . 
       FIG.  13 B  is a circuit diagram showing architecture for data loading in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  13 B , in a serial-advanced-technology-attachment (SATA) standard, the buttering/driving unit  340  may include (1) the memory units  446 , e.g., ones of SRAM cells of the first type as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A , (2) multiple switches  449 , e.g., ones of SRAM cells of the first type as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A , each having a channel with an end coupling in parallel to each other or one another and the other end coupling in series to one of the memory units  446 , and (3) multiple switches  336  each having a channel with an end coupling in series to one of the memory units  446  and the other end coupling in series to one of the memory cells  490  and  362  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  as seen in  FIG.  8 A- 8 J  or one of the memory cells  362  of the memory-array blocks  423  of the DPIIC chip  410  as seen in  FIG.  9   . 
     Referring to  FIG.  13 B , the control unit  337  couples to gate terminals of the switches  449  through multiple word lines  451 , e.g., ones of SRAM cells of the first type as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A , and to gate terminals of the switches  336  through a word line  454 . Thereby, the control unit  337  is configured to turn on one of the switches  449  and off the others of the switches  449  in each of first clock periods in each of clock cycles. The control unit  337  is configured to turn on all of the switches  336  in a second clock period in said each of the clock cycles and off all of the switches  336  in said each of the first clock periods in said each of the clock cycles. The control unit  337  is configured to turn off all of the switches  449  in the second clock period in said each of the clock cycles. 
     For example, referring to  FIG.  13 B , in a first one of the first clock periods in a first one of the clock cycles, the control unit  337  may turn on the bottommost one of the switches  449  and off the others of the switches  449 , and thereby first data, such as a first one of the resulting values or programming codes, from the input of the buffering/driving unit  340  may pass through the channel of the bottommost one of the switches  449  to be latched or stored in the bottommost one of the memory units  446 . Next, in second one of the first clock periods in the first one of the clock cycles, the control unit  337  may turn on the second bottom one of the switches  449  and off the others of the switches  449 , and thereby second data, such as a second one of the resulting values or programming codes, from the input of the buffering/driving unit  340  may pass through the channel of the second bottom one of the switches  449  to be latched or stored in the second bottom one of the memory units  446 . In the first one of the clock cycles, the control unit  337  may turn on the switches  449 , in turn and one by one, and off the others of the switches  449  in the first clock periods, and thereby data, such as a first set of resulting values or programming codes, from the input of the buffering/driving unit  340  may, in turn and one by one, pass through the channels of the switches  449  to be latched or stored in the memory units  446 , respectively. In the first one of the clock cycles, after the data from the input of the buffering/driving unit  340  are latched or stored, in turn and one by one, in all of the memory units  446 , the control unit  337  may turn on all of the switches  336  and off all of the switches  449  in the second clock period, and thereby the data latched or stored in the memory units  446  may pass in parallel through the channels of the switches  336  to the memory cells  490  and/or  362  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  as seen in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J  and/or the memory cells  362  of the memory-array blocks  423  of the DPI IC chip  410  as seen in  FIG.  9   , respectively. 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  13 B , in a second one of the clock cycles, the control unit  337  and buffering/driving unit  340  may perform the same steps as illustrated above in the first one of the clock cycles. In the second one of the clock cycles, the control unit  337  may turn on the switches  449 , in turn and one by one, and off the others of the switches  449  in the first clock periods, and thereby data, such as a second set of resulting values or programming codes, from the input of the buffering/driving unit  340  may, in turn and one by one, pass through the channels of the switches  449  to be latched or stored in the memory units  446 , respectively. In the second one of the clock cycles, after the data from the input of the buffering/driving unit  340  are latched or stored, in turn and one by one, in all of the memory units  446 , the control unit  337  may turn on all of the switches  336  and off all of the switches  449  in the second clock period, and thereby the data latched or stored in the memory units  446  may pass in parallel through the channels of the switches  336  to the memory cells  490  and/or  362  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  as seen in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J  and/or the memory cells  362  of the memory-array blocks  423  of the DPIIC chip  410  as seen in  FIG.  9   , respectively. 
     Referring to  FIG.  13 B , the above steps may be repeated for multiple times to have data, such as the resulting values or programming codes, from the input of the buffering/driving unit  340  to be loaded in the memory cells  490  and/or  362  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  as seen in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J  and/or the memory cells  362  of the memory-array blocks  423  of the DPIIC chip  410  as seen in  FIG.  9   . The buffering/driving unit  340  may latch the data from its single input and increase data bit-width to the memory cells  490  and/or  362  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  as seen in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J  and/or the memory cells  362  of the memory-array blocks  423  of the DPIIC chip  410  as seen in  FIG.  9   . 
     Alternatively, in a peripheral-component-interconnect (PCI) standard, referring to  FIGS.  13 A and  13 B , a plurality of the buffering/driving unit  340  may be provided in parallel to buffer data, such as the resulting values or programming codes, in parallel from its inputs and drive or amplify the data to the memory cells  490  and/or  362  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  as seen in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J  and/or the memory cells  362  of the memory-array blocks  423  of the DPIIC chip  410  as seen in  FIG.  9   . Each of the buffering/driving units  340  may perform the same function as mentioned above. 
     I. First Type of Arrangement for Control Unit, Buffering/Driving Unit and Memory Cells for Standard Commodity FPGA IC Chip 
     Referring to  FIGS.  13 A and  13 B , in a case that a bit width between the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  as seen in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J  and an external circuitry thereof is 32 bits, the buffering/driving units  340  having the number of 32 may be set in parallel in the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  to buffer data, such as the resulting values or programming codes, from their 32 respective inputs coupling to the external circuitry, i.e., with a bit width of 32 bits in parallel, and drive or amplify the data to the memory cells  490  and/or  362  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  as seen in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J . In each of the clock cycles, the control unit  337  set in the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  may turn on the switches  449 , in turn and one by one, of each of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  and off the others of the switches  449  of said each of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  in the first clock periods, and thereby data, such as the resulting values or programming codes, from the input of each of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  may, in turn and one by one, pass through the channels of the switches  449  of said each of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  to be latched or stored in the memory units  446  of said each of the 32 buffering/driving units  340 , respectively. In said each of the clock cycles, after the data from their 32 respective inputs in parallel are latched or stored, in turn and one by one, in all of the memory units  446  of the 32 buffering/driving units  340 , the control unit  337  may turn on all of the switches  336  of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  and off all of the switches  449  of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  in the second clock period, and thereby the data latched or stored in all of the memory units  446  of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  may pass in parallel through the channels of the switches  336  of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  to the memory cells  490  and/or  362  of the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  as seen in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J , respectively. 
     For the first type of standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , each of the memory cells  490  for the look-up tables (LUTs)  210  may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B , and the memory cells  362  for the cross-point switches  379  may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B . 
     For each of the logic drives  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may be provided with the first arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  490  and  362  as mentioned above. 
     II. Second Type of Arrangement for Control Unit, Buffering/Driving Unit and Memory Cells for DPIIC Chip 
     Referring to  FIGS.  13 A and  13 B , in a case that a bit width between the DPIIC chip  410  as seen in  FIG.  9    and an external circuitry thereof is 32 bits, the buffering/driving units  340  having the number of 32 may be set in parallel in the DPIIC chip  410  to buffer data, such as the programming codes, from their 32 respective inputs coupling to the external circuitry, i.e., with a bit width of 32 bits in parallel, and drive or amplify the data to the memory cells  362  of the memory-array blocks  423  of the DPIIC chip  410  as seen in  FIG.  9   . In each of the clock cycles, the control unit  337  set in the DPIIC chip  410  may turn on the switches  449 , in turn and one by one, of each of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  and off the others of the switches  449  of said each of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  in the first clock periods, and thereby data, such as the programming codes, from the input of each of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  may, in turn and one by one, pass through the channels of the switches  449  of said each of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  to be latched or stored in the memory units  446  of said each of the 32 buffering/driving units  340 , respectively. In said each of the clock cycles, after the data in parallel from their 32 respective inputs are latched or stored, in turn and one by one, in all of the memory units  446  of the 32 buffering/driving units  340 , the control unit  337  may turn on all of the switches  336  of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  and off all of the switches  449  of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  in the second clock period, and thereby the data latched or stored in all of the memory units  446  of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  may pass in parallel through the channels of the switches  336  of the 32 buffering/driving units  340  to the memory cells  362  of the memory-array blocks  423  of the DPIIC chip  410  as seen in  FIG.  9   , respectively. 
     For the first type of DPIIC chip  410 , each of the memory cells  362  for the cross-point switches  379  may be referred to one  398  as illustrated in  FIG.  1 A or  1 B . 
     For each of the logic drives  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , each of the DPIIC chips  410  may be provided with the second arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  362  as mentioned above. 
     III. Third Type of Arrangement for Control Unit, Buffering/Driving Unit and Memory Cells for Logic Drive 
     Referring to  FIGS.  13 A and  13 B , the third arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  490  and  362  for the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N  may be similar to the first arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  490  and  362  for each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  of the logic drive  300 , but the difference therebetween is that the control unit  337  in the third arrangement is set in the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , but instead is not set in any of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  of the logic drives  300 . The control unit  337  set in the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  may (1) pass a control command to one of the switches  449  of the buffering/driving unit  340  in one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  through one of the word lines  451  provided by one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 , or (2) pass a control command to the all switches  336  of the buffering/driving unit  340  in said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  through the word line  454  provided by another of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . 
     IV. Fourth Type of Arrangement for Control Unit, Buffering/Driving Unit and Memory Cells for Logic Drive 
     Referring to  FIGS.  13 A and  13 B , the fourth arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  362  for the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N  may be similar to the second arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  362  for each of the DPIIC chips  410  of the logic drive  300 , but the difference therebetween is that the control unit  337  in the fourth arrangement is set in the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , but instead is not set in any of the DPIIC chips  410  of the logic drives  300 . The control unit  337  set in the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  may (1) pass a control command to one of the switches  449  of the buffering/driving unit  340  in one of the DPIIC chips  410  through one of the word lines  451  provided by one or more of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 , or (2) pass a control command to the all switches  336  of the buffering/driving unit  340  in said one of the DPIIC chips  410  through the word line  454  provided by another of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . 
     V. Fifth Type of Arrangement for Control Unit, Buffering/Driving Unit and Memory Cells for Logic Drive 
     Referring to  FIGS.  13 A and  13 B , the fifth arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  490  and  362  for the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 B,  11 E , HF.  11 H and  11 J may be similar to the first arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  490  and  362  for each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  of the logic drive  300 , but the difference therebetween is that both of the control unit  337  and buffering/driving unit  340  in the fifth arrangement are set in the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  as seen in  FIGS.  11 B,  11 E,  11 F,  11 H and  11 J , but instead are not set in any of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  of the logic drives  300 . Data may be transmitted in series to the buffering/driving unit  340  in the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  to be latched or stored in the memory units  446  of the buffering/driving unit  340 . The buffering/driving unit  340  in the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  may pass data in parallel from its memory units  446  to a group of the memory cells  490  and  362  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  through, in sequence, a parallel group of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268 , a parallel group of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and a parallel group of the small I/O circuits  203  of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . 
     VI. Sixth Type of Arrangement for Control Unit, Buffering/Driving Unit and Memory Cells for Logic Drive 
     Referring to  FIGS.  13 A and  13 B , the sixth arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  362  for the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 B,  11 E , HF.  11 H and  11 J may be similar to the second arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  490  and  362  for each of the DPIIC chips  410  of the logic drive  300 , but the difference therebetween is that both of the control unit  337  and buffering/driving unit  340  in the sixth arrangement are set in the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  as seen in  FIGS.  11 B,  11 E,  11 F .  11 H and  11 J, but instead are not set in any of the DPIIC chips  410  of the logic drives  300 . Data may be transmitted in series to the buffering/driving unit  340  in the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  to be latched or stored in the memory units  446  of the buffering/driving unit  340 . The buffering/driving unit  340  in the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  may pass data in parallel from its memory units  446  to a group of the memory cells  362  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  through, in sequence, a parallel group of the small I/O circuits  203  of the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268 , a parallel group of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and a parallel group of the small I/O circuits  203  of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 . 
     VII. Seventh Type of Arrangement for Control Unit, Buffering/Driving Unit and Memory Cells for Logic Drive 
     Referring to  FIGS.  13 A and  13 B , the seventh arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  490  and  362  for the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N  may be similar to the first arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  490  and  362  for each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  of the logic drive  300 , but the difference therebetween is that the control unit  337  in the seventh arrangement is set in the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , but instead is not set in any of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  of the logic drives  300 . Further, the buffering/driving unit  340  in the seventh arrangement is set in one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , but instead is not set in any of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  of the logic drives  300 . The control unit  337  set in the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  may (1) pass a control command to one of the switches  449  of the buffering/driving unit  340  in one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  through one of the word lines  451  provided by one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 , or (2) pass a control command to the all switches  336  of the buffering/driving unit  340  in said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  through the word line  454  provided by another of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . Data may be transmitted in series to the buffering/driving unit  340  in said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to be latched or stored in the memory units  446  of the buffering/driving unit  340 . The buffering/driving unit  340  in said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may pass data in parallel from its memory units  446  to a group of the memory cells  490  and  362  of one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  through, in sequence, a parallel group of the small I/O circuits  203  of said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , a parallel group of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and a parallel group of the small I/O circuits  203  of said one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . 
     VIII. Eighth Type of Arrangement for Control Unit, Buffering/Driving Unit and Memory Cells for Logic Drive 
     Referring to  FIGS.  13 A and  13 B , the eighth arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  362  for the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N  may be similar to the first arrangement for the control unit  337 , buffering/driving unit  340  and memory cells  362  for each of the DPIIC chips  410  of the logic drive  300 , but the difference therebetween is that the control unit  337  in the eighth arrangement is set in the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , but instead is not set in any of the DPIIC chips  410  of the logic drives  300 . Further, the buffering/driving unit  340  in the eighth arrangement is set in one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , but instead is not set in any of the DPIIC chips  410  of the logic drives  300 . The control unit  337  set in the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  may (1) pass a control command to one of the switches  449  of the buffering/driving unit  340  in one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  through one of the word lines  451  provided by one of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 , or (2) pass a control command to the all switches  336  of the buffering/driving unit  340  in said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  through the word line  454  provided by another of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371 . Data may be transmitted in series to the buffering/driving unit  340  in said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to be latched or stored in the memory units  446  of the buffering/driving unit  340 . The buffering/driving unit  340  in said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may pass data in parallel from its memory units  446  to a group of the memory cells  490  and  362  of one of the DPIIC chips  410  through, in sequence, a parallel group of the small I/O circuits  203  of said one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , a parallel group of the fixed interconnects  364  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  and a parallel group of the small I/O circuits  203  of said one of the DPIIC chips  410 . 
     First Interconnection Scheme for Chip (FISC) and Process for Forming the Same 
     Each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , DPIIC chips  410 , dedicated I/O chips  265 , dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , IAC chip  402 , DCIAC chip  267 , DCDI/OIAC chip  268 , DRAM chips  321  and PCIC chip  269  may be formed by following steps. 
       FIG.  14 A  is a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor wafer in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  14 A , a semiconductor substrate or semiconductor blank wafer  2  may be a silicon substrate or silicon wafer, a GaAs substrate, GaAs wafer, a SiGe substrate, SiGe wafer, Silicon-On-Insulator (SOI) substrate with the substrate wafer size, for example 8″, 12″ or 18″ in the diameter. 
     Referring to  FIG.  14 A , multiple semiconductor devices  4  are formed in or over a semiconductor-device area of the semiconductor substrate  2 . The semiconductor devices  4  may comprise a memory cell, a logic circuit, a passive device, such as a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor or a filter, or an active device, such as p-channel MOS device, n-channel MOS device, CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) device, BJT (Bipolar Junction Transistor) device, BiCMOS (Bipolar CMOS) device or FIN Field-Effect-Transistor (FINFET), FINFET on Silicon-On-Insulator (FINFET SOI), Fully Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (FDSOI) MOSFET, Partially Depleted Silicon-On-Insulator (PDSOI) MOSFET or conventional MOSFET, used for the transistors of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , DPIIC chips  410 , dedicated I/O chips  265 , dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , IAC chip  402 , DCIAC chip  267 , DCDI/OIAC chip  268 , NVMIC chips  250  and PCIC chip  269 . 
     With regards to the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , the semiconductor devices  4  may compose the multiplexer  211  of the logic blocks (LB)  201 , memory cells  490  for the look-up table  210  of the logic blocks (LB)  201 , memory cells  362  for the pass/no-pass switches  258 , pass/no-pass switches  258 , cross-point switches  379  and small I/O circuits  203 , as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 J , for each of its standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . The semiconductor devices  4  may compose the memory cells  362  for the pass/no-pass switches  258 , pass/no-pass switches  258 , cross-point switches  379  and small I/O circuits  203 , as illustrated in  FIG.  9   , for each of its DPIIC chips  410 . The semiconductor devices  4  may compose the large and small I/O circuits  341  and  203 , as illustrated in  FIG.  10   , for each of its dedicated I/O chips  265 , its dedicated control and I/O chip  266  or its DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . The semiconductor devices  4  may compose the control unit  337  as seen in  FIGS.  13 A and  13 B  set in each of its standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , each of its DPIIC chips  410 , its dedicated control chip  260 , its dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , its DCIAC chip  267  or its DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . The semiconductor devices  4  may compose the buffering/driving unit  340  as seen in  FIGS.  13 A and  13 B  set in each of its standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , each of its DPIIC chips  410 , each of its dedicated I/O chips  265 , its dedicated control and I/O chip  266  or its DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  14 A , a first interconnection scheme  20 , connected to the semiconductor devices  4 , is formed over the semiconductor substrate  2 . The first interconnection scheme  20  in, on or of the Chip (FISC) is formed over the semiconductor substrate  2  by a wafer process. The FISC  20  may comprise 4 to 15 layers, or 6 to 12 layers of interconnection metal layers  6  (only three layers are shown) patterned with multiple metal pads, lines or traces  8  and multiple metal vias  10 . The metal pads, lines or traces  8  and metal vias  10  of the FISC  20  may be used for the programmable and fixed interconnects  361  and  364  of the intra-chip interconnects  502 , as seen in  FIG.  8 A , of each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . The first interconnection scheme  20  of the FISC  20  may include multiple insulating dielectric layers  12  and multiple interconnection metal layers  6  each in neighboring two of the insulating dielectric layers  12 . Each of the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC  20  may include the metal pads, lines or traces  8  at a top portion thereof and the metal vias  10  at a bottom portion thereof. One of the insulating dielectric layers  12  of the FISC  20  may be between the metal pads, lines or traces  8  of neighboring two of the interconnection metal layers  6 , a top one of which may have the metal vias  10  in said one of the insulating dielectric layers  12 . For each of the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC  20 , its metal pads, lines or traces  8  may have a thickness t 1  of less than 3 μm (such as between 3 nm and 500 nm, between 10 nm and 1,000 nm or between 10 nm and 3,000 nm, or thinner than or equal to 5 nm, 10 nm, 30 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, 200 nm, 300 nm, 500 nm, or 1,000 nm) and may have a width, for example, between 3 nm and 500 nm, or between 10 nm and 1,000 nm, or, narrower than 5 nm, 10 nm, 20 nm, 30 nm, 70 nm, 100 nm, 300 nm, 500 nm or 1,000 nm. For example, the metal pads, lines or traces  8  and metal vias  10  of the FISC  20  are principally made of copper by a damascene process such as single-damascene process or double-damascene process, mentioned as below. For each of the interconnection metal layers  6 , its metal pads, lines or traces  8  may include a copper layer having a thickness of less than 3 μm (such as between 0.2 and 2 μm). Each of the insulating dielectric layers  12  of the FISC  20  may have a thickness between, for example, 3 nm and 500 nm, or between 10 nm and 1,000 nm, or thinner than 5 nm, 10 nm, 30 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, 200 nm, 300 nm, 500 nm or 1,000 nm. 
     I. Single Damascene Process for FISC 
     In the following, a single damascene process for the FISC  20  is illustrated in  FIGS.  14 B- 14 H . Referring to  FIG.  14 B , a first insulating dielectric layer  12  is provided and multiple metal vias  10  or metal pads, lines or traces  8  (only one is shown) having exposed top surfaces are provided in the first insulating dielectric layer  12 . A top-most layer of the first insulating dielectric layer  12  may be, for example, a low k dielectric layer, such as SiOC layer. 
     Referring to  FIG.  14 C , a chemical vapor deposition (CVD) method may be performed to deposit a second insulating dielectric layer  12  (upper one) on or over the first insulating dielectric layer  12  (lower one) and on the exposed vias  10  or metal pads, lines or traces  8  in the first insulating dielectric layer  12 . The second insulting dielectric layer  12  (upper one) may be formed by (a) depositing a bottom differentiate etch-stop layer  12   a , for example, a Silicon Carbon Nitride layer (SiCN), on the top-most layer of the first insulting dielectric layer  12  (lower one) and on the exposed top surfaces of the vias  10  or metal pads, lines or traces  8  in the first insulating dielectric layer  12  (lower one), and (b) next depositing a low k dielectric layer  12   b , for example, a SiOC layer, on the bottom differentiate etch-stop layer  12   a . The low k dielectric layer  12   b  may have low k dielectric material having a dielectric constant smaller than that of the SiO 2  material. The SiCN, SiOC, and SiO 2  layers may be deposited by CVD methods. The material used for the first and second insulating dielectric layers  12  of the FISC  20  comprises inorganic material, or material compounds comprising silicon, nitrogen, carbon, and/or oxygen. 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  14 D , a photoresist layer  15  is coated on the second insulting dielectric layer  12  (upper one), and then the photoresist layer  15  is exposed and developed to form multiple trenches or openings  15   a  (only one is shown) in the photoresist layer  15 . Next, referring to  FIG.  14 E , an etching process is performed to form trenches or openings  12   d  (only one is shown) in the second insulating dielectric layer  12  (upper one) and under the trenches or openings  15   a  in the photoresist layer  15 . Next, referring to  FIG.  14 F , the photoresist layer  15  may be removed. 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  14 G , an adhesion layer  18  may be deposited on a top surface of the second insulating dielectric layer  12  (upper one), a sidewall of the trenches or openings  12   d  in the second insulating dielectric layer  12  (upper one) and a top surface of the vias  10  or metal pads, lines or traces  8  in the first insulating dielectric layer  12  (lower one) by, for example, sputtering or Chemical Vapor Depositing (CVD) a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer  18  (with thickness for example, between 1 nm to 50 nm). Next, an electroplating seed layer  22  may be deposited on the adhesion layer  18  by, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer  22  (with a thickness, for example, between 3 nm and 200 nm) on the adhesion layer  18 . Next, a copper layer  24  (with a thickness, for example, between 10 nm and 3,000 nm, 10 nm and 1,000 nm or 10 nm and 500 nm) may be electroplated on the copper seed layer  22 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  14 H , a chemical-mechanical polishing (CMP) process may be applied to remove the adhesion layer  18 , electroplating seed layer  22  and copper layer  24  outside the trenches or openings  12   d  in the second insulating dielectric layer  12  (upper one) until the top surface of the second insulating dielectric layer  12  (upper one) is exposed. The metals left or remained in trenches or openings  12   d  in the second insulating dielectric layer  12  (upper one) are used as the metal vias  10  or metal pads, lines or traces  8  for each of the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC  20 . 
     In the single-damascene process, the copper electroplating process step and the CMP process step are performed for the metal pads, lines or traces  8  of a lower one of the interconnection metal layers  6 , and are then performed sequentially again for the metal vias  10  of an upper one of the interconnection metal layers  6  in the insulating dielectric layer  12  on the lower one of the interconnection metal layers  6 . In other words, in the single damascene copper process, the copper electroplating process step and the CMP process step are performed two times for forming the metal pads, lines or traces  8  of the lower one of the interconnection metal layers  6 , and metal vias  10  of the upper one of the interconnection metal layers  6  in the insulating dielectric layer  12  on the lower one of interconnection metal layers  6 . 
     II. Double Damascene Process for FISC 
     Alternatively, a double damascene process may be performed for fabricating the metal vias  10  and metal pads, lines or traces  8  of the FISC  20 , as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 I- 14 Q . Referring to  FIG.  14 I , a first insulating dielectric layer  12  is provided and multiple metal pads, lines or traces  8  (only one is shown) having exposed top surfaces are provided in the first insulating dielectric layer  12 . A top-most layer of the first insulating dielectric layer  12  may be, for example, a Silicon Carbon Nitride layer (SiCN) or Silicon Nitride (SiN). Next, a dielectric stack layer comprising second and third insulating dielectric layers  12  are deposited on the top-most layer of the first insulting dielectric layer  12  and the exposed top surfaces of metal pads, lines or traces  8  in the first insulating dielectric layer  12 . The dielectric stack layer comprises, from bottom to top, (a) a bottom low k dielectric layer  12   e , such as SiOC layer, (to be used as an inter-metal dielectric layer to have the metal vias  10  formed therein) on the first insulating dielectric layer  12  (lower one), (b) a middle differentiate etch-stop layer  12   f , such as Silicon Carbon Nitride layer (SiCN) or Silicon Nitride layer (SiN), on the bottom low k dielectric layer  12   e , (c) a top low k SiOC layer  12   g  (to be used as the insulating dielectrics between the metal pads, lines or traces  8  in or of the same interconnection metal layer  6 ) on the middle differentiate etch-stop layer  12   f , and (d) a top differentiate etch-stop layer  12   h , such as Silicon Carbon Nitride layer (SiCN) or Silicon Nitride (SiN) layer, on the top low k SiOC layer  12   g . All layers of SiCN, SiN or SiOC may be deposited by CVD methods. The bottom low k dielectric layer  12   e  and middle differentiate etch-stop layer  12   f  may compose the second insulating dielectric layer  12  (middle one); the top low k SiOC layer  12   g  and top differentiate etch-stop layer  12   h  may compose the third insulating dielectric layer  12  (top one). 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  14 J , a first photoresist layer  15  is coated on the top differentiate etch-stop layer  12   h  of the third insulting dielectric layer  12  (top one), and then the first photoresist layer  15  is exposed and developed to form multiple trenches or openings  15   a  (only one is shown) in the first photoresist layer  15  to expose the top differentiate etch-stop layer  12   h  of the third insulting dielectric layer  12  (top one). Next, referring to  FIG.  14 K , an etching process is performed to form trenches or top openings  12   i  (only one is shown) in the third insulating dielectric layer  12  (top one) and under the trenches or openings  15   a  in the first photoresist layer  15  and to stop at the middle differentiate etch-stop layer  12   f  of the second insulting dielectric layer  12  (middle one) for the later double-damascene copper process to from the metal pads, lines or traces  8  of the interconnection metal layer  6 . Next, referring to  FIG.  14 L , the first photoresist layer  15  may be removed. 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  14 M , a second photoresist layer  17  is coated on the top differentiate etch-stop layer  12   h  of the third insulting dielectric layer  12  (top one) and the middle differentiate etch-stop layer  12   f  of the second insulting dielectric layer  12  (middle one), and then the second photoresist layer  17  is exposed and developed to form multiple trenches or openings  17   a  (only one is shown) in the second photoresist layer  17  to expose the middle differentiate etch-stop layer  12   f  of the second insulting dielectric layer  12  (middle one). Next, referring to  FIG.  14 N , an etching process is performed to form holes or bottom openings  12   j  (only one is shown) in the second insulating dielectric layer  12  (middle one) and under the trenches or openings  17   a  in the second photoresist layer  17  and to stop at the metal pads, lines or traces  8  (only one is shown) in the first insulating dielectric layer  12  for the later double-damascene copper process to from the metal vias  10  in the second insulating dielectric layer  12 , i.e., inter-metal dielectric layer. Next, referring to  FIG.  14 O , the second photoresist layer  17  may be removed. The second and third insulating dielectric layers  12  (middle and upper ones) may compose a dielectric stack layer. One of the trenches or top openings  12   i  in the top portion of the dielectric stack layer, i.e., third insulating dielectric layer  12  (upper one), may overlap one of the bottom openings or holes  12   j  in the bottom portion of the dielectric stack layer, i.e., second insulating dielectric layer  12  (middle one), and have a larger size than that of said one of the bottom openings or holes  12   j . In other words, the bottom openings or holes  12   j  in the bottom portion of the dielectric stack layer, i.e., second insulating dielectric layer  12  (middle one), are inside or enclosed by the trenches or top openings  12   i  in the top portion of the dielectric stack layer, i.e., third insulating dielectric layer  12  (upper one), form a top view. 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  14 P , an adhesion layer  18  may be deposited on top surfaces of the second and third insulating dielectric layers  12  (middle and upper ones), a sidewall of the trenches or top openings  12   i  in the third insulating dielectric layer  12  (upper one), a sidewall of the holes or bottom openings  12   j  in the second insulating dielectric layer  12  (middle one) and a top surface of the metal pads, lines or traces  8  in the first insulating dielectric layer  12  (bottom one) by, for example, sputtering or Chemical Vapor Depositing (CVD) a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer  18  (with thickness for example, between 1 nm to 50 nm). Next, an electroplating seed layer  22  may be deposited on the adhesion layer  18  by, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer  22  (with a thickness, for example, between 3 nm and 200 nm) on the adhesion layer  18 . Next, a copper layer  24  (with a thickness, for example, between 20 nm and 6,000 nm, 10 nm and 3,000 nm or 10 nm and 1,000 nm) may be electroplated on the copper seed layer  22 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  14 Q , a chemical-mechanical polishing (CMP) process may be applied to remove the adhesion layer  18 , electroplating seed layer  22  and copper layer  24  outside the holes or bottom openings  12   j  and trenches or top openings  12   i  in the second and third insulating dielectric layers  12  (middle and top ones) until the top surface of the third insulating dielectric layer  12  (top one) is exposed. The metals left or remained in the trenches or top openings  12   i  in the third insulating dielectric layer  12  (top one) are used as the metal pads, lines or traces  8  for each of the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC  20 . The metals left or remained in the holes or bottom openings  12   j  in the second insulating dielectric layer  12  (middle one) are used as the metal vias  10  for each of the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC  20  for coupling the metal pads, lines or traces  8  below and above the metal vias  10 . 
     In the double-damascene process, the copper electroplating process step and CMP process step are performed one time for forming the metal pads, lines or traces  8  and metal vias  10  in two of the insulating dielectric layers  12 . 
     Accordingly, the processes for forming the metal pads, lines or traces  8  and metal vias  10  using the single damascene copper process as illustrated in  FIG.  14 B- 14 H  or the double damascene copper process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 I- 14 Q  may be repeated multiple times to form a plurality of the interconnection metal layer  6  for the FISC  20 . The FISC  20  may comprise 4 to 15 layers or 6 to 12 layers of interconnection metal layers  6 . The topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC may have multiple metal pads  16 , such as copper pads formed by the above-mentioned single or double damascene process or aluminum pads formed by a sputter process. 
     III. Passivation Layer for Chip 
     Referring to  FIG.  14 A , a passivation layer  14  is formed over the first interconnection scheme  20  of the chip (FISC) and over the insulating dielectric layers  12 . The passivation layer  14  can protect the semiconductor devices  4  and the interconnection metal layers  6  from being damaged by moisture foreign ion contamination, or from water moisture or contamination form external environment, for example sodium mobile ions. In other words, mobile ions (such as sodium ion), transition metals (such as gold, silver and copper) and impurities may be prevented from penetrating through the passivation layer  14  to the semiconductor devices  4 , such as transistors, polysilicon resistor elements and polysilicon-polysilicon capacitor elements, and to the interconnection metal layers  6 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  14 A , the passivation layer  14  is commonly made of a mobile ion-catching layer or layers, for example, a combination of SiN, SiON, and/or SiCN layer or layers deposited by a chemical vapor deposition (CVD) process. The passivation layer  14  commonly has a thickness t 3  of more than 0.3 μm, such as between 0.3 and 1.5 μm. In a preferred case, the passivation layer  14  may have a silicon-nitride layer having a thickness of more than 0.3 μm. The total thickness of the mobile ion catching layer or layers, i.e., a combination of SiN, SiON, and/or SiCN layer or layers, may be thicker than or equal to 100 nm, 150 nm, 200 nm, 300 nm, 450 nm or 500 nm. 
     Referring to  FIG.  14 A , an opening  14   a  in the passivation layer  14  is formed to expose a metal pad  16  of a topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC  20 . The metal pad  16  may be used for signal transmission or for connection to a power source or a ground reference. The metal pad  16  may have a thickness t 4  of between 0.4 and 3 μm or between 0.2 and 2 μm. For example, the metal pad  16  may be composed of a sputtered aluminum layer or a sputtered aluminum-copper-alloy layer with a thickness of between 0.2 and 2 μm. Alternatively, the metal pad  16  may include the electroplated copper layer  24  formed by the single damascene process as seen in  FIG.  14 H  or by the double damascene process as seen in  FIG.  14 Q . 
     Referring to  FIG.  14 A , the opening  14   a  may have a transverse dimension d, from a top view, of between 0.5 and 20 μm or between 20 and 200 μm. The shape of the opening  14   a  from a top view may be a circle, and the diameter of the circle-shaped opening  14   a  may be between 0.5 and 20 μm or between 20 and 200 μm. Alternatively, the shape of the opening  14   a  from a top view may be a square, and the width of the square-shaped opening  14   a  may be between 0.5 and 20 μm or between 20 and 200 μm. Alternatively, the shape of the opening  14   a  from a top view may be a polygon, such as hexagon or octagon, and the polygon-shaped opening  14   a  may have a width of between 0.5 and 20 μm or between 20 and 200 μm. Alternatively, the shape of the opening  14   a  from a top view may be a rectangle, and the rectangle-shaped opening  14   a  may have a shorter width of between 0.5 and 20 μm or between 20 and 200 μm. Further, there may be some of the semiconductor devices  4  under the metal pad  16  exposed by the opening  14   a . Alternatively, there may be no active devices under the metal pad  16  exposed by the opening  14   a.    
     Micro-Bump on Chip 
       FIGS.  15 A- 15 G  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming a micro-bump or micro-pillar on chip in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. For connection to circuitry outside a chip, multiple micro-bumps may be formed over the metal pads  16  exposed by the openings  14   a  in the passivation layer  14 . 
       FIG.  15 A  is a simplified drawing from  FIG.  14 A . Referring to  FIG.  15 B , an adhesion layer  26  having a thickness of between 0.001 and 0.7 μm, between 0.01 and 0.5 μm or between 0.03 and 0.35 μm may be sputtered on the passivation layer  14  and on the metal pad  16 , such as aluminum pad or copper pad, exposed by opening  14   a . The material of the adhesion layer  26  may include titanium, a titanium-tungsten alloy, titanium nitride, chromium, titanium-tungsten-alloy layer, tantalum nitride, or a composite of the abovementioned materials. The adhesion layer  26  may be formed by an atomic-layer-deposition (ALD) process, chemical vapor deposition (CVD) process or evaporation process. For example, the adhesion layer  26  may be formed by sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 50 nm) on the passivation layer  14  and on the metal pads  16  at a bottom of the openings  14  in the passivation layer  14 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  15 C , an electroplating seed layer  28  having a thickness of between 0.001 and 1 μm, between 0.03 and 2 μm or between 0.05 and 0.5 μm may be sputtered on the adhesion layer  26 . Alternatively, the electroplating seed layer  28  may be formed by an atomic-layer-deposition (ALD) process, chemical-vapor-deposition (CVD) process, vapor deposition method, electroless plating method or PVD (Physical Vapor Deposition) method. The electroplating seed layer  28  is beneficial to electroplating a metal layer thereon. Thus, the material of the electroplating seed layer  28  varies with the material of a metal layer to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer  28 . When a copper layer is to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer  28 , copper is a preferable material to the electroplating seed layer  28 . For example, the electroplating seed layer  28  may be deposited on or over the adhesion layer  26  by, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness between, for example, 3 nm and 300 nm or 3 nm and 200 nm) on the adhesion layer  26 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  15 D , a photoresist layer  30 , such as positive-type photoresist layer, having a thickness of between 5 and 300 μm or between 20 and 50 μm is spin-on coated on the electroplating seed layer  28 . The photoresist layer  30  is patterned with the processes of exposure, development, etc., to form an opening  30   a  in the photoresist layer  30  exposing the electroplating seed layer  28  over the metal pad  16 . A 1× stepper, 1× contact aligner or laser scanner may be used to expose the photoresist layer  30  during the process of exposure. 
     For example, the photoresist layer  30  may be formed by spin-on coating a positive-type photosensitive polymer layer having a thickness of between 5 and 100 μm on the electroplating seed layer  28 , then exposing the photosensitive polymer layer using a 1× stepper, 1× contact aligner or laser scanner with at least two of G-line having a wavelength ranging from 434 to 438 nm, H-line having a wavelength ranging from 403 to 407 nm, and I-line having a wavelength ranging from 363 to 367 nm, illuminating the photosensitive polymer layer, that is, G-line and H-line, G-line and I-line, H-line and I-line, or G-line, H-line and I-line illuminate the photosensitive polymer layer, then developing the exposed polymer layer, and then removing the residual polymeric material or other contaminants on the electroplating seed layer  28  with an O 2  plasma or a plasma containing fluorine of below 200 PPM and oxygen, such that the photoresist layer  30  may be patterned with multiple openings  30   a  in the photoresist layer  30  exposing the electroplating seed layer  28  over the metal pad  16 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  15 D , each of the openings  30   a  in the photoresist layer  30  may overlap one of the openings  14   a  in the passivation layer  14  for forming one of micro-pillars or micro-bumps in said one of the openings  30   a  by following processes to be performed later, exposing the electroplating seed layer  28  at the bottom of said one of the openings  30   a , and may extend out of said one of the openings  14   a  to an area or ring of the passivation layer  14  around said one of the openings  14   a.    
     Next, referring to  FIG.  15 E , a metal layer  32 , such as copper, may be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer  28  exposed by the trenches or openings  30   a . For example, the metal layer  32  may be formed by electroplating a copper layer with a thickness between 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, or 5 μm and 15 μm on the electroplating seed layer  28 , made of copper, exposed by the openings  30   a.    
     Referring to  FIG.  15 F , after the copper layer  32  is formed, most of the photoresist layer  30  may be removed using an organic solution with amide. However, some residuals from the photoresist layer  30  could remain on the metal layer  32  and on the electroplating seed layer  28 . Thereafter, the residuals may be removed from the metal layer  32  and from the electroplating seed layer  28  with a plasma, such as O 2  plasma or plasma containing fluorine of below 200 PPM and oxygen. Next, the electroplating seed layer  28  and adhesion layer  26  not under the copper layer  32  are subsequently removed with a dry etching method or a wet etching method. As to the wet etching method, when the adhesion layer  26  is a titanium-tungsten-alloy layer, it may be etched with a solution containing hydrogen peroxide; when the adhesion layer  26  is a titanium layer, it may be etched with a solution containing hydrogen fluoride; when the electroplating seed layer  28  is a copper layer, it may be etched with a solution containing NH 4 OH. As to the dry etching method, when the adhesion layer  26  is a titanium layer or a titanium-tungsten-alloy layer, it may be etched with a chlorine-containing plasma etching process or with an RIE process. Generally, the dry etching method to etch the electroplating seed layer  28  and the adhesion layer  26  not under the metal layer  32  may include a chemical plasma etching process, a sputtering etching process, such as argon sputter process, or a chemical vapor etching process. 
     Thereby, the adhesion layer  26 , electroplating seed layer  28  and electroplated copper layer  32  may compose multiple micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  on the metal pads  16  at bottoms of the openings  14   a  in the passivation layer  14 . Each of the micro-bumps  34  may have a height, protruding from a top surface of the passivation layer  14 , between 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm or 3 μm and 10 μm, or greater than or equal to 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, 5 μm or 3 μm, and a largest dimension in a cross-section (for example, the diameter of a circle shape, or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape) between, for example, 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. The space between one of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  to its nearest neighboring one of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  is between, for example, 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. 
     Referring to  FIG.  15 G , after the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  are formed over the semiconductor wafer as seen in  FIG.  15 F , the semiconductor wafer may be separated, cut or diced into multiple individual semiconductor chips  100 , integrated circuit chips, by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process. These semiconductor chips  100  may be packaged using the following steps as shown in  FIGS.  18 A- 18 U,  19 A- 19 Z,  20 A- 20 Z,  21 A- 21 H and  22 I . 
     Alternatively,  FIG.  15 H  is a schematically cross-sectional view showing a micro-bump or micro-pillar on chip in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  15 H , before the adhesion layer  26  is formed as shown in  FIG.  15 B , a polymer layer  36 , that is, an insulating dielectric layer contains an organic material, for example, a polymer, or material compounds comprising carbon, may be formed on the passivation layer  14  by a process including a spin-on coating process, a lamination process, a screen-printing process, a spraying process or a molding process, and multiple openings in the polymer layer  36  are formed over the metal pads  16 . The polymer layer  36  has a thickness between 3 and 30 micrometers or between 5 and 15 micrometers and the material of the polymer layer  36  may include benzocyclobutane (BCB), parylene, photoepoxy SU-8, elastomer, silicone, polyimide (PI), polybenzoxazole (PBO) or epoxy resin. 
     In a case, the polymer layer  36  may be formed by spin-on coating a negative-type photosensitive polyimide layer having a thickness between 6 and 50 micrometers on the passivation layer  14  and on the pads  16 , then baking the spin-on coated polyimide layer, then exposing the baked polyimide layer using a 1× stepper, 1× contact aligner or laser scanner with at least two of G-line having a wavelength ranging from 434 to 438 nm, H-line having a wavelength ranging from 403 to 407 nm, and I-line having a wavelength ranging from 363 to 367 nm, illuminating the baked polyimide layer, that is, G-line and H-line, G-line and I-line, H-line and I-line, or G-line, H-line and I-line illuminate the baked polyimide layer, then developing the exposed polyimide layer to form multiple openings exposing the pads  16 , then curing or heating the developed polyimide layer at a temperature between 180 and 400° C. or higher than or equal to 100° C., 125° C., 150° C., 175° C., 200° C., 225° C., 250° C., 275° C. or 300° C. for a time between 20 and 150 minutes in a nitrogen ambient or in an oxygen-free ambient, the cured polyimide layer having a thickness between 3 and 30 micrometers, and then removing the residual polymeric material or other contaminants from the pads  16  with an O 2  plasma or a plasma containing fluorine of below 200 PPM and oxygen. 
     Thereby, referring to  FIG.  15 H , the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  may be formed on the metal pads  16  at bottoms of the openings  14   a  in the passivation layer  14  and on the polymer layer  36  around the metal pads  16 . The specification of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  as seen in  FIG.  15 H  may be referred to that of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  as illustrated in  FIG.  15 F . Each of the micro-bumps  34  may have a height, protruding from a top surface of the polymer layer  36 , between 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm or 3 μm and 10 μm, or greater than or equal to 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, 5 μm or 3 μm, and a largest dimension in a cross-section (for example, the diameter of a circle shape, or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape) between, for example, 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. The space from one of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  to its nearest neighboring one of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  is between, for example, 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. 
     Embodiment for SISC Over Passivation Layer 
     Alternatively, before the micro-bumps  34  are formed, a Second Interconnection Scheme in, on or of the Chip (SISC) may be formed on or over the passivation layer  14  and the FISC  20 .  FIGS.  16 A- 16 D  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming an interconnection metal layer over a passivation layer in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
     Referring to  FIG.  16 A , the process for fabricating the SISC over the passivation layer  14  may continue from the step shown in  FIG.  15 C . A photoresist layer  38 , such as positive-type photoresist layer, having a thickness of between 1 and 50 μm is spin-on coated or laminated on the electroplating seed layer  28 . The photoresist layer  38  is patterned with the processes of exposure, development, etc., to form multiple trenches or openings  38   a  in the photoresist layer  38  exposing the electroplating seed layer  28 . A 1× stepper, 1× contact aligner or laser scanner may be used to expose the photoresist layer  38  with at least two of G-line having a wavelength ranging from 434 to 438 nm, H-line having a wavelength ranging from 403 to 407 nm, and I-line having a wavelength ranging from 363 to 367 nm, illuminating the photoresist layer  96 , that is, G-line and H-line, G-line and I-line, H-line and I-line, or G-line, H-line and I-line illuminate the photoresist layer  38 , then developing the exposed photoresist layer  38 , and then removing the residual polymeric material or other contaminants on the electroplating seed layer  28  with an O 2  plasma or a plasma containing fluorine of below 200 PPM and oxygen, such that the photoresist layer  38  may be patterned with multiple trenches or openings  38   a  in the photoresist layer  38  exposing the electroplating seed layer  28  for forming metal pads, lines or traces in the trenches or openings  38   a  and on the electroplating seed layer  28  by following processes to be performed later. One of the trenches or openings  38   a  in the photoresist layer  38  may overlap the whole area of one of the openings  14   a  in the passivation layer  14 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  16 B , a metal layer  40 , such as copper, may be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer  28  exposed by the trenches or openings  38   a . For example, the metal layer  40  may be formed by electroplating a copper layer with a thickness of between 0.3 and 20 μm, 0.5 and 5 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm or 2 μm and 10 μm on the electroplating seed layer  28 , made of copper, exposed by the trenches or openings  38   a.    
     Referring to  FIG.  16 C , after the metal layer  40  is formed, most of the photoresist layer  38  may be removed and then the electroplating seed layer  28  and adhesion layer  26  not under the metal layer  40  may be etched. The removing and etching processes may be referred respectively to the process for removing the photoresist layer  30  and etching the electroplating seed layer  28  and adhesion layer  26  as illustrated in  FIG.  15 F . Thereby, the adhesion layer  26 , electroplating seed layer  28  and electroplated metal layer  40  may be patterned to form an interconnection metal layer  27  over the passivation layer  14 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  16 D , a polymer layer  42 , i.e., insulting or inter-metal dielectric layer, is formed on the passivation layer  14  and metal layer  40  and multiple openings  42   a  in the polymer layer  42  are over multiple contact points of the interconnection metal layer  27 . The material of the polymer layer  42  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the polymer layer  36  and the process for forming the same as illustrated in  FIG.  15 H . 
     The process for forming the interconnection metal layer  27  as illustrated in  FIGS.  15 A,  15 B and  16 A- 16 C  and the process for forming the polymer layer  42  as seen in  FIG.  16 D  may be alternately performed more than one times to fabricate the SISC  29  as seen in  FIG.  17   .  FIG.  17    is a cross-sectional view showing a second interconnection scheme of a chip (SISC) is formed with multiple interconnection metal layers  27  and multiple polymer layers  42  and  51 , i.e., insulating or inter-metal dielectric layers, alternatively arranged in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  17   , the SISC  29  may include an upper one of the interconnection metal layers  27  formed with multiple metal vias  27   a  in the openings  42   a  in one of the polymer layers  42  and multiple metal pads, lines or traces  27   b  on said one of the polymer layers  42 . The upper one of the interconnection metal layers  27  may be connected to a lower one of the interconnection metal layers  27  through the metal vias  27   a  of the upper one of the interconnection metal layers  27  in the openings  42   a  in said one of the polymer layers  42 . The SISC  29  may include the bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  27  formed with multiple metal vias  27   a  in the openings  14   a  in the passivation layer  14  and multiple metal pads, lines or traces  27   b  on the passivation layer  14 . The bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  27  may be connected to the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC  20  through the metal vias  27   a  of the bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  27  in the openings  14   a  in the passivation layer  14 . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  16 K,  16 L and  17   , a polymer layer  51  may be formed on the passivation layer  14  before the bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  27  is formed. The material of the polymer layer  51  and the process for forming the same may be referred to the polymer layer  36  and the process for forming the same as shown in  FIG.  15 H . In this case, the SISC  29  may include the bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  27  formed with multiple metal vias  27   a  in the openings  51   a  in the polymer layer  51  and multiple metal pads, lines or traces  27   b  on the polymer layer  51 . The bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  27  may be connected to the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC  20  through the metal vias  27   a  of the bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  27  in the openings  14   a  in the passivation layer  14  and in the openings  51   a  in the polymer layer  51 . 
     Accordingly, the SISC  29  may be optionally formed with 2 to 6 layers or 3 to 5 layers of interconnection metal layers  27  over the passivation layer  14 . For each of the interconnection metal layers  27  of the SISC  29 , its metal pads, line or traces  27   b  may have a thickness between, for example, 0.3 μm and 20 μm, 0.5 μm and 10 μm, 1 μm and 5 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm or 2 μm and 10 μm, or thicker than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm or 3 μm and a width between, for example, 0.3 μm and 20 μm, 0.5 μm and 10 μm, 1 μm and 5 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm or 2 μm and 10 μm, or wider than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm or 3 μm. Each of the polymer layers  42  and  51  may have a thickness between, for example, 0.3 μm and 20 μm, 0.5 μm and 10 μm, 1 μm and 5 μm, or 1 μm and 10 μm, or thicker than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm or 3 μm. The metal pads, lines or traces  27   b  of the interconnection metal layers  27  of the SISC  29  may be used for the programmable interconnects  202 . 
       FIGS.  16 E- 16 I  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming micro-pillars or micro-bumps on an interconnection metal layer over a passivation layer in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  16 E , an adhesion layer  44  may be sputtered on the polymer layer  42  and on the metal layer  40  exposed by the opening  42   a . The specification of the adhesion layer  44  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the adhesion layer  26  and the process for forming the same as illustrated in  FIG.  15 B . An electroplating seed layer  46  may be sputtered on the adhesion layer  44 . The specification of the electroplating seed layer  46  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the electroplating seed layer  28  and the process for forming the same as illustrated in  FIG.  15 C . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  16 F , a photoresist layer  48  is formed on the electroplating seed layer  46 . The photoresist layer  48  is patterned with the processes of exposure, development, etc., to form an opening  48   a  in the photoresist layer  48  exposing the electroplating seed layer  46 . The specification of the photoresist layer  48  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the photoresist layer  48  and the process for forming the same as illustrated in  FIG.  15 D . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  16 G , a copper layer  50  is electroplated on the electroplating seed layer  46  exposed by the opening  48   a . The specification of the copper layer  50  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the copper layer  32  and the process for forming the same as illustrated in  FIG.  15 E . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  16 H , most of the photoresist layer  48  may be removed and then the electroplating seed layer  46  and adhesion layer  44  not under the copper layer  50  may be etched. The processes for removing the photoresist layer  48  and etching electroplating seed layer  46  and adhesion layer  44  may be referred respectively to the processes for removing the photoresist layer  30  and etching the electroplating seed layer  28  and adhesion layer  26  as illustrated in  FIG.  15 F . 
     Thereby, referring to  FIG.  16 H , the adhesion layer  44 , electroplating seed layer  46  and electroplated copper layer  50  may compose multiple micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  on the topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  27  of the SISC  29  at bottoms of the openings  42   a  in the topmost one of the polymer layers  42  of the SISC  29 . The specification of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  as seen in  FIG.  16 H  may be referred to that of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  as illustrated in  FIG.  15 F . Each of the micro-bumps  34  may have a height, protruding from a top surface of a topmost one of the polymer layers  42  of the SISC  29 , between 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm or 3 μm and 10 μm, or greater than or equal to 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, 5 μm or 3 μm, and a largest dimension in a cross-section (for example, the diameter of a circle shape, or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape) between, for example, 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. 
     Referring to  FIG.  16 I , after the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  are formed over the semiconductor wafer as shown in  FIG.  16 H , the semiconductor wafer may be separated, cut or diced into multiple individual semiconductor chips  100 , integrated circuit chips, by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process. These semiconductor chips  100  may be packaged using the following steps as shown in  FIGS.  18 A- 18 U,  19 A- 19 Z,  20 A- 20 Z,  21 A- 21 H and  22 I . 
     Referring to  FIG.  16 J , the above-mentioned interconnection metal layers  27  may comprise a power interconnection metal trace or a ground interconnection metal trace to connect multiple of the metal pads  16  and to have the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  formed thereon. Referring to  FIG.  16 L , the above-mentioned interconnection metal layers  27  may comprise an interconnection metal trace to connect multiple of the metal pads  16  and to have no micro-pillar or micro-bump formed thereon. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  16 I- 16 L and  17   , the interconnection metal layers  27  of the FISC  29  may be used for the programmable and fixed interconnects  361  and  364  of the intra-chip interconnects  502 , as seen in  FIG.  8 A , of each of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . 
     Embodiment for FOIT 
     A Fan-Out Interconnection Technology (FOIT) may be employed for making or fabricating the logic drive  300  in a multi-chip package. The FOIT are described as below: 
       FIG.  18 A- 18 T  are schematic views showing a process for forming a logic drive based on FOIT in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  18 A , a glue material  88  is formed on multiple regions of a carrier substrate  90 , i.e., chip carrier, holder or molder, by a dispensing process to form multiple glue portions on the carrier substrate  90 . The carrier substrate  90  may be in a wafer format (with 8″, 12″ or 18″ in diameter) or a panel format in square or rectangle format (with a width or a length greater than or equal to 20 cm, 30 cm, 50 cm, 75 cm, 100 cm, 150 cm 200 cm or 300 cm). Next, the various types of semiconductor chips  100  as illustrated in  FIGS.  15 G,  15 H,  16 I- 16 L and  17    are placed, mounted, fixed or attached onto the glue material  88  to join the carrier substrate  90 . Each of the semiconductor chips  100  to be packaged in the logic drives  300  may be formed with the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  with the above-mentioned height, protruding from a top surface of the said each of the semiconductor chips  100 , between 3 μm and 60 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or greater than or equal to 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, 5 μm or 3 μm. Each of the semiconductor chips  100  is placed, held, fixed or attached on or to the carrier substrate  90  with its side or surface formed with the semiconductor devices  4 , e.g., transistors, being faced up. The backside of each of the semiconductor chips  100  formed without any active device is faced down to be placed, fixed, held or attached on or to the glue material  88  preformed on the carrier substrate  90 . Next, the glue material  88  is baked or cured at a temperature of between 100 and 200° C. 
     In view of the logic drive  300  shown in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , each of the semiconductor chips  100  may be one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , DPIIC chips  410 , NVMIC chips  250 , dedicated I/O chips  265 , PCIC chips  269  (such as CPU chips, GPU chips, TPU chips or APU chips), DRAM chips  321 , dedicated control chips  260 , dedicated control and I/O chips  266 , IAC chips  402 , DCIAC chips  267  and DCDI/OIAC chips  268 . For example, the six semiconductor chips  100  shown in  FIG.  18 A  may be the NVMIC chip  250 , the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , the CPU chip  269 , the dedicated control chip  260 , the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  and the GPU chip  269  arranged respectively from left to right. For example, the six semiconductor chips  100  shown in  FIG.  18 A  may be the NVMIC chip  250 , the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , the DPIIC chip  410 , the CPU chip  269 , the DPIIC chip  410  and the GPU chip  269  arranged respectively from left to right. For example, the six semiconductor chips  100  shown in  FIG.  18 A  may be the dedicated I/O chip  265 , the NVMIC chip  250 , the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200 , the DPIIC chip  410 , the standard commodity FPGA IC chip  200  and the dedicated I/O chip  265 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  18 A , the material of the glue material  88  may be polymer material, such as polyimide or epoxy resin, and the thickness of the glue material  88  is between 1 and 50 μm. For example, the glue material  88  may be polyimide having a thickness of between 1 and 50 μm. Alternatively, the glue material  88  may be epoxy resin having a thickness of between 1 and 50 μm. Therefore, the semiconductor chips  100  may be adhered to the carrier substrate  90  using polyimide. Alternatively, the semiconductor chips  100  may be adhered to the carrier substrate  90  using epoxy resin. 
     In  FIG.  18 A , the material of the carrier substrate  90  may be silicon, metal, ceramics, glass, steel, plastics, polymer, epoxy-based polymer, or epoxy-based compound. For example, the carrier substrate  90  may be a glass-fiber-reinforced epoxy-based substrate with a thickness of between 200 and 2,000 μm. Alternatively, the carrier substrate  90  may be a glass substrate with a thickness of between 200 and 2,000 μm. Alternatively, the carrier substrate  90  may be a silicon substrate with a thickness of between 200 and 2,000 μm. Alternatively, the carrier substrate  90  may be a ceramic substrate with a thickness of between 200 and 2,000 μm. Alternatively, the carrier substrate  90  may be an organic substrate with a thickness of between 200 and 2,000 μm. Alternatively, the carrier substrate  90  may be a metal substrate, comprising aluminum, with a thickness of between 200 and 2,000 μm. Alternatively, the carrier substrate  90  may be a metal substrate, comprising copper, with a thickness of between 200 and 2,000 μm. The carrier substrate  90  may have no metal trace in the carrier substrate  90 , but may have a function for carrying the semiconductor chips  100 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  18 B , a polymer layer  92  having a thickness t 7  of between 250 and 1,000 μm is formed by methods, such as spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing or molding, on the carrier substrate  90  and on the semiconductor chips  100 , enclosing the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  of the semiconductor chips  100 , and filled into multiple gaps between the semiconductor chips  100 . The molding method includes compress molding (using top and bottom pieces of molds) or casting molding (using a dispenser). The material, resin, or compound used for the polymer layer  92  may be a polymer material includes, for example, polyimide, BenzoCycloButene (BCB), parylene, epoxy-based material or compound, photo epoxy SU-8, elastomer or silicone. The polymer layer  92  may be, for example, photosensitive polyimide/PBO PIMEL™ supplied by Asahi Kasei Corporation, Japan, or epoxy-based molding compounds, resins or sealants provided by Nagase ChemteX Corporation, Japan. The polymer layer  92  is applied (by coating, printing, dispensing or molding) on or over the carrier substrate  90  and on or over the semiconductor chips  100  to a level to: (i) fill gaps between the semiconductor chips  100 , (ii) cover the top surfaces of the semiconductor chips  100 , (iii) fill gaps between the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  on or of the semiconductor chips  100 , (iv) cover top surfaces of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  on or of the semiconductor chips  100 . The polymeric material, resin or molding compound for the polymer layer  92  may be cured or cross-linked by raising a temperature to a certain temperature degree, for example, at or higher than or equal to 50° C., 70° C., 90° C., 100° C., 125° C., 150° C., 175° C., 200° C., 225° C., 250° C., 275° C. or 300° C. 
     Referring to  FIG.  18 C , the polymer layer  92  is polished from a front side thereof to uncover a front surface of each of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  and to planarize the front side of the polymer layer  92 , for example by a mechanical polishing process. Alternatively, the polymer layer  92  may be polished by a chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process. When the polymer layer  92  is being polished, the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  each may have a front portion allowed to be removed and the polymer layer  92 , after polished, may have a thickness t 8  between 250 and 800 microns. 
     Next, a Top Interconnection Scheme in, on or of the logic drive (TISD) may be formed on or over the front side of the polymer layer  92  and the front sides of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  by a wafer or panel processing, as seen in  FIGS.  18 D- 18 N . 
     Referring to  FIG.  18 D , a polymer layer  93 , i.e., insulating dielectric layer, is formed on the polymer layer  92  and the micro-pillar or micro-bumps  34  by a method of spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing or molding, and openings  93   a  in the polymer layer  93  are formed over the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  to be exposed by the openings  93   a . The polymer layer  93  may contain, for example, polyimide, BenzoCycloButene (BCB), parylene, epoxy-based material or compound, photo epoxy SU-8, elastomer or silicone. The polymer layer  93  may comprise organic material, for example, a polymer, or material compounds comprising carbon. The polymer layer  93  may be photosensitive, and may be used as photoresist as well for patterning multiple openings  93   a  therein to have multiple metal vias formed therein by following processes to be performed later. The polymer layer  93  may be coated, exposed to light through a photomask, and then developed to form the openings  93   a  therein. The openings  93   a  in the polymer layer  93  overlap the top surfaces of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  to be exposed by the openings  93   a . In some applications or designs, the size or transverse largest dimension of one of the openings  93   a  in the polymer layer  93  may be smaller than that of the area of the top surface of one of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  under said one of the openings  93   a . In other applications or designs, the size or transverse largest dimension of one of the openings  93   a  in the polymer layer  93  may be greater than that of the area of the top surface of one of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  under said one of the openings  93   a . Next, the polymer layer  93 , i.e., insulating dielectric layer, is cured at a temperature, for example, at or higher than 100° C., 125° C., 150° C., 175° C., 200° C., 225° C., 250° C., 275° C. or 300° C. The polymer layer  93  has a thickness between 3 and 30 micrometers or between 5 and 15 micrometers. The polymer layer  93  may be added with some dielectric particles or glass fibers. The material of the polymer layer  93  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the polymer layer  36  and the process for forming the same as illustrated in  FIG.  15 H . 
     Next, an emboss process is performed on the polymer layer  93  and on the exposed top surfaces of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34 , as seen in  FIGS.  18 E- 18 H . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  18 E , an adhesion/seed layer  94  is formed on the polymer layer  93  and on the exposed top surfaces of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34 . Optionally, the adhesion/seed layer  94  may be formed on the polymer layer  92  around the exposed top surfaces of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34 . First, an adhesion layer having a thickness of between 0.001 and 0.7 μm, between 0.01 and 0.5 μm or between 0.03 and 0.35 μm may be sputtered on the polymer layer  93  and on the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34 . Optionally, the adhesion layer may be formed on the polymer layer  92  around the exposed top surfaces of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34 . The material of the adhesion layer may include titanium, a titanium-tungsten alloy, titanium nitride, chromium, titanium-tungsten-alloy layer, tantalum nitride, or a composite of the abovementioned materials. The adhesion layer may be formed by an atomic-layer-deposition (ALD) process, chemical vapor deposition (CVD) process or evaporation process. For example, the adhesion layer may be formed by sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 50 nm) on the polymer layer  93  and on the exposed top surfaces of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34 . 
     Next, an electroplating seed layer having a thickness of between 0.001 and 1 μm, between 0.03 and 2 μm or between 0.05 and 0.5 μm may be sputtered on a whole top surface of the adhesion layer. Alternatively, the electroplating seed layer may be formed by an atomic-layer-deposition (ALD) process, chemical-vapor-deposition (CVD) process, vapor deposition method, electroless plating method or PVD (Physical Vapor Deposition) method. The electroplating seed layer is beneficial to electroplating a metal layer thereon. Thus, the material of the electroplating seed layer varies with the material of a metal layer to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer. When a copper layer is to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer, copper is a preferable material to the electroplating seed layer. For example, the electroplating seed layer may be deposited on or over the adhesion layer by, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness between, for example, 3 nm and 300 nm or 3 nm and 200 nm) on the adhesion layer. The adhesion layer and electroplating seed layer compose the adhesion/seed layer  94  as seen in  FIG.  18 E . 
     Next, referring to  18 F, a photoresist layer  96 , such as positive-type photoresist layer, having a thickness of between 5 and 50 μm is spin-on coated or laminated on the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  94 . The photoresist layer  96  is patterned with the processes of exposure, development, etc., to form multiple trenches or openings  96   a  in the photoresist layer  96  exposing the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  94 . A 1× stepper, 1× contact aligner or laser scanner may be used to expose the photoresist layer  96  with at least two of G-line having a wavelength ranging from 434 to 438 nm, H-line having a wavelength ranging from 403 to 407 nm, and I-line having a wavelength ranging from 363 to 367 nm, illuminating the photoresist layer  96 , that is, G-line and H-line, G-line and I-line, H-line and I-line, or G-line, H-line and I-line illuminate the photoresist layer  96 , then developing the exposed polymer layer  96 , and then removing the residual polymeric material or other contaminants on the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  94  with an O 2  plasma or a plasma containing fluorine of below 200 PPM and oxygen, such that the photoresist layer  96  may be patterned with multiple openings  96   a  in the photoresist layer  96  exposing the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  94  for forming metal pads, lines or traces in the trenches or openings  96   a  and on the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  94  by following processes to be performed later. One of the trenches or openings  96   a  in the photoresist layer  96  may overlap the whole area of one of the openings  93   a  in the polymer layer  93 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  18 G , a metal layer  98 , such as copper, is electroplated on the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  94  exposed by the trenches or openings  96   a . For example, the metal layer  98  may be formed by electroplating a copper layer with a thickness of between 0.3 and 20 μm, 0.5 and 5 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm or 2 μm and 10 μm on the electroplating seed layer, made of copper, exposed by the trenches or openings  96   a.    
     Referring to  FIG.  18 H , after the metal layer  98  is formed, most of the photoresist layer  38  may be removed and then the adhesion/seed layer  28  not under the metal layer  98  may be etched. The removing and etching processes may be referred respectively to the processes for removing the photoresist layer  30  and etching the electroplating seed layer  28  and adhesion layer  26  as illustrated in  FIG.  15 F . Thereby, the adhesion/seed layer  94  and electroplated metal layer  98  may be patterned to form an interconnection metal layer  99  over the polymer layer  92 . The interconnection metal layer  99  may be formed with multiple metal vias  99   a  in the openings  93   a  in the polymer layer  93  and multiple metal pads, lines or traces  99   b  on the polymer layer  93 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  18 I , a polymer layer  104 , i.e., insulting or inter-metal dielectric layer, is formed on the polymer layer  14  and metal layer  98  and multiple openings  104   a  in the polymer layer  104  are over multiple contact points of the interconnection metal layer  99 . The polymer layer  104  has a thickness between 3 and 30 micrometers or between 5 and 15 micrometers. The polymer layer  104  may be added with some dielectric particles or glass fibers. The material of the polymer layer  104  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the polymer layer  93  or  36  and the process for forming the same as illustrated in  FIG.  18 D or  15 H . 
     The process for forming the interconnection metal layer  99  as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 F- 18 H  and the process for forming the polymer layer  104  may be alternately performed more than one times to fabricate the TISD  101  as seen in  FIGS.  18 J- 18 N . Referring to  FIG.  18 N , the TISD  101  may include an upper one of the interconnection metal layers  99  formed with multiple metal vias  99   a  in the openings  104   a  in one of the polymer layers  104  and multiple metal pads, lines or traces  99   b  on said one of the polymer layers  104 . The upper one of the interconnection metal layers  99  may be connected to a lower one of the interconnection metal layers  99  through the metal vias  99   a  of the upper one of the interconnection metal layers  99  in the openings  104   a  in said one of the polymer layers  104 . The TISD  101  may include the bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  99  formed with multiple metal vias  99   a  in the openings  93   a  in the polymer layer  93  and multiple metal pads, lines or traces  99   b  on the polymer layer  93 . The bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  99  may be connected to the SISCs  29  of the semiconductor chips  100  through its metal vias  99   a  and the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  94 . 
     Accordingly, referring to  FIG.  18 N , the TISD  101  may comprise 2 to 6 layers, or 3 to 5 layers of interconnection metal layers  99 . The metal pads or lines or traces  99   b  of the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  may be over the semiconductor chips  100  and extend horizontally across the edges of the semiconductor chips  100 ; in other words, the metal pads or lines or traces  99   b  may extend over the a gap between neighboring two of the semiconductor chips  100  of the logic drive  300 . The metal pads, lines or traces  99   b  of the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  connect or couple the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  of two or more of the semiconductor chips  100  of the logic drive  300 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  18 N , the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  are coupled or connected to the interconnection metal layers  27  of the SISC  29 , the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC  20 , and/or the semiconductor devices  4 , i.e., transistors, of the semiconductor chips  100  of the logic drive  300 , through the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  of the semiconductor chips  100 . The semiconductor chips  100  are surrounded by the polymer layer  92  filled in the gaps between the semiconductor chips  100 , and the semiconductor chips  100  are also covered by the polymer layer  92  on the top surfaces of the semiconductor chips  100 . For the TISD  101 , the metal pads, lines or traces  99   b  of its interconnection metal layers  99  may have thicknesses between, for example, 0.3 μm and 30 μm, 0.5 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm or 0.5 μm to 5 μm, or thicker than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm, 3 μm or 5 μm, and widths between, for example, 0.3 μm and 30 μm, 0.5 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm or 0.5 μm to 5 μm or wider than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm, 3 μm or 5 μm. For the TISD, its polymer layers  104 , i.e., inter-metal dielectric layer, may have a thickness between, for example, 0.3 μm and 30 μm, 0.5 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm or 0.5 μm and 5 μm, or thicker than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm, 3 μm or 5 μm. The interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  may be used for the inter-chip interconnects  371  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N . 
     Referring to  FIG.  18 N , in the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  may be provided by the interconnection metal layers  99  of TISD  101  and may be programmed by a plurality of the memory cells  362  distributed in the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  as seen in  FIG.  8 A- 8 J  and DPIIC chips  410  as seen in  FIG.  9   . Each (or each group) of the memory cells  362  is configured to turn on or off one of the pass/no-pass switches  258  to control whether connection between two of the programmable interconnects  361  of the TISD  101  coupling to two ends of said one of the pass/no-pass switches  258  is established or not. Thereby, in the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , a group of the programmable interconnects  361  of the TISD  101  may connected to each other or one another by the pass/no-pass switches  258  of the cross-point switches  379  set in one or more of the DPIIC chips  410  to (1) connect one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to another of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , (2) connect one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to one of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , (3) connect one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to one of the DRAM chips  321 , (4) connect one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to one of the PCIC chips  269 , (5) connect one of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200  to the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268 , (6) connect one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to another of the dedicated I/O chips  265 , (7) connect one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one of the DRAM chips  321 , (8) connect one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to one of the PCIC chips  269 , (9) connect one of the dedicated I/O chips  265  to the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268 , (10) connect one of the DRAM chips  321  to another of the DRAM chips  321 , (11) connect one of the DRAM chips  321  to one of the PCIC chips  269 , (12) connect one of the DRAM chips  321  to the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268 , (13) connect one of the PCIC chips  269  to another of the PCIC chips  269 , or (14) connect one of the PCIC chips  269  to the dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268 . 
     Typically, the metal pads, lines or traces  99   b  of the TISD  101  as seen in  FIGS.  18 T and  18 U  may have a thickness greater than or equal to the metal pads, lines or traces  27   b  of the SISC  29  as seen in  FIGS.  16 I- 16 L and  17    greater than the metal pads, lines or traces  8  as seen in  FIG.  14 A . 
     Metal Bumps Over TISD 
     Next, multiple metal pillars or bumps may be formed on a topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101 , as seen in  FIGS.  18 O- 18 R .  FIGS.  18 O- 18 R  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming metal pillars or bumps on an interconnection metal layer of TISD in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
     Referring to  FIG.  18 O , an adhesion/seed layer  116  is formed on a topmost one of the polymer layers  104  of the TISD  101  and on a topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101 . First, an adhesion layer having a thickness of between 0.001 and 0.7 μm, between 0.01 and 0.5 μm or between 0.03 and 0.35 μm may be sputtered on the topmost one of the polymer layers  104  of the TISD  101  and on the topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101 . The material of the adhesion layer may include titanium, a titanium-tungsten alloy, titanium nitride, chromium, titanium-tungsten-alloy layer, tantalum nitride, or a composite of the abovementioned materials. The adhesion layer may be formed by an atomic-layer-deposition (ALD) process, chemical vapor deposition (CVD) process or evaporation process. For example, the adhesion layer may be formed by sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 200 nm or between 5 nm and 50 nm) on the topmost one of the polymer layers  104  of the TISD  101  and on the topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101 . 
     Next, an electroplating seed layer having a thickness of between 0.001 and 1 μm, between 0.03 and 2 μm or between 0.05 and 0.5 μm may be sputtered on a whole top surface of the adhesion layer. Alternatively, the electroplating seed layer may be formed by an atomic-layer-deposition (ALD) process, chemical-vapor-deposition (CVD) process, vapor deposition method, electroless plating method or PVD (Physical Vapor Deposition) method. The electroplating seed layer is beneficial to electroplating a metal layer thereon. Thus, the material of the electroplating seed layer varies with the material of a metal layer to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer. When a copper layer, for a first type of metal bumps  122  to be formed in the following steps, is to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer, copper is a preferable material to the electroplating seed layer. When a copper barrier layer, for a second type of metal bumps  122  to be formed in the following steps, is to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer, copper is a preferable material to the electroplating seed layer. When a gold layer, for a third type of metal bumps  122  to be formed in the following steps, is to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer, gold is a preferable material to the electroplating seed layer. For example, the electroplating seed layer, for the first or second type of metal bumps  122  to be formed in the following steps, may be deposited on or over the adhesion layer by, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness between, for example, 3 nm and 400 nm or 10 nm and 200 nm) on the adhesion layer. The electroplating seed layer, for the third type of metal bumps  122  to be formed in the following steps, may be deposited on or over the adhesion layer by, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a gold seed layer (with a thickness between, for example, 1 nm and 300 nm or 1 nm and 50 nm) on the adhesion layer. The adhesion layer and electroplating seed layer compose the adhesion/seed layer  116  as seen in  FIG.  18 O . 
     Next, referring to  18 P, a photoresist layer  118 , such as positive-type photoresist layer, having a thickness of between 5 and 500 μm is spin-on coated or laminated on the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  116 . The photoresist layer  118  is patterned with the processes of exposure, development, etc., to form multiple openings  118   a  in the photoresist layer  118  exposing the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  116 . A 1× stepper, 1× contact aligner or laser scanner may be used to expose the photoresist layer  118  with at least two of G-line having a wavelength ranging from 434 to 438 nm, H-line having a wavelength ranging from 403 to 407 nm, and I-line having a wavelength ranging from 363 to 367 nm, illuminating the photoresist layer  118 , that is, G-line and H-line, G-line and I-line, H-line and I-line, or G-line, H-line and I-line illuminate the photoresist layer  118 , then developing the exposed photoresist layer  118 , and then removing the residual polymeric material or other contaminants on the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  116  with an O 2  plasma or a plasma containing fluorine of below 200 PPM and oxygen, such that the photoresist layer  118  may be patterned with multiple openings  118   a  in the photoresist layer  118  exposing the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  116  over the metal pads  99   b  of a topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  99 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  18 P , one of the openings  118   a  in the photoresist layer  118  may overlap one of the openings  104   a  in the topmost one of the polymer layers  104  for forming one of metal pads or bumps by following processes to be performed later, exposing the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  116  at the bottom of said one of the openings  118   a , and may extend out of said one of the openings  104  to an area or ring of the topmost one of the polymer layers  104  of the TISD  111  around said one of the openings  104 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  18 Q , a metal layer  120 , such as copper, is electroplated on the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  116  exposed by the openings  118   a . For example, in a first type, the metal layer  120  may be formed by electroplating a copper layer with a thickness of between 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm on the electroplating seed layer, made of copper, exposed by the openings  118   a.    
     Referring to  FIG.  18 R , after the metal layer  120  is formed, most of the photoresist layer  118  may be removed and then the adhesion/seed layer  116  not under the metal layer  120  may be etched. The removing and etching processes may be referred respectively to the processes for removing the photoresist layer  30  and etching the electroplating seed layer  28  and adhesion layer  26  as illustrated in  FIG.  15 F . Thereby, the adhesion/seed layer  116  and electroplated metal layer  120  may be patterned to form multiple metal bumps  122  on the metal pads  99   b  of the topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  99  at bottoms of the openings  104   a  in the topmost one of the polymer layers  104 . The metal pillars or bumps  122  may be used for connecting or coupling the semiconductor chips  100 , such as dedicated I/O chips  265  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , of the logic drive  300  to circuits or components external or outside of the logic drive  300 . 
     The first type of metal pillars or bumps  122  may have a height, protruding from a top surface of the topmost one of the polymer layers  104 , between 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater or taller than or equal to 50 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 5 μm, and a largest dimension in a cross-section (for example, the diameter of a circle shape or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape), for example, between 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. The smallest space between neighboring two of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first type may be, for example, between 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. 
     Alternatively, for a second type of metal bumps  122 , the metal layer  120  as seen in  FIG.  18 Q  may be formed by electroplating a copper barrier layer, such as nickel layer, with a thickness, for example, between 1 μm and 50 μm, 1 μm and 40 μm, 1 μm and 30 μm, 1 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, 1 μm and 5 μm or 1 μm and 3 μm on the electroplating seed layer, made of copper, exposed by the openings  118   a , and then electroplating a solder layer with a thickness, for example, between 1 μm and 150 μm, 1 μm and 120 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 5 μm and 100 μm, 5 μm and 75 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 10 μm, 1 μm and 5 μm, or 1 μm and 3 μm on the copper barrier layer in the openings  118   a . The solder layer may be a lead-free solder containing tin, copper, silver, bismuth, indium, zinc, antimony, and/or traces of other metals, for example, Sn—Ag—Cu (SAC) solder, Sn—Ag solder, or Sn—Ag—Cu—Zn solder. Furthermore, after most of the photoresist layer  118  is removed and the adhesion/seed layer  116  not under the metal layer  120  is etched as seen in  FIG.  18 R , a reflow process may be performed to reflow the solder layer into multiple solder balls or bumps in a circular shape for the second type of metal bumps  122 . 
     The second type of metal pillars or bumps  122  may have a height, protruding from a top surface of the topmost one of the polymer layers  104 , between 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater or taller than or equal to 75 μm, 50 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm and a largest dimension in a cross-section (for example, the diameter of a circle shape or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape), for example, between 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm; or greater than or equal to 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. The smallest space between neighboring two of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the second type may be, for example, between 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm; or greater than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. 
     Alternatively, for a third type of metal bumps  122 , the electroplating seed layer as illustrated in  FIG.  18 O  may be formed by sputtering or CVD depositing a gold seed layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 300 nm, or 1 nm to 100 nm) on the adhesion layer as illustrated in  FIG.  18 O . The adhesion layer and electroplating seed layer compose the adhesion/seed layer  116  as seen in  FIG.  18 O . The metal layer  120 , as seen in  FIG.  18 Q , may be formed by electroplating a gold layer with a thickness, for example, between 3 μm and 40 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, 3 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm on the electroplating seed layer, made of gold, exposed by the openings  118   a . Next, most of the photoresist layer  118  may be removed and then the adhesion/seed layer  116  not under the metal layer  120  may be etched to form the third type of metal bumps  122 . 
     The third type of metal pillars or bumps  122  may have a height, protruding from a top surface of the topmost one of the polymer layers  104 , between 3 μm and 40 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, 3 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller or shorter than or equal to 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm and a largest dimension in a cross-section (for example, the diameter of a circle shape or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape), for example, between 3 μm and 40 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, 3 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller than or equal to 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. The smallest space between neighboring two of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the third type may be, for example, between 3 μm and 40 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, 3 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm, or smaller than or equal to 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. 
     Alternatively, for a fourth type of metal bumps  122 , the metal layer  120  as seen in  FIG.  18 Q  may be formed by electroplating a copper layer with a thickness, for example, between 1 μm and 100 μm, 1 μm and 50 μm, 1 μm and 30 μm, 1 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, 1 μm and 5 μm or 1 μm and 3 μm on the electroplating seed layer, made of copper, exposed by the openings  118   a , and then electroplating a solder layer with a thickness, for example, between 1 μm and 150 μm, 1 μm and 120 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 5 μm and 100 μm, 5 μm and 75 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm, 5 μm and 10 μm, 1 μm and 5 μm, or 1 μm and 3 μm on the copper layer in the openings  118   a . The solder layer may be a lead-free solder containing tin, copper, silver, bismuth, indium, zinc, antimony, and/or traces of other metals, for example, Sn—Ag—Cu (SAC) solder, Sn—Ag solder, or Sn—Ag—Cu—Zn solder. Furthermore, after most of the photoresist layer  118  is removed and the adhesion/seed layer  116  not under the metal layer  120  is etched as seen in  FIG.  18 R , a reflow process may be performed to reflow the solder layer into multiple solder balls or bumps in a circular shape for the fourth type of metal bumps  122 . 
     The fourth type of metal pillars or bumps  122  may have a height, protruding from a top surface of the topmost one of the polymer layers  104 , between 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater or taller than or equal to 75 μm, 50 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm and a largest dimension in a cross-section (for example, the diameter of a circle shape or the diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape), for example, between 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm; or greater than or equal to 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 10 μm. The smallest space between neighboring two of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the fourth type may be, for example, between 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm; or greater than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. 
     Process for Chip Package 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  185   , the carrier substrate  90  may be removed, by a polishing, grinding or chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process, from the structure as seen in  FIG.  18 R . Alternatively, the carrier substrate  90  may be removed, by a polishing, grinding or chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process, after polishing the polymer layer  92  as seen in  FIG.  18 C  and before forming the polymer layer  93  as seen in  FIG.  18 D . Optionally, a wafer or panel thinning process, for example, a CMP process, polishing process or grinding process, may be performed to polish or grind a backside  100   a  of the semiconductor chips  100  and a backside  92   a  of the polymer layer  92  for thinning the structure as seen in  FIG.  18 S  such that the polymer layer  92  may have a thickness between 50 and 500 μm. Alternatively, the carrier substrate  90  may not be removed. 
     After the carrier substrate  90  is removed as shown in  FIG.  185   , the package structure shown in  FIG.  18 S  may be separated, cut or diced into multiple individual chip packages, i.e., single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , as shown in  FIG.  18 T  by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process. In the case that the carrier substrate  90  is not removed, the carrier substrate  90  may be further separated, cut or diced into multiple carrier units of the individual chip packages, i.e., single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , as shown in  FIG.  18 U . 
     Assembly for Chip Package 
     Referring to  FIGS.  18 T and  18 U , the first, second or third type of metal bumps or pillars  122  may be used for assembling the logic drive  300  onto an assembling substrate, film or board, similar to the flip-chip assembly of the chip packaging technology, or similar to the Chip-On-Film (COF) assembly technology used in the LCD driver packaging technology. The assembling substrate, film or board may be, for example, a Printed Circuit Board (PCB), a silicon substrate with interconnection schemes, a metal substrate with interconnection schemes, a glass substrate with interconnection schemes, a ceramic substrate with interconnection schemes, or a flexible film with interconnection schemes. 
       FIG.  18 V  is a schematically bottom view of  FIG.  18 T , showing a layout of metal bumps of a logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  18 V , the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type may be arranged with a layout of a grid array. A first group of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type is arranged in an array in a central region of a bottom surface of the chip package, i.e., logic drive  300 , and a second group of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type may be arranged in an array in a peripheral region, surrounding the central region, of the bottom surface of the chip package, i.e., logic drive  300 . Each of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type in the first group may have a largest transverse dimension d 1 , e.g., diameter in a circular shape or diagonal length in a square or rectangle shape, greater than a largest transverse dimension d 2 , e.g., diameter in a circular shape or diagonal length in a square or rectangle shape, of each of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type in the second group. More than 90% or 80% of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type in the first group may be used for power supply or ground reference. More than 50% or 60% of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type in the second group may be used for signal transmission. The metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type in the second group may be arranged from one or more rings, such as 1 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 rings, along the edges of a bottom surface of the chip package, i.e., logic drive  300 . The minimum pitch of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type in the second group may be smaller than that of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type in the first group. 
     For bonding the first type of metal pillars or bumps  122  to the assembling substrate, film or board, the assembling substrate, film or board may be provided with multiple metal bonding pads or bumps, at its top surface, having a solder layer to be bonded with the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first type using a solder reflowing process or thermal compressing bonding process. Thereby, the chip package, i.e., logic drive  300 , may be bonded onto the assembling substrate, film or board. 
     For the second type of metal pillars or bumps  122 , they may be bonded to the assembling substrate, film or board by a solder flow or reflow process with or without solder flux. Thereby, the chip package, i.e., logic drive  300 , may be bonded onto the assembling substrate, film or board. 
     For the third type of metal pillars or bumps  122 , they may be thermal-compress bonded to a flexible circuit film, tape or substrate in the COF technology. In the COF assembly, the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the third type may provide very high I/Os in a small area. The metal pillars or bumps  122  of the third type may have a pitch smaller than 20 μm. For a square shaped logic drive  300  with a width of 10 mm, the number of I/Os of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the third type for signal inputs or outputs arranged along 4 edges of its bottom surface, for example, in two rings (or two rows) in its peripheral area, may be, for example, greater than or equal to 5,000 (with a bump pitch of 15 μm), 4,000 (with a bump pitch of 20 μm) or 2,500 (with a bump pitch of 15 μm). The reason that 2 rings or rows are designed along its edges is for the easy fan-out from the logic drive  300  when a single-layered film with one-sided metal lines or traces is used for the flexible circuit film, tape or substrate to be bonded with the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the third type. The metal pads on the flexible circuit film, tape or substrate may have a gold layer, at a top surface of its metal pads, to be bonded with the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the third type using a gold-to-gold thermal compressing bonding method. Alternatively, the metal pads on the flexible circuit film, tape or substrate may have a solder layer, at a top surface of its metal pads, to be bonded with the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the third type using a gold-to-solder thermal compressing bonding method. 
     For example,  FIG.  18 W  is a cross-sectional view showing multiple metal pillars or bumps of a logic drive are bonded onto a flex circuit film, tape or substrate in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  18 W , the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type may be bonded to a flexible circuit film, tape or substrate  126 . The flexible circuit film, tape or substrate  126  includes a polymer layer  148 , a copper trace  146  on the polymer layer  148 , a protective polymer layer  150  on the copper trace  146  and on the polymer layer  148 , and a gold or solder layer  152  electroless plated on the copper trace  146  exposed by an opening in the protective polymer layer  150 . The flexible circuit film, tape or substrate  126  is further connected to an external circuit, such as another semiconductor chip, printed circuit board (PCB), glass substrate, another flexible circuit film, tape or substrate, ceramic substrate, glass fiber reinforced epoxy based substrate, silicon substrate or organic substrate, wherein the printed circuit board contains a core, having glass fiber, and multiple circuit layers over and under the core. The metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type may be bonded to the gold or solder layer  152 . For the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the third type, the metal layer  152  may be a tin or solder layer to be bonded with it using a gold-to-solder thermal compressing bonding method, and thereby a tin-gold alloy  154  may be formed between the copper trace  146  and the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the third type. Alternatively, for the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the third type, the metal layer  152  may be a gold layer to be bonded with it using a gold-to-gold thermal compressing bonding method. Thereafter, a polymeric material  156 , such as polyimide, may be filled into a gap between the logic drive, i.e., logic drive  300 , and the flexible circuit film, tape or substrate  126  to enclose the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first, second or third type. 
     As mentioned above, the semiconductor chips  100  are arranged in a single layer to form a single-layer-packaged logic drive  300 . A plurality of the single-layer-packaged logic drive  300  may compose an integrated logic drive. The integrated logic drive may be fabricated with two or more than two of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , such as 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or greater than 8 ones, that can be, for example, (1) flip-package assembled in a planar fashion on a printed circuit board (PCB), high-density fine-line PCB, Ball-Grid-Array (BGA) substrate, or flexible circuit film or tape; or (2) assembled in a stack fashion using a Package-on-Package (POP) assembling technology of assembling one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  on top of the other one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . For achieving the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  assembled in a stack fashion, a middle, bottom or lower one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be formed with through-package vias or through-polymer vias (TPV) mentioned as below: 
     First Embodiment for Chip Package with TPVs 
     Each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  in the stack fashion, i.e., in the POP package, may be fabricated in accordance with the same process steps and specifications as described in the above paragraphs as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 A- 18 T , but further including multiple TPVs  158  in the polymer layer  92  between the semiconductor chips  100  of the logic drive  300 , and/or in a peripheral area of the logic drive  300  surrounding the semiconductor chips  100  in a central area of the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  19 A- 19 M .  FIGS.  19 A- 19 M  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming a chip package with TPVs based on FOIT in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. The TPVs  158  may be formed in one of the single-layer-packaged logic drive  300  for connecting or coupling circuits or components at the front side of said one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  to those at the backside of said one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . 
       FIGS.  19 A- 19 O  are schematically views showing a process for forming a chip package with TPVs in accordance with a first embodiment of the present application. Before the semiconductor chips  100  are mounted onto the carrier substrate  90  illustrated in  FIG.  18 A , the TPVs  158  as seen in  FIG.  19 D  may be formed over the carrier substrate  90  illustrated in  FIG.  18 A . Referring to  FIG.  19 A , a base insulating layer  91  including a silicon-oxide layer, silicon-nitride layer, polymer layer or combination thereof may be formed on the carrier substrate  90  illustrated in  FIG.  18 A . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  19 B , a polymer layer  97 , i.e., insulating dielectric layer, is formed on the base insulating layer  91  by a method of spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing or molding, and openings  97   a  in the polymer layer  97  are formed over the base insulating layer  91  to be exposed by the openings  97   a . The polymer layer  97  may contain, for example, polyimide, BenzoCycloButene (BCB), parylene, epoxy-based material or compound, photo epoxy SU-8, elastomer or silicone. The polymer layer  97  may comprise organic material, for example, a polymer, or material compounds comprising carbon. The polymer layer  97  may be photosensitive, and may be used as photoresist as well for patterning multiple openings  97   a  therein to have an end portion of multiple through-package vias (TPV) formed therein by following processes to be performed later. The polymer layer  97  may be coated, exposed to light through a photomask, and then developed to form the openings  97   a  therein. The openings  97   a  in the polymer layer  97  expose multiple top areas of the base insulating layer  91 . Next, the polymer layer  97 , i.e., insulating dielectric layer, is cured at a temperature, for example, at or higher than 100° C., 125° C., 150° C., 175° C., 200° C., 225° C., 250° C., 275° C. or 300° C. The polymer layer  97  after cured may have a thickness between, for example, 2 μm and 50 μm, 3 μm and 50 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, or 3 μm and 15 μm; or thicker than or equal to 2 μm, 3 μm, 5 μm, 10 μm, 20 μm, or 30 μm. The polymer layer  97  may be added with some dielectric particles or glass fibers. The material of the polymer layer  97  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the polymer layer  36  and the process for forming the same as illustrated in  FIG.  15 H . 
     Next, multiple metal pillars or bumps may be formed on the base insulating layer  91 , as seen in  FIGS.  19 C- 19 F .  FIGS.  19 C- 19 F  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming multiple through-package vias (TPV) over a carrier substrate in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  19 C , an adhesion/seed layer  140  is formed on the polymer layer  97  and on the base insulating layer  91  at bottoms of the openings  97   a  in the insulting polymer 97. First, an adhesion layer having a thickness of between 0.001 and 0.7 μm, between 0.01 and 0.5 μm or between 0.03 and 0.35 μm may be sputtered on the insulting dielectric layer  91  and on the base insulating layer  91  at bottoms of the openings  97   a  in the insulting polymer 97. The material of the adhesion layer may include titanium, a titanium-tungsten alloy, titanium nitride, chromium, titanium-tungsten-alloy layer, tantalum nitride, or a composite of the abovementioned materials. The adhesion layer may be formed by an atomic-layer-deposition (ALD) process, chemical vapor deposition (CVD) process or evaporation process. For example, the adhesion layer may be formed by sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 200 nm or between 5 nm and 50 nm) on the insulting dielectric layer  91 . 
     Next, an electroplating seed layer having a thickness of between 0.001 and 1 μm, between 0.03 and 2 μm or between 0.05 and 0.5 μm may be sputtered on a whole top surface of the adhesion layer. Alternatively, the electroplating seed layer may be formed by an atomic-layer-deposition (ALD) process, chemical-vapor-deposition (CVD) process, vapor deposition method, electroless plating method or PVD (Physical Vapor Deposition) method. The electroplating seed layer is beneficial to electroplating a metal layer thereon. Thus, the material of the electroplating seed layer varies with the material of a metal layer to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer. When a copper layer is to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer, copper is a preferable material to the electroplating seed layer. For example, the electroplating seed layer may be deposited on or over the adhesion layer by, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness between, for example, 3 nm and 300 nm or 10 nm and 120 nm) on the adhesion layer. The adhesion layer and electroplating seed layer compose the adhesion/seed layer  140  as seen in  FIG.  19 A . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  19 D , a photoresist layer  142 , such as positive-type photoresist layer, having a thickness of between 5 and 500 μm is spin-on coated or laminated on the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  140 . The photoresist layer  142  is patterned with the processes of exposure, development, etc., to form multiple openings  142   a  in the photoresist layer  142  exposing the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  140 . A 1× stepper, 1× contact aligner or laser scanner may be used to expose the photoresist layer  142  with at least two of G-line having a wavelength ranging from 434 to 438 nm, H-line having a wavelength ranging from 403 to 407 nm, and I-line having a wavelength ranging from 363 to 367 nm, illuminating the photoresist layer  142 , that is, G-line and H-line, G-line and I-line, H-line and I-line, or G-line, H-line and I-line illuminate the photoresist layer  142 , then developing the exposed photoresist layer  142 , and then removing the residual polymeric material or other contaminants on the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  140  with an O 2  plasma or a plasma containing fluorine of below 200 PPM and oxygen, such that the photoresist layer  142  may be patterned with multiple openings  142   a  in the photoresist layer  142  exposing the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  140 . Each of the opening  142   a  in the photoresist layer  142  may overlap one of the openings  97   a  in the polymer layer  97  and extend out of said one of the openings  97   a  in the polymer layer  97  to an area or a ring of the polymer layer  97  around said one of the openings  97   a  in the polymer layer  97 , wherein the ring of polymer layer  97  may have a width between 1 μm and 15 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm, or 1 μm and 5 μm. 
     Referring to  FIG.  19 D , the openings  142   a  are positioned at the places where multiple gaps between the semiconductor chips  100  to be mounted to the polymer layer  97  in the following processes are arranged and where peripheral areas of individual chip packages  300  to be formed in the following processes are arranged, wherein each of the peripheral areas surrounds the semiconductor chips  100  to be mounted in a central area of one of the individual chip packages  300  to be formed. 
     Referring to  FIG.  19 E , a copper layer  144  having a thickness between 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm is electroplated on the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  140  exposed by the openings  142   a.    
     Referring to  FIG.  19 F , after the copper layer  144  is formed, most of the photoresist layer  142  may be removed and then the adhesion/seed layer  140  not under the metal layer  144  may be etched. The removing and etching processes may be referred respectively to the processes for removing the photoresist layer  30  and etching the electroplating seed layer  28  and adhesion layer  26  as illustrated in  FIG.  15 F . Thereby, the adhesion/seed layer  140  and electroplated metal layer  144  may be patterned to form multiple TPVs  158  on the base insulating layer  91  and on the polymer layer  97  around the openings  97   a  in the polymer layer  97 . Each of the TPVs  158  may have a height, protruding from a top surface of the polymer layer  97 , between 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater or taller than or equal to 50 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 5 μm and a largest dimension in its cross-section (for example, its diameter of a circle shape or its diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape) between, for example, 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater than or equal to 150 μm, 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. The smallest space between neighboring two of the TPVs  158  may be between, for example, 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater than or equal to 150 μm, 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. 
     Next, the following steps for FOIT as seen in  FIGS.  19 G- 19 J  may be referred to the steps for FOIT as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 A- 18 R . For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  18 A- 18 R and  19 G- 19 J , the specification of the element as seen in  FIGS.  19 G- 19 J  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 A- 18 R  and the process for forming the same. 
     Referring to  FIG.  19 G , the glue material  88  is formed on multiple regions of the polymer layer  97 . Next, the semiconductor chips  100  as illustrated in  FIGS.  15 G,  15 H,  16 I- 16 L and  17    have backsides attached onto the glue material  88  to join the polymer layer  97 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  19 H , the polymer layer  92  having a thickness t 7  of between 250 and 1,000 μm is applied (by coating, printing, dispensing or molding) on or over the polymer layer  97  and on or over the semiconductor chips  100  to a level to: (i) fill gaps between the semiconductor chips  100 , (ii) cover the top surfaces of the semiconductor chips  100 , (iii) fill gaps between the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  of the semiconductor chips  100 , (iv) cover top surfaces of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  of the semiconductor chips  100 , (v) fill gaps between the TPVs  158  and (vi) cover the TPVs  158 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  19 I , the polymer layer  92  is polished from a front side thereof to uncover a front side of each of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  and a front side of each of the TPVs  158 , and to planarize the front side of the polymer layer  92 , for example by a mechanical polishing process. Alternatively, the polymer layer  92  may be polished by a chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process. When the polymer layer  92  is being polished, the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  each may have a front portion allowed to be removed and the polymer layer  92 , after polished, may have a thickness t 8  between 250 and 800 microns. 
     Next, the TISD  101  as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 D- 18 N  may be formed on or over the front side of the polymer layer  92  and on or over the front sides of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  and TPVs  158  by a wafer or panel processing. Next, the metal pillars or bumps  122  as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 O- 18 R  may be formed on the topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  at bottoms of the openings  104   a  of the topmost one of the polymer layer  104  as seen in  FIG.  19 J . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  19 K , the carrier substrate  90  may be removed, by a peeling, polishing, grinding or chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process, from the structure as seen in  FIG.  19 K  to uncover the base insulating layer  91 . Next, the base insulating layer  91  and a bottom portion of the polymer layer  97  may be removed, by a polishing, grinding or chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process, from the structure as seen in  FIG.  19 K  to uncover a backside  158   a  of each of the TPVs  158  such that the TPVs  158  has copper exposed at the backside  158   a  thereof for acting as multiple metal pads. Alternatively, after polishing the polymer layer  92  as seen in  FIG.  19 I  and before forming the polymer layer  93  of the TISD  101 , the carrier substrate  90  may be removed, by a peeling, polishing, grinding or chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process, from the structure as seen in  FIG.  19 K  to uncover the base insulating layer  91 . Next, the base insulating layer  91  and the bottom portion of the polymer layer  97  may be removed, by a polishing, grinding or chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process to uncover the backside  158   a  of each of the TPVs  158  such that the TPVs  158  has copper exposed at the backside  158   a  thereof for acting as multiple metal pads. Thereafter, the TISD  101  as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 D- 18 N  may be formed on or over the front side of the polymer layer  92  and on or over the front sides of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  and TPVs  158  by a wafer or panel processing. Next, the metal pillars or bumps  122  as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 O- 18 R  may be formed on the topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  at bottoms of the openings  104   a  of the topmost one of the polymer layer  104  as seen in  FIG.  19 K . 
     After the carrier substrate  90 , the base insulating layer  91  and the bottom portion of the polymer layer  97  are removed as shown in  FIG.  19 K , the package structure shown in  FIG.  19 K  may be separated, cut or diced into multiple individual chip packages, i.e., single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , as shown in  FIG.  19 L  by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process. 
     Second Embodiment for Chip Package with TPVs 
       FIGS.  19 S- 19 Z  are schematically views showing a process for forming a chip package with TPVs in accordance with a second embodiment of the present application. The difference between the second embodiment as illustrated in  FIGS.  19 S- 19 Z  and the first embodiment as illustrated in  FIGS.  19 A- 19 L  is that the polymer layer  97  may be completely removed. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  19 S- 19 Z and  19 A- 19 L , the specification of the element as seen in  FIGS.  19 S- 19 Z  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIGS.  19 A- 19 L  and the process for forming the same. 
     For the second embodiment, referring to  FIG.  19 S , the polymer layer  97  is formed on the base insulating layer  91  by a method of spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing or molding, but none of the openings  97   a  as seen in  FIG.  19 B  are formed in the polymer layer  97 . In this case, besides the materials as illustrated in  FIG.  19 B , the polymer layer  97  may be a non-photosensitive material. 
     Next, multiple metal pillars or bumps may be formed on the polymer layer  97 , as seen in  FIGS.  19 T- 19 W .  FIGS.  19 T- 19 W  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming multiple through-package vias (TPV) over a carrier substrate in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. 
     Referring to  FIG.  19 T , the adhesion/seed layer  140  is formed on the polymer layer  97 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  19 U , the photoresist layer  142 , such as positive-type photoresist layer, having a thickness of between 5 and 500 μm is spin-on coated or laminated on the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  140 . The photoresist layer  142  is patterned with the processes of exposure, development, etc., to form multiple openings  142   a  in the photoresist layer  142  exposing the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  140 . The openings  142   a  are positioned at the places where multiple gaps between the semiconductor chips  100  to be mounted to the polymer layer  97  in the following processes are arranged and where peripheral areas of individual chip packages  300  to be formed in the following processes are arranged, wherein each of the peripheral areas surrounds the semiconductor chips  100  to be mounted in a central area of one of the individual chip packages  300  to be formed. 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  19 V , a copper layer  144  having a thickness between 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm, or 10 μm and 30 μm is electroplated on the electroplating seed layer of the adhesion/seed layer  140  exposed by the openings  142   a.    
     Next, referring to  FIG.  19 W , after the copper layer  144  is formed, most of the photoresist layer  142  may be removed and then the adhesion/seed layer  140  not under the metal layer  144  may be etched. The removing and etching processes may be referred respectively to the processes for removing the photoresist layer  30  and etching the electroplating seed layer  28  and adhesion layer  26  as illustrated in  FIG.  15 F . Thereby, the adhesion/seed layer  140  and electroplated metal layer  144  may be patterned to form the TPVs  158  on the polymer layer  97 . Each of the TPVs  158  may have a height, protruding from a top surface of the polymer layer  97 , between 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater or taller than or equal to 50 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm, or 5 μm and a largest dimension in its cross-section (for example, its diameter of a circle shape or its diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape) between, for example, 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater than or equal to 150 μm, 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. The smallest space between neighboring two of the TPVs  158  may be between, for example, 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater than or equal to 150 μm, 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. 
     Next, the following steps for FOIT as seen in  FIG.  19 X  may be referred to the steps for FOIT as illustrated in  FIGS.  19 G- 19 J and  18 A- 18 R . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  19 Y , the carrier substrate  90  may be removed, by a peeling, polishing, grinding or chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process, from the structure as seen in  FIG.  19 X  to uncover the base insulating layer  91 . Next, the base insulating layer  91  and polymer layer  97  may be completely removed, by a polishing, grinding or chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process, from the structure as seen in  FIG.  19 K  to uncover a backside  158   a  of each of the TPVs  158  such that the TPVs  158  has copper exposed at the backside  158   a  thereof for acting as multiple metal pads. Alternatively, after polishing the polymer layer  92  as seen in  FIG.  19 I  and before forming the polymer layer  93  of the TISD  101 , the carrier substrate  90  may be removed, by a peeling, polishing, grinding or chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process, from the structure as seen in  FIG.  19 X  to uncover the base insulating layer  91 . Next, the base insulating layer  91  and polymer layer  97  may be removed, by a polishing, grinding or chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process to uncover the backside  158   a  of each of the TPVs  158  such that the TPVs  158  has copper exposed at the backside  158   a  thereof for acting as multiple metal pads. Thereafter, the TISD  101  as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 D- 18 N  may be formed on or over the front side of the polymer layer  92  and on or over the front sides of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  and TPVs  158  by a wafer or panel processing. Next, the metal pillars or bumps  122  as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 O- 18 R  may be formed on the topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  at bottoms of the openings  104   a  of the topmost one of the polymer layer  104  as seen in  FIG.  19 Y . 
     After the carrier substrate  90 , the base insulating layer  91  and the bottom portion of the polymer layer  97  are removed as shown in  FIG.  19 Y , the package structure shown in  FIG.  19 Y  may be separated, cut or diced into multiple individual chip packages, i.e., single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , as shown in  FIG.  19 Z  by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process. 
     Package-on-Package (POP) Assembly for Drives with TISD 
       FIGS.  19 M- 19 O  are schematically views showing a process for fabricating a package-on-package assembly in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIGS.  19 M- 19 O , when a top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  as seen in  FIG.  19 L  is mounted onto a bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have its TPVs  158  in its polymer layer  92  to couple to circuits, interconnection metal schemes, metal pads, metal pillars or bumps, and/or components of the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  at the backside of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . The process for fabricating a package-on-package assembly is mentioned as below: 
     First, referring to  FIG.  19 M , a plurality of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  (only one is shown) may have its metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto multiple metal pads  109  of a circuit carrier or substrate  110  at a topside thereof, such as printed circuit board (PCB), ball-grid-array (BGA) substrate, flexible circuit film or tape, or ceramic circuit substrate. An underfill  114  may be filled into a gap between the circuit carrier or substrate  110  and the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . Alternatively, the underfill  114  between the circuit carrier or substrate  110  and the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be skipped. Next, a surface-mount technology (SMT) may be used to mount a plurality of the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  (only one is shown) onto the plurality of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , respectively. 
     For the surface-mount technology (SMT), solder or solder cream or flux  112  may be first printed on the metal pads  158   a  of the TPVs  158  of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . Next, referring to  FIG.  19 N , the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have its metal pillars or bumps  122  placed on the solder or solder cream or flux  112 . Next, a reflowing or heating process may be performed to fix the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  to the TPVs  158  of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . Next, an underfill  114  may be filled into a gap between the top and bottom ones of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . Alternatively, the underfill  114  between the top and bottom ones of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be skipped. 
     In the next optional step, referring to  FIG.  19 N , other multiple of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  as seen in  FIG.  19 L  may have its metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the TPVs  158  of the plurality of the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  or the TPVs  158  of the plurality of the topmost one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  using the surface-mount technology (SMT) and the underfill  114  is then optionally formed therebetween. The step may be repeated by multiple times to form three or more than three of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  stacked on the circuit carrier or substrate  110 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  19 N , multiple solder balls  325  are planted on a backside of the circuit carrier or substrate  110 . Next, referring to  FIG.  19 O , the circuit carrier or structure  110  may be separated, cut or diced into multiple individual substrate units  113 , such as Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs), Ball-Grid-Array (BGA) substrates, flexible circuit films or tapes, or ceramic circuit substrates, by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process. Thereby, the number i of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be stacked on one of the substrate units  113 , wherein the number i may be equal to or greater than 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8. 
     Alternatively,  FIGS.  19 P- 19 R  are schematically views showing a process for fabricating a package-on-package assembly in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIGS.  19 P and  19 Q , a plurality of the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have its metal pillars or bumps  122  fixed or mounted, using the SMT technology, to the TPVs  158  of the structure in a wafer or panel level as seen in  FIG.  19 K  before being separated into a plurality of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  19 Q , the underfill  114  may be filled into a gap between each of the top ones of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and the structure in a wafer or panel level as seen in  FIG.  19 K . Alternatively, the underfill  114  may be skipped. 
     In the next optional step, referring to  FIG.  19 Q , other multiple of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  as seen in  FIG.  19 L  may have its metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the TPVs  158  of the top ones of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  using the surface-mount technology (SMT) and the underfill  114  is then optionally formed therebetween. The step may be repeated by multiple times to form two or more than two of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  stacked on the structure in a wafer or panel level as seen in  FIG.  19 K . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  19 R , the structure in a wafer or panel level as seen in  FIG.  19 K  may be separated, cut or diced into a plurality of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process. Thereby, the number i of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be stacked together, wherein the number i may be equal to or greater than 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8. Next, the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  stacked together may have a bottommost one provided with the metal pillars or bumps  122  to be mounted onto the multiple metal pads  109  of the circuit carrier or substrate  110  as seen in  FIG.  19 M , such as ball-grid-array substrate, at the topside thereof. Next, an underfill  114  may be filled into a gap between the circuit carrier or substrate  110  and the bottommost one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . Alternatively, the underfill  114  may be skipped. Next, multiple solder balls  325  are planted on a backside of the circuit carrier or substrate  110 . Next, the circuit carrier or structure  110  may be separated, cut or diced into multiple individual substrate units  113 , such as printed circuit boards (PCB) or BGA (Ball-Grid-array) substrates, by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process, as seen in  FIG.  19 O . Thereby, the number i of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be stacked on one of the substrate units  13 , wherein the number i may be equal to or greater than 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8. 
     The single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  with the TPVs  158  to be stacked in a vertical direction to form the POP assembly may be in a standard format or have standard sizes. For example, the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be in a shape of square or rectangle, with a certain widths, lengths and thicknesses. An industry standard may be set for the shape and dimensions of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . For example, the standard shape of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be a square, with a width greater than or equal to 4 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm or 40 mm, and having a thickness greater than or equal to 0.03 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm or 5 mm. Alternatively, the standard shape of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be a rectangle, with a width greater than or equal to 3 mm, 5 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm or 40 mm, and a length greater than or equal to 5 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm, 40 mm, 45 mm or 50 mm; and having a thickness greater than or equal to 0.03 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm or 5 mm. 
     Embodiment for Chip Package with BISD and TPVs 
     Alternatively, the Fan-Out Interconnection Technology (FOIT) may be further performed over the carrier substrate  90  for fabricating a Bottom metal Interconnection Scheme at a backside of the logic Drive  300  (BISD) in a multi-chip package. The BISD are described as below: 
       FIG.  20 A- 20 M  are schematic views showing a process for forming BISD over a carrier substrate in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  20 A , a base insulating layer  91  including a silicon-oxide layer, silicon-nitride layer, polymer layer or combination thereof may be formed on the carrier substrate  90  illustrated in  FIG.  18 A . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  20 B , a polymer layer  97 , i.e., insulating dielectric layer, is formed on the base insulating layer  91  by a method of spin-on coating, screen-printing, dispensing or molding, and openings  97   a  in the polymer layer  97  are formed over the base insulating layer  91  to be exposed by the openings  97   a . The polymer layer  97  may contain, for example, polyimide, BenzoCycloButene (BCB), parylene, epoxy-based material or compound, photo epoxy SU-8, elastomer or silicone. The polymer layer  97  may comprise organic material, for example, a polymer, or material compounds comprising carbon. The polymer layer  97  may be photosensitive, and may be used as photoresist as well for patterning multiple openings  97   a  therein to have metal vias formed therein by following processes to be performed later. The polymer layer  97  may be coated, exposed to light through a photomask, and then developed to form the openings  97   a  therein. The openings  97   a  in the polymer layer  97  expose multiple top areas of the base insulating layer  91 . Next, the polymer layer  97 , i.e., insulating dielectric layer, is cured at a temperature, for example, at or higher than 100° C., 125° C., 150° C., 175° C., 200° C., 225° C., 250° C., 275° C. or 300° C. The polymer layer  97  after cured may have a thickness between, for example, 3 μm and 50 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, or 3 μm and 15 μm, or thicker than or equal to 3 μm, 5 μm, 10 μm, 20 μm, or 30 μm. The polymer layer  97  may be added with some dielectric particles or glass fibers. The material of the polymer layer  97  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the polymer layer  36  and the process for forming the same as illustrated in  FIG.  15 H . 
     Next, an emboss process is performed on the polymer layer  97  and on the exposed top areas of the base insulating layer  91  to form the BISD  79 , as seen in  FIGS.  20 C- 20 M . Referring to  FIG.  20 C , an adhesion layer  81  having a thickness of between 0.001 and 0.7 μm, between 0.01 and 0.5 μm or between 0.03 and 0.35 μm may be sputtered on the polymer layer  97  and on the base insulating layer  91 . The material of the adhesion layer  81  may include titanium, a titanium-tungsten alloy, titanium nitride, chromium, titanium-tungsten-alloy layer, tantalum nitride, or a composite of the abovementioned materials. The adhesion layer  81  may be formed by an atomic-layer-deposition (ALD) process, chemical vapor deposition (CVD) process or evaporation process. For example, the adhesion layer  81  may be formed by sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 200 nm or between 5 nm and 50 nm) on the polymer layer  97  and on the exposed top areas of the base insulating layer  91 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  20 C , an electroplating seed layer  83  having a thickness of between 0.001 and 1 μm, between 0.03 and 2 μm or between 0.05 and 0.5 μm may be sputtered on a whole top surface of the adhesion layer  81 . Alternatively, the electroplating seed layer  83  may be formed by an atomic-layer-deposition (ALD) process, chemical-vapor-deposition (CVD) process, vapor deposition method, electroless plating method or PVD (Physical Vapor Deposition) method. The electroplating seed layer  83  is beneficial to electroplating a metal layer thereon. Thus, the material of the electroplating seed layer  83  varies with the material of a metal layer to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer  83 . When a copper layer is to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer  83 , copper is a preferable material to the electroplating seed layer  83 . For example, the electroplating seed layer may be deposited on or over the adhesion layer  81  by, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness between, for example, 3 nm and 300 nm or 10 nm and 120 nm) on the adhesion layer  81 . 
     Next, referring to  24 D, a photoresist layer  75 , such as positive-type photoresist layer, having a thickness of between 5 and 50 μm is spin-on coated or laminated on the electroplating seed layer  83 . The photoresist layer  75  is patterned with the processes of exposure, development, etc., to form multiple trenches or openings  75   a  in the photoresist layer  75  exposing the electroplating seed layer  83 . A 1× stepper, 1× contact aligner or laser scanner may be used to expose the photoresist layer  75  with at least two of G-line having a wavelength ranging from 434 to 438 nm, H-line having a wavelength ranging from 403 to 407 nm, and I-line having a wavelength ranging from 363 to 367 nm, illuminating the photoresist layer  75 , that is, G-line and H-line, G-line and I-line, H-line and I-line, or G-line, H-line and I-line illuminate the photoresist layer  75 , then developing the exposed polymer layer  75 , and then removing the residual polymeric material or other contaminants on the electroplating seed layer  83  with an O 2  plasma or a plasma containing fluorine of below 200 PPM and oxygen, such that the photoresist layer  75  may be patterned with multiple openings  75   a  in the photoresist layer  75  exposing the electroplating seed layer  83  for forming metal pads, lines or traces in the trenches or openings  75   a  and on the electroplating seed layer  83  by following processes to be performed later. One of the trenches or openings  75   a  in the photoresist layer  75  may overlap the whole area of one of the openings  97   a  in the polymer layer  97 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  20 E , a metal layer  85 , such as copper, is electroplated on the electroplating seed layer  83  exposed by the trenches or openings  75   a . For example, the metal layer  85  may be formed by electroplating a copper layer with a thickness between 5 μm and 80 μm, 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 40 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm, 3 μm and 15 μm, or 3 μm and 10 μm on the electroplating seed layer  83 , made of copper, exposed by the trenches or openings  75   a.    
     Referring to  FIG.  20 F , after the metal layer  85  is formed, most of the photoresist layer  75  may be removed and then the adhesion layer  81  and electroplating seed layer  83  not under the metal layer  85  may be etched. The removing and etching processes may be referred respectively to the processes for removing the photoresist layer  30  and etching the electroplating seed layer  28  and adhesion layer  26  as illustrated in  FIG.  15 F . Thereby, the adhesion layer  81 , electroplating seed layer  83  and electroplated metal layer  85  may be patterned to form an interconnection metal layer  77  on the polymer layer  97  and in the openings  97   a  in the polymer layer  97 . The interconnection metal layer  77  may be formed with multiple metal vias  77   a  in the openings  97   a  in the polymer layer  97  and multiple metal pads, lines or traces  77   b  on the polymer layer  97 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  20 G , a polymer layer  87 , i.e., insulting or inter-metal dielectric layer, is formed on the polymer layer  97  and metal layer  85  and multiple openings  87   a  in the polymer layer  87  are over multiple contact points of the interconnection metal layer  77 . The polymer layer  87  has a thickness between 3 and 30 micrometers or between 5 and 15 micrometers. The polymer layer  87  may be added with some dielectric particles or glass fibers. The material of the polymer layer  87  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the polymer layer  97  or  36  and the process for forming the same as illustrated in  FIG.  20 B or  15 H . 
     The process for forming the interconnection metal layer  77  as illustrated in  FIGS.  20 C- 20 F  and the process for forming the polymer layer  87  may be alternately performed more than one times to fabricate the BISD  79  as seen in  FIGS.  20 H- 20 L . Referring to  FIG.  20 L , the BISD  79  may include an upper one of the interconnection metal layers  77  formed with multiple metal vias  77   a  in the openings  87   a  in one of the polymer layers  87  and multiple metal pads, lines or traces  77   b  on said one of the polymer layers  87 . The upper one of the interconnection metal layers  77  may be connected to a lower one of the interconnection metal layers  77  through the metal vias  77   a  of the upper one of the interconnection metal layers  77  in the openings  87   a  in said one of the polymer layers  87 . The BISD  79  may include the bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  77  formed with multiple metal vias  77   a  in the openings  97   a  in the polymer layer  97  and multiple metal pads, lines or traces  77   b  on the polymer layer  97 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  20 L , a topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  77  may be covered with a topmost one of the polymer layer  87 . The openings  87   a  in the topmost one of the polymer layer  87  are positioned at the places where multiple gaps between the semiconductor chips  100  to be mounted onto the polymer layer  87  in the following processes are to be arranged and at the places where peripheral areas of individual logic drives  300  to be completed in the following processes are to be arranged, wherein each of the peripheral areas surrounds the semiconductor chips  100  to be mounted in a central area of one of the logic drives  300 . The topmost one of the polymer layers  87  after cured and before polished in the following process may have a thickness t 9  between 3 and 30 micrometers or between 5 and 15 micrometers. 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  20 M , a chemical-mechanical polishing (CMP) process, mechanical polishing process or grinding process may be performed to planarize or polish the top surface of the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  of the BISD  79  such that the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  after polished may have a thickness t 10  between 3 and 30 micrometers or between 5 and 15 micrometers. Thereby, the BISD  79  may include 1 to 6 layers, or 2 to 5 layers of interconnection metal layers  77 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  20 M , each of the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  may have a thickness, on one of the polymer layers  87  and  97 , between, for example, 0.3 μm and 40 μm, 0.5 μm and 30 μm, 1 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 15 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm or 0.5 μm and 5 μm, or thicker than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 2 μm, 3 μm, 5 μm, 7 μm or 10 μm. Each of the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  may have a line width between, for example, 0.3 μm and 40 μm, 0.5 μm and 30 μm, 1 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 15 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm or 0.5 μm to 5 μm, or wider than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 2 μm, 3 μm, 5 μm, 7 μm or 10 μm. Each of the polymer layers  87  between neighboring two of the interconnection metal layers  77  may have a thickness, between neighboring two of the interconnection metal layers  77 , between, for example, 0.3 μm and 50 μm, 0.3 μm and 30 μm, 0.5 μm and 20 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm or 0.5 μm and 5 μm, or thicker than or equal to 0.3 μm, 0.5 μm, 0.7 μm, 1 μm, 1.5 μm, 2 μm, 3 μm or 5 μm. Each of the metal vias  77   a  of the interconnection metal layers  77  in one of the openings  87   a  in the polymer layers  87  may have a thickness or height between, for example, 3 μm and 50 μm, 3 μm and 30 μm, 3 μm and 20 μm or 3 μm and 15 μm, or thicker than or equal to 3 μm, 5 μm, 10 μm, 20 μm or 30 μm. 
       FIG.  20 N  is a top view showing a metal plane in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIGS.  20 M and  20 N , one of the interconnection metal layers  77  may include two metal planes  77   c  and  77   d  used as a power plane and ground plane of a power supply, respectively, wherein the metal planes  77   c  and  77   d  may have a thickness, for example, between 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm or 5 μm and 15 μm, or thicker than or equal to 5 μm, 10 μm, 20 μm or 30 μm. Each of the metal planes  77   c  and  77   d  may be layout as an interlaced or interleaved shaped structure or fork-shaped structure, that is, each of the metal planes  77   c  and  77   d  may have multiple parallel-extension sections and a transverse connection section coupling the parallel-extension sections. One of the metal planes  77   c  and  77   d  may have one of the parallel-extension sections arranged between neighboring two of the parallel-extension sections of the other of the metal planes  77   c  and  77   d . Alternatively, one of the interconnection metal layers  77  may include a metal plane, used as a heat dissipater or spreader for heat dissipation or spreading, having a thickness, for example, between 5 μm and 50 μm, 5 μm and 30 μm, 5 μm and 20 μm or 5 μm and 15 μm, or thicker than or equal to 5 μm, 10 μm, 20 μm or 30 μm. 
     Next, an emboss process as illustrated in  FIGS.  19 C- 19 F  is performed on the BISD  79  to form the through-package vias (TPV), as seen in  FIGS.  20 O- 20 R .  FIGS.  20 O- 20 R  are schematically cross-sectional views showing a process for forming multiple through-package vias (TPV) on the BISD in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  20 O , an adhesion layer  140   a  having a thickness between 0.001 and 0.7 μm or between 0.01 and 0.5 μm or between 0.03 and 0.35 μm may be sputtered on the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  and on the topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  77  at bottoms of the openings  87   a  in the topmost one of the polymer layers  87 . The material of the adhesion layer  140   a  may include titanium, a titanium-tungsten alloy, titanium nitride, chromium, titanium-tungsten-alloy layer, tantalum nitride, or a composite of the abovementioned materials. The adhesion layer may be formed by an atomic-layer-deposition (ALD) process, chemical vapor deposition (CVD) process or evaporation process. For example, the adhesion layer  140   a  may be formed by sputtering or CVD depositing a titanium (Ti) or titanium nitride (TiN) layer (with a thickness, for example, between 1 nm and 200 nm or between 5 nm and 50 nm) on the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  and on the topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  77  at bottoms of the openings  87   a  in the topmost one of the polymer layers  87 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  20 O , an electroplating seed layer  140   b  having a thickness of between 0.001 and 1 μm, between 0.03 and 2 μm or between 0.05 and 0.5 μm may be sputtered on a whole top surface of the adhesion layer  140   a . Alternatively, the electroplating seed layer  140   b  may be formed by an atomic-layer-deposition (ALD) process, chemical-vapor-deposition (CVD) process, vapor deposition method, electroless plating method or PVD (Physical Vapor Deposition) method. The electroplating seed layer  140   b  is beneficial to electroplating a metal layer thereon. Thus, the material of the electroplating seed layer  140   b  varies with the material of a metal layer to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer  140   b . When a copper layer is to be electroplated on the electroplating seed layer  140   b , copper is a preferable material to the electroplating seed layer  140   b . For example, the electroplating seed layer  140   b  may be deposited on or over the adhesion layer  140   a  by, for example, sputtering or CVD depositing a copper seed layer (with a thickness between, for example, 3 nm and 400 nm or 10 nm and 200 nm) on the adhesion layer  140   a . The adhesion layer  140   a  and electroplating seed layer  140   b  compose the adhesion/seed layer  140 . 
     Next, referring to  24 P, a photoresist layer  142 , such as positive-type photoresist layer, having a thickness of between 5 and 500 μm is spin-on coated or laminated on the electroplating seed layer  140   b  of the adhesion/seed layer  140 . The photoresist layer  142  is patterned with the processes of exposure, development, etc., to form multiple openings  142   a  in the photoresist layer  142  exposing the electroplating seed layer  140   b  of the adhesion/seed layer  140 . A 1× stepper, 1× contact aligner or laser scanner may be used to expose the photoresist layer  142  with at least two of G-line having a wavelength ranging from 434 to 438 nm, H-line having a wavelength ranging from 403 to 407 nm, and I-line having a wavelength ranging from 363 to 367 nm, illuminating the photoresist layer  142 , that is, G-line and H-line, G-line and I-line, H-line and I-line, or G-line, H-line and I-line illuminate the photoresist layer  142 , then developing the exposed photoresist layer  142 , and then removing the residual polymeric material or other contaminants on the electroplating seed layer  140   b  of the adhesion/seed layer  140  with an O 2  plasma or a plasma containing fluorine of below 200 PPM and oxygen, such that the photoresist layer  142  may be patterned with multiple openings  142   a  in the photoresist layer  142  exposing the electroplating seed layer  140   b  of the adhesion/seed layer  140 . Each of the opening  142   a  in the photoresist layer  142  may overlap one of the openings  87   a  in the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  and extend out of said one of the openings  87   a  in the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  to an area or a ring of the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  around said one of the openings  87   a  in the topmost one of the polymer layers  87 , wherein the ring of the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  may have a width between 1 μm and 15 μm, 1 μm and 10 μm or 1 μm and 5 μm. 
     Referring to  FIG.  20 P , the openings  142   a  are positioned at the places where multiple gaps between the semiconductor chips  100  to be mounted onto the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  of the BISD  79  in the following processes are to be arranged and at the places where peripheral areas of the logic drives  300  to be completed in the following processes are to be arranged, wherein each of the peripheral areas surrounds the semiconductor chips  100  to be mounted in a central area of one of the logic drives  300 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  20 Q , a copper layer  144  having a thickness between 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm is electroplated on the electroplating seed layer  140   b  of the adhesion/seed layer  140  exposed by the openings  142   a.    
     Referring to  FIG.  20 R , after the copper layer  144  is formed, most of the photoresist layer  142  may be removed and then the electroplating seed layer  140   b  and adhesion layer  140   a  not under the metal layer  144  may be etched. The removing and etching processes may be referred respectively to the processes for removing the photoresist layer  30  and etching the electroplating seed layer  28  and adhesion layer  26  as illustrated in  FIG.  15 F . Thereby, the adhesion/seed layer  140  and electroplated metal layer  144  may be patterned to form multiple TPVs  158  on the topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  77  and on the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  around the openings  87   a  in the topmost one of the polymer layers  87 . 
       FIG.  21 A  is a top view of TPVs in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. The areas  53  surrounded by dot lines may have the semiconductor chips  100  to be mounted thereto. Referring to  FIG.  21 A , the TPVs  158  are positioned at the places where multiple gaps between the semiconductor chips  100  to be mounted onto the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  of the BISD  79  in the following processes are to be arranged and at the places where peripheral areas of the logic drives  300  to be completed in the following processes are to be arranged, wherein each of the peripheral areas surrounds the semiconductor chips  100  to be mounted in a central area of one of the logic drives  300 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  20 R , each of the TPVs  158  may have a height, protruding from a top surface of the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  of BISD  79 , between 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater or taller than or equal to 50 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 5 μm and a largest dimension in its cross-section (for example, its diameter of a circle shape or its diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape) between, for example, 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater than or equal to 150 μm, 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. The smallest space between neighboring two of the TPVs  158  may be between, for example, 5 μm and 300 μm, 5 μm and 200 μm, 5 μm and 150 μm, 5 μm and 120 μm, 10 μm and 100 μm, 10 μm and 60 μm, 10 μm and 40 μm or 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater than or equal to 150 μm, 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. 
     Next, the following steps for FOIT as seen in  FIGS.  20 S- 20 V  may be referred to the steps for FOIT as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 A- 18 R . For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  18 A- 18 R and  20 S- 20 V , the specification of the element as seen in  FIGS.  20 S- 20 V  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 A- 18 R  and the process for forming the same. 
     Referring to  FIG.  20 S , the glue material  88  is formed on multiple regions of the topmost one of the polymer layers  87 . Next, the semiconductor chips  100  as illustrated in  FIGS.  15 G,  15 H,  16 I- 16 L and  17    have backsides attached onto the glue material  88  to join the topmost one of the polymer layers  87 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  20 T , the polymer layer  92  having a thickness t 7  of between 250 and 1,000 μm is applied (by coating, printing, dispensing or molding) on or over the topmost one of the polymer layers  87  and on or over the semiconductor chips  100  to a level to: (i) fill gaps between the semiconductor chips  100 , (ii) cover the top surfaces of the semiconductor chips  100 , (iii) fill gaps between the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  of the semiconductor chips  100 , (iv) cover top surfaces of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  of the semiconductor chips  100 , (v) fill gaps between the TPVs  158  and (vi) cover the TPVs  158 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  20 U , the polymer layer  92  is polished from a front side thereof to uncover a front side of each of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  and a front side of each of the TPVs  158 , and to planarize the front side of the polymer layer  92 , for example by a mechanical polishing process. Alternatively, the polymer layer  92  may be polished by a chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process. When the polymer layer  92  is being polished, the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  each may have a front portion allowed to be removed and the polymer layer  92 , after polished, may have a thickness t 8  between 250 and 800 microns. 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  20 V , the TISD  101  as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 D- 18 N  may be formed on or over the front side of the polymer layer  92  and on or over the front sides of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  and TPVs  158  by a wafer or panel processing. Thereby, the interconnection metal layers  99  and the polymer layers  93  and  104  may be alternately formed over the front side of the polymer layer  92  and on or over the front sides of the micro-pillars or micro-bumps  34  and TPVs  158 . Each of the interconnection metal layers  99  contains the adhesion layer, referenced as  94   a  herein, and the seed layer, referenced as  94   b  herein, composing the adhesion/seed layer  94 . Each of the interconnection metal layers  99  contains the metal layer  98  on the adhesion/seed layer  94 . Next, the metal pillars or bumps  122  as illustrated in  FIGS.  18 O- 18 R  may be formed on the topmost one of the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  at bottoms of the openings  104   a  of the topmost one of the polymer layer  104 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  20 W , the carrier substrate  90 , the base insulating layer  91  and a bottom portion of the polymer layer  97  may be removed, by a polishing, grinding or chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process, from the structure as seen in  FIG.  20 V  to uncover the metal vias  77   a  of the bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  in the openings  97   a  in the bottommost one of the polymer layers  87  and  97  of the BISD  79  such that the metal vias  77   a  of the bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  have copper exposed at the backside  77   e  thereof. Alternatively, after polishing the polymer layer  92  as seen in  FIG.  20 U  and before forming the polymer layer  93  of the TISD  101 , the carrier substrate  90 , the base insulating layer  91  and the bottom portion of the polymer layer  97  may be removed, by a polishing, grinding or chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process to uncover the metal vias  77   a  of the bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  in the openings  97   a  in the bottommost one of the polymer layers  87  and  97  of the BISD  79  such that the metal vias  77   a  of the bottommost one of the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  have copper exposed at the backside  77   e  thereof to be layout as metal pads in an array. 
     After the carrier substrate  90 , the base insulating layer  91  and the bottom portion of the polymer layer  97  are removed as shown in  FIG.  20 W , the package structure shown in  FIG.  20 W  may be separated, cut or diced into multiple individual chip packages, i.e., single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , as shown in  FIG.  20 X  by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process. 
     Alternatively, following the step as illustrated in  FIG.  20 W , multiple solder bumps  583  may be formed on the contact pads  77   e  of the BISD  79  of the package structure as shown in  FIG.  20 W  by a screen printing method or a solder-ball mounting method, and then by a solder reflow process as seen in  FIG.  20 Y . The material used for forming the solder bumps  583  may be a lead-free solder containing tin, copper, silver, bismuth, indium, zinc, antimony, and/or traces of other metals, for example, Sn—Ag—Cu (SAC) solder, Sn—Ag solder, or Sn—Ag—Cu—Zn solder. One of the solder bumps  583  may be used for connecting or coupling one of the semiconductor chips  100 , such as the dedicated I/O chip  265  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , of the logic drive  300  to the external circuits or components outside of the logic drive  300  through one of the micro-bumps  54 , the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101 , one of the TPVs  582  and the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  in sequence. Each of the solder bumps  583  may have a height, from a backside surface of the BISD  79 , between 5 μm and 150 μm, between 5 μm and 120 μm, between 10 μm and 100 μm, between 10 μm and 60 μm, between 10 μm and 40 μm or between 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater or taller than or equal to 75 μm, 50 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm, for example, and a largest dimension in cross-sections, such as a diameter of a circle shape or a diagonal length of a square or rectangle shape, between 5 μm and 200 μm, between 5 μm and 150 μm, between 5 μm and 120 μm, between 10 μm and 100 μm, between 10 μm and 60 μm, between 10 μm and 40 μm, or between 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater than or equal to 100 μm, 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm, for example. The smallest space from one of the solder bumps  583  to its nearest neighboring one of the solder bumps  583  is, for example, between 5 μm and 150 μm, between 5 μm and 120 μm, between 10 μm and 100 μm, between 10 μm and 60 μm, between 10 μm and 40 μm, or between 10 μm and 30 μm, or greater than or equal to 60 μm, 50 μm, 40 μm, 30 μm, 20 μm, 15 μm or 10 μm. 
     Next, the package structure shown in  FIG.  20 Y  may be separated, cut or diced into multiple individual chip packages, i.e., single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , as shown in  FIG.  20 Z  by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process. 
     Programing for TPVs, Metal Pads and Metal Pillars or Bumps 
     Referring to  FIGS.  20 X and  19 L , one of the TPVs  158  may be programmed by one or more of the memory cells  379  in one or more of the DPIIC chips  410 , wherein said one or more of the memory cells  379  may switch on or off one or more of the cross-point switches  379  distributed in said one or more of the DPIIC chips  410  as seen in  FIGS.  3 A- 3 C and  9    to form a signal path from said one of the TPVs  158  to any of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , dedicated I/O chips  265 , DRAM chips  321 , PCIC chips  269 , dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N  through one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  provided by the TISD  101  and/or BISD  79 . Thereby, the TPVs  158  may be programmable. 
     Furthermore, referring to  FIGS.  20 X and  19 L , one of the metal bumps or pillars  122  may be programmed by one or more of the memory cells  379  in one or more of the DPIIC chips  410 , wherein said one or more of the memory cells  379  may switch on or off one or more of the cross-point switches  379  distributed in said one or more of the DPIIC chips  410  as seen in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 C and  9    to form a signal path from said one of the metal bumps or pillars  122  to any of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , dedicated I/O chips  265 , DRAM chips  321 , PCIC chips  269 , dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N  through one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  provided by the TISD  101  and/or BISD  79 . Thereby, the metal bumps or pillars  122  may be programmable. 
     Furthermore, referring to  FIG.  20 X , one of the metal pads  77   e  may be programmed by one or more of the memory cells  379  in one or more of the DPIIC chips  410 , wherein said one or more of the memory cells  379  may switch on or off one or more of the cross-point switches  379  distributed in said one or more of the DPIIC chips  410  as seen in  FIGS.  8 A- 8 C and  9    to form a signal path from said one of the metal pads  77   e  to any of the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , dedicated I/O chips  265 , DRAM chips  321 , PCIC chips  269 , dedicated control chip  260 , dedicated control and I/O chip  266 , DCIAC chip  267  or DCDI/OIAC chip  268  in the logic drive  300  as seen in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N  through one or more of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  provided by the TISD  101  and/or BISD  79 . Thereby, the metal pads  77   e  may be programmable. 
     Interconnection for Logic Drive with TISD and BISD 
       FIGS.  21 B through  21 G  are cross-sectional views showing various interconnection nets in a single-layer-packaged logic drive in accordance with embodiments of the present application. 
     Referring to  FIG.  21 D , the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  may connect one or more of the metal pillars or bumps  122  to one of the semiconductor chips  100  and connect one of the semiconductor chips  100  to another of the semiconductor chips  100 . For a first case, the interconnection metal layers  99  and  77  of the TISD  101  and BISD  79  and the TPVs  158  may compose a first interconnection net  411  connecting multiple of the metal pillars or bumps  122  to each other or one another, connecting multiple of the semiconductor chips  100  to each other or one another and connecting multiple of the metal pads  77   e  to each other or one another. Said multiple of the metal pillars or bumps  122 , said multiple of the semiconductor chips  100  and said multiple of the metal pads  77   e  may be connected together by the first interconnection net  411 . The first interconnection net  411  may be a signal bus for delivering signals or a power or ground plane or bus for delivering power or ground supply. 
     Referring to  FIG.  21 B , for a second case, the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  may compose a second interconnection net  412  connecting multiple of the metal pillars or bumps  122  to each other or one another and connecting multiple of the micro pillars or bumps  34  of one of the semiconductor chips  100  to each other or one another. Said multiple of the metal pillars or bumps  122  and said multiple of the micro pillars or bumps  34  may be connected together by the second interconnection net  412 . The second interconnection net  412  may be a signal bus for delivering signals or a power or ground plane or bus for delivering power or ground supply. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  21 B and  21 C , for a third case, the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  may compose a third interconnection net  413  connecting one of the metal pillars or bumps  122  to one of the micro pillars or bumps  34  of one of the semiconductor chips  100 . The third interconnection net  413  may be a signal bus for delivering signals or trace for signal transmission or a power or ground plane or bus for delivering power or ground supply. 
     Referring to  FIG.  21 C , for a fourth case, the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  may compose a fourth interconnection net  414  not connecting to any of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the single-layer-packaged logic drive  300  but connecting multiple of the semiconductor chips  100  to each other or one another. The fourth interconnection net  414  may be one of the programmable interconnects  361  of the inter-chip interconnects  371  for signal transmission. 
     Referring to  FIG.  21 F , for a fifth case, the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  may compose a fifth interconnection net  415  not connecting to any of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the single-layer-packaged logic drive  300  but connecting multiple of the micro pillars or bumps  34  of one of the semiconductor devices  4  to each other or one another. The fifth interconnection net  415  may be a signal bus or trace for signal transmission or a power or ground plane or bus for delivering power or ground supply. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  21 C,  21 D and  21 F , the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  may be connected to the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  through the TPVs  158 . For example, each of the metal pads  77   e  of the BISD  79  in a first group may be connected to one of the semiconductor chips  100  through, in sequence, the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79 , one or more of the TPVs  158  and the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101 , as provided by a sixth interconnection net  416  in  FIG.  21 C , the first interconnection net  411  and a seventh interconnection nets  417  in  FIG.  21 D  and eighth and ninth interconnection nets  418  and  419  in  FIG.  21 F . Furthermore, one of the metal pads  77   e  in the first group may be further connected to one or more of the metal pillars or bumps  122  through, in sequence, the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79 , one or more of the TPVs  158  and the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101 , as provided by the first, sixth, seventh and eighth interconnection nets  411 ,  416 ,  417  and  418 . Alternatively, multiple of the metal pads  77   e  in the first group may be connected to each other or one another through the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  and to one or more of the metal pillars or bumps  122  through, in sequence, the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79 , one or more of the TPVs  158  and the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101 , wherein said multiple of the metal pads  77   e  in the first group may be divided into a first subset of one or ones under a backside of one of the semiconductor chips  100  and a second subset of one or ones under a backside of another of the semiconductor chips  100 , as provided by the first and eighth interconnection nets  411  and  418 . Alternatively, one or multiple of the metal pads  77   e  in the first group may not be connected to any of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the single-layer-packaged logic drive  300 , as provided by the ninth interconnection net  419 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  21 B,  21 D and  21 E , each of the metal pads  77   e  of the BISD  79  in a second group may not be connected to any of the semiconductor chips  100  of the single-layer-packaged logic drive  300  but connected to one or more of the metal pillars or bumps  122  through, in sequence, the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79 , one or more of the TPVs  158  and the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101 , as provided by a tenth interconnection net  420  in  FIG.  21 B , an eleventh interconnection net  421  in  FIG.  21 D  and a twelfth interconnection net  422  in  FIG.  21 E . Alternatively, multiple of the metal pads  77   e  of the BISD  79  in the second group may not be connected to any of the semiconductor chips  100  of the single-layer-packaged logic drive  300  but connected to each other or one another through the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  and to one or more of the metal pillars or bumps  122  through, in sequence, the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79 , one or more of the TPVs  158  and the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101 , wherein said multiple of the metal pads  77   e  in the second group may be divided into a first subset of one or ones under a backside of one of the semiconductor chips  100  and a second subset of one or ones under a backside of another of the semiconductor chips  100 , as provided by the twelfth interconnection net  422  in  FIG.  21 E . 
     Referring to  FIG.  21 G , one of the interconnection metal layers  77  in the BISD  79  may include the power plane  77   c  and ground plane  77   d  of a power supply, as illustrated in  FIG.  20 N .  FIG.  21 H  is a bottom view of  FIG.  21 G , showing a layout of metal pads of a logic drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  21 H , the metal pads  77   e  may be layout in an array at a backside of the logic drive  300 . Some of the metal pads  77   e  may be vertically aligned with the semiconductor chips  100 . A first group of the metal pads  77   e  is arranged in an array in a central region of a backside surface of the chip package, i.e., logic drive  300 , and a second group of the metal pads  77   e  may be arranged in an array in a peripheral region, surrounding the central region, of the backside surface of the chip package, i.e., logic drive  300 . More than 90% or 80% of the metal pads  77   e  in the first group may be used for power supply or ground reference. More than 50% or 60% of the metal pads  77   e  in the second group may be used for signal transmission. The metal pads  77   e  in the second group may be arranged from one or more rings, such as 1 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 rings, along the edges of the backside surface of the chip package, i.e., logic drive  300 . The minimum pitch of the metal pads  77   e  in the second group may be smaller than that of the metal pads  77   e  in the first group. 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIG.  21 G , one of the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79 , such as the bottommost one, may include a thermal plane for heat dispassion and one or more of the TPVs  158  may be provided as thermal vias formed over the thermal plane for heat dispassion. 
     Package-On-Package (POP) Assembly for Drives with TISD and BISD 
       FIGS.  22 A- 22 F  are schematically views showing a process for fabricating a package-on-package assembly in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  22 A , when a top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  as seen in  FIG.  20 X  is mounted onto a bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  as seen in  FIG.  20 X , the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have its BISD  79  to couple the TISD  101  of the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  via the metal pillars or bumps  122  provided from the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . The process for fabricating a package-on-package assembly is mentioned as below: 
     First, referring to  FIG.  22 A , a plurality of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  (only one is shown) may have its metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto multiple metal pads  109  of a circuit carrier or substrate  110  at a topside thereof, such as Printed Circuit Board (PCB), Ball-Grid-Array (BGA) substrate, flexible circuit film or tape, or ceramic circuit substrate. An underfill  114  may be filled into a gap between the circuit carrier or substrate  110  and the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . Alternatively, the underfill  114  may be skipped. Next, a surface-mount technology (SMT) may be used to mount a plurality of the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  (only one is shown) onto the plurality of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , respectively. Solder or solder cream or flux  112  may be first printed on the metal pads  77   e  of the BISD  79  of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . 
     Next, referring to  FIGS.  22 A and  22 B , the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have its metal pillars or bumps  122  placed on the solder or solder cream or flux  112 . Next, referring to  FIG.  22 B , a reflowing or heating process may be performed to fix the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  to the metal pads  77   e  of the BISD  79  of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . Next, an underfill  114  may be filled into a gap between the top and bottom ones of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . Alternatively, the underfill  114  may be skipped. 
     In the next optional step, referring to  FIG.  22 B , other multiple of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  as seen in  FIG.  20 X  may have its metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the BISD  79  of the plurality of the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  using the surface-mount technology (SMT) and the underfill  114  is then optionally formed therebetween. The step may be repeated by multiple times to form the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  stacked in three-layered fashion or more-than-three-layered fashion on the circuit carrier or substrate  110 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  22 B , multiple solder balls  325  are planted on a backside of the circuit carrier or substrate  110 . Next, referring to  FIG.  22 C , the circuit carrier or structure  110  may be separated, cut or diced into multiple individual substrate units  113 , such as Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs), Ball-Grid-Array (BGA) substrates, flexible circuit films or tapes, or ceramic circuit substrates, by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process. Thereby, the number i of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be stacked on one of the individual substrate units  113 , wherein the number i may be equal to or greater than 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8. 
     Alternatively,  FIGS.  22 D through  22 F  are schematically views showing a process for fabricating a package-on-package assembly in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIGS.  22 D and  22 E , a plurality of the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have its metal pillars or bumps  122  fixed or mounted, using the SMT technology, to the metal pads  77   e  of the BISD  79  of the structure in a wafer or panel level as seen in  FIG.  20 W  before being separated into a plurality of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  22 E , the underfill  114  may be filled into a gap between each of the top ones of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and the structure in a wafer or panel level as seen in  FIG.  20 W . Alternatively, the underfill  114  may be skipped. 
     In the next optional step, referring to  FIG.  22 E , other multiple of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  as seen in  FIG.  20 X  may have its metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the BISD  79  of the plurality of the top one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  using the surface-mount technology (SMT) and the underfill  114  is then optionally formed therebetween. The step may be repeated by multiple times to form the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  stacked in two-layered fashion or more-than-two-layered fashion on the structure in a wafer or panel level as seen in  FIG.  20 W . 
     Next, referring to  FIG.  22 F , the structure in a wafer or panel level as seen in  FIG.  20 X  may be separated, cut or diced into a plurality of the bottom one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process. Thereby, the number i of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be stacked together, wherein the number i may be equal to or greater than 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8. Next, the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  stacked together may have a bottommost one provided with the metal pillars or bumps  122  to be mounted onto the multiple metal pads  109  of the circuit carrier or substrate  110  as seen in  FIG.  22 A , such as ball-grid-array substrate, at a topside thereof. Next, an underfill  114  may be filled into a gap between the circuit carrier or substrate  110  and the bottommost one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . Alternatively, the underfill  114  may be skipped. Next, multiple solder balls  325  are planted on a backside of the circuit carrier or substrate  110 . Next, the circuit carrier or structure  110  may be separated, cut or diced into multiple individual substrate units  113 , such as printed circuit boards (PCB) or BGA (Ball-Grid-array) substrates, by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process, as seen in  FIG.  22 C . Thereby, the number i of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be stacked on one of the individual substrate units  113 , wherein the number i may be equal to or greater than 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8. 
     The single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  with the TPVs  158  to be stacked in a vertical direction to form the POP assembly may be in a standard format or have standard sizes. For example, the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be in a shape of square or rectangle, with a certain widths, lengths and thicknesses. An industry standard may be set for the shape and dimensions of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . For example, the standard shape of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be a square, with a width greater than or equal to 4 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm or 40 mm, and having a thickness greater than or equal to 0.03 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm or 5 mm. Alternatively, the standard shape of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be a rectangle, with a width greater than or equal to 3 mm, 5 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm or 40 mm, and a length greater than or equal to 5 mm, 7m, 10 mm, 10 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm, 40 mm, 45 mm or 50 mm; and having a thickness greater than or equal to 0.03 mm, 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm or 5 mm. 
     Interconnection for Multiple Drives with TISD and BISD 
       FIGS.  22 G through  22 I  are cross-sectional views showing various connection of multiple logic drives in POP assembly in accordance with embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  22 G , in the POP assembly, each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may include one or more of the TPVs  158  used as first inter-drive interconnects  461  stacked and coupled to each other or one another for connecting to an upper one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and/or to a lower one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , without connecting or coupling to any of the semiconductor chips  100  in the POP assembly. In each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , each of the first inter-drive interconnects  461  is formed, from bottom to top, of: (i) one of the metal pads  77   e  of the BISD  79 , (ii) a stacked portion of the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79 , (iii) one of the TPVs  158 , (iv) a stacked portion of the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  100 , and (v) a stacked one of the metal pillars or bumps  122 . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIG.  22 G , a second inter-drive interconnect  462  in the POP assembly may be provided like the first inter-drive interconnect  461 , but the second inter-drive interconnect  462  may connect or couple to one or more of its semiconductor chips  100  through the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101 . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIG.  22 H , each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may provide a third inter-drive interconnect  463  like the second inter-drive interconnect  461  in  FIG.  22 G , but the third inter-drive interconnect  463  is not stacked up to one of the metal pillars or bumps  122 , which are arranged vertically over the third inter-drive interconnect  463 , joining said each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and an upper one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  or joining said each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and the circuit carrier or substrate  110 . The third inter-drive interconnect  463  may couple to another one or more of the metal pillars or bumps  122 , which are arranged not vertically over the third inter-drive interconnect  463  but vertically over one of its semiconductor chips  100 , joining said each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and an upper one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  or joining said each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and the substrate unit  113 . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIG.  22 H , each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may provide a fourth inter-drive interconnect  464  composed from (i) a first horizontally-distributed portion of the interconnection metal layers  77  of its BISD  79 , (ii) one of its TPVs  158  coupled to one or more of the metal pads  77   e  of the first horizontally-distributed portion vertically under one or more of its semiconductor chips  100 , (iii) a second horizontally-distributed portion of the interconnection metal layers  99  of its TISD  101  connecting or coupling said one of its TPVs  158  to one or more of its semiconductor chips  100 , The second horizontally-distributed portion of its fourth inter-drive interconnect  464  may couple to the metal pillars or bumps  122 , which are arranged not vertically over said one of its TPVs  158  but vertically over said one or more of its semiconductor chips  100 , joining said each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and an upper one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  or joining said each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and the substrate unit  113 . 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIG.  22 I , each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may provide a fifth inter-drive interconnect  465  composed from (i) a first horizontally-distributed portion of the interconnection metal layers  77  of its BISD  79 , (ii) one of its TPVs  158  coupled to one or more of the metal pads  77   e  of the first horizontally-distributed portion vertically under one or more of the semiconductor chips  100 , (iii) a second horizontally-distributed portion of the interconnection metal layers  99  of its TISD  101  connecting or coupling said one of its TPVs  158  to one or more of the semiconductor chips  100 . The second horizontally-distributed portion of its fifth inter-drive interconnect  465  may not couple to any of the metal pillars or bumps  122  joining said each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and an upper one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  or joining said each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and the substrate unit  113 . 
     Immersive IC Interconnection Environment (IIIE) 
     Referring to  FIGS.  22 G through  22 I , the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be stacked to form a super-rich interconnection scheme or environment, wherein their semiconductor chips  100  represented for the FPGA IC chips  200 , provided with the logic blocks  201  and the cross-point switches  379  as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 A through  8 J , immerses in the super-rich interconnection scheme or environment, i.e., programmable 3D Immersive IC Interconnection Environment (IIIE). For one of the FPGA IC chips  200  in one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , (1) the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC  20  of said one of the FPGA IC chips  200 , interconnection metal layers  27  of the SISC  29  of said one of the FPGA IC chips  200 , micro pillars or bumps  34  of said one of the FPGA IC chips  200 , interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  of said one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , and metal pillars or bumps  122  between an upper one and said one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  are provided over the logic blocks  201  and cross-point switches  379  of said one of the FPGA IC chips  200 ; (2) the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  of said one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and the copper pads  77   e  of the BISD  79  of said one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  are provided under the logic blocks  201  and cross-point switches  379  of said one of the FPGA IC chips  200 ; and (3) the TPVs  158  of said one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  are provided surrounding the logic blocks  201  and cross-point switches  379  of said one of the FPGA IC chips  200 . The programmable 3D IIIE provides the super-rich interconnection scheme or environment, comprising the FISC  20 , SISC  29  and micro pillars or bumps  34  of each of the semiconductor chips  100 , the TISD  101 , BISD  79  and TPVs  158  of each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and the metal pillars or bumps  122  between each two of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , for constructing an interconnection scheme or system in three dimensions (3D). The interconnection scheme or system in a horizontal direction may be programmed by the cross-point switches  379  of each of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  of each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . Also, the interconnection scheme or system in a vertical direction may be programmed by the cross-point switches  379  of each of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200  and DPIIC chips  410  of each of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 . 
       FIGS.  23 A and  23 B  are conceptual views showing interconnection between multiple logic blocks from an aspect of human&#39;s nerve system in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIGS.  23 A and  23 B  and in above-illustrated figures, the specification of the element as seen in  FIGS.  23 A and  23 B  may be referred to that of the element as above illustrated in the figures. Referring to  FIG.  23 A , the programmable 3D IIIE is similar or analogous to a human brain. The logic blocks  201  as seen in  FIG.  6 A  are similar or analogous to neurons or nerve cells; the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC  20  and/or the interconnection metal layers  27  of the SISC  29  are similar or analogous to the dendrites connecting to the neurons or nerve cells  201 . The micro pillars or bumps  34  of one of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200  connecting to the small receivers  375  of the small I/O circuits  203  of said one of the FPGA IC chips  200  for the inputs of the logic blocks  201  of said one of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200  are similar or analogous to post-synaptic cells at ends of the dendrites. For short distance between two of the logic blocks  201  in one of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , the interconnection metal layers  6  of its FISC  20  and the interconnection metal layers  27  of its SISC  29  may construct an interconnect  482  like an axon connecting from one of the neurons or nerve cells  201  to another of the neurons or nerve cells  201 . For long distance between two of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200 , the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and the TPVs  158  of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may construct the axon-like interconnect  482  connecting from one of the neurons or nerve cells  201  to another of the neurons or nerve cells  201 . One of the micro pillars or bumps  34  of a first one of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200  connecting to the axon-like interconnect  482  may be programmed to connect to the small drivers  374  of the small I/O circuits  203  of a second one of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200  is similar or analogous to pre-synaptic cells at a terminal of the axon  482 . 
     For more elaboration, referring to  FIG.  23 A , a first one  200 - 1  of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may include first and second ones LB 1  and LB 2  of the logic blocks  201  like the neurons, the FISC  20  and SISC  29  like the dendrites  481  coupled to the first and second ones LB 1  and LB 2  of the logic blocks  201  and the cross-point switches  379  programmed for connection of its FISC  20  and SISC  29  to the first and second ones LB 1  and LB 2  of the logic blocks  201 . A second one  200 - 2  of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may include third and fourth ones LB 3  and LB 4  of the logic blocks  210  like the neurons, the FISC  20  and SISC  29  like the dendrites  481  coupled to the third and fourth ones LB 3  and LB 4  of the logic blocks  210  and the cross-point switches  379  programmed for connection of its FISC  20  and SISC  29  to the third and fourth ones LB 3  and LB 4  of the logic blocks  210 . A first one  300 - 1  of the logic drives  300  may include the first and second ones  200 - 1  and  200 - 2  of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . A third one  200 - 3  of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may include a fifth one LB 5  of the logic blocks  201  like the neurons, the FISC  20  and SISC  29  like the dendrites  481  coupled to the fifth one LB 5  of the logic blocks  201  and its cross-point switches  379  programmed for connection of its FISC  20  and SISC  29  to the fifth one LB 5  of the logic blocks  201 . A fourth one  200 - 4  of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200  may include a sixth one LB 6  of the logic blocks  201  like the neurons, the FISC  20  and SISC  29  like the dendrites  481  coupled to the sixth one LB 6  of the logic blocks  201  and the cross-point switches  379  programmed for connection of its FISC  20  and SISC  29  to the sixth one LB 6  of the logic blocks  201 . A second one  300 - 2  of the logic drives  300  may include the third and fourth ones  200 - 3  and  200 - 4  of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . (1) A first portion, which is provided by the interconnection metal layers  6  and  27  of the FISC  20  and SISC  29 , extending from the logic block LB 1 , (2) one of the micro-bumps or pillars  34  extending from the first portion, (3) a second portion, which is provided by the interconnection metal layers  99  and/or  77  of the TISD  101  and/or BISD  79  of the first one  300 - 1  of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , extending from said one of the micro-bumps or pillars  34 , (4) the other one of the micro-bumps or pillars  34  extending from the second portion, and (5) a third portion, which is provided by the interconnection metal layers  6  and  27  of the FISC  20  and SISC  29 , extending from the other one of the micro-bumps or pillars  34  to the logic block LB 2  may compose the axon-like interconnect  482 . The axon-like interconnect  482  may be programmed to connect the first one LB 1  of the logic block  201  to either of the second through sixth ones LB 2 , LB 3 , LB 4 , LB 5  and LB 6  of the logic blocks  201  according to switching of first through fifth ones  258 - 1  through  258 - 5  of the pass/no-pass switches  258  of the cross-point switches  379  set on the axon-like interconnect  482 . The first one  258 - 1  of the pass/no-pass switches  258  may be arranged in the first one  200 - 1  of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . The second and third ones  258 - 2  and  258 - 3  of the pass/no-pass switches  258  may be arranged in one of the DPIIC chips  410  in the first one  300 - 1  of the logic drives  300 . The fourth one  258 - 4  of the pass/no-pass switches  258  may be arranged in the third one  200 - 3  of the standardized commodity FPGA IC chips  200 . The fifth one  258 - 5  of the pass/no-pass switches  258  may be arranged in one of the DPIIC chips  410  in the second one  300 - 2  of the logic drives  300 . The first one  300 - 1  of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have the metal pads  77   e  coupling to the second one  300 - 2  of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  through the metal bumps or pillars  122 . Alternatively, the first through fifth ones  258 - 1  through  258 - 5  of the pass/no-pass switches  258  set on the axon-like interconnect  482  may be omitted. Alternatively, the pass/no-pass switches  258  set on the dendrites-like interconnect  481  may be omitted. 
     Furthermore, referring to  FIG.  23 B , the axon-like interconnect  482  may be considered as a scheme or structure of a tree including (i) a trunk or stem connecting to the first one LB 1  of the logic blocks  201 , (ii) multiple branches branching from the trunk or stem for connecting its trunk or stem to one of the second and sixth ones LB 2 -LB 6  of the logic blocks  201 , (iii) a first one  379 - 1  of the cross-point switches  379  set between its trunk or stem and each of its branches for switching the connection between its trunk or stem and one of its branches, (iv) multiple sub-branches branching from one of its branches for connecting said one of its branches to one of the fifth and sixth ones LB 5  and LB 6  of the logic blocks  201 , and (v) a second one  379 - 2  of the cross-point switches  379  set between said one of its branches and each of its sub-branches for switching the connection between said one of its branches and one of its sub-branches. The first one  379 - 1  of the cross-point switches  379  may be provided in one of the DPIIC chips  410  in the first one  300 - 1  of the logic drives  300 , and the second one  379 - 2  of the cross-point switches  379  may be provided in one of the DPIIC chips  410  in the second one  300 - 2  of the logic drives  300 . Each of the dendrite-like interconnects  481  may include (i) a stem connecting to one of the first through sixth ones LB 1 -LB 6  of the logic blocks  201 , (ii) multiple branches branching from the stem, (iii) a cross-point switch  401  set between its stem and each of its branches for switching the connection between its stem and one of its branches. Each of the logic blocks  201  may couple to multiple of the dendrite-like interconnects  481  composed of the interconnection metal layers  6  of the FISC  20  and the interconnection metal layers  27  of the SISC  29 . Each of the logic blocks  201  may be coupled to a distal terminal of one or more of the axon-like interconnects  482 , extending from others of the logic blocks  201 , through the dendrite-like interconnects  481  extending from said each of the logic blocks  201 . 
     Combinations of POP Assembly for Logic Drive and Memory Drive 
     As mentioned above, the single-layer-packaged logic drive  300  may be packaged with the semiconductor chips  100  as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N . A plurality of the logic drive  300  may be incorporated with one or more memory drives  310  into a module. The memory drives  310  are configured to store data or applications. The memory drives  310  may be divided into two types, one of which is a non-volatile memory drive  322 , and the other one of which is a volatile memory drive  323 , as seen in  FIGS.  24 A- 24 K .  FIGS.  24 A- 24 K  are schematically views showing multiple combinations of POP assemblies for logic and memory drives in accordance with embodiments of the present application. The structure for the memory drives  310  and the process for forming the same may be referred to the illustration for  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I  but the semiconductor chips  100  are non-volatile memory chips for the non-volatile memory drive  322 ; the semiconductor chips  100  are volatile memory chips for the volatile memory drive  323 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  24 A , the POP assembly may be stacked with only the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  on the substrate unit  113  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I . An upper one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of a lower one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  at the backside thereof, but a bottommost one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  109  of the substrate unit  113  at the topside thereof. 
     Referring to  FIG.  24 B , the POP assembly may be stacked with only the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  on the substrate unit  113  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I . An upper one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of a lower one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  at the backside thereof, but a bottommost one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  109  of the substrate unit  113  at the topside thereof. 
     Referring to  FIG.  24 C , the POP assembly may be stacked with only the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  on the substrate unit  113  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I . An upper one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of a lower one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  at the backside thereof, but a bottommost one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  109  of the substrate unit  113  at the topside thereof. 
     Referring to  FIG.  24 D , the POP assembly may be stacked with a group of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and a group of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I . The group of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be arranged over the substrate unit  113  and under the group of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323 . For example, a group of two single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be arranged over the substrate unit  113  and under a group of two single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323 . A first one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  109  of the substrate unit  113  at the topside thereof, a second one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  at the backside thereof, a first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the second one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  at the backside thereof, and a second one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  at the backside thereof. 
     Referring to  FIG.  24 E , the POP assembly may be alternately stacked with the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I . For example, a first one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  109  of the substrate unit  113  at the topside thereof, a first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  at the backside thereof, a second one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  at the backside thereof, and a second one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the second one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  at the backside thereof. 
     Referring to  FIG.  24 F , the POP assembly may be stacked with a group of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  and a group of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I . The group of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may be arranged over the substrate unit  113  and under the group of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322 . For example, a group of two single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may be arranged over the substrate unit  113  and under a group of two single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322 . A first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  109  of the substrate unit  113  at the topside thereof, a second one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  at the backside thereof, a first one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the second one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  at the backside thereof, and a second one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  at the backside thereof. 
     Referring to  FIG.  24 G , the POP assembly may be stacked with a group of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  and a group of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I . The group of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may be arranged over the substrate unit  113  and under the group of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323 . For example, a group of two single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may be arranged over the substrate unit  113  and under a group of two single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323 . A first one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  109  of the substrate unit  113  at the topside thereof, a second one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  at the backside thereof, a first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the second one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  at the backside thereof, and a second one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  at the backside thereof. 
     Referring to  FIG.  24 H , the POP assembly may be alternately stacked with the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  and the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I . For example, a first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  109  of the substrate unit  113  at the topside thereof, a first one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  at the backside thereof, a second one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  at the backside thereof, and a second one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the second one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  at the backside thereof. 
     Referring to  FIG.  24 I , the POP assembly may be stacked with a group of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , a group of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  and a group of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I . The group of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be arranged over the substrate unit  113  and under the group of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323 , and the group of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may be arranged over the group of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and under the group of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322 . For example, a group of two single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may be arranged over the substrate unit  113  and under a group of two single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323 , and the group of two single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may be arranged over the group of two single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  and under a group of two single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322 . A first one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  109  of the substrate unit  113  at the topside thereof, a second one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the COIP logic drives  300  at the backside thereof, a first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the second one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  at the backside thereof, a second one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  at the backside thereof, a first one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the second one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  at the backside thereof, and a second one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  at the backside thereof. 
     Referring to  FIG.  24 J , the POP assembly may be alternately stacked with the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  and the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  14 A through  22 I. For example, a first one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  109  of the substrate unit  113  at the topside thereof, a first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  at the backside thereof, a first one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  at the backside thereof, a second one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the first one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  at the backside thereof, a second one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the second one of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  at the backside thereof, and a second one of the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  may have the metal pillars or bumps  122  mounted onto the metal pads  77   e  of the second one of the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  at the backside thereof. 
     Referring to  FIG.  24 K , the POP assembly may be stacked with three stacks, one of which is stacked with only the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300  on the substrate unit  113  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I , another one of which is stacked with only the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  on the substrate unit  113  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I , and the other one of which is stacked with only the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  on the substrate unit  113  in accordance with the process as illustrated in  FIGS.  14 A through  22 I . With respect to the process for forming the same, after the three stacks of the single-layer-packaged logic drives  300 , the single-layer-packaged non-volatile memory drives  322  and the single-layer-packaged volatile memory drives  323  are stacked on a circuit carrier or substrate, like the one  110  as seen in  FIG.  22 A , the solder balls  325  are planted on a backside of the circuit carrier or substrate and then the circuit carrier or structure  110  may be separated, cut or diced into multiple individual substrate units  113 , such as printed circuit boards (PCB) or BGA (Ball-Grid-array) substrates, by a laser cutting process or by a mechanical cutting process. 
       FIG.  24 L  is a schematically top view of multiple POP assemblies, which is a schematically cross-sectional view along a cut line A-A shown in  FIG.  24 K . Furthermore, multiple I/O ports  305  may be mounted onto the substrate unit  113  to have one or more universal-serial-bus (USB) plugs, high-definition-multimedia-interface (HDMI) plugs, audio plugs, internet plugs, power plugs and/or video-graphic-array (VGA) plugs inserted therein. 
     Application for Logic Drive 
     The current system design, manufactures and/or product business may be changed into a commodity system/product business, like current commodity DRAM, or flash memory business, by using the standardized commodity logic drive  300 . A system, computer, processor, smart-phone, or electronic equipment or device may become a standard commodity hardware comprises mainly the memory drive  310  and the logic drive  300 .  FIGS.  25 A- 25 C  are schematically views showing various applications for logic and memory drives in accordance with multiple embodiments of the present application. Referring to  FIGS.  25 A- 25 C , the logic drive  300  in the aspect of the disclosure may have big enough or adequate number of inputs/outputs (I/Os) to support multiple I/O ports  305  used for programming all or most applications. The logic drive  300  may have I/Os, provided by the metal bumps  122 , to support required I/O ports for programming, for example, to perform all or any combinations of functions of Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning, deep learning, big data, Internet Of Things (IOT), Virtual Reality (VR), Augmented Reality (AR), car electronics, Graphic Processing (GP), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Micro Controlling (MC), and/or Central Processing (CP), and etc. The logic drive  300  may be configured for (1) programming or configuring Inputs/Outputs (I/Os) for software or application developers to load application software or program codes stored in the memory drive  310  to program or configure the logic drive  300  through the I/O ports  305  or connectors connecting or coupling to the I/Os of the logic drive  300 ; and (2) executing the I/Os for the users to perform their instructions through the I/O ports  305  or connectors connecting or coupling to the I/Os of the logic drive  300 , for example, generating a Microsoft Word file, or a PowerPoint presentation file, or an Excel file. The I/O ports  305  or connectors connecting or coupling to the corresponding I/Os of the logic drive  300  may comprise one or multiple (2, 3, 4, or more than 4) Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports, one or more IEEE 1394 ports, one or more Ethernet ports, one or more high-definition-multimedia-interface (HDMI) ports, one or more video-graphic-array (VGA) ports, one or more power-supply ports, one or more audio ports or serial ports, for example, RS-232 or COM (communication) ports, wireless transceiver I/Os, and/or Bluetooth transceiver I/Os, and etc. The I/O ports  305  or connector may be placed, located, assembled, or connected onto a substrate, film or board, such as Printed Circuit Board (PCB), silicon substrate with interconnection schemes, metal substrate with interconnection schemes, glass substrate with interconnection schemes, ceramic substrate with interconnection schemes, or the flexible film  126  with interconnection schemes as illustrated in  FIG.  18 W . The logic drive  300  is assembled on the substrate, film or board using its metal pillars or bumps  122 , similar to the flip-chip assembly of the chip packaging technology, or the Chip-On-Film (COF) assembly technology used in the LCD driver packaging technology. 
       FIG.  25 A  is a schematically view showing an application for a logic drive or FPGA IC module in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  25 A , a laptop or desktop computer, mobile or smart phone or artificial-intelligence (AI) robot  330  may include the logic drive  300  that may be programmed for multiple processors including a baseband processor  301 , application processor  302  and other processors  303 , wherein the application processor  302  may include a central processing unit (CPU), southbridge, northbridge and graphical processing unit (GPU), and the other processors  303  may include a radio frequency (RF) processor, wireless connectivity processor and/or liquid-crystal-display (LCD) control module. The logic drive  300  may further include a function of power management  304  to put each of the processors  301 ,  302  and  303  into the lowest power demand state available via software. Each of the I/O ports  305  may connect a subset of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the logic drive  300  to various external devices. For example, these I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  1  for connection to wireless communication components  306 , such as global-positioning-system (GPS) component, wireless-local-area-network (WLAN) component, bluetooth components or RF devices, of the computer, phone or robot  330 . These I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  2  for connection to various display devices  307 , such as LCD display device or organic-light-emitting-diode (OLED) display device, of the computer, phone or robot  330 . These I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  3  for connection to a camera  308  of the computer, phone or robot  330 . These I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  4  for connection to various audio devices  309 , such as microphone or speaker, of the computer, phone or robot  330 . These I/O ports  305  or connectors connecting or coupling to the corresponding I/Os of the logic drive may include I/O port  5 , such as Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) ports or Peripheral Components Interconnect express (PCIe) ports, for communication with the memory drive, disk or device  310 , such as hard disk drive, flash drive and/or solid-state drive, of the computer, phone or robot  330 . These I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  6  for connection to a keyboard  311  of the computer, phone or robot  330 . These I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  7  for connection to Ethernet networking  312  of the computer, phone or robot  330 . 
     Alternatively,  FIG.  25 B  is a schematically view showing an application for a logic drive or FPGA IC module in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. The scheme shown in  FIG.  25 B  is similar to that illustrated in  FIG.  25 A , but the difference therebetween is that the computer, phone or robot  330  is further provided with a power-management chip  313  therein but outside the logic drive  300 , wherein the power-management chip  313  is configured to put each of the logic drive  300 , wireless communication components  306 , display devices  307 , camera  308 , audio devices  309 , memory drive, disk or device  310 , keyboard  311  and Ethernet networking  312  into the lowest power demand state available via software. 
     Alternatively,  FIG.  25 C  is a schematically view showing an application for a logic drive or FPGA IC module in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  25 C , a laptop or desktop computer, mobile or smart phone or artificial-intelligence (A 1 ) robot  331  in another embodiment may include a plurality of the logic drive  300  that may be programmed for multiple processors. For example, a first one, i.e., left one, of the logic drives  300  may be programmed for the baseband processor  301 ; a second one, i.e., right one, of the logic drives  300  may be programmed for the application processor  302  including a central processing unit (CPU), southbridge, northbridge and graphical processing unit (GPU). The first one of the logic drives  300  may further include a function of power management  304  to put the baseband processor  301  into the lowest power demand state available via software. The second one of the logic drives  300  may further include a function of power management  304  to put the application processor  302  into the lowest power demand state available via software. The first and second ones of the logic drives  300  may further include various I/O ports  305  for various connections to various devices. For example, these I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  1  set on the first one of the logic drives  300  for connection to wireless communication components  306 , such as global-positioning-system (GPS) component, wireless-local-area-network (WLAN) component, bluetooth components or RF devices, of the computer, phone or robot  330 . These I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  2  set on the second one of the logic drives  300  for connection to various display devices  307 , such as LCD display device or organic-light-emitting-diode (OLED) display device, of the computer, phone or robot  330 . These I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  3  set on the second one of the logic drives  300  for connection to a camera  308  of the computer, phone or robot  330 . These I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  4  set on the second one of the logic drives  300  for connection to various audio devices  309 , such as microphone or speaker, of the computer, phone or robot  330 . These I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  5  set on the second one of the logic drives  300  for connection to a memory drive, disk or device  310 , such as hard disk or solid-state disk or drive (SSD), of the computer, phone or robot  330 . These I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  6  set on the second one of the logic drives  300  for connection to a keyboard  311  of the computer, phone or robot  330 . These I/O ports  305  may include I/O port  7  set on the second one of the logic drives  300  for connection to Ethernet networking  312  of the computer, phone or robot  330 . Each of the first and second ones of the logic drives  300  may have dedicated I/O ports  314  for data transmission between the first and second ones of the logic drives  300 . The computer, phone or robot  330  is further provided with a power-management chip  313  therein but outside the first and second ones of the logic drives  300 , wherein the power-management chip  313  is configured to put each of the first and second ones of the logic drives  300 , wireless communication components  306 , display devices  307 , camera  308 , audio devices  309 , memory drive, disk or device  310 , keyboard  311  and Ethernet networking  312  into the lowest power demand state available via software. 
     Memory Drive 
     The disclosure also relates to a standard commodity memory drive, package, package drive, device, module, disk, disk drive, solid-state disk, or solid-state drive  310  (to be abbreviated as “drive” below, that is when “drive” is mentioned below, it means and reads as “drive, package, package drive, device, module, disk, disk drive, solid-state disk, or solid-state drive”), in a multi-chip package comprising plural standard commodity non-volatile memory IC chips  250  for use in data storage, as seen in  FIG.  26 A .  FIG.  26 A  is a schematically top view showing a standard commodity memory drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  26 A , a first type of memory drive  310  may be a non-volatile memory drive  322 , which may be used for the drive-to-drive assembly as seen in  FIGS.  24 A- 24 K , packaged with multiple high speed, high bandwidth non-volatile memory (NVM) IC chips  250  for the semiconductor chips  100  arranged in an array, wherein the architecture of the memory drive  310  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the logic drive  300  and the process for forming the same, but the difference therebetween is the semiconductor chips  100  are arranged as shown in  FIG.  26 A . Each of the high speed, high bandwidth non-volatile memory IC chips  250  may be NAND flash chip in a bare-die format or in a multi-chip flash package format. Data stored in the non-volatile memory IC chips  250  of the standard commodity memory drive  310  are kept even if the memory drive  310  is powered off. Alternatively, the high speed, high bandwidth non-volatile memory IC chips  250  may be Non-Volatile Radom-Access-Memory (NVRAM) IC chips in a bare-die format or in a package format. The NVRAM may be a Ferroelectric RAM (FRAM), Magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), Resistive RAM (RRAM) or Phase-change RAM (PRAM). Each of the NAND flash chips  250  may have a standard memory density, capacity or size of greater than or equal to 64 Mb, 512 Mb, 1Gb, 4Gb, 16Gb, 64Gb, 128Gb, 256 Gb, or 512Gb, wherein “b” is bits. Each of the NAND flash chips  250  may be designed and fabricated using advanced NAND flash technology nodes or generations, for example, more advanced than or equal to 45 nm, 28 nm, 20 nm, 16 nm, and/or 10 nm, wherein the advanced NAND flash technology may comprise Single Level Cells (SLC) or multiple level cells (MLC) (for example, Double Level Cells DLC, or triple Level cells TLC) in a 2D-NAND or a 3D NAND structure. The 3D NAND structures may comprise multiple stacked layers or levels of NAND cells, for example, greater than or equal to 4, 8, 16, 32 stacked layers or levels of NAND cells. Accordingly, the standard commodity memory drive  310  may have a standard non-volatile memory density, capacity or size of greater than or equal to 8 MB, 64 MB, 128 GB, 512 GB, 1 GB, 4 GB, 16 GB, 64 GB, 256 GB, or 512 GB, wherein “B” is bytes, each byte has 8 bits. 
       FIG.  26 B  is a schematically top view showing another standard commodity memory drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  26 B , a second type of memory drive  310  may be a non-volatile memory drive  322 , which may be used for the drive-to-drive assembly as seen in  FIGS.  24 A- 24 K , packaged with multiple non-volatile memory IC chips  250  as illustrated in  FIG.  26 A , multiple dedicated I/O chips  265  and a dedicated control chip  260  for the semiconductor chips  100 , wherein the non-volatile memory IC chips  250  and dedicated control chip  260  may be arranged in an array. The architecture of the memory drive  310  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the logic drive  300  and the process for forming the same, but the difference therebetween is the semiconductor chips  100  are arranged as shown in  FIG.  26 B . The dedicated control chip  260  may be surrounded by the non-volatile memory IC chips  250 . Each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may be arranged along a side of the memory drive  310 . The specification of the non-volatile memory IC chip  250  may be referred to that as illustrated in  FIG.  26 A . The specification of the dedicated control chip  260  packaged in the memory drive  310  may be referred to that of the dedicated control chip  260  packaged in the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIG.  11 A . The specification of the dedicated I/O chip  265  packaged in the memory drive  310  may be referred to that of the dedicated I/O chip  265  packaged in the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N . 
       FIG.  26 C  is a schematically top view showing another standard commodity memory drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  26 C , the dedicated control chip  260  and dedicated I/O chips  265  have functions that may be combined into a single chip  266 , i.e., dedicated control and I/O chip, to perform above-mentioned functions of the control and I/O chips  260  and  265 . A third type of memory drive  310  may be a non-volatile memory drive  322 , which may be used for the drive-to-drive assembly as seen in  FIGS.  24 A- 24 K , packaged with multiple non-volatile memory IC chips  250  as illustrated in  FIG.  26 A , multiple dedicated I/O chips  265  and a dedicated control and I/O chip  266  for the semiconductor chips  100 , wherein the non-volatile memory IC chips  250  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may be arranged in an array. The architecture of the memory drive  310  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the logic drive  300  and the process for forming the same, but the difference therebetween is the semiconductor chips  100  are arranged as shown in  FIG.  26 C . The dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may be surrounded by the non-volatile memory IC chips  250 . Each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may be arranged along a side of the memory drive  310 . The specification of the non-volatile memory IC chip  250  may be referred to that as illustrated in  FIG.  26 A . The specification of the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  packaged in the memory drive  310  may be referred to that of the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  packaged in the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIG.  11 B . The specification of the dedicated I/O chip  265  packaged in the memory drive  310  may be referred to that of the dedicated I/O chip  265  packaged in the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N . 
       FIG.  26 D  is a schematically top view showing a standard commodity memory drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  26 D , a fourth type of memory drive  310  may be a volatile memory drive  323 , which may be used for the drive-to-drive assembly as seen in  FIGS.  24 A- 24 K , packaged with multiple volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324 , such as high speed, high bandwidth DRAM chips as illustrated for the one  321  packaged in the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIG.  11 A- 11 N  or high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chips, for the semiconductor chips  100  arranged in an array, wherein the architecture of the memory drive  310  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the logic drive  300  and the process for forming the same, but the difference therebetween is the semiconductor chips  100  are arranged as shown in  FIG.  26 D . In a case, all of the volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324  of the memory drive  310  may be DRAM chips  321 . Alternatively, all of the volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324  of the memory drive  310  may be SRAM chips. Alternatively, all of the volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324  of the memory drive  310  may be a combination of DRAM chips and SRAM chips. 
       FIG.  26 E  is a schematically top view showing another standard commodity memory drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  26 E , a fifth type of memory drive  310  may be a volatile memory drive  323 , which may be used for the drive-to-drive assembly as seen in  FIGS.  24 A- 24 K , packaged with multiple volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324 , such as high speed, high bandwidth DRAM chips or high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chips, multiple dedicated I/O chips  265  and a dedicated control chip  260  for the semiconductor chips  100 , wherein the volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324  and dedicated control chip  260  may be arranged in an array, wherein the architecture of the memory drive  310  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the logic drive  300  and the process for forming the same, but the difference therebetween is the semiconductor chips  100  are arranged as shown in  FIG.  26 E . In this case, the locations for mounting each of the DRAM chips  321  may be changed for mounting a SRAM chip. The dedicated control chip  260  may be surrounded by the volatile memory chips such as DRAM chips  321  or SRAM chips. Each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may be arranged along a side of the memory drive  310 . In a case, all of the volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324  of the memory drive  310  may be DRAM chips  321 . Alternatively, all of the volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324  of the memory drive  310  may be SRAM chips. Alternatively, all of the volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324  of the memory drive  310  may be a combination of DRAM chips and SRAM chips. The specification of the dedicated control chip  260  packaged in the memory drive  310  may be referred to that of the dedicated control chip  260  packaged in the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIG.  11 A . The specification of the dedicated I/O chip  265  packaged in the memory drive  310  may be referred to that of the dedicated I/O chip  265  packaged in the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N . 
       FIG.  26 F  is a schematically top view showing another standard commodity memory drive in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  26 F , the dedicated control chip  260  and dedicated I/O chips  265  have functions that may be combined into a single chip  266 , i.e., dedicated control and I/O chip, to perform above-mentioned functions of the control and I/O chips  260  and  265 . A sixth type of memory drive  310  may be a volatile memory drive  323 , which may be used for the drive-to-drive assembly as seen in  FIGS.  24 A- 24 K , packaged with multiple volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324 , such as high speed, high bandwidth DRAM chips as illustrated for the one  321  packaged in the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIG.  11 A- 11 N  or high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chips, multiple dedicated I/O chips  265  and the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  for the semiconductor chips  100 , wherein the volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324  and dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may be arranged in an array as shown in  FIG.  26 F . The dedicated control and I/O chip  266  may be surrounded by the volatile memory chips such as DRAM chips  321  or SRAM chips. In a case, all of the volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324  of the memory drive  310  may be DRAM chips  321 . Alternatively, all of the volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324  of the memory drive  310  may be SRAM chips. Alternatively, all of the volatile memory (VM) IC chips  324  of the memory drive  310  may be a combination of DRAM chips and SRAM chips. The architecture of the memory drive  310  and the process for forming the same may be referred to that of the logic drive  300  and the process for forming the same, but the difference therebetween is the semiconductor chips  100  are arranged as shown in  FIG.  26 F . Each of the dedicated I/O chips  265  may be arranged along a side of the memory drive  310 . The specification of the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  packaged in the memory drive  310  may be referred to that of the dedicated control and I/O chip  266  packaged in the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIG.  11 B . The specification of the dedicated I/O chip  265  packaged in the memory drive  310  may be referred to that of the dedicated I/O chip  265  packaged in the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N . The specification of the DRAM chips  321  packaged in the memory drive  310  may be referred to that of the DRAM chips  321  packaged in the logic drive  300  as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N . 
     Alternatively, another type of memory drive  310  may include a combination of non-volatile memory (NVM) IC chips  250  and volatile memory chips. For example, referring to  FIGS.  26 A- 26 C , some of the locations for mounting the NVMIC chips  250  may be changed for mounting the volatile memory chips, such as high speed, high bandwidth DRAM chips  321  or high speed, high bandwidth SRAM chips. 
     FISC-to-FISC Assembly for Logic and Memory Drives 
     Alternatively,  FIGS.  27 A- 27 C  are cross-sectional views showing various assemblies for logic and memory drives in accordance with an embodiment of the present application. Referring to  FIG.  27 A , the memory drive  310  may have the metal bumps  122  to be bonded to the metal bumps  122  of the logic drive  300  to form multiple bonded contacts  586  between the memory and logic drives  310  and  300 . For example, one of the logic and memory drives  300  and  310  may be provided the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the fourth type having the solder balls or bumps, as illustrated in  FIG.  18 R , to be bonded to the copper layer of the metal pillars or bumps  122  of the first type of the other of the logic and memory drives  300  and  310  so as to form the bonded contacts  586  between the memory and logic drives  310  and  300 . 
     For high speed and high bandwidth communications between one of the semiconductor chips  100 , e.g., non-volatile or volatile memory chip  250  or  324  as illustrated in  FIGS.  34 A- 34 F , of the memory drive  310  and one of the semiconductor chips  100 , e.g., FPGA IC chip  200  or PCIC chip  269  as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 N , of the logic drive  300 , said one of the semiconductor chips  100  of the memory drive  310  may be aligned with and positioned vertically over said one of the semiconductor chips  100  of the logic drive  300 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  27 A , the memory drive  310  may include multiple first stacked portions provided by the interconnection metal layers  99  of its TISD  101 , wherein each of the first stacked portions may be aligned with and stacked on or over one of the bonded contacts  586  and positioned between said one of its semiconductor chips  100  and said one of the bonded contacts  586 . Further, for the memory drive  310 , multiple of its micro-bumps  34  may be aligned with and stacked on or over its first stacked portions respectively and positioned between said one of its semiconductor chips  100  and its first stacked portions to connect said one of its semiconductor chips  100  to its first stacked portions respectively. 
     Referring to  FIG.  27 A , the logic drive  300  may include multiple second stacked portions provided by the interconnection metal layers  99  of its TISD  101 , wherein each of the second stacked portions may be aligned with and stacked under or below one of the bonded contacts  586  and positioned between said one of its semiconductor chips  100  and said one of the bonded contacts  586 . Further, for the logic drive  300 , multiple of its micro-bumps  34  may be aligned with and stacked under or below its second stacked portions respectively and positioned between said one of its semiconductor chips  100  and its second stacked portions to connect said one of its semiconductor chips  100  to its second stacked portions respectively. 
     Accordingly, referring to  FIG.  27 A , from bottom to top, one of the micro-bumps  34  of the logic drive  300 , one of the second stacked portions of the TISD  101  of the logic drive  300 , one of the bonded contacts  586 , one of the first stacked portions of the TISD  101  of the memory drive  310  and one of the micro-bumps  34  of the memory drive  310  may be stacked together in a vertical direction to form a vertical stacked path  587  between said one of the semiconductor chips  100  of the logic drive  300  and said one of the semiconductor chips  100  of the memory drive  310  for signal transmission or power or ground delivery. In an aspect, a plurality of the vertical stacked path  587  having the number equal to or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K, for example, may be connected between said one of the semiconductor chips  100  of the logic drive  300  and said one of the semiconductor chips  100  of the memory drive  310  for parallel signal transmission or for signal transmission or power or ground delivery. 
     Referring to  FIG.  27 A , for said each of the logic and memory drives  300  and  310 , the small I/O circuits  203  as seen in  FIG.  5 B  having the driving capability, loading, output capacitance or input capacitance between 0.01 pF and 10 pF, 0.05 pF and 5 pF, 0.01 pF and 2 pF or 0.01 pF and 1 pF, or smaller than 10 pF, 5 pF, 3 pF, 2 pF, 1 pF, 0.5 pF or 0.1 pF may be set in said one of its semiconductor chips  100  for one of the vertical stacked paths  287 . For example, the small I/O circuits  203  may be composed of the small ESD protection circuit  373 , small receiver  374 , and small driver  375 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  27 A , each of the logic and memory drives  300  and  310  may have the metal bumps  583  of the metal pads  77   e  of its BISD  79  for connecting the logic and memory drives  300  and  310  to an external circuitry. For each of the logic and memory drives  300  and  310 , one of its metal bumps  583  may (1) couple to one of its semiconductor chips  100  through the interconnection metal layers  77  of its BISD  79 , one or more of its TPVs  158 , the interconnection metal layers  99  of its TISD  101  and one or more of its micro-bumps  34  in sequence, (2) couple to one of the semiconductor chips  100  of the other of the logic and memory drives  300  and  310  through the interconnection metal layers  77  of its BISD  79 , one or more of its TPVs  158 , the interconnection metal layers  99  of its TISD  101 , one or more of the bonded contacts  586 , the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  of the other of the logic and memory drives  300  and  310 , and one or more of the micro-bumps  34  of the other of the logic and memory drives  300  and  310  in sequence, or (3) couple to one of the metal bumps  583  of the other of the logic and memory drives  300  and  310  through the interconnection metal layers  77  of its BISD  79 , one or more of its TPVs  158 , the interconnection metal layers  99  of its TISD  101 , one or more of the bonded contacts  586 , the interconnection metal layers  99  of the TISD  101  of the other of the logic and memory drives  300  and  310 , one or more of the TPVs  158  of the other of the logic and memory drives  300  and  310 , and the interconnection metal layers  77  of the BISD  79  of the other of the logic and memory drives  300  and  310  in sequence. 
     Alternatively, referring to  FIGS.  27 B and  27 C , their structures are similar to that shown in  FIG.  27 A . For an element indicated by the same reference number shown in  FIG.  27 A- 27 C , the specification of the element as seen in  FIGS.  27 B and  27 C  may be referred to that of the element as illustrated in  FIG.  27 A . The difference between the structures shown in  FIGS.  27 A and  27 B  is that the memory drive  310  may not be provided with the metal bumps  583 , BISD  79  and TPVs  582  for external connection. The difference between the structures shown in  FIGS.  27 A and  27 C  is that the logic drive  300  may not be provided with the metal bumps  583 , BISD  79  and TPVs  582  for external connection. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  27 A- 27 C , for an example of parallel signal transmission, the vertical stacked paths  587  in parallel may be arranged between said one of the semiconductor chip  100 , e.g. GPU chip as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 F- 11 N , of the logic drive  300  and one of the semiconductor chips  100 , e.g., high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chip, DRAM chip, or NVMIC chip for MRAM or RRAM as illustrated in  FIGS.  26 A- 26 F , of the COIP memory drive  310  with a data bit width of equal to or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. Alternatively, for an example of parallel signal transmission, the vertical stacked paths  587  in parallel may be arranged between one of the semiconductor chip  100 , e.g. tensor-procession-unit (TPU) chip as illustrated in  FIGS.  11 F- 11 N , of the COIP logic drive  300  and one of the semiconductor chips  100 , e.g., high speed, high bandwidth cache SRAM chip, DRAM chip, or NVM chip for MRAM or RRAM as illustrated in  FIGS.  26 A- 26 F , of the COIP memory drive  310  with a data bit width of equal to or greater than 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8K, or 16K. 
     CONCLUSION AND ADVANTAGES 
     Accordingly, the current logic ASIC or COT IC chip business may be changed into a commodity logic IC chip business, like the current commodity DRAM, or commodity flash memory IC chip business, by using the standardized commodity logic drive  300 . Since the performance, power consumption, and engineering and manufacturing costs of the standardized commodity logic drive  300  may be better or equal to that of the ASIC or COT IC chip for a same innovation or application, the standardized commodity logic drive  300  may be used as an alternative for designing an ASIC or COT IC chip. The current logic ASIC or COT IC chip design, manufacturing and/or product companies (including fabless IC design and product companies, IC foundry or contracted manufactures (may be product-less), and/or vertically-integrated IC design, manufacturing and product companies) may become companies like the current commodity DRAM, or flash memory IC chip design, manufacturing, and/or product companies; or like the current DRAM module design, manufacturing, and/or product companies; or like the current flash memory module, flash USB stick or drive, or flash solid-state drive or disk drive design, manufacturing, and/or product companies. The current logic ASIC or COT IC chip design and/or manufacturing companies (including fabless IC design and product companies, IC foundry or contracted manufactures (may be product-less), vertically-integrated IC design, manufacturing and product companies) may become companies in the following business models: (1) designing, manufacturing, and/or selling the standard commodity FPGA IC chips  200 ; and/or (2) designing, manufacture, and/or selling the standard commodity logic drives  300 . A person, user, customer, or software developer, or application developer may purchase the standardized commodity logic drive  300  and write software codes to program them for his/her desired applications, for example, in applications of Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning, deep learning, big data, Internet Of Things (IOT), Virtual Reality (VR), Augmented Reality (AR), car electronics, Graphic Processing (GP), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Micro Controlling (MC), and/or Central Processing (CP). The logic drive  300  may be programed to perform functions like a graphic chip, or a baseband chip, or an Ethernet chip, or a wireless (for example, 802.11ac) chip, or an A 1  chip. The logic drive  300  may be alternatively programmed to perform functions of all or any combinations of functions of Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning, deep learning, big data, Internet Of Things (IOT), Virtual Reality (VR), Augmented Reality (AR), car electronics, Graphic Processing (GP), Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Micro Controlling (MC), and/or Central Processing (CP). 
     The disclosure provides the standardized commodity logic drive in a multi-chip package comprising plural FPGA IC chips and one or more non-volatile memory IC chips for use in different applications requiring logic, computing and/or processing functions by field programming. Uses of the standardized commodity logic drive is analogues to uses of a standardized commodity data storage solid-state disk (drive), data storage hard disk (drive), data storage floppy disk, Universal Serial Bus (USB) flash drive, USB drive, USB stick, flash-disk, or USB memory, and differs in that the latter has memory functions for data storage, while the former has logic functions for processing and/or computing. 
     For another aspect, in accordance with the disclosure, the standard commodity logic drive may be arranged in a hot-pluggable device to be inserted into and couple to a host device in a power-on mode such that the logic drive in the hot-pluggable device may operate with the host device. 
     For another aspect, the disclosure provides the method to reduce Non-Recurring Engineering (NRE) expenses for implementing an innovation or an application in semiconductor IC chips by using the standardized commodity logic drive. A person, user, or developer with an innovation or an application concept or idea needs to purchase the standardized commodity logic drive and develops or writes software codes or programs to load into the standardized commodity logic drive to implement his/her innovation or application concept or idea. Compared to the implementation by developing a logic ASIC or COT IC chip, the NRE cost may be reduced by a factor of larger than 2, 5, or 10. For advanced semiconductor technology nodes or generations (for example more advanced than or below 30 nm or 20 nm), the NRE cost for designing an ASIC or COT chip increases greatly, more than US $5M, US $10M or even exceeding US $20M, US $50M, or US $100M. The cost of a photo mask set for an ASIC or COT chip at the 16 nm technology node or generation may be over US $2M, US$5M, or US $10M. Implementing the same or similar innovation or application using the logic drive may reduce the NRE cost down to smaller than US $10M or even less than US $7M, US $5M, US $3M or US $1M. The aspect of the disclosure inspires the innovation and lowers the barrier for implementing the innovation in IC chips designed and fabricated using an advanced IC technology node or generation, for example, a technology node or generation more advanced than or below 30 nm, 20 nm or 10 nm. 
     For another aspect, the disclosure provides the method to change the logic ASIC or COT IC chip hardware business into a software business by using the standardized commodity logic drive. Since the performance, power consumption, and engineering and manufacturing costs of the standardized commodity logic drive may be better or equal to that of the ASIC or COT IC chip for a same innovation or application, the current ASIC or COT IC chip design companies or suppliers may become software developers or suppliers; they may adapt the following business models: (1) become software companies to develop and sell software for their innovation or application, and let their customers to install software in the customers&#39; own standard commodity logic drive; and/or (2) still hardware companies by selling hardware without performing ASIC or COT IC chip design and production. They may install their in-house developed software for the innovation or application in the non-volatile memory chips in the purchased standard commodity logic drive; and sell the program-installed logic drive to their customers. They may write software codes into the standard commodity logic drive (that is, loading the software codes in the non-volatile memory IC chip or chips in or of the standardized commodity logic drive) for their desired applications, for example, in applications of Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning, Internet Of Things (IOT), Virtual Reality (VR), Augmented Reality (AR), Graphic Processing, Digital Signal Processing, micro controlling, and/or Central Processing. A design, manufacturing, and/or product companies for a system, computer, processor, smart-phone, or electronic equipment or device may become companies to (1) design, manufacture and/or sell the standard commodity hardware comprising the memory drive and the logic drive; in this case, the companies are still hardware companies; (2) develop system and application software for users to install in the users&#39; own standard commodity hardware; in this case, the companies become software companies; (3) install the third party&#39;s developed system and application software or programs in the standard commodity hardware and sell the software-loaded hardware; and in this case, the companies are still hardware companies. 
     For another aspect, the disclosure provides a development kit or tool for a user or developer to implement an innovation or an application using the standard commodity logic drive. The user or developer with innovation or application concept or idea may purchase the standard commodity logic drive and use the corresponding development kit or tool to develop or to write software codes or programs to load into the non-volatile memory of the standard commodity logic drive for implementing his/her innovation or application concept or idea. 
     The components, steps, features, benefits and advantages that have been discussed are merely illustrative. None of them, nor the discussions relating to them, are intended to limit the scope of protection in any way. Numerous other embodiments are also contemplated. These include embodiments that have fewer, additional, and/or different components, steps, features, benefits and advantages. These also include embodiments in which the components and/or steps are arranged and/or ordered differently. 
     Unless otherwise stated, all measurements, values, ratings, positions, magnitudes, sizes, and other specifications that are set forth in this specification, including in the claims that follow, are approximate, not exact. They are intended to have a reasonable range that is consistent with the functions to which they relate and with what is customary in the art to which they pertain. Furthermore, unless stated otherwise, the numerical ranges provided are intended to be inclusive of the stated lower and upper values. Moreover, unless stated otherwise, all material selections and numerical values are representative of preferred embodiments and other ranges and/or materials may be used. 
     The scope of protection is limited solely by the claims, and such scope is intended and should be interpreted to be as broad as is consistent with the ordinary meaning of the language that is used in the claims when interpreted in light of this specification and the prosecution history that follows, and to encompass all structural and functional equivalents thereof.